This

to
It

is

a digital copy of a

make

the world's

book

that

was preserved

for generations

on

library shelves before

it

was

carefully scanned

by Google

as part of a project

books discoverable online.

A public domain book is one that was never subject

domain may vary country to country. Public domain books

has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain.

whose

to copyright or

legal copyright

term has expired. Whether a book

are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture

is

in the public

and knowledge

that's often difficult to discover.

Marks, notations and other marginalia present in the original volume will appear in

this file

a reminder of this book's long journey

from the

publisher to a library and finally to you.

Usage guidelines
Google

is

proud

public and

we

prevent abuse by commercial parties,

We

domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken steps to
including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.

to partner with libraries to digitize public

are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this

also ask that you:

+ Make non-commercial use of the files

We

designed Google

Book Search

for use

by

individuals,

and

we

request that you use these

files for

personal, non-commercial purposes.

+ Refrain from automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain

attribution

The Google "watermark" you see on each file is essential

Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.

for informing people about this project

and helping them find

additional materials through

+ Keep

it

because

legal

we

Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you
book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is

believe a

are doing

is legal.

also in the public

Do

not assume that just

domain

for users in other

Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liability can be quite severe.

countries.

specific use of

in

any manner

About Google Book Search

Google's mission

is to

organize the world's information and to

make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web

discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach
at

http //books google com/|

:

HARVARD
COLLEGE
LIBRARY

Digitized by

Google

Digitized by

Google

Digitized by

Google

Digitized by

Google
}

Digitized by

Google

THE

..

^ASHTADHYAYI^OF PANINL
TRANSLATED INTO ENGLISH

BY

fcJRfSA

CHANDRA VASU,
High

Vakil,

Court,

M-W.

B. A,,

P.

-:-0-0-o-:

JtUahabab:

Indian Press.
^
i

891.

(All rljjhU referred.)

Digitized by
1

Google

Digitized by

Google

fEtbntrg
THE BEQUEST OF

CflVUcJ&i
PROFESSOR OF SANSKRIT
lSSo-t9S<

Digitized by

Google

Ju^vfotyrf/ft*-

<$

/w^***

Digitized by

Google

/.>

COLLEGE UBRAR?
r^OMTiIICSTATEOF
CHAHLEC f.OC.ttVELL LANMAN
HAfT.'ASD

UASCH15.1941

JMlahabai:
PRINTED BY THE INDIAN PRESS.

\
Digitized by
\

PREFACE.
+

advent of

the

Since

perity that has followed

her

of

which

its train,

in

ancient literature,

philosophies and

the British rule and the peace and

in

which

is

greater in value or usefulness

has

some

embodied

Among

religions of the world.

benign Government

our

pros-

India has witnessed a glorious revival

upon

conferred

than this revival of

of the

the various

highest

blessings

none can be

us,

Our schools

Sanskrit.

and colleges are annually turning out hundreds, nay thousands of scholars,
who have entered upon the study of Sanskrit literature, and have thus
Very few of them,
learnt to appreciate the beauties of this language.
however, have the opportunity of studying the language, with that depth and
fulness, as

it

was and

is

perly understand Sanskrit language,

is

To pro-

mastered by the Pandits of the old school.

and especially that portion

of

it

in

which

locked up the highest aspirations of the ancient Aryan hearts vis. 9 the

Vedas, the Br&hmanas, the Upanishads &c.

a complete knowledge of the

absolutely necessary to

it is

Grammar elaborated by

have

The Grammar

Panini.

is

reckoned as one of the VedArtgas, or the helps to the study of the Vedas; and
it is

unquestionably one of the most important of the Vediirtgas.

thousand sutras of P&nini contain within themselves almost

all

The four

that a student

need know to enable him to understand the language of the Vedas.

Not only

is

this excellent treatise of PAnini necessary for those

who

are desirous of learning the ancient Sanskrit literature, but a knowledge of

this

is

even necessary for understanding the modern Sanskrit, which is

modelled on the rules laid down by that great Grammarian, whose aphorisms
are being constantly quoted in

all

Vedic commentaries, and

classical authors

and law books*

Further, as a master-piece of close reasoning
it

ought to be an object of study with every one

intellectual powers.

what the Geometry

In fact

the logical development of the western

has

fulfilled

the

same purpose' in

can refrain from praising

it

It

artistic

arrangement,

to cultivate his

has done towards

of Euclid

intellect,

India.

and

who wants

the Ash{idhy4yl of P&nini

No one who

has studied this book

has evoked admiration even from the Sans-

Max

Muller thus gives his opinion about

the merits of this excellent Sanskrit Grammar : " The Grammatical system

krit savants of the west.

Professor

elaborated by native Grammarians,

have tested Panini's work

is

in itself

most perfect, and those

will readily admit, that there is

no Grammar

in

who
any

language, that could vie with the wonderful mechanism of his eight books of

Grammatical rules."

The

style of these sutras is studiedly brief, but then this brevity is its

greatest recommendation.

guity in the

sfltras,

That, which appears to

many

obscurity

and ambi-

vanishes before the clear and exhaustive explanations of

Digitized by

VjOOQIC

>i

and shows the extreme skill and wonderful ingenuity of

the author of these aphorisms. These sfitras, therefore, which though at first
sight may appear difficult and repulsive, if once mastered, will enable a
student to know and remember more of the Sanskrit Grammar, than he can
the commentators

ever learn through other methods, with twice that labour. Unfortunately,
however, for our college and school students, and also for that vast majority
of our English reading countrymen, whose number

is

on the increase,

daily

and who depend for their knowledge of what is contained in Sanskrit books,
on English translation of Sanskrit authors, no translation of this important
work exists in English. To supply this want, I have undertaken to translate
P&nini's aphorisms, as explained by the Commentators Jay&ditya and V&mana
and issue one chapter every
month. Though, it is not a close translation of the whole of KisikA,
it may be regarded as a free rendering of the most important portions of that

in their well-known book, called K&ik&

vritti

book. I have closely followed on the foot-steps of those authors, translating their

commentary, explaining

it

where necessary

The

For a beginner,
and great, and

like

am

difficulties,

making

short,

my work

the whole,

fully

conscious that here and there, I

in

my humble

many

may have

arguments of the authors of K&ik&.

have spared no pains to render

K&iki, is

even for the masters of Sanskrit learning.

the present translator, those difficulties were

failed to grasp the full drift of the

as lay

in

translation of Sanskrit texts, especially those like

always beset with great

on

and

to the student, desirous of studying the KAsik! in the original.

a help

power. I shall

feel

much

this

work as

But

free from errors

obliged to those gentlemen,

who

good enough to point out any errors, or suggest any improvements, so

may be benefited by their advice.
I must here acknowledge the great assistance I have derived from the

will be

that

well-known translation

Guide to P&nini

Laghu Kaumudi by Dr. Ballantyne

of

Mr. Iengar's

Professor Apte's Sanskrit Composition as well as from Dr.

Kielhorn's ParibhdshenduSekhara.

absorbed their rendering into

have freely quoted from these authors and

my own,

without distinguishing them by marks

of quotation.

When

undertook the translation of Panini,

I first

had thought that

the work when completed, will not occupy more than 1200 pages.

the present sample

The

it

will

be seen, that that estimate was far below the mark.

complete translation, together with the Introduction, Glossary and the

Indices, which

intend to add, will take up nearly double as

nearly 2000 pages or more.

But from

have, however, kept the price

much space *>.,

of the book the

same, namely, Rs. 14 (payable by two instalments), for subscribers, who have
already got their names registered, or who will do so within the 31st January
1892, and Rs. 20 for non-subscribers.

OCS

14M November,

1891.

^RfSA

CHANDRA VASIH

THE

;.

ASHTADHYAYI OF PANINL
Salutation to the

Supreme

Now an
The term *pf " now"
out that a dissertation

and Philology.
is

'

is

restrictive rule/

Spirit.

explanation of words.
in the sfttra indicates

a commencement, and points

to be offered on the science of words, viz.

The term mjsm*M means

mnfchK or
'

'

Grammar
This

explanation of any system.

definition,'

qR^WT or the

or 'the statement of a general rule/ RflH or

faffr

a head or governing

rule,

over other rules/ and

ing or governing influence

application

'

an 4J1M4iK sfttra, and introduces the subject.

An aphorism or sutra is of six kinds, qRtf or ' a

key to interpretation/

'

which exerts a direct-

srf^J

'extended

or

by analogy.9

The Praty&Mra

The above

fourteen aphorisms contain the arrangement of Sanskrit

alphabets fpr grammatical purposes.

jihva-muliya and

The
The

final
final

Sfttras.

The anusvira and

the upadh mlniya are

not

the

visarga,

the

above

list.

contained in the

consonants f, *r &c, is merely for the sake of articulation.

pure consonants in the several aphorisms as T, ^r, ^&c., are non3r in the

The

a grammatical symbol or abbreviation and is

is nota non-efficient letter and joining it with
any non-efficient letter that follows it. This gives a name which stands for the
former ma-efficient letter and for all the other letters intervening between it and
the non-efficient letter. Thus ^p^ means all the vowels, fij means all the consonants,*^ means all soft unaspirate consonants, ^^ means all hard unaspirate
consonants. Though numerous praty&hiras could be formed, practically
efficient

or 73.

formed by taking any

JJMJI4H is
letter

which

however, there are only 42 pratyihlras

as given below :

^i^i'^ir^i^ii^i^iH^iifr^i^jii^i^ ig^?
*

The same

letter [ is

made use

both in the sixth sutra sn^ and in the

of as"

first

V{ litter

Hjj^q* or an indicatory

sj f ^[

There

letter

arises consequently

Introduction.

the doubt, whether the praty&haras

r^ and

^ when

they are employed in

Grammar

are formed with the of the former or with the [ of the

and one might, on that account, consider it impossible to ascertain
what P&nini intended to denote by *r[ and f^ when he employed these
terms. To remove this doubt there is the following paribhAsM :

P&nini's

latter sfttra,

"The

precise

terpretation! for

meaning of an ambiguous term is ascertained from ineven though it contain* an ambiguous term, must never-

rule,

the less teach something definite."

Accordingly
in Sutra

the term

i.

I.

69,

is

we

learn from interpretation that the term

formed by means of the

f\ is formed by means

of the

of the

first

*T% except
and that,

s&tra

^ of the subsequent sfitra.

^
\

\\

.Google

3h^

BOOK

Chapter First.

Rf^iHhf

ii

1.

*n,

k and ^r are called v/iddhl

The

This defines the word vriddhi.

letters qqr,

^ and %fr

are vpddhi

The s&tra consists of three words vriddhi , &t and aich. *ni(
means the long ^T, the final ^[ being indicatory only, and is for the sake of
the praty&h&ra aich, and the praty&h&ra^ means the letters 'and *ft .

letters.

The

indicatory

^ in

iyn{ serves the purpose of showing that the very

form *jt having two m&tr&s or prosodial measure, is to be taken. This ^ also
joins with the succeeding vowels i and sfrbythe rule of OTT(L 1.70) or that
" which precedes or succeeds w," and indicates that these vowels must be taken

maybe the result of the combination of

may be more than two. A short vowel has one
m&tr&, a long vowel has two, and a consonant has half a m&triL Thus by a
rule of ^f^if or euphonic conjunction of letters IJT+W^WT, as TfT+WUPf: 3*
Tfnj*H. Here fr has two m&tr&s and not four. So also in ^If^T: the -vowel
$ the resultant of 1JT+^ has only two, not four, m&tr&s.
as having two m&tr&s only, though they

vowels whose aggregate m&tr&s

Thus

the initial vowels in the following secondary derivative nouns

are vriddhi forms of their primitive vowels.

Hj|<jp:

"bodily", from^p; 'body*

HfM* " optional", from f^[r " option"; *JWre " the son of Upagu", from the
word ^r^J: meaning " a sage called Upagu." Similarly in ^ifoOq: "belonging to
:

the house" the

occurs in

in

radical,

is

sfttras like

and

is

fffiq^l^K^Mifo (VII. 2.

base get vjiddhi substitute before the

2.

is

Each one
called a guna

also called vriddhi.

*r,

s and

*fr

affix

initial

vriddhi
of the

of the Parasmaipada".

are called guna.

3 and if} whether radical

of the letters *?,

letter; as the

fn^

1.)

The word

"Let the final

or secondary

vowels in the following: itf%,

"he

4.
>

GunaVriddhi Paribhasha
H ;. V'i

[Bk.

" he comes ", <qfrcn% " he goes*"

moves";

m%

roots 3T,

ft and

I.

Ch.

I.

\i

.-

Here the

initial

have been respectively gunated into m$,

vowels of the

^ and *fr

before

the thirdjperson-singular termination ft.

The

Guna

occurs in sutras like ftf^^: (VIl/3. 82).

be guna substitute for the ik of the root fkf " to melf ."
terth

" Let there

*$T 3*135*

mi

^5: 13*1-35*,

T^rfSril

(??%:, g*i:) n

the absence of any ..special rule, whenever guna or vriddhi is enjoined about any expression by
using the terms guna or vriddhi, it is to be understood
to come in the room of the ik vowels only (i, u, ri\ and
li long and short,) of that expression.
3.

This

letters, in

comeu-

is

Iijl

a paribh&sh&

sfitra,

and

guna and

present rule will apply where there

Thus sfttra VII.

3.

84 declares:

tuka affix follows there

is

guna

expression which

word

useful in determining the original

the place of which the substitute

The

other particular rule.

the

is

is

is

Here the sth&ni or the original

hot specified, and to complete the sense,

"ikab" must be read into the

sfitra.

"

when a S. or an A. affix follows there is guna of

The guna of f or f is^r; of gr or sr, is *ft,
*p$; and

Vrddhi

their

%+^n% =5nri% "be

is {, *ft,

*tf^

vriddhi letters will

the specification of no

" when a s&rvadh&tuka or an irdhadMU

of the base/

to be gunated,

is

and

The

rule

then

being,

the ik vowels of the base."

of

T,of *y is
Thus sft+Wfrs8

^for^fis

*jrf respectively.

leads."

Therefore, wherever in any rule in this Grammar, guna or vriddhr

ordained by employing the terms guna or

vjriddhi,

the genitive case, meaning "in the place of ik",

is

is

there the word " ika^" in

to

be supplied to complete

the sense.

The word
qualified

thus understood in the following rules, and

'

114) J*FS*TTTO

416)

'ik' is

by the term *j^r or base' :ftr^:

^rT^T

&c
&c,

(VII. 3- 86);

jfT^yrcfr

(VII. 3.

(VII. 4.1 1)

^Bftftlfc^:

ingia or base,

These

there

(VII-

(VI. 4. 156).

In the following sfitras, the term 'ik' is understood

word

is

82) fl^lPfr: (VII. 2.

gfa

^ (VII. 3,

stitras will

83),

be explained

^ijvii^i

W^'

and

qualifies the

(VII. 3* 84)-

in their proper, place?.

The word ik' has been used in the sfttra: to' show that the long *n, ^5 or
the diphthongs andf^ or the consonants, are Hot to take gunaox vpddhtby this
'

lA.ttf

Exception to Guna and Vriddhi.

Bk;

l.

rule,

as in the following examples

Ch\-

I.

4. ]

AH\ "a carriage", TvTRft "He feels aversion,"

J;

4{lH*U " confined."

1/

Here **rpn%

is

formed by adding the

affix f?fy third

mination, with the class a affix ^JT, to the root t^; as

**

ft.

At this

stage, rule VII. 3. 84,

person singular ter-

t^+^+ ^=^4.^4.

would require the guna substitution of the vowel

of the base before the s&rvadh&tuka termination *r; the

^ beings,

there would be *^+?rf^,,T*niftr.

being not included

"5,

and there
the long

is

*n

in the

praty&h&ra

no guna substitution
of otfj.

Thus

w+

*T,
is

ik, is

(HI. 3.

nr

not an

f^

So

also

^rjr

fKt

substitution in the place of the consonant

of

and the form would have been ^T^ which

vowel.

But

this is

guna

substitute of

wrong, the

letter

not affected by rule VII. 3. 84,

no change in

in this case. Similarly there is

there been guna by Rule VII. 3. 84, the

-5.

15) -3TFPJ (VII. 1.

i).

Here had

m, would have been changed into

is

wrong. But

- tiP*ML

it

is

not so, as *jr

Here, there

no guna

is

The repetition of the words guna and Vfiddhi ir. this sutra,
by
(though
^j^Rf or the supplying of a word from the previous sfitra,
two preceding sutras) is for the
these words followed from the
purpose of indicating that, this is a restrictive rule applicable only there,
where guna or vfiddhi has been ordained by the employment of the words

guna or vriddhi. Therefore, it is not so in the following cases

ifh "sky",
" this." ifh is the nominative singular of the base
"
"
he,"
way"
fH\
qjr:
^.
" in the nominative singular
It is formed by rule VII. 1. 84, which declares that
the letter *ft takes the place of ft^r." Here the letter sit is no doubt a vriddhi letter, but as this substitution is not enjoined by the enunciation of the
:

term vriddhi, qft does not take the place of the vowel f of f%\, but
the final*. Thus f*+sfr+^*ft:.
Similarly rule VII.
substitute.

The

the term vriddhi,

q**tt: t

the

sf

qqr is
it

1.

85, declares

a vriddhi

letter

takes the place of

being added by VII.

1.

that of the

word

it

qf*P![,

replaces

*tt is the

no doubt, but not being enunciated by

^ of <rfat and

not of f .

Thus we have

87.

is formed by VII. 2. 102 "shorty

Thus we have
Here
*[ takes the place of f
the substitute of tyad, &c.,"
which is changed again into ^ by VII. 2. 106.

Similarly *r: from tf|, which

is
?f,

The Guna and vriddhi substitutions, which

otherwise would have presented themselves, do* not
4.

Exception to Guna and Vriddhi.

6.

[Bk.

I.

Ca

I.

4.

when such an ArdhadMtuka

take place,

(IIL 4. 114)
causes a portion of the root to he

which

affix follows,

elided.
This

an

is

exception to

sfttra 3.

'gunated or vriddhied and by s&tra

before

Ardhadhituka terminations.

all

By

that sfitra iks were to be

VII. 3. 84, the root

is

to be gunated

All primary affixes, that are applied

two broad classes, called sarvamarked with an indicatory JJ ( called

such as fk\ , ft. &c, ( called f%^ ) are

directly to roots in Sanskrit, are divided into

The

dhituka and irdhadh&tuka.

ftpi

),

and the conjugational

s&rvadh&tuka 5

all

affixes

affixes,

other affixes are called irdhadhltuka.

Though by

the general rule, VII. 3. 84, the root

Ardhadhituka terminations, yet

it is

is

to be gunated before

not to be so, before those affixes which

v/

cause the 5Tfa topping off or ellipses' of a portion or a member of the original C
dhitu Thus the termination *?nfir is a first person singular termination of /
the future tense

off

and

is

an irdhadhatuka termination; when this

is

becomes gunated and we have %**nPf

f
But in those cases where there is a lopaof the member
"I shall or will excel.
of a root form, caused by an affix, there is no gunation. Thus in sffepn "a great
cutter," the original root is Sj/'to cut" which forms the Intensive verb frHo^q.
added to root

f*r 'to excel'

1

the

of fsr

'

In forming the noun of agency from the verb oftoUl, an

HI.

%T\
of

1.

134,

sfttra II. 4.

the

if of

74.

is

Thus

added.

vOfcgt

At

*p{.

which declares that "before the

Ardhadhituka
this

affix

the Intensive verb must be suppressed," the

ya

stage,

*pzj (IIL
is

suffix

by force
1.

134)

dropped and we

Here by the general rule VII. 3. 84, the final

would have
But by virtue of the present sutra, do guna takes place, be-^

cause here on account of the Irdhadhatuka affix *p(, a portion of the root, \ *
namely, *, has been elided ; therefore no guna takes place. Thus we have J
have sffa^+ST.

been gunated.

feftcgq:

"a great cutter."

The word tfg "root" has been used in the

that the exception does not apply where there

or of an
3j has

As

affix.

been

is

in sr*+T*IT5ft+TffT-5TflraT.

elided, but that

sfitra, in

an

order to indicate

an anubandha
Here the indicatory letter
elision of

does not prevent gunation.

Similarly in

added to the root ft^ "to injure." Thus ft^+fircj (III. 2. 75.)
-ft^+^fl. 3- 2. and 3.)- ftv + * (VI. 1. 67.) Here theaffix ^ is elided, but
nevertheless, the guna substitute must take place in ft^ . Thus we have
ft^+ -*J (VII. 3. 86 and 1. 1. 62)
(VIII. 2. 39).

the

affix finj is

-^

The word &rdhadhituka has been used

to indicate that a sirvadhia portion of a root, does not prevent

guna or vriddhi as in ctoftfa, (Rig Veda IV. 58.3) "he roars much." *+*^

tuka

affix

which causes the

-<fcw(IH.

1.

22).

elision of

ttTO-rft^-tft+ft

(II. 4.

74.).

Here the sirvadh&tuka

Bk

I.

Ch.

I.

Exceptions to Guna and Vriddhi

5. ]

causes the elision of

affix finj

^r,

a portion of the root The guna substitution

however takes place, and we have tWfr+f+pir (VII. 3. 94)- ffctifit, the
augment f^ being added by sfitra VII. 3. 94.
The word "ika^" of the previous sfitra is understood in this sfitra also.

The ik

not gunated or vriddhied before such ftrdhadh&tuka

may do so. Thus in *pnfir the equation is as

letters only are

affixes; the

other vowels

follows: *J + **3^ + f^[ *r + *p{ + f ( VI.

Here the d rdhadhituka affix

4. 33) .
f^cg has caused a portion of the root ?pn(, to be suppressed, w., the letter ^r
But nevertheless the *r

has been elided.

because ST
in the

3.18)

not included in the praty&h&ra ik

is

present

^+*T

sfitra

(VI. 4. 27.)

-*pt: (VII.

affixes,

So

also frssj+ini (III.

3. 52).

otherwise would have caused

so,

when

has an indica-

it

or ^.

Thus the
tuka

and the exception contained

letters.

and VII.

2. 116.

guna or vriddhi, does not do

*

vfiddhied before f*T

is

*nj

only applies to the ik

And that, which

5.

tory

of

past participle terminations t?

which would, by the general rule VII.

and

3. 84,

TOf?f are irdhadhA-

have caused guna, but

wm

they
f*$ the real terminations being, n and
do not cause guna. Therefore, when these terminations are added to a root, the
ik of the root is not gunated. Thus with the root fa "to collect" we have

as their indicatory letter q?

fofr

or

famr%

TI,

is

"to hear,"

*pr:,

^m%

4t

Similarly the terminations TO?^fpr,

all fefrj

being

terminations 'the indicatory letters of

^r,

nf*\*(

^TCJ

Thus we have from

&c
*f

&c.

"to fear"
U*j[

all

*fftf: t

>ftfrnt.

3*H^,TOT, f^,&c., are

being

55*/

Before these, the root

^r,

"to bear"

The terms fr^

The

Sec.

the real affixes

is

not gunated.

from fa^ "to pierce" fift^PT

&c., of this sfttra are in the locative or seventh case.

force of this case termination here is that of QfjKf or cause, that is the

guna or vriddhi which would otherwise have been caused, does not take place,
Thus all &rdbadh&tuka and s&rvadh&tuka affixes
if an affix is ftr^ , ftrjr, fiF
cause gunation of Hit final ik of the inflective base (VII. 3. 84.) Thus the
.

S&rvadh&tuka

affix

?j\

*r ) in the following

1+*J?+fay ,3 Ht+*J + fa-Trf^ "he is." Similarly s&rvadh&tuka

and ftrdbadh&tuka affixes cause the gupa substitution of the short penulti+ ft^ -*>iRr.
mate it of the inflective base (VII. 3. 85.) Thus f^ +
,

The
operation
66.)

If

general force of the locative case in an aphorism

directed,

on the expression

is

to cause the

immediately preceding

it

(I.

the force of the locative case in the present s&tra were also that as

Exception to, Guna and Vriddhi.

8.

explained in

I. I.

66, then the interpretation

[Bk.

would be this

k g or ft, would not cause the guna

indicatory

Ch..

I.

An

. 5.

affix

substitution of the

The case of the penultimate short ik

Then though the rule may apply to f% +^RTft^:

having an

vowel

not be

immediately preceding it

will

covered by it

"collected

it

would not apply to

of

fiff.

This however

the locative as one of " occasion" and thus

firf

is

guna subs-

there would be nothing to bar the

ftj+W;

titution of the penultimate

iky

prevented by explaining

" broken.

Pfa":

we have a word ft0[ victorious/ in which

the affix *pg has an indicatory i Thus fir + *J*5 - fa*J : "victorious"
(HI- 2. 139), so also **mf "durable,"
:

Similarly from the root fSr

'

Similarly the

the
is

affix,

*J3^

is

fir^ affix, the

real

being

suffix

*r,

Therefore when n5 & added to a root, there

Thus we have from firjf " to know', fap

being merely indicatory.

no gunation or vriddhing.
Similarly by I. 2. 4,

by an indicatory

all

sarvadhatuka affixes that are not marked

Thus the second person singular termi-

, are treated as f|^.

nation <r^isft^,and we have faj*r :" they two collect," similarly fanPq,
"they collect," * + ?Rr ye : "cleansed," *p\fct "they cleanse."

The phrase "when

The

indicated bythe term ik"

in general.
fJSj^;

Thus by

III

1.

30, th^-root

of this affix the letters^

The force

of

is

understood in this sutra.

gr^"

to desire"

and 3? are indicatory, the

to cause vriddhi (VII.

prevent such vriddhi, as the letter *? of

2. 116).

The

all

vowels )'

takes the affix

real affix

indicatory

not included in

3T5J is

^~9ff%+snH3ST'ni%" he

have 3rrft+

is

ik\owels only, and not to

prohibition, therefore, applies to

is

^ does

ik.

f.

not]

Thus we!

desires."

According to the wish of the author of the Mahabh&shya, the verb

f^ optionally takes vriddhi, before kit or nit affixes beginning with a vowel.

As MR*j*ifirl

Here

or MfiHlwiPd " they rub."

in this sfttra there is prohibition

of the guna

of the short penultimate ik also.

*
The indicatory ^f of the verbal tense affixes *>.,
-

is

an exception to

III. 4.

this rule

of fF?

This

104 which declares " when the sense

is
is

5T^ , f*T^

g^ , 5J^ t
an inference deduced from
,

that of benediction, then the

augment *U*J* of f5H is as if it were distinguished by an indicatory qf."

There woulcThave been no necessity of making qi$^ a %^, if f*n were a
Hfh, but the very fact of making HW\ a f%T7[ indicates by implication or is

mn<h
f|^.

5T^ &c. does not make these tense affixes

Thus in *T^ or Imperfect tense we have 5tf^re^ " he collected" ( *tfaf
that the final

^frf: Q

of feo^

^Mf^zfWiaj% 5T3Jf^

Hl^i <H&

T nW:

ll

Ibigitized by

Vj^OQ

Bk.

I.

Ch.

I.

Sanyoga defined.

6, 7. ]

Theguna and vriddhi substitutions, which

would otherwise have presented themselves, do not
however come, in the place of the vowels of didhl * to
shine/ and vevi to go,' and of the augment called jr. if6.

The

roots $>ft

and

iffi

never take the guf&a or vpddhi substitutions

under ordinary circumstances. Thus the

titution
affixes

affix 0355 generally

causes vriddhi subs-

when added to any root and so th^aflhfsg^ causes guna. But these
when applied to the verbs didhi and N vest, never cause vriddhi or
;

guna substitution. As^hft + *5^ - SJTfhft + smrtVII. 1. 1) - rrfta*r:

So also *n*hft +
- *nfcft + rc (VII. 1. 1) = ^rth^Fi^.
Similarly from %^fr we have Hf|$*>*H1 and Hji^q* :- In the Vedas, however,
these verbs take guna. Thus ^r^[ (Rig Ved. X. 98, 7), and rfhT3 : (R*g
Ved. V. 40. 5). These two Verbs are confined generally to the Vedic
literature, and the present rule therefore, seems to be an unnecessary
prohibition ; as they take guna in spite of such prohibition.

(VI. i- 77).

In the general tenses, it is

Of the augment j% the real affix is f.
added to certain terminations beginning with consonants of the *f^ class, *>.,
all

consonants except

person, singular
/
'

is

441P)

Thus the future termination, first

" to move" requires
when added to the root

(VII. 2. 35).
this

an intermediate f, and thus we have the form ^ft*srrf% , ' I shall

is never gunated or vriddhied, though according to the general
before an irdhadhituka termination,

The augment f^
the prohibition therefore,

jf%*.

'i

rule,*

This f

coming

ought to have been gunated.

could under no circumstances have taken vriddhi,

is in

#WntU

it

walk.'

the case of the

^ftTC:

fn+ ii<Ti *h *ip

II

K>m ff

<rf

guna substitute

of

f^

3 II *J^tf*ll f^:, WInTCT:, *S*TO:

a^gteiifrii

*sr:

*Nt*r

II

^gr nqfiggypt:

Consonants unseparated by a vowel are

called conjunct consonants.
7.

This defines the word sanyoga.

The

sfitra consists of

5ST:, the plural of the praty&h&ra ft*, denoting

all

three words,

the consonants, HH^K:

means "without any separation or space" and

word defined, and means u conjunct consonants/

trvftr:
9

So

which
that

is

the

the

s&tra

means, conjunct consonants are those consonants between which there is

no heterogeneous separating vowel and which are pronounced jointly, such as
QT in the word *f^z: 9 " cock." The word u sanyoga" applies to the whole of
the conjunct consonants jointly and not to them separately.

number shows

that the conjunction

may be
2

of two or

The

plural

more consonants,

[BK.

ANUNASIKA DEFINED.

10

say " consonant "?

Why do we

If

CH.

I.

8/

two vowels come together they

will

not be called " sanyoga".

and* have come

Thus ffrrrggpi " a sieve umbrella," the two vowels *f

together unseparated by any consonant; yet they are not
have been rejected by VIII.

* would

called sanyoga, otherwise the

final

23 " there

of that pada which ends

of the final

is elision

Why do we say " unseparated by a vowel"?

If

and by

called sanyoga,

2.

a sanyoga letter ."

consonants separated by a vowel

were also called sanyoga, then in the sentence <ptf%

would be

in

HHH%

29, the

VIII. 2.

the syllable

initial

*r

w^

would be

elided.

Trim,

m^Hium

That which

8.

along with the

is

pronounced by the nose

mouth is called Anundsika

or nasal.

This defines the word anunasika. The sutra consists of four words
"
ysr mouth" Hllti^ r " nose" *r^ " utterance or pronunciation" and^npnfiW:

" nasals."

Though

the words

position form yaufa<h

$& + mftw

and not

(II. 4. 2) will

jf<SHlff>* l

held to be an irregularity ; or the phrase

as a

compound

of jj(jHII*l<h

mN*H

by the

yet the latter

rule of

com-

form might be

jiSHH^H^H may

be regarded

the word avachana meaning " partial

That is a letter partially uttered by the nose and partially by the

mouth would be called anunasika. Therefore the nasals are those letters
which are pronounced from two organs or places, i.e., the mouth and the nose.

utterance."

The pure nasal is anusvara, while anunasikas are different from this, in as
much as, that in pronouncing these, the breath passes through the nose and
the mouth.

The vowels

are generally so nasalised.

vowel sound freely through the mouth,

and the

air to vibrate

pharynx,

we

is

If,

instead of emitting the

allow the velum pendulum to drop

through the cavities which connect the nose with the

hear the nasal vowels (anunasika).'

the particle srn

<rft

we

'

anunAsika.

As

#r ifcft: srf **si (Rig Ved.

The consonants

y,

sf, nr,

qpst *rf

VIII. 67.

Thus

qj f *qr #

In the Vedas,

spr (Rig Veda. V.

48. 1); so also

1 1).

^ and H

are also anunasika.

Thus

is

*f by the palate and nose, UJ by

the upper palate and nose sfby the teeth and nose, and *r by the lip and nose.
The semi-vowels 3f, ^ and 5T are also nasalised and are then called ]/

pronounced by the throat along with the nose,

The term anunasika is used in sfitra V. I. 126 &c.

Why have we used the word "by the mouth"? This definition

anunasika.

not include anusvAra or the pure nasal, which

is

will

pronounced wholly through

Bk.

I.

Ch.

I.

Savarna letters.

9 ]

Why have we

the nose.

the consonants

q?,

used the word " by the nose "?

II

In order to exclude

% % ^ &c. &c, which are pronounced wholly and solely

*,

through the mouth.

*r*i%

ii

9. Those whose place of utterance and effort

are equal are called savarna or homogeneous letters.

This defines the word savarna or a homogeneous letter. The sutra

" mouth or place of
words
<pir " equal or similar/' qj

consists of four

pronunciation, " inrsr " effort " and

The

<ujit4

toS^ " words

of the

various sounds are fonpecLare chiefly the following:

*fc

'

palate/ 3.

w^f ,(head^

Th^raa^ or

4. f??rr: 'teeth/ 5. *frgV

The

first

is

*WL\ or complete contact

1.

T belong

'

I.

class."

^nj* " throat" 2!

lips/ 6,

quality or effort is of two sorts primarily,

nal" and 5*nQT^"extemal."

from q? to

same

or places or portions of the mouth by contact with which

to this class.

mflfW

MJIKMi:

'

nose.

"inter-

again sub-divided into five parts:

of the organs.

The

twenty-five letters

In pronouncing these there

is

a complete

contact of the root of the tongue with the various places, such as throat,

dome

palate,

of the palate, teeth and' lip.

f^fj^ or slight

2.

contact.
The letters *, r, 5C, * belong to this
" In pronouncing these semi-vowels the two organs, the

class of contacts.

active

and passive, which are necessary

noises, are not allowed to touch

3.

4.

this class.

them

for the production of all

consonantal

each other, but only to approach."

The vowels belong to this class.

fqr^ f%ff or slight opening. The letters lj *r, ^, f belong to
Some however place the vowels and jj &c, into one group and call
firf^T

or complete opening.

all vivyita.

5*

Hf^or contracted.

ql the short *T is contracted but

of the other vowels,

when

In actual use, the organ in the enunciation

it is

considered to be open only, as in the case

the vowel *r

is in

the state of taking part in. some

operation of grammar.

The

Abhyantara prayatna

is

the

mode

of articulation preparatory* to

the utterance of the sound, the b&hya-prayatna

is

the

mode

of articulation

at the close of the utterance of the sound.

The
already

division of letters according to &bhyantra prayatna has been

given.

By

that

we

get,

a ntasth a or intermediate between

the sparsa or mute letters,

th
2. the
c\Lc>
semi-vowel
or
1 or
sparsas and ushmans,
1.

*P
*

[BK.

SA VARNA LETTERS.

12

Cll.

I.

I.

9.

or vivrita letters, 4. the ushmaiw or

liquid letters, 3. the syaras or vowels

sibilants or flatus letters.

division of letters according to bihya prayatna gives us first

The

surds or aghoslia

letters, 2.

sonants or ghosha

The aghosha

letters.

are also

called svdsa letters, the ghoshas are called nida letters.

The second

division of letters according to

Aspirated (mahiprina).

1.

The vowel

bAhya prayatna

is

into

Unaspirated (alpaprAna).

2.

*T (ucIAtta), grave *T
Each one of these three may

The acute

*[ has eighteen forms.

(anuditta) and circumflexes *f (svarita).

be nasalised (anun&sika), or not (niranun&sika).

Then

Thus:*T,

lastly

B^ 4,

everyone of these six

4, 4, #, MT,

Similarly the letters f,

has no long form;

letter 51

it

*TT,

*d,

may be

4K

*ft,

*ft,

? and gj have

short, long, or prolated.

HT*,

4*,

4,*,

*f\,

also eighteen forms.

The

The diphthongs
The antastha or

has therefore 12 modifications.

have no short forms, they have therefore, only 12 forms.

semi-vowels with the exception of r have two forms each vis., nasalised and
un-nasalised. The semi-vowels have no homogeneous letters corresponding

homogeneous
Thus then the homogeneous or savarna letters must
All letters of a varga or 'class' are

to them.

to each other.
satisfy

tions before they could be called savarna.

First, their place of

must be the same.

JPT5T

or

Mj|*4

equal.

If

Secondly their

must be

or quality

one condition be present and the other be absent, there can be no

Thus ^ and jj are both palatals, their
or place of pro-

mm

savarna-hood.

nunciation being

TOST

two condi-

pronunciation

is different,

<jr<S

'

palate,'

the q^ra* of

but

still

they are not savarna, because their

^ being sprishfa and

Similarly q? and *? though their 733*

Mj|*4 being different,

There

is

is

that of

the

same

% being

vivrita.

*>., sprishta,

yet their

one being guttural and the other palatal, are not savarna.

exception to this rule in the case of

^ and

3f,

which though

having different *TTCT are still called savarna by virtue of the v&rttika of
K&tyiyana ; " the homogeneousness of 3; and of, one with another, should

be stated." Thusffcr+onrrc'-*- ftpCTT: ; here 31 and 5* have coalesced into

long ^r by rules of sandhi, on the assumption that they are savarna letters.

The word savarna occurs in sfitras like*?*?: 97$ tf$: (VI. 1. IOI).
Why do we say "the place of pronunciation"? So that there may
not be homogeneous relationship between mm<i and <| whose prayatna is the
same but whose ftsya is different. What is the harm if we make them savarna?

Then

in

words

like snff

and ?rf$ the

geneous with % by VIII.

4.

<r

would be

elided,

if

it

be held homo-

65, "there is optional elision of frt, preceded

by a consonant, when a homogeneous

follows.

Digitized by

GoCK

Bk. I.Ch.

Pragrihya defined.

io, ii ]

13

Why do we say " effort" ? That there may be no homogeneity between

and
the
palatals, and ^ and jj whose organ of pronunciation is the same,
f
but whose prayatna is different. What harm if it be so? Then in HJ*^4t9

llftr,

the xr would be elided before ** by the rule already referred

TTOSn&T
?i%:

90 H

Xl^Tfe

gWroji^rr*ft ^rspsft

I1

3T* ^&T,

^m m*5*kft t

*nr*r.

to,

VIII. 4. 65.

Wfe)

There is however no homogeneity between

vowels and consonants, though their place and effort be
10.

equal.
There can
consonants,
and
be no homogeneity or savarna relationship between vowels
though their 3TTCT and TOoT may be the same. Thus f and tfhave the same
This

sfttra lays

SJTW namely m*

down an exception

'palate/

to the former sutra.

and the samesraa': namely

vivjita,

but

?till

they

are not to be called savarna. Thus in y^cT, jfimfagi &c, the letters *r and f
in the first example, and f and ^r in the second not being homogeneous
letters ; there is no combination or sandhi, which would otherwise have

taken place.

and f be held homogeneous, then f^THCT + *PJ (IV. 3.

53)ftTO+*T^(VI. 4. 148 here jj would be elided by VI. 4. 148, but it is not so
and we have ^THJ " belonging to vipisA or born therein." So also in ijFTJf
"ox-skin/ the f would have been omitted, if held homogenebus with %f.
Similarly

if

XT

11.

A dual case affix ending in

*r or

s is
do not ad-

I or

called Pragrihya, or excepted vowels which

mit of sandhi or conjunction.
As a general rule, Sanskrit allows of no hiatus in a sentence.
word ends

in

If

a vowel, and the next word begins with a vowel, the two vowels

coalesce, according to certain rules.

This

is

called sandhi.

But pragrihyas

are exceptions to this sandhi, "they are certain terminations, the final vowels
of which are not liable to

any sandhi

rules."

(VI.

1.

125).

This sutra gives

three of these terminations, viz., the duals of nouns or verbs ending in

Thus:

qrfr

ffc " these two poets/' so also

*T*t *f?T"two winds;" HT^r *T% " these two garlands." V%&fnr"they two

(f^)i^

(3T^), or

I?

(^).

cook" 7%^fi% "you two cook." Here according to the general rule of
sandhi, the final f of 3rft and the initial f of f4t ought to have coalesced into
an I, but it is not so, because ^ft is the nominative dual of WkQhy (

14

Pragrihya.

Why do we say ending

any other vowel
trees" (VI.

1.

Of course

the dual number only are

ber they

will

{,

H and e ?

Ch.

I.

I.

12,

13.

Because when the dual ends in

As ^ft + JSpr-fWPTi "these two

*r, or n of
pragrihya; if these vowels terminate any other num-

this rule will

78).

in

[Bk.

not apply.
it

follows from the definition, that f,

not be pragrihya but will follow the general rule of sandhi, as

+ ispf - ^H\^A " the girl is here" (VI. 1. 77).

Vdrh The prohibition of *pffa &c, should be stated in treating of the
pragrihya nature of f, a? &c. Thus *pft (two gems) + f^ - *nffcr"like two
gems." So also ^FT^hc " like a couple," spanffa " like man and wife," rr^?T
" like heaven and earth/' Some say that this vlrtika is unneccessary. Because
the final member of the above words is notf^, but the particle * only which
has the same meaning as iva.
ipnft

( 1. s. )

^H
12.

noun

*re^ are

Htr^r

11

9?^:,

*t<j> (

in f, 3T or

grihya by force of the last sutra, but the present sutra

makes

ij

will

be pra-

this addition,

terminations ending in f,
or ^ and preceded by
of whatever number they may be, will be pragrihya.
As a matter of fact,

that in the case of 3flRJ,

*T,

(The same letters) after the 1 of the proPragrihya.

pronoun *ft^ , the dual termination

In the

^^ mwi

all

there are only two such terminations satisfying the above conditions name*

and sp. The rule may therefore be put in the following words of
Dr. Max Mullen " The terminations of^pftand^pj^nom. plur. masc. andnom.
dual of the pronoun ^^r are pragrihya." As^pftspsr: "Those horses,"
ly ^Pfl"

and *PWWfr. There is no example of the word adas ending in ^r.

Why do we say " of the word adas" ? The letters f ^, 5 following
after the ^ of any other wdrd will not be pragrihya.
As ^pft + *jpr IF***
,

"thissami

tree."

Why do we
-Hgj^ = ^TJ^T f

^r,

say "after the letter it"

Because

in the

example m%j%

"those here," the ^, preceded not by it but by the q? of

not pragrihya, which

^nr^

would have been by the influence of

(V. 3. 71)
sdtra 1 1, which includes ^ as well as f and 3T, and from which the word dual
is not supplied here, else this rule would be useless.
is

i*

11

1^ n

13.

case-affixes), is

The

it

v^rfk n
affix

$r,

jhi^i*

11

(the Yedic substitute of the

a pragrihya.

In the Vedic Sanskrit, the declesion of

what from the ordinary Sanskrit. One

of

nouns sometimes

somethe peculiar Vedic terminations, which

differs

Bk.

Ch.

I.

I.

replace the

Thus
This

ordinary declensional terminations

tlt'U'ftlJt^'jdt

Of
final

5 is a
;

1.

39.)

being ^.

pragrihya.

while in imitation of

H& ff<t % Tfa &c

called ft (VII.

this substitute ft, the initial ^r is indicatory, the real suffix

as given above

wn?s

is

In the sacred literature there

as, stffa,

15

Pragrihya.

14. ]

wra* )

is

only one example of this pragrihya,

this,

we have

in secular

writing phrases

A particle 1. 4.

56 consisting of a single
vowel, with the exception of the particle *n?s is a Pragrihya.
14.

This sAtra consists of three words :f^TRT: " particle,"

sisting of one vowel ," ^HT< " with the exception of STT^-"
technically

All such particles

sist of

not

(I.

^FH[ " conwhich con-

4. 56)

a simple vowel without any consonant, are pragrihya and therefore are
As * %$. "Oh, Indra" gr sf%5" " O arise."

liable to the rules of sandhi.

It

of

called nip&ta

'

follows from the above definition that those ni pitas

which consist

vowel and consonant, are not pragrihya,

e. g. jj in JJF?r#

two or more

letters,

^rr^ which
diminutive particle

qfrmj^

is

"little hot,

As a

joined to adjectives and nouns, as *rr+

4uyn

pragrihya, has

not a

when

tepid"

(2)

four

as a prefix to verbs,

significations:

it

expresses the senses of

"near" "nearto," and with verbs of "motion," "taking" &c,

of the action, as

TH'togo/srpTT

'

to

it

shows the reverse

come j'^T + tf?*^, (3) as showing the limit

inceptive ( *rffifafa) "from," " ever since," as qjM**H ; " ever since his birth, *?
(4) as showing the limit exclusive (*nrr*T), "till" "until" as qrr-HijunHiq
s

qj|Ul*HI<t > "until the reading begins."

the above four senses

*TT

and

is

S# f^vlI<A^ "Ah! such

When

the particle ^TT has not any one of

used in expressing regret &c,

there once was," *rr

it is

a pragrihya, as

%j >to%. "Oh! do you

think so."

The word

JZ^KT* in this

aphorism has a peculiar meaning.

" consisting of one vowel and nothing else."

selves

when used

as ftmtf,

e. g. *jt,

signification than that given to

of

it

It

means

In other words, the vowels them-.

7, f &c.

in this sutra.

But the term 33THT has a wider

It means "a word or a portion

a word consisting of one vowel which can be pronounced at once"

other words
will also

^r^ means a

"syllable." In that sense the

be HM^, but not so here.

words

it, fir,

f%

in

&c^

Therefore the rule of sandhi will apply

Pragrihya.

See

to them, thus H\**\A JTOftOT.

[Bk.

sfttra VI. 1. 1.

Ch.

I.

--

I.

where the word

15

3*fln[

to

18.

means

a monosyllable.

Why

do we say " a nipta?" Because if the single vowel is not a particle, but something else, an affix &c, then it will not be a pragrihya, as the final
*T in n^TT " he did," is the affix of third person perfect tense, and is liable to
sandhi

as TOftff.

afani v% h
frtfc

*r ^r^pnr

11

sftc^, (

^hnfir

The

final

ifr

sfttra consists

of one

word

15.
This

% f*nrro

<j?i<m!

11

nqxfk

uw*

11

of a particle is a pragrihya.
*ffr^ the final

^ is

a surplusage.

The

words "pragrihya" and " nipita" are to be supplied from the preceding sfttras

The meaning

to complete the sense.

though consisting of several

is

that those particles which

are pragrihya.

letters,

end

in 9ft

As *(H trtft " Halloo, go

away."

^^ajra**ram*Ri3ti^ii rnrfkn ***$,

ffrf: llH*ff^[

RAMI

MjUhK:

*T

CT3i?*fCTrar4TO ItPT

*T

mwwHt

T"IW^at H*fa

The final sfr of the vocative singular (II. 3.

the word fft according to S&kalya, in secular
16.

49) before

is pragrihya.

or non-vedic literature,
This

gives the opinion of the /fishi 5%kalya,

sfttra

optional rule.

Thus both forms

rule of sandhi)

and qpft^Rj (where

The mention of the name of any

mention

is

either

it

it

is

an

sjt is pragrihya) are correct.

In arsha literature the sandhi

one of the two purposes :(l)

so that

qrartlft (formed according to the general

imperative, not optional, as

is

^T iff

sage, such as that of 5&kalya in this sutra, serves generally

makes the

rule

an optional one, vibhasbartham, or (2) the

merely for the sake of showing respect to the particular sage, the rale would have stood

as well without such mention

wi:
jRf:

II

pujartham, as the word Kasyapa in sutra

n 93

**T. ST^RT

17.

11

^^rf*

11

**:

I. 2. 25.

g^^ m^n^cnnHi^

^JT
f^ ^ll^^^l^l^^ H$H I
particle s* before itt\ according to
*Flfir

The

Sikaly a is a Pragrihya.
This
to the

same

of the single

sfttra consists

tfishi

S&kalya,

This is also an optional

srsj is

rule.

word

meaning ?

According

a pragrihya, before ffat in modern Sanskrit.

Thus * tf%

or ftft.

Di ^

Bk.

I.

Ch.

Pragrihya.

i8, 19.]

I.

^ IM6

The

vtfk

17

WWW, *: TOF? )

replaces **T in non-vedic

literature, and it is a pragrihya in the opinion of SAkalya.
18.

particle

Before the word jfa the word *sj

is replaced sometimes by 3? the

Thus ^ + f|% - $ f|% orftft'.
In some authorities the sfitras 17 and 18 form but one sutra, and then it
is divided by the method of yoga-vibhdga, the division of a single sutra into

long nasal

4.

two separate

sfitras

having two distinct rules.

f^ry^rq *f sti ****& *Ah\* *Pi*rk$ *nrf!t

19. The final lander of words giving the
sense of the locative case are pragrihya.
ff^r

This
sutra (VII.

11

sfttra finds its

1.

scope in the Vedic literature generally.

sup are often replaced either by

changed into a

Wi

There

is

39) which declares that "in the Vedic Sanskrit, the case-affixes

letter

5 (1. s.),

or are altogether elided, or they are

homogeneous with the prior

letter,

or ^r, or ssn* or tr% or syr^ takes their place."

changed into a

where a

case-affix is

Thus the

case-affix of the seventh case is

letter

or *jt, or

*n$

or

& or

Let us take the example

homogeneous with the

prior.

Rf (f). In forming the 7. s. of ipj;

be changed into a homogeneous letter with

we have *FJ+f. The % will

"
5T and we have *FJ + 3T *P in the body," as, *rurc*rf TPT5ft^ (for ifPRPli Wt).
"body,"

This

is

the Vedic form, the secular form being fF^f.

"on the Gaurf," as

*rfaw (Rig Veda

*?tffr$r#

cases, therefore, that the long i

Similarly ?frft+f*ftft

IX. 12. 3).

It is

in

such

and I are used in the sense of locative, and

are pragrihya.
It is

only long i and

though used

in the sense of

39) $l (*)

may

rf

which are pragrihya, and not any other vowel,

Thus by the same aphorism (VII. 1.

denote the seventh case-affix. Thus *jffer *+ fr

locative.

be employed to

*rf*T+5T=S^T;^ 'in the fire/ as, fipn *jifnrtrVMHI >Wl3 H XWR *J<Ki1*fl
(Rig Veda V. 37. 5). Here mjhi though in the locative case, its final
,

ss

pragrihya.

Therefore SFSTT+ftlfr - *P#fit

4414.1*1

fs

not

Therefore *rf?r + *T (3rd s.)

3> must be of the 7th case.
with

homogeneous
the
prior)
Here t is
*nfr 'with wisdom
T
the sense of the instrumental case and is not pragrihya. Thus tpft + fft

The f and

1^ +
in

*****

(letter

Digitized by

G00gle

IS

Ghu
The word trf

is

[Bk.

defined.

used in the aphorism,

IT^T^ " in the well" and *p* " horse," the

Here, no doubt, the word 3nft is
CTft + %TS-

of

case-affix is elided

but

we

in* order

Thus

cation of this rule to cases like the following.

in

and we get
though the

cannot say that the long fbf v&pt has the sense,

In other words, the present aphorism

we

shall

*Fro

have sandhills,
is

the horse

**

not to apply to the

words standing as the prior member of a compound term

for words like qrrft &c, in the above example, can never, by them-

and alone, denote the

locative case

while words like *ft#, formed in the

described already, give the sense of the locative, even alone, though they

be placed anywhere

in -a sentence.

^rera^iq
fRT: H W*H\ *J*1lO

and

dM

*0 n tr^rfn u

ii

>TPFfr

\n

TOt ^T t, W&W * ARlll

si^t*

'to give*

to place, are called ghu.

This defines the word ghu. Four verbs have the form of

by the

ji

J^RRT! *nrf^f II

The verbs having the form of di

20.

it

of

(pflrva-pada);

selves

to exclude the appli-

in the locative case,

near the welL"

way

20, 21.

I.

case-affix is elided,

Here, therefore,

for 3?

Ch.

forming the. compound

df the locative.

final

I.

application of VI.

i.

45,

and two,

or assume

JT,

of qr; they are called 5.

The ghu

verbs have certain peculiarities of conjugation to be described hereafter.

" to give.," as sjftjwPl ; fTJ
The tj verbs are the following:
"
" to give/' as, nfywn ; tf "to cut," as, ijfcroft;
*C to P*lty " ** 'ffisrc*^ 5>IP|
" to place" as. nftj^rRr,
^t to " fccd " ** ifiinrcfo

5^

In the

above examples, because of the verbs being 5, the

changed into ur by

H of sri%

is

VIII. 4. 17.

"to cut" and |r " to clean" not being called 5, rules MIL
~ *rir 'what is cut,* as, frt
4. 46 and 47 do not apply to them. Thus *r +
"
Hf%:. So also*rort " washed as, n?rt J^r " a bright face." But with tf " to
give," &c. *r + ^f> =*^ +n (VII. 4. 46) frT: "given ;" so also we have sy+fr
Similarly

-JPfPJ (VII.

The word dip

4.

The word 5

47).

includes also daip

19,^ changed into mt by VI.

21.

single letter,
This
*|T "end,"
is

is

an

1.

sfttra

VI.

4.

66,

by the paribh&shi given under

III.

&c.
4.

45.

An operation
aaupon an

atidea\sfttra

occurs in

should be performed on a
upon a final.

initial or

and consists

of four words, qrrft " beginning,"

"like " Jptfr^L "in one;" the literal translation being ''beginning

end-like in one."

The

affix

*$ has

the force of the

locative,

and the

(
\

Bk.

Ch.

I.

I.

22, 23.

Gha

19

defined.

and " on the end," %** let an operation be

Thus by
initial or upon a final.
initial
Thus
the
its
on
vowel.
III. 1. 3. an affix has ud&tta or acute accent
But when an
affix tavya has accent on the first if, and we have 3^W^
the end, and,
beginning
and
the
itself
is
it
vowel,
single
of
a
affix consists
as such, will have the accent. As in *fhpi*^ aupagavam the last & baa the
meaning

is

"on

the beginning,"

performed on a single

letter,

as upon an

accent, which 4 represents the affix *r<y

Similarly,

by VII.

3.

102, the final of

a base

ending, in short

is lengthened before a case-affix beginning with a consonant of*3| class.

Thus rre+^^TPT' lH ^l^. This rule will apply when the word consists
l

and that letter is a short *T- Thus ir+^W^" 'Jl**! !

"by those two." Here it must not be objected that the solitary if is
initial, and cannot be final.
of

one

letter only,

Why

do we say "in one"?

If

a word consists of more than one

Thus

word Wft the

initial short 3T is not like the final long *JT; otherwise tnft would get the name
of ^5^(1. 1. 73), and the secondary derivative from 4HI4W4*t would be formed
by the affix 5 (IV. 2. 1 14). But this is not so, the affix T^is employed inthen the beginning

letter,

stead,

and the form

is *J

not like the end.

Him 3*1

The

22.

is

in the

affixes tarap

and tamap are

called

*.

This sfitra defines tj affixes. They are two, CRT and ipr, the ^ in
them being f^. The special use of these affixes will be described later on.
These affixes are useful in forming the comparative and the superlative
degrees respectively of adjectives, adverbs, &c.

changes before these terminations, which

Thus
affixes ?TT

and

11

ftu&1

11

The base undergoes

be treated of in

its

the words apnf^TTT and gjHlftd'U are formed

23.

certain

proper place.

by adding

the

a girl/ whose long f is shortened before

of
chapter
of the 6th Book.
the
third
43

?PT to the

these affixes by sfitra

1f^n

will

word ymfl

'

The words balm 'many, gana

1

the words ending in the affix vatu (V. 2.

(V. 2. 41) are called numerals (sankhyA). D

39),

class, 1

and

and

cfati

20

Sankhya.

This

sfttra defines

[Bk.

word sankhyA* or numeral.

the

I.

Ch.

$ 23.

I.

These are certain words, besides the ordinary numerals, having some %
The words like ?g ' many/ and *n!T 'class , and those
that have the affixes
and *rf?r after them, belong to this class. The letters
* and of ^5 and *(% arefrtfy or indicatory, the actual affixes being
and
1

peculiarity of declension.

The word sankhyA means " numerals f and this class contains,
among others, the Sanskrit numerals. The words formed by adding
are
generally compound pronouns, e.g.m*$ 4tso much/' *rr*<| " as much," ^TPR[

"so much," similarly words formed by the

affix ^rf%, e. .

^ft " how many," *nfr

##

"so many," tr* as many."

Thus *$+$**|^ (V. 4. i7)-*3frai? "many times" the affix fTC**^
being added only to sankhyA words in the sense of the repetition of the
.

action.

So

*rarar:,

vrjw*

42)*jqrr " in many ways." Here also the affix

HT is added by virtue of *rj being a sankhyA. Similarly ^f^: (V. 1. 22)
" purchased for a big sum," ^Jtf: (V. 4. 43) " manifold." So also *IUJ$g3 :, iflZPtfi
also

When

SJ + ^T(V.

3.

so also ciT^g^ir,

srn^r

m^gr

<*ft*w

srfiter,

kRw: ^

mean "abundance" and "multiIt is only when they are expressive

of
tude" they are not sankhya.
numbers, that they get the designation of sankhyA. The necessity of defining
sankhyA arose in order to exclude such words as, 5jf? " numerous," &c,
which though they express numbers, are not to be treated as " numerals,"
the words

and

qj

ifT&

technically so called.

Varti

The word *f^ " half" when standing as a

pound number which takes an

affix

term in a com- "^

first

giving the sense of an ordinal, gets the

designation of sankhyA, for the purposes of the application of the rules of

samAsa and of the

like

affix

qr^

The ordinal affixes or p&rana pratyayas are

U^(V. 2. 51), &c. Thus s^fiW- "eleventh,"

(V. 2. 48), *{% (V. 2. 49),

q^if: " fifth,"

^3$: "

fourth," &c. Similarly

we have qjj^**^

'

"purchased for

Here ^rt+'^fT (an ordinal) =*rt*re5, a bahuvrihi

compound meaning 4J, vis. t that in which half is the fifth term. VJ^'H'l :
^:fflrtn WJpHH^ the taddhita aflfexes snjjandjjRl required by V. 1.19

4} baskets" (a dvigu).

and 26 being elided by V.

1.

28.

compounding (dvigu) by taking qr^q^*PT as a sankhyA,

and then applying sfttra II. 1. 51. The samAsa here is in the sense
of taddhita, and this compounding is only possible by rules (II. x. 50 and
Having got this name,
51), when -*j4tHq*jl gets the appellation of sankhyA.
affixes 57^ and snqr
in
taddhita
dvigu
compound
the
sense
of
the
it forms
(V. 1.26). The word^ takes both these affixes in the sense of "being
Here, there

is

u/

Bk.

Ch.

I.

I.

bought with."

^Pj

So

28 after dvigu compounds.

1.

the affix

also

^rtwff^

affixes

sense

the

is

have been elided by

we have Hj^tH<fr by applying

:

For these two purposes, namely samisa and the application

compounds

of Qv\,

mean "bought with a measure

both

above --compound of

the

In

21.

above-named taddhita; but the

that of the

V.

Thu$ ^rffap^nd

$urpa."

called

Shat.

-24, 25.]-

ardha-panchama are treated as sankhyi.

of ardha, like

v$&m ^11

tnjrft

11

*-*r-3ren

11

(*w)

tc,

11

The SankhyAs having * or h as their final

24.

are called sha*.

This

sfitra

group sankhyi.

word sankhy&

defines the term

Those sankhy&s which end

is

The numerals

seven/ %TZ%

!It

and

tive

accusative

in

TfJ

eight/

'

qualifies

it

end

that

one of the

is

is

in

a subdivision of the larger

?r

or

^.

are called

understood in this sutra, because the word dSJF^T

feminine gender, showing that

TOTJ,

^ which

'

qr

or

5f

nine/

peculiarities of

sankhyd which

^*

is

five/

'six,'

ten/

^ words

that they lose their

terminations (VII.

plural

the

also feminine.

are six, namely *fa%

The

is in

I.

nomina-

Thus s^

22).

forfcr,

The word *jp?j in the sfitra shows that the letters *r and H must bo
i.e., must belong to the words as originally enunciated and not
.added afterwards as affix &c. Thus in *Wlfl 'hundreds/ ^ftfrftj 'thousands/
of eights the H is not radical, but an augment, and therefore they are
) ^JtlHIH
aupade&ika

'

'

not ^[ and the nominative and accusative plural terminations are not elided;
^ as sranj + f = ^Rnfir &c
,'

sfir
ffrf:

11

^**wi

^t(5i

r\i\

11

*tt

4**4i

w iv**

5f?r,

11

*&ft

wt,

^)

11

And the sankhyAs ending with the

25.

11

affix

dati are called sha.

This
in

it,

sfitra

enlarges the scope of the definition of q^

words formed by

^nfr.

khy4 ; by

this

they are also

reading/

srrf^T

<T*^

tion

by

VII.

1.

see

words

siitra 22,

Therefore

how many/

in

^ffir

by including

are already san-

we have gjfir q?fcf, how many are

Here

'

Rfir

has lost

its

plural termina-

22.

26.

Nishdia,

'

s^

By

The

affixes

kta and ktavatu are called

Digitized by

Google

Nishtha.

22

This

defines the

The

the past participle.

They beiag

nishtha

[Bk.

The

WMHUpIl

3?f

(7,

the affix

Sf),

The word

fTCPPft (fern.).

by IV.

is,

an

#p^

nisfijha

i 6, to indicate that

having an indicatory

affix

The words

sarva,

Ganapitha where a

we know

from

*k

'

it,

all/

many/ *p*

Jfr.'half/

'

of

list

'

and the

To know what

sarvan&ma

faj?

'

all,

^r two/ sro

'

wt

'other/

'all/

*p*m

it/

'either/ f<nc 'other/

%K%
So

'y u / flf* 'what/

'that/ *rgf

also

'

it/

other or inferior/

^rr

z^H

'he,

So

also

means 'own.'

^r when

So

also

it

east,' 'prior/

qr

*F3T when

it

it/

'

subsequent/

^TT

inferior, subsequent,'

'west or inferior/ are sarvan&mas

does not

she,

'one/ ft 'two/ 3*** 'you/ *rcr^

ply a relation in time or place, as shown above, and not

names.

affix

as *nPT 'which

f' other,' *r 'other/

west or posterior/ {ftiUJ ' south or right/ *tTC 'north or

'

Thus

given.

is

both/ words formed by the

'whole/ nr* 'he, she,

finr

are the

we must refer to Pimm's

rest*

groups referred to in the sutras,

all

that the following are

who/ ipf^'this/

*n^

2. 14.

and the rest are

'all,'

qRIT such as qr?nr 'which of two/ words formed by the affix

'1/^5

VIL

sarvan&ma or pronouns.

other words comprised in the phrase

Thus

must be added.

(f)

occurs in sutra

This defines sarvan&ma or pronominals.

of

II

27.

called

of

affixes

g^TJ.

in ktavatu

in forming the feminine of nouns ending in

fRTC^ (masc.)i

to say, the

is

$ 26, 27.

ft, ipnt, the 3T and * being indicatory.

the rules applicable to fr<^ affixes, such as rule

all

force of the indicatory

vowel of uk pratyahira

I.

actual affixes are

ft^fatre liable to

Thu*jwfe have, gpr:, ^TORT, *:,

I. 1. 5.

that

affixes,

Of.

I.

when they imwhen they are

mean a kinsman or a treasure/ but

means 'outej/ or 'an_under^ or lower
'

garment' isa sarvan&ma.

There are certain

Thus

though ending

the plural of

^t being ^,

H*PT# *k$t; the

peculiarities in the declension of

in 3T, is not declined like' q(?

that of 5^ being srt:.

abl. sing, srnfc,

u$*HI; the

also
^h*,

Tyrant*

e object of

its

'

being inserted in the

h\Rh;
in

the Gen.

3.

71) which

it

could not have taken,

if it

pi.

these words are

the dual number" as

list

of pronominals,

(whilst its declension does not differ from that of qrc), is its taking the

*n*^ (V.

in *r,

Similarly the dative singular

loc. sing. *ft,

The compounds (with certain exceptions) ending

sarvan&mas. The word 3*? both is always used in
'

sarvanima words.

which also ends

augment

were not ^Tbronominal

fV

Bk.

ch.

I.

as &f^(.

^ II. 3.

27,

I.

28]

S ARYAN AMA.

23

Another object gained by its being so called, is the application of

by which a pronominal may take the case-affix of the 3rd case or

the 6th case in denoting cause.

There are two Vf in the above list, namely ^gp and ^having the
same meaning, and both ending in *q\ But the final if of one is ud&tta,
and of the other anud&tta. Some give/one **sr ^mly and not the other;
and say that both have anud&tta accent The word H*r Is a sarvanima, when
it is synonymous with the word g%
all / and not when it means ' equality/

7Vx 6*^
*****

When

it

has the

sense of

latter

equality/

declined like *ir

is

it

ordinary words ending in *rf as PAnini himself indicates in

uses the regular genitive plural BHFTT5T, meaning

'

a pronominal the genitive plural would have been

The above words

it

will

be declined

I.

3. io,

e.

For example,
is

As

H% be

the

regularly formed.

name
'

of

when

a person

give to Sarva (a

Similarly

when these

words are so compounded with others^as to lose their original independent

character, namely when they arc(3Tr^ry they are not treated as sarvan&ma,
but follow the regular declension, as mfitmflq $ft ' give to (him who is) above
all/

)
)
r

Here

in the

compound

qjft*i%

'

Above-all

or * Supreme Being,' the word

'

and defines and determines the sense of

another word. Fuller explanation of the word rapasarj ana) will be given later
on in I. 2.43. This term^TPT is an *F3&R(1 that is a term the appliloses its independent character

cation of which accords with

ifxf:

its

meaning. A,w,

'"''

'

ft<W*U*ft fTyrf^"

f%3jt <IHlti)

II

'"

t?WWL; (\^^l^ SgsftfT

II

V^fh

WTO^ TOft^" ftHTOT

fiim^T,

^rafaflft

^5hiH

The above words are optionally sarvan&ma when they occur in a hahuvrihi compound signi28.

fying direction
This

is

(II.

% 26.)

an exception to

sfltra

29 which follows.

As a

general rule

(see sfitra 29), in bahuvrihi compounds, these words sarv^ &c. are declined
like ordinary nouns.

The

present sfitra declares an option to

cases relating to compounds signifying direction.

of direction grTrj^T 'north-east'

eg. ^rrjjKtir or

it

may form

its

may form

'

tflrei^.

nouns, as &fni \(%

like ordinary

person'). Here the dative singular

if

like

where he

or of equals/

sarva &c. are notto he_treated_ as pronouns

they are used as appellatives.

then

among

/.

this,

in special

Thus the bahuvrihi compound

Its dative case as

a pronominal,

dative like ordinary words ending in qjr,

i. e.

Sarvanama.

24

Why do we

say

"when

[Bk.I.Ch.1.

signifying a direction" ?

The next

ig.

sfitra will

enjoin that in bahuvrihi compounds! these words are not treated as pronoim-

present sutra, we had not used the word ftgsr , it

would have been impossible to know where there was option and where
By employing the word " direction," it is thus determined, that
prohibition.
nals.

in

Therefore,

if

in the

a samasa, relating to direction

therelsprohibition in

Why

(II. 2.

26), there is

allowed option, while

other kinds of bahuvrihi compounds.

all

do we say "

compound"? So that the option may be in that

bahuvrihi which is purely sam&sa, and injio^ other bahuvrihi. 'There is no/
in

option allowed in that bahuvrihi where there

is

a semblance of bahuvrihi \

but not exact bahuvrihi.

The

quasi-bahuvrihi, or analogical bahuvrihi compounds, or to use the

Sanskrit phrase, bahuvrihi-vadbh&va,

is

in repetition are treated like bahuvrihi.

one, each one/ Bahuvrihi

above example, no idea of

is

taught in sfitra VIII.

Thus

5* +

jgk

1.

9.

where words

R^**^ 'one and

compounds are possessive compounds, but in the

possession enters. However the compound here

treated like a bahuvrihi, for the purposes of the elision of the case-affix of

the

first

member, and the whole compound gets the designation of pr&tipadika.

In compounds like

this, therefore,

bahuvrihi, the present rule

^to"& %ft

'

which are bahuvrfhi-vat, but not exactly

Thus

and the succeeding sutra do not apply.

g>ve to each one/ {ftmJtftlUJtil fft II

Why do we say " in the bahuvrihi "? So that there
'

in the

dvandva compound.

east9

The

Thus {RiUJIiU^fruJIJl
dvandva by

prohibition in the case of

'

may be no option

of the south, north

rule 31

is

and

absolute and

invariable.

fnT

TOmfT SPTFa
29.

wfn 4WU*Hil*UM H H^TRT

II

The words sarva &c, are not

sarva-

n&ma when occurring in a bahuvrihi compound.

As a general rule (see sfitra 72), when any definition, rule, operation
&c. is made applicable to a particular word, the same would also apply to any
other word which ends in that word. Thus the plural of man being men'
in English, the plural of blackman will be blackmen. So the definition of sarvan&ma given to sarva &c., separately, will also apply to the words ending
'

in sarva &c.

This

sfitra

introduces thus an e xceptio n to sfitra 27.

In bahuvrihi
.

or possessive compounds, the nature of which compounds will be described

Digitized by

LiOOQ 16

Bk. I.Ch.

15

Sarvanama.

30.]

I.

above mentioned words are not pronominals, and must follow

later on, the

Thus the compound fstaft^q meaning

beloved of all' is a bahuvrthi compound of ft* beloved/ and flf^r'all/
(which is a sarvanama). The declension of this compound will follow the
the ordinary rule of declension.

'

Thus, in the dative singular,

general rule.

dative singular of firT*

A4W4I4

" to

him who

by

is

itself

we have

ftsrf^^ra, though the

firj*&, like other pronominals.

is

So

beloved of both."

also t^TOra,

So

also

33H &c*

Similarly in bahuvrthi compounds, these words not being treated as

pronominals, they do not take also the special affix S^p* f but the general
affix

q^.

As, qretfteqfr, H^Ptegft (V.

3. 70).

Though the word bahuvrthi was present in this sulra by anuvptti

from the last aphorism, the object of using the word bahuvrthi again in this
r^sutra, is this
I

that

may apply

the prohibition

to those expressions also

which are no longer bahuvrthi, but whose original components were once
bahuvrthi.

Thus the words

and q^HI^KI are bahuvrthi compounds;

4fe4l~<HI

but when these two words are further compounded into a dvandva compound,
the present rule

ifa

still

applies.

g<flanma

11

As, q<ll*t<H*HMHl

v
: II

H^h% e3u*niflifc h *nrf3*r

11

In Instrumental Determinative Compounds the words sarva &c. are not sarvanAma.
30.

This

is

another exception to the definition of sarvanama.

a class of compounds
last

There

is

in Sanskrit called tatpurusha compounds, in which the

word governs the preceding one. The word governed raajrjbein^any^one

when

of the six cases

pound

tritiyS,

is

called

it

is

or instrumental case, the

in the third

tatpurusha.

When,

therefore, there is such

com-

a samftsa,

the words mentioned in sutra 26 are not to be declined like pronominals.

Thus the word itch^T is a compound

a month/ where the word misa is in
will

be declined

dative of

*jjjt,

of

m& and^~*{|iw^i meaning 'prior by

the instrumental case.

like ordinary words, e.g. its dative will

when standing by

The tptiya-samasa
trittya-samasa ordained

ends with the 3rd case

itself,

is

<$&;

so also

of the present sutra has

by the particular sutra

affix, is

II. 1.

be

This compound

tliJujjjq,

uvtH^H

though the
l

reference to the special

31. namely, "that which

compounded with the words

pftrva,

sadpa,

sama, &c." and has not reference to the trittya-samasa in general, such as one
ordained by II. 1. 32, " that which ends with the 3rd case-affix when it denotes
the agent or the instruments

compounded
4

diversely with

what ends

in

Sarvanama.

26

Therefore, in phrases (TOOT

kfit affix."

me/

%n 'done by

thee,'

I.

ch.

31, 32.

I.

TOOT ftf done by

4

these words are treated as pronominals, though in the instrumental case

followed by a word ending in a krit-affix.

with

II. 1.

we

31,

purva

find that

In other words, reading this sfitra

the only sarvanftma which

is

pounded,, and. to which only the present sutra would

The word wtps may appear

it

Bk.

seem

is

so com-

to apply.

have been mentioned redundantly, as

to

has already been mentioned in the previous sutra, the primary object of the

sutra authors being to shorten the rules

by the keeping out of every un-

But here, the word *i*u has been repeated, to show that
phrases like H\hn itro* though not a compound, but used in construc-

necessary word.

even

in

tion with

an instrumental case, the word

<jj is

not a sarvanima, that

is

to say, the

prohibition extends even to phrases, which bear the sense of the instrumental

compound, though not exhibited

5*5
*wi%, 1)
fnr

11

^1

in the

q^ifa

11

form of the instrumental compound.

11

5*|f

(w^WSf, **wmif3if

11

tF^

11

*Hi$ft tj^fiw^iPi

*t *hi*1

h wf^f

11

And in Collective Compound,

31.

words sarva &c,

are

II. 2.

26 the

not sarvanAma.

In collective compounds the

Dvandva is a compound in which two words
are simply joined together, the compound taking the terminations of the dual
or plural according to the number of compounded words, or the terminations
of the singular, being treated as a collective term. Thus, the compound

This sutra mentions another exception.

above words are not sarvan&ma.

^uflNHtR" means,

word

qpfir

f<TT in this

ordinary word.

the castes/ *|TOT 'the orders' and fiR

compound

is

Therefore, in the genitive plural

and not *T<f^t9> So also

The word ^ and*
4

'

The

the others'.

not to be treated as a sarvan&ma, but an

^m unq/
i

in the

of the priors

sftrta

we

have:

and the

indicates that

it

iUjfrHtH

posteriors.

closes the

UHl

list

of

exceptions or prohibitions that began with sutra. 29.

fom*T

sift

M%*im , 5^5 ^rt%, 1

ifrf:

11

11

^n

tRrrf^ n

famm,

*rf%f

qt&(tfr,

f^t *nrra *rfa fairer sttltfft 3*nmi<uflr * *rcfar 11

32. (Tlieir dvandva compounds) are option-

ally sarvan&ma

when

the nominative plural termina-

tion j as follows.
This
tion *r*
later on,

is

which

a proviso to
is

sfttra 31,

and declares that before the termina-

the termination of the nominative pluraj $ by*re shall find

in the pronominals is replaced by jft), the dvandva

and which

fti

Bk-

Ch.

"I.

I.

Sarvanama.

$ 33, 34-]

compounds may be treated

take either sr^ or

%^,

either qr^r^^RT: or

that

in the case of the application of the affix

^J

*T%%

affix

*>M*: -

comes before the

the

The

(V. 3. 71).

<*cK<hri*i*>l; in

last vowel, with

There the

what follows

it,

of pronominals

sutra 31

of

absolute.

is,

^r

(*4n^)
the pronominals and

This

the plural.

option allowed

thedvandva compounds

ist pi. to

dvandva compounds

of pronominals, does not extend to the

Thus, gnir:+

is,

<fr.

This sutra governs the four succeeding suites.

which take the

Thus
word may

either as sarvan&mas or as ordinary words.

may be

the plural of ^R&rOT^T

J7

affix

indeclinables.

?far:

11

*m ^rr

to spt *r

And

srfSrnr

^r

t<3ft*fti fairer

q$wni<ir

the words prathama l first 1 ;

charama 6 last,' words ending with the affix taya (V* 2.
c
katipaya c some, 1 and nema
42); alpa few* ardha 'half
4
half' are optionally sarvan&ma, before the nom. pL
termination.
Thus we have stvft or TOTO ^1% or ^TH *F^ or *PTC *F? or
33.

also

'

V|r:

3frf?tt% or 3faq*ir: , %% or
The words " optionally

The

in this sutra.

%TTs

fifr* or fitTOT:

II

the affix *T9 follows " are understood

governing force of the word " dvandva " does not extend

when

By the word <nr in the aphorism, is meant words

The rest are prdtipadikas or crude bases. The
*r*T.
already been enumerated among the pronominals, therefore,

to this, and stops at this.

ending

word

in the affix

Sfa has

the option in
will

declension

be

its

ca p

.,

is

what

be that though in the nom.

is like

is

called pripta-vibhasA, the result of

pi. it

may be

sarva, while in the case of

declined like

5f?r,

the rest of its

prathama &c. the nom.

like sarva, but the rest of their derlensioiftqust

be

which

pi.

like that of nara.

may
The

word ubhaya, has been formed by the addition of the affix TO, and it is
already enumerated in the list of pronominals, therefore, by the present
sutra

its

nom.

The

pi.

admits of two forms.

application of the affix kan or akach must

nature of these words,

if

depend upon the

pronominals, then akach, otherwise kan.

18

Sarvanama.
34.

The words

[Bk.

pftrva

I.. 35:

para

prior)'

Ch.

I.

after,

avara posterior,' dakshina c south,' uttara north.' apara

c
other,' and adhara
inferior,' when they discriminate
relative position, not when they are appellatives, are
optionally sarvanAma before the affix jas.
l

These seven words have already been mentioned

mas.

them

They
in the

in the list of

sarvani-

when they have the meaning given to

when they imply a relation in time and space, but when

are always sarvan&mas,

list, i. e.,

used in any other sense than the one which has been determined or fixed for
them, they are not sarvanimas, nor are they so when they are used as appellatives (H^rf ).

ma,

as,

Thus, when the word sftru means

f%HJT ?%

*l 1*4*7:

word

the northern Kurus/ the

declares a direction,

When

it is

it is

not a sarvan&-

similarly in

^fTH ^TO
it

a proper noun.

these seven words are sarvan&ma, they are declined like sarva,

The

n&mas, or as ordinary nouns.

clever/

not a pronominal, for though

is

grarr

except in the nominative plural, when they

is

'

these clever minstrels,'

may be

declined either as sarva-

option allowed in the case of these words

prftptavibhisft.

That there

is

a 'specification' (niyama), or

tacit implication, of

determinate point (avadhi), with reference to which something

ed by the word

itself, is

what we mean when we say "that a

is

to

be describ-

relation in time

we wish to describe Benares

this,
may specify some point, say
do
we
as being southern (dakshina), to
one of the peaks of the Him&lay& with reference to which Benares may be described as a "place to the southward." Again we in the north may thus speak

or place (avasthi)

is

implied." For example,

of the people to the south of the

if

Vindhyi mountains, as being southern, not

with reference to the inhabitants of Ceylon, but with reference (as every one

here understands by tacit implication) to us ourselves, who

the Vindhya range.
tfrHUi:

*^ or 4tI<|:

Thus,
;

*t or Jfh, ^q^r or MH<f

*FJ^ or

*nrn 5 *P^

or

live to the north

^ or

*ncn

*!%*& or

4jtj<i:.

The word sva own,' when it does not

mean a kinsman or property is optionally sarvanima
35.

before the affix jas.

The word ^ when
or

'

wealth*

is

.--

\
it

does not

always a sarvan&ma,

in

mean a ^mfa kinsman

'

'

or >ft 'property'

every number and case* as

it

has been

BK.

CH.

I.

AVYAYA

36, 37. ]

I.

J9

DEFINED.

enumerated among the pronominals, except in the nominative plural where

Thus *% j*tc or

optionally so.

own ,cows'.
But when
nom. pi. As

y*T:

'

one's

own sons/

itXT.

it is

or **r TUT:

'one's

the

it

means

^rHnft

kinsmen

'

these kinsmen' l^jpr **ft 'much riches'.

'

or

'

Wcri gf|5fanrean ^T:

^^3ycMH^r:
*1MH %
I

W:

'

articles* of

11

11

property

xi^Tft

is

war^-^ff-

11

^ra^pr, vtinufSr

( fkflT^r, sift,

alone

II

^r^nr*

11

<n/nn^

*^T3fh%

^ ^*m*i*

*f%TT^r nrrd

11

^Nw

11

^r ft^5 ^forprtr<ftg^8nwH^*ii

The word aatara being always a sarvanAma, when meaning " outer 11 or "a lower garment," is
36.

optionally so before the affix jas.

The word srwir when it means ^rf**fPT w*- outer*
ma, so also, when it means ^nWOTT or a lower garment
'

is

always sarvanA-

Thus, <q??ft tor

or HjHff *p3T outer houses, the residence of Chandal, and other low castes/
So spctt or qqpsrcr. JCrr^fr: 'the inner garments, such as petticoats worn
'

'

The word

under the upper garments."

is

Hj^di

when used

always sarvanima, but in the nominative plural,

when
qrsrfit

it is
'

With

he

not used in the above senses,

optionally so.

never a sarvanima,

it is

above sense

in the

But,

e. g., *T IH<rt<!<nf

between the two villages/ where the regular locative is *JV*T^.

sfttra ends the section on sarvan&mas, which began with sfttra 26.

lives

this

Vart

The word M|*<u when qualifying the word

be treated as a sarvan&ma, and

m^KU

As,

it is

jfr

Vart

mft

'

is,

therefore,

jft*

a city,'

is

not to

declined like ordinary nouns.

he lives out of the city/

The words

formed by the

affix tffa

such

ns, fi^ffcr

and

<??fhr,

are optionally declined as sarvan&ma before the case-affixes having an indicatory SF (fl^), which are the singular terminations of dative, ablative, genitive

and

ffrn

locative, as, ffrforet or fitftapr, cl<fl4M or

11

^roffn%

*i4**4ifisr

?rf**^.

ftmnwiui^Ktaiftf *rcfer

11

The words

svar heaven,* &c., and the particles (1. 4. 56) are called indeclinables.
This defines avyaya or indeclinables. The words ** &c. must be
37.

found out from the Ganapa^ha

** heaven/
'

in

concealment*

4j4|{

3$$

'

'

they are the following:

midst/ qpr^'in the morning/

high, aloft

'

$A%

low,

down/

3^' again/ Bj?|^

jjS^g

slowly/

^n^

Avyaya

30
rightly, separately, aside,

[Bk.

singly, particularly, truly,'

I.

Ch. L

3&

5T% ' except, without/

*iTT5 ' at the same time, at once/ ^TO?L 'near, far from, directly/ **T5 * sepfrrately, apart/ |0H ' yesterday/ ** ' to-morrow/ for by day/ JX^t 'byjiight
'

little/

f^t

outside,' qrft

'

self/ ?*ir

not,* %?fr

'

exclamation/ sp^r

'

'

gladly/ 3*OT*

below, without, outside. HTOT ' near/ Pi*qi

by/ ST*P{ of one's

particle,

since a ,on S time/ ,p

lon

'

&&%

& ,onS
slightly, a little/ *nc^ ever/ sn^

or in the night/ RT%.' at eve /

'

in vain/

this reason,

for
'

'

srfcir

by reason

evidently, truly/ Hfft

by

at night,

'

of/

'

silently/

'

truly,

*&%

near, hard, close

1
night, spj

f^r

half/ ^*r

'

'

negative

really'

$*

enclitic like, as

Br&hmanavat, priestly/ Wf% *&Fl * perpetually/ ^T^T ' division/

ft^ 'crooked-

awry, over/ MJ*HI , ^-fl^UJ 'except, without' &4l4i, 5T3T 'long/ ^p{ 'expletive
particle,'
'ease/'^RT ' perpetually,' *TfSTT 'suddenly, hastily/ f^jr ' with-

ly,

'variously/ ^rfttr 'greeting, peace/ W^TT* exclamation, oblation to

out,' sfpfr

Manes/ *T5T* enough/

'

^*

'

exclamation/

vfrq^, *fcnr

of butter/ H|v*4<j/ again, moreover, otherwise.' *rfcr

a low

voice, secretly, privately/ ^PTT 'patience,

air/ $tar

'

'again,

farot or fa*J5

'

mutually, together/ JTPTfr

l$*^

repeatedly'

or

44I$<M

(interjection) 'oblation

being present,' Trig* ' in

pardon/

at night or in the evening/ $^T, fawrf

formerly/

'

'

'at

RrfRW

'

falsely/

'

frequently,

the

same

yjr

'aloft in the
'in

vain/ jn'

almost/ g*?j

time,'

^JT^f^^

4
reverence/
*pft^!T^ ' repeatedly/ HT^PJ or htJ^ ' with' *FVg,
ff*^ 'without/ Rr^ 'fie I' ipf 'thus/ iffir^ ' with fatigue/ JRtf^ ' alike/
'

violently

'

ipn^ ' widely/ Ht , HI?

'

do not'

So, also the words formed by the affixes ktvi tosun, kasun, by the kpit
affixes

ending

in

or v, \, sjt or *ft , and the avyayibhiva compounds, are

So, also the words formed by the affixes beginning with aflter
with STHJ^ (V 3. 47), by the affixes beginning with
ending
(V. 3. 1) and
(V.

indeclinables.

4. 42)

and

and ending with

m^by

*W|U(<|:

(V. 4. 68),

by the

affixes frenf*,

g^, *jp

the affixes having the sense of the affix ffe?, or by the affixes %pr

or n^, ?rf% or qfH

or ^r^ are also indeclinables.

The words called nipata will be given under sutras, I. 4, 56 to 61.

Thus a word which changes not ( H $rf<f), remaining alike in the three genders
and in all cases, and in all numbers, is what is termed an HJUI4 or indeclinables.

38.

And the words ending in

condary affixes (IV. 1. 76.) which

the cases are also indeclinables.

taddhtta or seare not declined in all

Digitiz

8^

Bk.

Ch.

I.

I.

Avyaya

39, 40.]

3*

This expands the definition of avyaya.

sutra taddhital?, cha

There are three words

TaddhiUs or secondary

and asarva-vibhaktib.

in the
affixes

are certain affixes, by which nouns are derived from other nouns, such as,
from H% we have HPTT. , sfcrva-vibhaktis are those words which take all
case-terminations, asarva-vibhaktis are those which do not take all vibhaktit

the adverb T&:

Thus

but some only.

the singular ablative

declined in

is

and does not take the dual and plural terminations.

Those derivative words which do not take all the case-terminations,
but only some of them and which are formed by the addition of Taddhita
As ?nr: 'thence,' *HT 'there/ Both these words
affixes are indeclinables.
only,

are formed

by taddhita

affixes

in the ablative case only

from the pronoun

and the other

iff

'

that/ the one

So

in the locative.

is

used

TO Vt

also

TO*

^*r &c-

*irr, *er%*r>

v?it*Rt:

^u

11

xi^TPf

^,

11

jmj^srj:

erora*

The words formed by those krit or pri(III. 1. 93) which end with 1 or in 5, *fr, $ and

39.

mary affixes,

are also indeclinables.

*ft

All affixes for the formation of

nouns are of two kinds:

Primary affixes,

by which nouns are derived directly from roots :

which nouns are derived from other nouns

Secondaiy

affixes.

Those
2. Those by
The former
1.

are called kpt, the latter, taddhita.

Words formed by

which end in H

krit affixes

orn;, ^rf,^, or qqfr (connot-

ed by the pratyahara i%) are avyayas. Thus the affix jj (technically JJ^)and
*j (technically UJJJ^T, III. 3. 10) are affixes which end in ^. The words formed

by the addition

,0*
i

'

VdK% remembering'
*

Thus,

yas

jflifoK ,'

relishing'

it

in the following

'

'^Hnrrf/

(III.

vt src% <fUi*ivM

TO

W^ ^ *$

'ftf,'

and not
(d. s.),

in sutra 24,

derivative.

^n^:

(Rig Veda

(g. s.)

(Rig Veda
is

2P5#, 'he eats

I.

III.

36. 10).

25. 21,

jfa:

having made

first

sjSr

3).

*m

^ + %^

jjm *tor%
>fa* *****%
'

3[r*

?irfhr

HI. 4. 11 ff.

used in this sutra for the same purpose^^asjtwas

showing that these terminations must

be(*

aupadesika/

Therefore the following words are not avyayas:

ft 404%

Sn^il^^T:
i

trt *ftq^ *r%%

and

HI. 4- 9"**T>; *T '11%%/

f^fKr.
ll

11

^H^ibw:i

Ttfpft

11

gjT,

*ri**n^r :

y*far*rei,

qMvw^3<i< Hqfii
i

*JT*J%

11

^Tg^-^^i: , (fosPPT)ll

to give/

'tolive,' frft^r 'to

examples, the words within quotation are avya-

"*$" n*: (V% + %

fcr ftrftnj

'

frp[

fix.

(* + tr=n^. Rig VedaV. 66.

The word *[m

employed

n;,

'STTO^rtr/

26).

4.

Tw^**Tsgf*wtf

Thus

So also words like?fta%

are avyayas.

drink/ are also avyayas as they end in

be indeclinables.

of these affixes will

D
11

3ltlzed

)y

31

Sarvanamasthana.

and kasun
As

Thus

in

I.

Ch.

I.

$ 40, 41.

The words ending with ktva, tosun

40.
4. 16)

Bk.

(III.

are indeclinables.

having done ' g$*fc # having risen, fr^T: # having spread?

the following examples the words within quotation are indeclinfrarr

'

'

ables :jn^ *4)W n$*:

ymmmi qHn*uV ycnjrw f^^E'fir' fl<fr*-3
WFnT^ff*^f%?ll (YajurVeda,I.28)^^f^f^ro 5^ *p|>* **imi'
'

'

(Rig Ved. Villa.

1. 12).

(The compound called) AvyayibhAva

41.

(II.

is also indeclinable.
The Avyayibhava or adverbial or indeclinable compounds are formed
by joining an indeclinable particle with another word. The resulting compound,
in which the indeclinable particle forms generally the first element, is again
1. 5)

indeclinable,

and generally ends,

like adverbsT^iiTThe

the nominative or accusative neuter.

Thus

sjrfafft'

'

o rdinaryjermi nations of S

upon Hari/ *IjVI

'after

the form ~*T, accordingly.'

The word ^ in the sutra shows that here ends J.he definition of
avyaya. The avyayas, therefore, are all those words which are comprised
above

in the

five sutras.

What is the object gained by making the avyayibhava compounds avyayas? Three objects are gained, by making these compounds, indeclinables,
the caseviz., we can apply to them ( ) the rule relating to the elision
1
(5J5 ) of
affixes

and feminine

words

upftgni

affixes, *>., sutra II. 4.

82 thus, in the following example, the

Salavah, do not take the

and pratyagni though qualifying the word

gender and number of the latter, zmf*H JJWF* JJ5THT: HdlSct (2) the rule relating
to^ccent when an avyaya is compounded with the word mukha, f$^T ^T)# **#
sutras VI. 2. 167
final

&

Thus,

168:

53^ yST

sutra VI. 2. 168, intervened,

and the

first

word

called ST^rC.

thus **rTO:3rrr:

Here, the compound

yppn being

adigana. see sutra 37.

pajha

retains

into ^, this

snfTCWT:

its

natural accent

(3)

change being technical-

as compared with HJ 441*11:

treated as avyaya sutra VIII. 3. 46, applies

and prevents the change of : into ^.

The four sutras 38,39,40, and 41 have

been enunciated under the svarThese sutras properly, therefore, belong to the ganaall

their repetition here in the Ashtadhy&yt indicates that these rules are

*lf%n&or not of universal application, wz.,

ral,

here, sutra VI. 2. I67, required the

vowel to take the udatta accent, but the preceding word being an avyaya,

the rule relating to the change of visarga

ly

do not apply

to them.

Thus

not used along with an avyaya

is

II.

all

rules relating to avyayas in gene-

3. 69. declaring that the genitive

case is

not a rule of universal application, for we see

Bk.

Ch.

I.

Sarvanamasthana.

42, 43. ]

I.

38

indeclinables like ?$<ft: governed by the genitive case as, ^fc^fttfc

fir ^sbn*rcn*re

The

42.

11

jr

affix

11

ftr

or

^hnroira*

15CW

vfq$i

fix,

(VIL

20) is called sarva-

I.

n&masthAna.
This

defines

word sarvan&masth&na.

the

nominative and accusative plural

The

of

f
vowe l

the peculiarity of the affix

**sv\\W

'

is

(VI. 4. 8)

and adds a

5^

So alscTapfrft

fruits.'

T^ftr ,

^f%:

sivjpt.

if

is

f$r
1.

fc>^P<1

that

and

<fr

u ^lft

The word sarvan&masthina

gfef%<r^ ^^nHr ^HH^H^^tiH

The

used

lengthens_Jhejgenultim ate

it

Thus the

72).

replaces

It

and the actual termination

fir is servile,

(VIL

the

is

sgj, an<* ^HJ

affixes

of 9T5T

plural

trc*.

occurs in

^rffir

'

fruit' is

Here, there

nominative and the accusative cases.

difference of form in the

H^pf

f^

affix

termination of neuter nouns.

the ordinary nominative and accusative plural

in every ocher gender.

The

'

sfitra

is

So

no

also

VI. 4. 8.

srj^raaf^Pi n

case affixes comprised in the

praty&Mra suf. (i. e., the three case-terminations of the
nominative, and the singular and dual of the accusative)
43.

first five

are called also sarvanimastMna; except the case-affixes

of the neuter gender.
This defines further the word sarvan&m >th&na. The case-termina
tions in Sanskrit are 21 as arranged
~

below

Singular

Dual

Accusative

f%a?iJ

Instrumental

*<fl*ll

Dative

**3*ft

19

Ablative

^pft

*9

Genitive

s&

Locative

iaa*ft

The above

Plural

WIT

Nominative

ft

are the 21 vibhaktis, the sj of srg, the

5[

of

^, the ? of ft^

&c. are indicatory. All these vibhaktis are included in the pratyahara gj formed

by taking the

first

vibhakti

and the

last letter of the last vibhakti. 'Similarly

sq, j^ &n&

by to
and feminine genders. In
the declension of nouns, it will be seen, that some nouns have two bases, one
before these sarvanamasthana and the other before the rest D
b v ^"^

the

first five

and are

terminations ($,

*ft,

*ft? ) are represented

called sarvanamasthana in the masculine

'9'

34

Samprasaranjl

Thus the word TRPJ

[Bk.

'king* has the base

while in the remaining cases, the base

Sbg.

Plural.

Nominative CPTT

K\A\<i \

Accusative

Kttrft

But

1%:

nouns there

in the neuter

11

%fir

IIMM:

\*HP

Cni^f

Instrumental CRTF

Jifii^rei' %f<ir

is

44, 45.

Dual.

<|J1H*1

I.

KRtt% before the 5^ vibhaktis,

tf^and n*T as

is

Ch.

I.

*PTfln

no such difference.

f^FT^nfh iRr^f%^^nfff%Hrtfir #?rr H*fif 11

is called vibMsM or

"May or may not "

44.

option.
This sutra defines the word ft^TRT. We had already had occasion to
use this word in sutras 28 and 32. Where there is a prohibition as well as

an

alternative course left open,

it is

tators mention three kinds of vibh&sha:

and

The

pr&ptipr&pta-vibh&shft.

The commen-

called option or vibh&shi.

pripta-vibhishl.,
occurs where there

first

already given, and then follows the optional rule

api&ptarvibh&shi

a general

is

rule

the second belongs to that

class where there is

no such general rule, but there is an optional rule, the

third is intermediate between the two.
Thus the root fifc to swell/ by virtue of the rule fa?rrer *% (V. 1. 30),
forms its perfect tense, either by sampras&rana, or in the ordinary way.

'

Thus

the third person singular is either *JJJT or

ipw.
^f^r

11

v^t
45.

^iw

s h

wsr- **uk

^jfi"

11

ftrWT

t^rfon

nnft *r *rro

^, vph

^^iiuiPI^ni

The ik vowels which

^wwrn^n

%*cr *f*fa

11

replace the semi-

vowels'yaw are called sampras&rana.

This defines the word sampras&rana.

change

of semi-vowels into vowels.

It

the

is

The praty&h&ra ik

name given

to the

includes the four simple

and qt , and their corresponding semi-vowels are * , f |T f

f ^f
and 5 included in the praty&h&ra yan. The word sampras&rana is properly
the name of the vowel which has replaced the semi-vowel. Thus the past

vowels f

participle of

So

sutra 26).

there

form

&%.

^\ 'to
that

sleep,' is

we

have

formed by

*^ +

?r.

adding the nistyhl

But there

is

affix

5ff

(see

by which
and we have the

rule (VI.

1.

15)

sampras&rana of the ? of ct^ before the ft*3[ affixes,

slept' Similarly from ^-sfar., ^r-^5L f **X-fo: , ^-^pjfa^- 1^The term sampras&rana is also employed to designate the whole pro-

is

grr:

'

cess of the change of the semi-vowels into vowels as in VI.

tf*

11

*nf*%**fir *r*r. f^nfir

<rtf

Rrffew

i.

13

11

Digitized by

VI. 4. 131.

Q 00gle

Bk.

I.

Ch.

I.

Augments *,

46, 47. ]

and ft^.

frw,

35

Of whatsoever the augments enunciated

are distinguished by an indicatory 1 or ^ they precede
46.

or follow it accordingly.
This s&tra explains the special use of two of the indicatory

^ and

Where

a^.

is ^ that augment is to
regard to which it is en*

augment

the indicatory letter of an

be placed before the word

in the genitive case with

joiued; while a f^r^ augment

is

6th case with regard to which

added

to be
is

it

letters

word

after the

enjoined.

Thus, there

exhibited in the

a s&tra

is

(VII. 2.

35) which says " fixdhadhituka affixes beginning with a consonant except*,
have f^". The question may arise where is this f^tobe added, in the beginning
or the end or the middle of the &rdhadh&tuka

The

question.

dhituka

when

indicatory % shows, that

Thus the

affix.

this is

lAuiPi,

'

he

added to the

it

Similarly by sfttra VII.

forming the causative.

the

word

as, *ft

*fir,

is

'

3. 40.

he

+5^+rcr^+*T

to

4W^
II

affix

Thus $+f^+CTfirs

will cut*.

the root

*ft

takes the augment 55? in

This having an indicatory

ft^T^qic^C:

an &rdhadhituka

takes the augment j^.

Similarly Tft?TT

will be.'

This sutra answers the

affix ?

to be placed before the &rdha-

termination reft,

future
root,

it is

'be frightens.

^Rftf^f

II

to be

is

added after

faf, !*:,

m*cm^ TO
,

The augment that has an indicatory^

the last among the vowels, and becomes the
final postion of that which it augments.
47.

comes

after

This

sfttra

explains the use of the indicatory

*j.

The augments hav-

ing an indicatory ^, technically called ft^ augments, are placed immediately

vowel of a word. Thus there

after the final

and

is

an augment called

jij,

n which

When, therefore, it is said "let 3^ be

added to the word," the letter ^ is added after the last vowel. Thus the plural of
q^r?r 'milk' is formed in the following way
TO^ + Jt+f (VII. 1. 72) TOrfNr
*(

are f^, and the actual

augment

is ^.

Here ^ is added between ^ and ^ t. e. after the %f of *, which

vowel of the word and before this 5 the preceding short vowel

(VI. 4. 8).

the final

lengthened.

59)

Similarly

5*31%

The word %w.

na or

specification

it

singular, being taken

the vowels.'

which an

J* +

Similarly

is in

There

fa

(III. 1. 77)

- yj + JJ + *T+

fir

is

(VI.

the genitive case, having the

force of nirdhlr*-

has the force of the plural, though exhibited in the

as representing the class.

This sGtra

affix is

tf

frosn%

is

The meaning

is

'among
1. 2, by

is an exception to sGtras I. 1.49 and III.

added at the end of the word exhibited in the 6th case.

is,

however, an exception, in the case of the root *&%, in

36

The short of diphthongs.

which the augment

The

and *.

sr

added not after the

pj is

?IT

(VII.

and the

So

merse".

- HtJl^ +

60)

1.

adding the augment

result of

sfitra VIII. 2. 29. applies,

also H7^:

'

*rr

?*sren^ifr

elided.

is

*n^r

gt

11

*rr

I.

Ch.

vowel *j of

I.

but between

r,

yj between ^and
Thus Jf^ +

(VII. 2. 29)=-

*rr

48, 49.

"

t^Gt

He

^t(^

11

ijv,

11

This

11

ft

no corresponding

3r^rr*far

out the y^f substitutes of

47

provided

"the short vowel

end

it

it,

but by virtue of this

and we have JSffaft

*fir 1

OT*I

'

be f and

Thus,

respectively.

ift

I.

2.

Therefore in compounding

^ has no

sjfif

+ ^

the

short vowel corresponding

f supplies the place of such a short vowel,

*'
disembarked or landed, 9
All avyayibhiva compounds are neuter (II. 4. 18).
stitra,

extravagant 1 so nh *rfifj

'

near a cow.'

Why do we

vowels are

the substitute in the neuter of a crude form

is

Properly speaking

must be shortened.
to

rule, will

a vowel."

in

ij^r

declares that the short vowels of If and

stitra

jLndjfitJor the purposes of the

declares:

when

5^ vowels have

Therefore, when, in any rule,

short vowels.

We know there are

^^.

but properly speaking the

in Sanskrit,

told to be shortened, this

im-

.11

sfltra points

short and long vowels

3ft

will

^fj 5*?-sn^5l

*Ht h^i% tft:

vowels, Ffcis the substitute,
48, Of
short is to be substituted.
??%.

that

is,

*rcsr

HH^ f?> H^rfcif.

immersed/

^r swrf

last

[Bk,

say

'

of qn

be ^5. Thus the short of *rr

Because the short of other vowels

'?

*n%+ ^r -

As,

is *f.

rf%*3T|:

*rf*T

will not

HI5TT

WfiPTTCT:!

Why
JW

do we say when short

is

to be substituted

or prolated vowels are to be substituted for

substitute.

As

f^r*rT

Devadatta

to* ^n^nn
Wl*fwfaf*M$%

11

*rfw sir JiRrnfRiT

49.

The

y%

3^

This

11

denotes

many

place,

^n^-^pn

11

II

force of the genitive case in a sfttra

explains the

mode

of interpreting

sive case (sixth case) in the sfttras of P&nini.

t ion in

Because when

the {* will not be the

Tn^ M t^

sfltra

'

fn^T

the phrase ' in the place of"

rules qualify the sense of the genitive.

is that of

The

when no

words used

special

in the posses-

genitive case or shAstyhi

sorts of relations in Sanskrit, such as causa tion, possession, rela-

comparison, ne arne ss, proximity, change, collection, component

So that when a word is in the genitive case in a sfitra generally,

the doubt may arise in what sense that genitive is to be used. This aphorism

member, &c.

Bk.

I.

Ch.

I.

P lays down

of such genitive is to

Thus

the substitute.

"

convey the meaning of

87

words.
'

means /in

this, viz. 48,

of ik there is

the place of f^.

we have

Thus

place of." Therefore,

srft

'

sfitra

means

'of

'

used generally and

displaces the verb

*r

the word f?%, is the

force is that of " in the

of hanti, there is
its

if*

in*n^ or imperative mood, and

kill thou.'

This sutra
enunciated in a

in the real

that the

means " in the place of."

this genitive is

So

Similarly in the sutra immediately preceding

in sutra f?ir (VI. 4: 36)

genitive of *f?r

we have

'

the word jr^ in the genitive case and the

Here also " of "

*nj.'

says

in the_place at*

virtue of the present rule of interpretation " in the place of."

sfitra

It

word f is in the genitive case ; the* literal

guna and vfiddhi." But " of" here means

the

in the sutra 3,

translation being

is

liIcest is

the restrictive rule for the interpretation of such

L that the force

by

The

50. ]

is

language

by Dr. Kielhorn : Only that which

read in a rule or rather that which
that which is read in a rule in a genitive case,

also thus translated

rule,

1.

e.

is like

which

that

is

or that which forms part of that which

is

enunciated in a

assumes the peculiar relation denoted by the word

the place of which some thing else

is

wpt

'

genitive case,

place '

t.

et

is

that in

substituted, but some thing suggested

by the former does not assume that relation.

The word WR" here is synonymous with TOy or ' occasion.9 Thus
in the sentence ^rot
5TJ VWRw^i the word sth&ne, means 'prasange*

WR

i.

e.

wherever there

instead.

words

'

is

Similarly
asti/

and

occasion to spread darbha grass, spread there the iara

in

'lAru'

sutras

^r#^:

(II.

4- 5 2 )t

or 1&i

*fa

are in the genitive case, and mean,

'

(II. 4. 53),

the

wherever there

*r^ or ^ use there the verbs ^ or *^[ instead

Thus Hft^T, HN^*, HftPR[, are the future, gerund, and pasrespectively of ^5; so slso, q^Gt, ^5^ and ??&ni^ are the

arises occasion to use the verbs

respectively/
sive participle

same forms

of

The word wft^PTT

is

a bahuvrihi compound of two words, not in

II. 2. 248 35), and it qualifies the

apposition, (vyadhikarana bahuvrihi, see

word shashthL

The compound means **n%

! the peculiar relation

^fpfttf^T,

denoted by the word sth&na.'

case-affix is not elided in this

^nStorRdV

compound

\o

11

that which assumes

Consequently the seventh

on the analogy of compounds

q^ift

11

wt^n-<UcW

like

11

HWI% KlwWHUMW*KfW WWt *nfa *fJQTTC

60. When a common term is obtained as a
substitute, the likest of its significates to that in the place
of which it comes, is the actual substitute. Digitized by (
?f%:

||

The four sorts op

38

[ Bk.

proximity.

This sutra also lays down another rule of paribh&sha.

we must

The guna

take an example.

of

T, 31,

and

ch.

I.

To

I.

50.

explain this

W[9 is ST, ? Mt.

what It might
be said that *jt is the guna of f because the definitions as laid down up to so
So that when in a
far, do not say anywhere that TT is not the guna of f.
word Hkc(ftrVeare told 'let there be the guna of % we do not know what
To clear
specific guna letter is to be substituted, whether it is %[, 5 or *fr.
There

nothing to specify what letter

is

is

the guna of

'

up

this doubt, this sutra declares that the likest of its significates is to

Now

tituted.

K
J

the nearest in place to

Similarly *jt

nunciation, the palate.

is q;

the

is

guna

of

because both are labials.^

There are four sorts of proximity or nearness

place or ctft

(i. e.

be subs-

both having their place of pro-

palate, throat &c.) ; (2) nearness in

(x) nearness in

meaning or

*nfr (such as,

singular terminations to be used after words used in the sense of singular); (3)

nearness in quantity or n*uuj (such as a short vowel to replace a short vowel,

a long vowel, along one);

(4)

nearness in quality or ip f such as aspirates to re-

place aspirates, and sonants to replace sonants).

the

first

vis.,

Of

all

these approximates

the nearness in the organ of utterance has preference, in the

selection of proper substitute.

(1).

Thus

in

applying rule VI.

1.

101,

follows ak, the corresponding long vowel is

must have recourse to the present sutra

V*
S^s,

+ TT

*aTPT

"when a homogeneous vowel

the substitute for both," we
*jr, for the

an example of substitution by nearness of place,

is

voweL Thus
two short
for both *f and *qx

for finding the proper

here the substitution of the long

are gutturals.

good example of substitution by the sense of the word is

afforded by VI. I. 63
" The words qf, ^, *H &c, are the substitutes when
(2).

the case-affixes jth (acc-pl.)

&c,

follow."

Here,

we know

the substitutes,

We

but we do not know of what they are the substitutes.

apply the maxim
of *pfr: " that only can become a substitute which has the power to express
the meaning of the original, /">., a substitute takes the place of that the meaning
of which

it

is

Thus we

able to express."

find that

* is

the substitute of

Hlf^r, &c., which convey the same meaning and contain almost the same letters. Another example of this is afforded by VI.3.34,
by which feminine words in a compound are changed into masculine. Thus

IRi

*?r

*m w

*fl

of ^cf,T5 f

(fern)

(3).

+ *r*fr = 4l<J u 4il34ft:

An example of prosodial

rule VIII. 2. 80,

^and

"?

is

substitution

(JlHniT^:) is afforded

the substitute of what comes after the f^of

by

WTOnot
- *J +

room of ^ there is * ." Thus sspt +

*l& - *?$$; ^nr+>^r5 -^RF+iT^(VII.3. io2)-sq^+^ni - *p*2^Here, short * replaces the short %f and the long ^ replaces the long *jr.
ending

in

in the

Bk.

I.

Ch.

I.

The *rj substitutes or ^.

51.]

39

(4X An illustration of qualitative substitution is afforded by VII.

"
when an affix
a letter of the guttural class is substituted lor ^and
3. 52,
having an indicatory ijr follows." Applying the rule of *pu*ti we find that

which

is

an alpaprina and aghosha

quality; while * which

is

rs-st+tpj^nr

Though

replaces

ghosha, and alpaprina

Thus qjj+

possessing similar quality.

"inn

letter

t^

is

(III.

^having the same

replaced by the letter *r

nrir+^

3. i8)>-qpc:;

11

the anuvfitti of the

word sth&na was understood

in this sfttra

from thejast. the repetition of this word indicates the existence of the following ^aribhAsha
fever there exist several kinds

which something else

shall

the proximity as to the organ of speech

that only

is

substituted which

is

is

between that for

of proximity

be substituted, and

its

possible substitutes, there

weightier than the rest,

1.

there

e.9

nearest as regards the organs of speech

with which both are uttered.

Thus in finding the guna substitutes of \ and 7 out of the three guna
letters *r, ^ and *fr, we find that *j\is a proximate substitute having regard
to prosodial measure, i. e. %f and f and 7 have all one mitri ; while having
t

proximity of the organ of utterance,

regard to the
latter

however prevails to the exclusion of the

Why do we use the

many

word " likest "

first; as,

we

get

%gr,

in the superlative

sort of proximities, the likest

^ and

*ft;

the

ttjfcir.

degree ?

Where

must be taken.

Thus qp +
class, ^ is changed
f^rft-SFtrefo Here, by VIII. 4. 63, " after a letter of
into a letter homogeneous with the preceding," must be changed into a
Out of the five letters of this class, and are both
letter of the class ^.
there are

aspirates, but r is hard,

unaspirate,

and

and (is

soft; so

is aspirate, therefore these

^ and y are both

must be rejected

which has the nearest approach to , is *, which is both

Similarly in ftjgwrer> the f has been changed into if.

m it

substitute for
sfttra

soft

but

is always followed

consists of three

is

the only letter

and

aspirate.

When a letter of *n pratyAhAra comes

51.

This

soft,

as a

by a r.

words vis., *: which

is

the genitive singular

or * in the place of tf; the second word

and means literally 'of
and
denoting
praty&h&ra
* long and short ; the third word
is *sr$ a
*f, f
'
is rTC which qualifies sr^ and means having a c after/

of 3T

This sAtra

is useful in fixing

the proper substitutes of qf.

Thus, there.

Substitute replaces the final.

40

are only three

guna vowels *f

if

and

*ft.

3T ? By the application

of the rule of

the nearest substitute.

So

that *r

is

'

[Bk.

Of these what

guna

of 57;

Ch.

52, 53,

the proper guna for

is

nearness of place

the

I.

we

see that %f is

and further by

Thus though technically speaking %f is

Thus fr-Mfr -^frfr; similarly fsfr.
the guna of 37 the actual substitute is *jj#
So also when ^T is replaced by f as by sutra VII. 1. 100, this substitute f must be followed by a .
As ? + *qf^-f^ + +*rf^=farfilr 'he
%f must have a Rafter

rule, this

it.

scatters;' similarly

this/
f

9
Puft 'he swallows.

So also when gr is replaced by 7 9 as by sutra IV. 1. 115 this 7 must

be followed by a . As ft + *rrar + ST3L " CTHjpr: 'son of two mothers'
This ^ is to be added only when ^f is replaced by *r, f or T~V
(*TJL) vowels

and not -when

replaced by any other

it is

letter.

Thus by IV. 1 97, " the *& of the word spjrar is replaced by sjg^ (techThus, 3>ft? + f
nically MJh ) when the affix J3 is added."
- *pn +
.

*T3

+ f *

gjf that

is

*ffanrr%:

'

a descendant of Sudhfttri

to say, the syllable

The *

Here the

'

substitute of

^T^is not followed by j.

by some to be a pratydh&ra formed

of
and
thus
it includes the letters
and
5TT
by the letter ^
*r
and w. In
that case the sutra would mean that 375 substitutes of gj and 5j are always
in the text has been taken
;

followed by

and

respectively.

3T%T?cXra H

*ft

Thus guna
tr^Tf^T

II

II

p = ar,

of

of

]i

W3:, WxT^T,

al.
(<3TT^9J:)

II

The substitute takes the place of only the

which is denoted by a term exhibited in

52.

final letter (of that

the genitive or sixth case).

The

rule

of

substitution

by nearness

of place

applies to the last

word which is exhibited in the genitive case and not to all its
letters. Thus by sutra VII. 2. 102, it is declared ^^ii?HH "in the place of ?ot
&c there is %f." It does not mean that the whole word ?ot is replaced by

etter of the

%f; though at

first

sight

it

may appear

to

mean so

the present explanatory s&tra, that the last

replaced

by

but

means, by virtue of
letter of nr$, namely w is to be
;

it

*f.

So also in
of iftaft

sutra I. 2. 50 yjifr^T: the short % replaces only the final letter

and not the whole word, as q^llftj: ' purchased for five gonis.'

wntrar

ffrf:

II

flTO

* ^JIW: %^*Wft

W^

*nft

Bigltized by

GoOQle

1/

Bk.

I.

Ch.

I.

ft* Substitutes.

53, 54. ]

41

And the substitute which

53.

has an indicatory r (even though it consists of more than one letter)

takes the place of the final letter only of the original
expression.
This sutra

an exception by anticipation to sfltra 55. By that

more than one letter, replace the whole word.
Thus in forming the dvandva compound of htt and ffc there

is

all

^substitutes, consisting of

rule (VI. 3. 25)

3T there

is

by which

is

declared:' In the

it is

place of words ending in

the substitution of ^TPHF in forming dvandvas.' Now the
substitute

TH^ is a ftg_ substitute, and therefore it applies to the last letter of the word
and not to the whole word, vis, the Sff of nT is only changed into *jr and
not
the whole word ; and we have the compound nut fttu
ft, so also
fhrriWV.

There

is

an exception, however,

in the

case of the substitute wnre (VIL

yet replaces the whole expressions

35) which, though it has an indicatory y

and
As *fa*nt may he
ft and not only their finals.
5
instead of sffaw, 'may he live,' or srNr ' live thou.'
1.

*n\i xito

II

ii

That which

54.

t^rft

11

*n^,

live,

may you live*;

or

xit^t, ( re: )

enjoined to come in the

room of what follows is to he understood as coming in
the room only of the first letter thereof.

When any
operation

To

is

operation

to be

made

is

to

is

be made

in

give an illustration:there

is

a rule (VI.

3.

of

place of *r* used after the words

ft and
there is fc" This rule may be stated in other

*n: there

replace

have

97 ) by which

*^ and

"Inthe

TOP*

a word following another, such

such subsequent word.

the initial letter of

in

all

is

* when
last

is

declared.'

words as:' In the place

** follows ft or *p^.' Now it is clear that f is not to

the letters of

been the

it

the particles called

letter

namely, where an operation

but only one.

of *pr,
is

By

sutra 52 that letter would

but this sutra

makes an exception,
a word, simply by reason
such change is to be made in
the

directed to be

made

in

of its being placed after another word

;
beginning of such second word. Therefore, the
f replaces the *r of rnr and
we have ft + ^r -flf (the final SJ is added by V. 4. ) an
island,' *****
74
promontory.' So also in the sutra
fcm: (VII. 2. 83) long * is the substi.
tute of *pr when t he latter comes after the
root n^. Thus
+ *TT WT! + fr-*mfhr: Here also the f replaces the initial
*r of *pr.
How can we find when an operation is to be performed
on a subsequent word ? When the previous word is exhibited
in the 5th or ablative case
'
see sutra 67.

Digitized by

rsr IC
VjOOQ
(

42

ftr^ substitutes.

sn^w:

Bk. L Ch,

I.

55, 56.

A substitute consisting of more than

one
an
having
indicatory
letter, and a substitute
*T take the
place of the whole of the original expression exhibited in
55.

the sixth case.

Tliis sutra is

an exception to sutra 52 by which

an &dea or substitute replaces only the

last letter.

it

was declared

that

This sutra on the contrary

enjoins that an &dea consisting of more than one letter replaces the whole expression in the genitive case, and not only

&dea consists of a single

letter,

but

if it

its

has a

last letter.

as

its

Even where an

indicatory letter,

it

re-

places the whole word.

Thus, there

is

one), and therefore,

a sutra y^r *fa: (H.

Here the

of *j let there be T^.'

it

fldesa

replaces the whole

4- 53) which means 'in the place

consists of three letters (more than

word ^and not only the

last letter

That is to say in forming certain tenses the verb ! is replaced

by *^. Thus the future tense of wis q^GT 'he will speak.
So also there is a sfttra (V. 3. 3.) by which it is declared: "In the
place of f*n there is f^." Here the &dea f is an &dea having the *for its
indicatory letter, and though it consists of only one letter, it replaces the
whole word fy% and not only its last letter \.
Of course, it must be understood that the phrase consisting of more

3?.

'

than one
its

letter* applies to the

indicatory

letters,

actual substitute, and not to the substitute with

the latter being for the purposes of counting regarded as

mere surplusages and not to be taken into account. To see whether an affix is
Mj^chiq^ or not, the indicatory letters must not be counted; and the affix must
be stripped

^TRrtftr

of all its

*4Riw

f letters.

substitute (&de?a) is like the former

occupant (sthAni) but not in the case of a rule the occasion for the operation of which is furnished by the letters
56.

of the original term.

This

is

an explanatory

atidcia sutra, in as

much as

it

sOtra,

or this

may be

considered also as

declares that the operations to

*n

be performed

Digitized by

VnOvJVlL,

Bk.

Ch.

I.

on or by the

K*

56.] "Substitute is like

V.

original,

may be

similarly

the

principal..

43

performed on or by the substitute,

The words

some detailed
word which is replaced.
>fdea is the expression which replaces something. Al-vidhi is a compound
meaning alphabet, or letters in general, and vidhi ' rule i. e. any
of
al
but with certain restrictions.

texposition.
'

Sth&ni

is

of this siitra require

the word or the portion of a

'

rule applicable to letters.

There

an exception, however, to

is

occasion for the operation of which,

That

term.

case of rules, the

this rule in the

furnished by the letters of the original

is

to say for the purposes of orthographic rules,

is

an adeSa

A rule which is applicable to the letters of the sth&ni,

like the sth&ni.

is

not

need not

be applicable to the letters of the ade*a.

Thus the gerund

rm

of verbs

generally formed by adding the affix

is

+ nrr. Now
an intermedif^ before ArdhadhAtuka affixes beginning with any consonant exceptor*
This rule is clearly an al-vidhi, because the occasion for its application is conVII. 2. 35. prescribes the insertion of

e. g. vfy

ate

ditional

on the

dhatuka

affix

7+T

Thus iFfe +

in

i6;VH.

1.

compound verbs the

This &dea

^T.

tions of *%T viz.

it

affix

^T begins

Now

the

has the power of making gerunds;

augment f which

*qj takes is

adesa

rule VII. 2. 35. the

scope

when

by

*qj

it

^r ( tech.

has

all

^T^).

the func-

makes the word an

But the

affix Ctf

takes

^r take also the f or not ?

by virtue of VII.- 2. 35, because it be-

pratyfiMra

is

while

if is

the only consonant which

Therefore, for the purposes of taking f by

is not included in this pratyfiMra.

its

we have

should, therefore, the adesa

gins with a consonant of

an irdha-

replaced

affix tqT is

indeclinable (see rule 41 ante), as the affix tqT does.

an intermediate ^

is

2. 37).

which takes the place of

if

^ and

Therefore,

with

the conditions of the rule.

fulfils all

+ *rr-7#*rr(VI.

Now

The

letters of the affix.

and

not like t*r; since that rule

there are certain

initial letters

is

one which has

Therefore,

or an al-vidhi.

we

have^ijfr.
Substitutes replace either a xnq

primary

affix/ or

a taddhita

clinable/ or a

5 J affix

'case

affix

the

'

full

affix

affix/

'

'

or an

root,'

m^p

base/ or a kpt

secondary affix/ or an avyaya

or a ff(%

affix

conjugational

affix/

'

inde-

or lastly

word or pada.

The

substitute of a dhatu

becomes

a dhatu.

like

*^is the substitute of the root

52 and 53 declare
W when an ardhadhatuka affix follows.' Here the
:

treated as dhatu,

The

and as such get the

substitute of an

fo3 declares:' q?

is

affixes ?jnr

anga becomes

the substitute of the base

like

III. 1.

an anga.

when

sfitras

1%

substitutes

&c. by

fifr^

Thus

*r?J an<*

II.

4.

of the root

^ and ^. are

96, &c.

Thus

Thus VII;

2.

^c^sej-gLffir follows/

44

Substitute

is

the principal.

like

[Bk.

Ch.

I,

56:

I,

Here, *f gets the designation 'base' and so rules applicable to base, are
also. Thus in ^r , 4iitqp 4t: &c. f we have fH, the lengthening

applied to

^3 substituted

of the vowel, and

The
pound, the

'fsp^

first

declares

member

is

which

is

*T

w^

word formed by

it,

gets the

?RT makes avyayas (1. 1. 40),

word an avyaya, and as such sutra II.
affix

as

sutra

name of pr&tipadika, and

an avyaya

substitute of

Here,

Thus

*fir

2.

I.

VII. 3.

*^E (IV.

50

2: 18)

56 applies and the

so declined.

is

an avyaya.

As, Jft^nr

is

like

its

substitute F*r^ will also

4.

*w%

&c.

JTf>**; similarly ir^nr

'

and 5^ is added.

71 applies,

the substitute of the affix *

9.

Thus VII. 1.
when the verb is a com-

an indeclinable, but not

1.

1.

krit affix.

affix tpfr

f^ being treated as a taddhita,

Vrffci^, here,

The

of

like

and VII.

3. 102,

substitute of a taddhita affix is like a taddhita.

'

The

becomes

krit affix

and VII.

1. 12,

the substitute of the krit

- Iff + * +

Jjfr+FSTS.

The

is

VII.

a krit affix, and as such, sutra VI.

is also called

As

substitute of

37 declares:

by

if^mv

make

the

82 applies, and the case-affixes are

elided after these words.

The
c

clares:

substitute of sup-affixes

3T is

mJ

applies,

and there

Here,
is

3r is

becomes

like

Thus

tin.

is

them pada by

rule

pada

substitute of a

the substitute of jprnj ,

Why have we

14

4.

is like

m%

as, MJ<$t*1^ f

Thus

a pada.

gm*^ gmi*^

and qrerrapg / Here, *f[ and

changed into visarga, as ^t m

I.

III. 4.

13 de-

101 declares

and ftj when

'm%9 ^, ?T and sri are substituted for ^5, 1*5,

having indicatory ^ follow.' Here the substitutes
The

L.

base ending

inflective

lengthening of the vowel, as, fSTPT ; 8OTW.

tj,

in

VII.

treated as a sup-affix, and therefore sutra VII. 3. 102

substitute of tin

words ending

Thus

like sup.

after an

the substitute of the sup-affix

in short

The

becomes

and

&c,

*rf[

the

&c
21 declares:

1.

of

make

also

HJ<&*4

VIII.

tense-affixes

%&tt%

are treated as pada, and the

*r**imw

final

is

used the word

in the s&tra?

Without

it

the aphorism

would have been ^l^l^Pl ^fcTqfr, and this being a chapter treating of defi
tj
an adea is called sth&ni.' This
nitions, the meaning would have been,
'

certainly

is

not intended, for had

it

been

so,

then

all

operations would be per-

formed by or on the substitute, but none by the original*

Thus

rule

I.

3. 28, says

the substitute of
its

'

the root fg^ preceded by SJT

f^ will be itmanepadt,

proper sphere,

as,

is

f^ also

will

*if

be so in

used in the sutra to indicate, that the rule applies

e venJ o partial substitutions

as changing the

of ft into

(III. 4.

86) in the

^f J.

\
The word al-vidhi is used in order
e. g.

is

this is not so.

itmanepadl.1

*nf*T

The word |dea

Imperative

as *TT?r5?; but

But

to indicate that the substitutes of ft*.

Bk.

L Ch. L

Substitute

57.]

is

like the principal.

45

?ft^ t*f &c, such as the change of ^ into *ft (VII. 1. 84), ^ into *JT (VIL 1.
are not to be treated like the original : as fh# VIP,
85), 1 into *j (VIL 2. 102
*n Had these substitutes been treated like the original, rule VI. 1. 68 would
apply, and the case-affix *g would have been elided.
,

*,

substitute in the room of a vowel

caused by something that follows, should be regarded
as that whose place it takes "when a rule would else take
effect on what stands anterior to the original vowel.
57.

This sutra consists of three words:

*r*: genitive of

the praty&hdra

^T% meaning of a vowel/ and means an &de$a which takes the place of a
vowel. The words adesa and sthfinivat are understood and are to be supplied
from the preceding sutra. The second word is 'parasmin' loc. sing, of 'para'
meaning 'in the subsequent. The locative has the force of on account of or
by reason of/ The third word is purva-vidhau loc. sing, of pfirva-vidhi mean*
*

'

ing'a

mean

that

a preceding thing.9

The whole sutra thus comes to

an &dea which replaces a vowel, becomes sth&nivat (like vowel), pro-

rule applicable to

vided that the substitution has been occasioned on account of something

\.

lowing and when a rule

Thus there is an affix called fy^ the actual

^ and ^[ being f*. The peculiarity of every

letters

is

to cause the vpddhi of the penultimate *f

V*+T

a,

nf^r.

Now

in

fol-

to be applied to anything preceding such an &dea.

is

affix
affix
;

being f; the other

having an indicatoiy

(sutra

V II.

2. 1 16)

as

forming the denominative verb from the wordqrj, we have

Thus qj + f; but before nich, the *T of STJ is substituted

by a 'jopa or blank, and this blank takes the place of the vowel ? ol qj and
becomes sth&nivat by force of the present sutra. The result of becoming
Sth&nivat is that though the ^r of
is really a penultimate and ought to be
to

add the

affix fisj%.

vt

vriddhied before 'nich 9

it is

not so, the lopa-substitute not allowing the *T tobe

we have

regarded as penultimate, and thus

third person singular of

preventing the

elided

qr?

+ + T,

the zero

^ of q^ from becoming penultimate.

the aorist(<j^) of

TO is

the form qft the present tense

which is q?qfc. The equation being

by VI.

*\r.

So also in the word *fvft*,

Thus*r+*>f + fjH+*X++f?r. Here, the *f of

4. 48.

(when an ardhadhatuka affix

follows there is elision

of the short Sf of that which ends in short qr;) this elision

something which follows (parasmin.)

Now there

clares 'vriddhi is optionally the substitute of

when r%^(aorist)

follows.

However

is

a rule

is

thus caused

by

(VII. 2. 7.) which de-

a laghu *J preceded by a consonant

in the present case the

z^Stftf?

11

*"'**

AM'

'46

Substitute

is

like

the principal.

dered as sthinivat, and prevents the application of

we get the form ^RPftst which is inadmissible.
Similarly *g*3|T

However, the word

*kap\

short *r

H$WL will

and

is

On

the contrary the short %f

the last

of

otherwise

the substitute of

(the ud&tta

2. 174,

in

a short vowel

a bah&vrihi compound followed by the

is

regarded as sthinivat to long

affix

kap).

*jr.

Thus

where an idea replaces a consonant, the previous s&tra 56 has

and prevents

its

being sthinivat. Thus there

is

a kfit

its

scope

the real

affix called FTPf,

^j
\

and ^ being diacritical letters. Before this 7 the verb

come) loses it ^ 9 and lopa or blank takes the place of W . Here

suffix

being

TPITt

(to

^r,

the

then lopa or blank

is

an idea and 1 a consonant

Now there

is

a rule which says (VI.

having an indicatory

Now

vowels.

affix

needless to say that this rule applies only to vowel &dea, there-

It is

fore,

member

57.

not be considered as a word ending in a

vowel but one of a word that ends

last

I.

because of the subsequent (parasmin)

short vowel, for the purposes of the application of rule VI.

accent falls on the

is

Ch.

I.

sfitra VII. 2.

+3TX W$*!|3M Here, the

the long *7T of *rar by VII. 4. 15

[Bk.

in

<g

STPPJ

1.

added

the letter

tr is

when 5 is

omitted,

thfe

is

sth&ni.

71),

that before

?r of

?r

kpt

affixes

ending in

after verbs

becomes

light

final

and

a ^ is required before ^r (which is a faw affix). Thus we have 3TPTO*

But had lopa or blank become sthinivat to *J then the *f of *r would
have remained penultimate as it was when it was *rnp(; and no 1 would have
been required. But it is not so.
therefore

Similarly in forming the

*J*(

+ f^

(VI. 4. 19).

Here,

word TO:.

^ is substituted

Thus

ij*S

for fj; this will not

(III.

3.

90)

be sthinivat

to f; though this substitute is caused by something that follows (parasmin ?.

Were

it

to be sthinivat, there would

come the augment g^ ( 5 ) by VL 1. 73.

Thus *r+5>*r + fli*[+inx-*r+

Similarly *J*rtST5, the aorist of fs^[.

^^+4- mi (VIII.
but

still

Had

2. 26).

Here the

the lopa substitute here

is

5 is elided

on account of what follows,

not sthinivat for the purposes of VIII. 2.41.

been sthinivat, ^of f^r would be changed into qr

Moreover this rule applies where a vowel is changed on account of
something which follows (parasmin). Therefore, where the change has not
it

been occasioned by anything subsequent, the idea (though of a vowel)

is

Thus the words j^srjfir: and *g^Nm%:

The word gi*ui% is a bahuvrihi compound of ^Rr and m^Xf meaning he who has a young wife.' In forming this compound, the 5JT of
is replaced by fir ( tech. fa^) by sfttra V. 4. 134. This fa will not be sthinivat
to *jt, as it is not caused by anything which follows. Had it been regarded
as sthinivat, the 5 could not be elided by VI. 1. 66 ('there is elision of *
not sthinivat

'

\/

Bk.

I.

Ch.

I.

Substitute

57. ]

like

is

the principal.

when any consonant except or ^ follows').

*RC + o + fa (V. 4. 134) - y^rft: (VI.. 1. 66).
and

Similarly the

'

Thus, JTOPTT+Rr-f*-

^r

trates this rule,

whose

foot is

word ^4IUHI:

wnwf

'

a descendant of 14IUHI41'

such compounds by V.

This lopa substitution

4. 138.

of the application of sOtra VI.

4.

130

('

is

not caused by any thing

not be sthinivat for the purposes

T^is the substitute bf'tEe~wor3 ^1^

the word *Tf and entitled to the

part of an inflective base ending in

of Bha.

Therefore, wmrrrj. +*T* (IV.

4. 18').

1.

the lopa been like the original, there could

'pad

also illus-

a bahuvrthi compound ofcqnt and *rf meaning

9
like that of a tiger.
Now the final *r of 'p&da' is elided in
is

that follows, therefore, this lop&deAa .will

when
name

47

'

1.

io5)-^nmr:. Had

not have been the substitution of

for 'p&d.'

word *nfr*5r, 1st per. sing. atm. present tense of the root
Thus *nft>ft+ff **sn$r*ft+S(HI. 4. 79). This change off
into is not caused by anything that follows, hence ^ is not sthftnivat to ff
for the purposes of the application of rule VII. 4. 53 ('the finals of didhl and
vevl are elided when an affix beginning wither or f follows' J.
Had ^ been
Similarly the

#>ft 'to shine.'

sthanivat, the final

f would have been

elided.

Similarly an &desa though of a vowel, and

by a subsequent something, would not be

of a rule to

tion
rule

is

it

It is

f pfirva-vidhi).

only

when a

rule is

the vocative case of

nominative case

(II.

3.

is

ift

49).

ifc

The

The nominative

5jft,

is

vocative
of

ing ^ft into qft and adding the case termination

replaces

*ft

is

Now

is

the sft of

ift

to

*jt (VI.

1.

69).

sth&nivat or not.

formed from the

fj

final

Now

there

drop-

is

be regarded as sth&nivat to *ftf which

^ would
rule VI.

the

places; for the purposes of this rule of elision of finals?

quence would be that the final

But it is not so. Because the

If

be applied

formed by changHere the adesa sft",

a rule applicable to vocative cases which declares that the

^ and

will

is

on account of the subsequent termination

ped after short vowels and

it

what was the letter which the ide^a

to be applied to a prior object, that

becomes important to consider whether the &dea

Thus

is

there is not the applica-

something subsequent to the &dea

to the exact &dea without considering

had

if

something that precedes the &dea

to be applied to

replaced.

sth&nivat,

even though occasioned

have to be dropped
1.

69,

it

re-

the conse-

If so,

in the vocative*

which ordains the dropping of f

and ^ and *jt applies to a letter, which is not anterior to

but to one which follows it, and consequently there being no

after short vowels

the &dea

*ft,

pfirva-vidhi here, the final fr is retained

Similarly the

TOP*

.is

word

derived from,

*w

and we have the vocative *fb

^nrffaT:, 'the pupils of B&bhravya.'

in this wise.

q% + *i (IV.

\.

The word

105) *pfr

Digitized by

VjOOQIC

Substitute

48

+ **
From

(VI.
this

4.
is

is

like

the principal.

146 and VII.

2.

117)

- WTO* +

formed OTrtfa

in

this

wise:

{Bk*

m*

(VI.

TOFRT +

Ch.

I.

1.

79)

(IV.

Sf

I.

$ 58.

- TO**:.
114) *

2.

*n*nr+fr* (VII. u 2) - *ra5 + f* (VI. 4. 148) - qra* +"t^r(Vi. 4. 150).

Here, had the substitute *n which replaced the *fjr of m^t9 been sth&nivat to
VT, rule VI.

4.

150 ('there

a consonant, when long

stitute

is

*r^

f"

is elision

of the ^r of

a taddhita

coming after
But this sub-

affix

follows'), could not have applied.

not sth&nivat for the purposes of rule VI.

inasmuch as that

4. 150,

does not apply to any letter that precedes the substitute %f% , but to the
very letters of the substitute itself.
rule

word ^fa which is evolved from the root qT, in this

(HI.
wise fa +*r + ftf
3- 9 2 )~ft + *T +X (I- 3- 8) = fir+ * ++ X (VI.4-64)
ftfa. Let us then form a secondary derivative from the word Reapplying
Similarly the

:,

5^ (IV. 1. 122), the whole of which affix is replaced by

fafa + s* " ft* + ** (VI. 4. 148) - ^T (VII. 2.
substituted for the 3JT of

application of IV.

'dhak

is

1.

Now firfa ends

;

64

is

(VII.

1. 2).

Thus

Here, the lopa

118).

not sth&nivat for the purposes of the

affix **r is

in f, provided

added. Rule V.

it

1.

122 says,

be a word containing two

f and contains two vowels ; but if the lopa were

then it would be a word of three syllables. That

in

sth&nivat to the elided qjT,

however not so

4.

122 by which the

added to a word ending

vowels/

is

by VI.

1ft

because the rule enjoining the

to anything preceding the lop&dea, but

is

affix

*qr

is

not applicable

enjoined with regard to something

after this substitution.

f^IJ,

qmfa g ^

Not

in rules relating to the finals of

words, to the doubling of letters, to the affixing of varach,
to the elision of ya, to accent, to homogeneous lelters, to
anusvira, to the lengthening of vowels, and to the substi58.

so,

tution of ja_ and char letters.

This sGtra lays down an exception

to the previous sfitra, by which it

was ruled that an &de?a which replaced a vowel becomes sthlnivat under certain conditions.
This sfltra says that a vowel &dea is not sth&nivat under
the following circumtances.
i.

*T of *nj

in).

is

ipftft:

'

A rule relating to the last letter of a word.

elided before the terminations of dual

Thus we have ^m?r

'he is/

w:

'

and

plural

they two are/ *f**r

'

Thus the
numbers (VI. 4.

Now

in

W: and mf*Q
by VJjVJOV IL

is

they are. 1

the technical phraseology of Sanskrit grammarians, the *f of

Digitized

/
*

Bk.

Ch.

I.

I.

Substitute

$ 58. ]

is

like the principal.

40-' %

replaced by an idesa callecferx, the peculiarity of which is that the whole of

it

So

vanishes.

that before

W: there

tKeword

is this

&de$a existing, though

it is in an invisible form.
This invisible &deia will be sthinivat, as it replaces
a vowel, by reason of something that follows, i. e. the affixes ir: and* *rf*l

being

f|=*w (I. 2,

4)

and

it

will

have all the powers of *f by the last sfttra, in the

absence of any rule to the contrary.

two

are' the final *ft of

sent

1.

But

78).

by which the change

stitra,

to

this incongruity is

we have

qt

coalesce by rules

preve nted by the

a <r?F3 fafa or a

So also

in

pre-.

rule relating

*fnf^T srfcfj

rule

VL

fiJ^Hfafa ' a rule relating to the doubling of letters.' In the sandhi

*fa+spr we have ^^r. Here f is changed into -5. If this ^ were sth&nivat
2.

of

^ of CT: ought to

of *ft into *rnt is

to the~fihals of a word, therefore,

1. 77 is not applied.

TO whoo^* -*;-

.Therefore, in the sentence dt

sfrand the invisible

of sandhi into *rnr (VI.

'

f then the rule by which ^ could be doubled before 5 would be inappliBut f[ is not equivalent to f though its substitutej and we have the doub,

cable.

>

^and

ling of

of letters the
3.
affix

which

get the form qF5<FT "Therefore, in rules relating to the doubling

&dea

is

not equivalent to the sth&nL

5x3/

irfafa: 'a rule relating to the affix

is

The

affix *?^j[ is

a kpt

added to certain roots to form npunsof^ agency ; thus from

f^

we have figp ' ruler/ So from the intensive verb ^HTHT we have
vagrant7~Tt is formed in thiswise qrara+TCtfll. 2. i76)^rrarw+%
a
4I4I4<:
+^T(VI. 4. 48). Here the *r of if has been dropped and replaced by lopa, on
account of its being followed by the JLrdhadh&tuka_affix jt;. The next
1

to rule

'

'

to drop the

step, is

and
?

t\ e. t

Now
is

by

rule VI.

there is a rule (VI.

if

66 which declares that the

letters i

are dropped before affixes beginning with any consonant except

beginning with consonants of **[ praty&h&ra. Thus *|PIT + o + *T.
4.

64) which declares that the final long sjt of a base

dropped before &rdhadh&tuka

fore,

I.

affixes

having an

initial

Here there-

vowel.

the adea 'lopa/ which replaced the vowel ^r, be considered as sth&nivat,

and *r be considered as an affix having a latent initial vowel* then the ^T of

*IP< requires to be dropped. But this sGtra prevents this and we have the form
*rarer; as,
4*

a verb

jh u

*fj ^nrrnr:

ft^rnL 11
a rule relating to the dropping of yaJ
scratch'.
In forming an abstract noun from

Wnrftfa:

^3

'to

ircfar

'

Thus
it,

there is

the affix ft

f^r%) is added. Thus 9Ff* +fir^ fl+*+fti the *T of ^T being

dropped by VI. 4. 48. Now there is a rule (VI. 1. 66) already mentioned above
which requires the elision of 3 before consonantal affixes. Now if the lopasubstitute be considered as stBnivat to *T, then the affix f?r is not an affix
(tech.

having an

initial

would not apply.

the form

consonant and the

The

present

*$%: scratching/

which requires the dropping of jrf

however, provides for this, and we have

rule,

sfitra,

Digitized

by

Google

Substitute

50

the principal.

like

accent1

FTCftfa: 'a rule relating to

5^

which says that when a word

*,

is

is

There

formed by an

[3k. I* Ch.

U 58.

a sutra (VI.

is

1.

193)

has an indicatory

affix that

the vowel that immediately precedes such an affix has the ud&tta accent.

Now *$% is

an

(VII. iT"i.).

Now

if

an

is

It

indicatory

fttft$,

the real

fj,

being jggjr

affix

used in forming nouns of agency.

affix

the desiderative verb fasftfr

this affix to
fazfift

that has an

affix

desirous of doing 9

the *f being dropped

*H?

^fnNr:

so also

6.

on the

falls

f"

of 3ft;

fall

4. 48.

on

this

and we have

fefT4^ a
c

*3N*3ftfa:

To

letters.'

The accent

not so.

it is

have:

by VI.

the zero be considered as sth&nivat, then the accent must

latent <? but

Adding

we

a rule relating to the substitution of homogeneous

explain this, let us form the second person singular of the verb

mood. The affix ft is the sign of the second person

imperative singular; and the verb ftp^ belongs to the seventh-class of verbs

ftr% in the imperative

called

and

RudMdi.

This class of verbs take the vikarana

^ being indicatory the

and the

radical vowel

final

real affix is

consonant

equation:^ + rr^+ft-ftf +T

*T of

if is

4.

gr (H I.

inserted

is

+* +ft~ftf+^ +

in, which declares

the follow-

o +^r +

^ of *^[

that the

78) the

1.

between the

we have

47). Therefore

(I. 1.

ing

dropped by VI.

This

5f.

ft.

is

The

dropped

before those s&rvadhitu ka terminations which aregt^orfe*. By I. 2.

4
all sirvadhfituka terminations which have not got an
indicatory q are considered as ftj The affix ft therefore is a ft^ sirvadhfttuka affix'and

by

IIL 4- 8 7 > ft >s to be regarded as srf^, not having an indicatory

stage is :fa+^+o+^+fa; the ftbeing changed into
by

a consonant of
of sandhi

Then
sj is

55

is

changed

Therefore

pratyihara:' here

:-ftr

*^T?^

letter of

is-cKanged into a
Therefore,

follows.

and

follows a root -which ends in

^ are

changed by general rules

if

in the

when followed by a consonant

applicable. Thus, there

anusvira followed by a

^ and ^

it

ftr+^+o+^+ft (VI IL

into anusvara

is

into ft, when'

we have

present rule

changed

and ^ and we have

a rule (VIII. 3. 24), which says that

into

there

'ft is

is

This

ft.

is

a rule (VIII.

^homogeneous

rule

The next

rule (VI. 4. 101)

fir

which says that

<j.

pratyihftra i>.,

4.

41).

body of a word the

of

5^ praty&hira.'

the form to which the

4.

58) which says that an

any consonant except

f,

letter

or savarna to the letter that

we regard

zero as sth&nivat to the *r which it replaces,

as homogeneous to 5. But IT is' not to

the anusvra cannot be changed into

be so regarded, and we have the form

ftf

+ ^ + ^ + ft- frPf

or ftrfoj

so also ft?*T.
7-

WS^rcftft: 'a rule relating to anusvara.'

will serve the purpose

here:ft + ^

ready mentioned (VIII.

3. 24),

+.

requires the

+ ^+

ft.

5 to be

The above example

This by the rule

al-

changed into anusvara.

Now if zero be

pratyahira

Substitute

Ch. I. 58. ]

Bjc. I.

is

the

into

However, the zero

anusv&ra.

we change the 5
+ % + Tfcf - ffr^F* so also ffafSv

not regarded as sthinivat, and

+ %+

examples areftr
8.-

51

principal.

considered as sthinivat, then g^is not followed by a letter of fft^

and cannot be changed

like

tf^ftnfc

a rule

directing the

Let us form the

short vowels/

mination of the Inst sing,

into an us vara.

is Zf

or

Inst.

substitution

sing, of

Therefore,

^n*.

of

is

Other

||

long vowels for

the noun *tf%fft^. The terwe have J?f%ft^ +snJri%f^

+ *+gr+*rr.

Here the *r has been elided by rule VI. 4. 134, which teaches
that words ending in *r% lose their *[ before terminations technically called
Bha. The termination of Inst sing, is a Bha termination by force of
rule I. 4. 18. The next rule that now comes into operation, is VIII. 2. 77, which
requires the lengthening of the short penultimate vowels, of the {3^ pratyi-

words that end in ^ or ^ and are followed by a consonant Here

a root that ends in \ ; and if the zero be considered as sthinivat, then
is not followed by a consonant, but by a latent vowel, and so the short f

hara, of

f$\

is

this

of

<j[

f^ will

This

not be lengthened.

however, provides for such length-

rule,

and therefore we have :Rftrft^ + + % + *jrr - Ufitffar II

requiring the substitution of soft unaspirate
9.
*r*3ftft: '& rule

ening,

consonants, of pratyihira ?ng, in the place of hard consonants

idca that takes the place of a vowel

also the

sr

+fir(VHi.
It is

intoir.
class,
If

affix

^+^+f^sr + tw+fir^+*{++^+f?r

have,

2.

26)- *+^+*++fa(Viii.

is

tst^

100)-*+*+%+

2. 40).

sthinivat, then the

and teaches

be changed

that in the place of letters of

class are substituted,

5^

if

not followed by a consonant of jg^ class, and cannot

is

be changed into *J. But

The

rule,

followed by letters of fr*J class.

obtained by dropping the si of *t be considered as

*r*(

was

the zero which

9).

(VI. 4.

at this stage, that rule VIII. 4. 53 requires the q^ to

This

the letters of

XVIII.

In this case

'

not sthinivat

ftr^ to the root *JJ 'to eat/ compounded with the

or *PfTT. In Vedic literature *r| is replaced by *rg, (II. 4. 39); so we

Let us add the

word

is

it is

not

various rules,

so.

Therefore

by which

^+

first

*T

+ +fa "^P**" 1 O^aj. Ved.

is

omitted,

and then jr is

dropped, have been referred to in brackets, and will be explained in their proper
places.

word waft^ which is the Imperative (lot) 2nd P* r

dual of the root H^ and is thus evolved. This root belongs to the Juhutyidi
class, and therefore, there is reduplication. Thus H5+^Rt**^5 + *? + IRt
T + H3 + ST5> +H^r + fTT5.- + * + + ^ + *l% (VI. 4- 100) - * +
Similarly the

*+++ m^(VHI.
+

+ m^"

2.

tion of VIII. 4. 53,

26)-* +

*+

*n*(Vlll.

2.

40)

- w +

Here the change of * into q^ is by the applicawhich is a ja rule, and therefore, the zero is not sthinivat

3 *9Jir*ll

Substitute

52

^Tprf^
^pratyih&ra instead
16.

'

is

like

the principal.

[Bk.

a rule requiring the substitution of the

replaced by q^r

singular of

of other consonants.'

(II. 4.

40) and *rg*r

or perfect

lit

is

*3

tense.

m\

8)

At

this stage

comes the

of

letters

*J\

'to eat.

the termination of the second person

+ *rg?[ - *% + -*5 + *f3S ( VI#

- * + *H + ST^UVII. 4. 60) - *r + *5 + ^3W(VIII.

+ + *$^5 + % + ^ + ^35 (VI.4. 98 ) 1.

59-

In the application of this rule,

also the substitute that replaces a vowel is not sth&nivat

Let us form the 2nd pers. sing, perfect of the verb
is

L Ch. I.

^^

rule in

4- 54)

operation, which says that the

pratyihira, when foHowletters of *R[ praty&hira are replaced by those of ^

is a letter of fl^ class, and if zero
praty&h&ra. Here
ed by letters of
class, and therewhich is a letter of
not sthinivat, it is followed by

is

class. By the present rule, zero

fore 3 is required to be changed into gr of
:
^sra^^^gH-^fffij: (VIII. 3. 60).
is not sthinivat and thus we have

Similarly *reT3. the 3rd per. plural aorist of

i3+i^

+ *nt-*r + *g + *FZ ( IL

8o)

Here had the lopa been sth&nivat, rule VIIL

4.98).

But

applied.

it

being a char rule, the lopa

is

" * + *
is

thus formed:*j

+%+ S + *ra

IVI.

55 could not have

not sth&nivat- Therefore we
4.

have,*j^T5^
lopa is the substitute of a vowel, it is not sth&nivat, for the
application of the rules of accent, rules relating to the doublthe
purposes of
ing of letters, and the rules relating to the elision of ya.. In other places,

When

with the exception of the above three ; the lop.a substitute of a vowel is, and
J
must be treated as sth&nivat Thus ^NJT^T: * ftifll: ftr^f: , ^P^fc In these
cases the lopa-&dea being sth&nivat, the rules relating to accent, lengthening and the elision of ya, do not apply.

sn^i: A arc*

Before an affix having an initial vowel,

which causes reduplication, the substitute which takes
the place of a vowel is like the original vowel even in
form, only for the purposes of reduplication and no
59.

further,

This sutra has been explained in different ways by the authors of the

Kasikaand of the Siddh&nta Kaumudi. According to the latter, the sutra

'when an affix beginning with a vowel follows, that is a cause of remeans
duplication, a substitute shall not take the place of a preceding vowel, {whilst
the reduplication is yet to be made but the reduplication having been made,

Bk.

I. Cri.

may

the substitution

more

Substitute

59. ]

then

is

like the principal.

The

take place/

53

by Easika

explanation given

harmony with the Great Commentary. For all practical purposes,

to the same conclusion. According to Kasika,
the vowel-substitute is sth&nivat, in the sense, that it is exactly of the same
form as the original, and retains this form only for a fixed time vis.f so long
as the reduplication is being made ; but as soon as the reduplication has been
is

in

the two explanations lead

made, the substitute takes

proper form.

its

This rule has

scope in the

its

rules relating (a) to the elision of long *JT, (b) to the elision of the penultimate,

the elision of the affix fij^, (d) to the substitution of semi-vowels for

(c) to

vowels, and lastly (e) to the substitution of *pr,

tj

and

s?r respectively

the root qr

therefore,

termination of 2nd person perfect

a termination beginning with a vowel, and

cation of the

root.

The

+ TJ? -

+ *T3? (VL 4, 64).

Thus we have

qr

which teaches that ' the *jt of the root

dh&tuka

affixes

The affix

^fjr

<J

is qTJRf.

all

exist in this.

Here the *n
is

This

causes the redupli-

it

conditions of the present sutra

by VI.

4. 64.

for

Let us form the 2nd person perfect tense of

The

to drink/

'

*p^ *THf and n?

rules of sandhi.

Elision of *JT.

(a).

is,

by the

is

elided

elided before &rdha-

beginning with a vowel and which are fervor ft^.and before

m^

is

such an

affix (I. 2. 5, III. 4. 1 15).

Now comes the

rule about reduplication which is contained in sutra

and teaches that a root consisting of a single vowel is reduplicated
before the terminations of the perfect. Here, by the elision of sjt, the only
visible root left to us is 5[ which is a consonant without any vowel.
The rule

VI.

1. 8,

of reduplication, therefore,

vowel in

it,

would not have applied to

but for the present sutra, which solves the

vowel-substitute zero must be considered sth&nivat

*TT itself.

Thus we have

qr

(6).

S^'to

The elision

^ of ^T

is

it

e.

THRJ

of the penultimate.

causes the reduplication

is no
Here the

difficulty*

as

if it

were the very

The long

(VII. 4. 59).
4. 59.

So

also qj:|

Let us form the same tense of

+ * + WJ^(VI.

Here also the preliminary conditions are

i.

because there

has been shortened by VII.

f^ + WS^ - +

with a vowel and

4. 98).

all fulfilled,

of the root.

the affix begins

The penultimate

replaced by the substitute lopa by VI. 4. 98, which teaches that the

rootsij^'togo'f^'to
affixes

SL + + *T35

^TT of the reduplicative syllable

kill/

it,

kill*

and a few others lose

beginning with a vowel and which are also

their penultimate before

f^

or few.

We

know

For the reasons already given, we can not redupli^55

cate the consonants 5^ as they have no voweL However, this reduplication
f + 1" + *T3^ is effected by virtue of the present rule^ and we have :
into
9 by VII. 4.62
first
is
changed
The
62,.VII.
(VII..
4.
3. 55).
siifij:

to be such an

affix.

and the second

into by VII. 3. 55.

...

Digitized by

^
VjOOQLC

Substitute

54

The

(c).

causative form of
the root

forming the

in

the real

an

The

qsnf.

causative

is

At
affix

5$.

ftrg[ to

Thus we have s*r +

*[.
The
affix
(HI. 1. 48) is added
+f +SC~*rr5+T+^T5;+^.
and
The
letters
causatives.
aorist of
^
5 are indicatory,

Now

sf.

by VI.

4. 51,

the affix fop^

elided before an

is

Now n^ is

affix that

comes

this stage,

into operation another rule (VI.

which causes reduplication;

Therefore,

was a

zero which

Let us form the Aorist (lun) of the

clares that 'the root is reduplicated before the affix

vowel.

Ch.

1.

formed by adding the affix

does not take the intermediate f .

Therefore we have 5Sn^ + + *nj.

affix.

an

[Bk.

augment

aorist takes the

being

affix

Ardhadh&tuka

like the principal.

elision of the affix ftj^ .

and the

+RSt^ +^[ s-sn?

is

it

satisfies the

an

it is

affix

^C

x. 11),

The

.'

which deis,

^raf

thus,

which also begins with a

conditions of this sutra.

substitute in place

such

Therefore, the

f becomes sth&nivat

of the vowel

were the very \ itself. Thus we have the reduplicative syllable

f>, by rule VI. 1. 2, which says that a verb beginning with a vowel reduplicates
its second syllable.
But as soon as the reduplication is over, the &dea takes
to

up

as

if it

original form of zero.

its

The

(d).

Thus

*\\\l\

*JT

mifidflN

fourth class of cases, where this sutra has scope,

substitution of inj^ for

singular of fr 'to do'

is

the

vowels. Thus let us form the perfect 2nd person

fr + *I$f*[ a^ + STJ^, the semi-vowel taking

the place of 3T by the general rule of sandhi VI. 1. 77. Now we have already
learned that *HRl ' s an an^ x which causes reduplication and it begins with

Now

a vowel.

is

a substitute which comes in the place of a vowel

therefore be sth&nivat

will

it

by

this sutra.

Had

it

(1.

e^ 3f),

not been sth&nivat,

the consonants ar could not be reduplicated, as they have no vowel

The

being taken equal to ^r, we reduplicate fr ; in reduplication the

changed into^by VII. 4. 62, and 3J into si by VII. 4. 66. Thus we

substitute
g*

is

have

^T^GJ.'
(*).

1st
^T.

similarly ^p$:

The

fifth

case

is

the substitution of *r^r &c.

person singular of the perfect of

The f

sft

'to lead:'

5ft

1575

Let us form

" ^ +

V *tt% +

isvriddhied before the termination si of the perfect (VII. 2. 115),

<*JT3T by the general rule of sandhi (VI. 1. 78). Now the

and then changed into

*T of the perfect causes reduplication,

a vowel

It satisfies

was a substitute

for

and

it is

the conditions of this sutra*

i,

an

affix

which begins with

Therefore the

n^ which
being a vowel substitute, becomes sthinivat to ij in form.

word m* we reduplicate as if it were still %. Thus we

N
'
have the form f^RPT and not 4ii4. Similarly Ph*|, 5J5TT, and igstr?.
Why have we used the word " dvirvachane" in the sutra? Without it,
the aphorism would have stood thus: " Before an affix having an initial vowel
which causes reduplication, the substitute which takes the place of a vowel
In reduplicating the

BK.

CH.

I.

is like

60.]

I.

*&

per. sing. atm. of

55

Let us form if^ the 3rd per. sing, perfect tense

" to be exhausted," in the atmanepada. The affix of 3rd

Now

here

is

lit,

t* is

be considered

if ^jjt

Thus

ip^(III. 4, 81).

changed into

causes reduplication, but

For

LOPA DEFINED.

the original vowel."

(fv^r) of the root

45).

so,

*rr,

l&t

*3TT

+ ^[

(VI.

1.

affix ^tj; this affix

of the

not to be considered as sth&nivat to ^.

SJT is

still

tit

on account

w+

then in the next stage

*5^

53^

it and the reduplicative

the form being fo**r and not 3P5T. But *JT is

(VI. 4. 64) the Iopa will be regarded as sth&nivat to

be

syllable will

and not

fir

sr

not sth&nivat to l, because for the purposes of reduplication, the change of

*r into *JT is immaterial ; it is the second and further change of *jt into zero

which

directly connected with reduplication, (for

is

sth&nivat, there can

be no reduplication)

and

if

zero be not considered

therefore, this

substitute zero

should be regarded as sth&nivat to *JT #

Why
words the

do we say "which causes reduplication?"

sfitra

would have stood thus

vowel, the substitute which takes the

" Before

an

affix

place of a vowel

vowel, for the purposes of reduplication."

we

the form J^f^r, 3rd per. sing, desiderative present tense of

This form

play/

is

thus evolved:f^+^(III.

1.

77).

=|^+3T+^ (VI.
because

3T

regarded

is this ^r

does not cause reduplication,

Therefore the equation

like

Why

is

duplication (VI.

it is

82).

to *JT;

had

The

^wjf>rtWfr

is

affix

4.

19)

(tech.

f ? No,
which causes reduplication.
1.

9) ^jrapifiir.

If

w could be

which causes reduplication, the subs*

been

so,

*rer sfrr

affix

is

like

the original vowel, for the

if& of the Intensive verbs causes re-

it

Thus HT+*y=fft +

changed

60.
fies

7)-ft+3& + ^(VI.
^ is caused by ^

does not begin with a vowel, the substitute

Let us form $rffcr% the 3rd per. sing. Intensive of

9); but as

1.

sthftnivat.

it

*+ ^ - J*ET (VI.

" Before an

root 5TT/to smell.'

Here,

to shine, to

f then the form would .have been f$ln%.

do we say "beginning with a vowel"? Otherwise the sfitra

purposes of reduplication."

be

'

to be regarded as sth&nivat to

titute which takes the place of a vowel,

the

ftjr

would have run thus

will not

could not get

Here, the change of \ into

which begins with a vowel

3T^),

1.

initial

the original

like

is

In that case

Without these
having an

into

f"

on account

of

the form would have been

**fW *%t

qrafir

(VII. 4.

but

3i)=*rafa*(VIL
f"

*ftfta?T.

is

4.

not sth&nivat

Similarly {ufcft.

The substitution of a blank

(lopa) signi-

disappearance.
This defines

elision.

When a

letter or

word-form becomes

latent,

56

is

Pratyaya-lakshana.

neither heard, nor pronounced, nor written,

Lopa

elided.

apparent.

is

the term

is

of anything

61, 62.

said to be'

previously

grammatical zero has

way as

L Ch. L

becomes lopa or

for the disappearance

In Sanskrit Grammar, this

is in several

it

[Bk.

all

" lopa"

the rights and

is

considered as a substitute or idem, and as such this

liabilities

of the thing which

places treated as having a real existence

to any ordinary substitute that has

selves with one sort of blank, but

and

rules are

it

made

replaces.

This blank or lopa

applicable to

it,

in the

have invented several

as lopa blank, rlu blank, hip blank, and luk blank, which like different sorts of zeroes of a
tician,

have

same

The Grammarians do not content themothers ; there are many kinds of them, such

an apparent form.

Mathema-

different functions.

The word

lopa occurs in sutras VI.

1.

66 and VI.

4.

&c.

118

Thus

The lopa substitute is a sense substitute, and not a form substitute.

when we say let the substitute lopa take the place of such and such a
letter or word/ we do not mean that the letters ft, %jt <and *r should be
'

substituted there, but the sense of the thing,

sr^afcn^)

namely ' disappearance. 9

11

The disappearance of an affix when it is

caused by the words luk, ilu or lup are designated by
61.

those terms respectively.

When an affix is elided by

using the term luk, that disappearance

when an affix
name of

gets the appellation of luk, similarly

the terms slu or lup, the disappearance gets the

is

elided by using

Slu or lup.

Thus in *r^+ JT^tf^T + f% - srf^T he eats.' Here the vikarana qrji has
been elided by using the word luk (II. 4. 72). Similarly in sjffrft 'he in*,
yokes/ the vikarana jrj is elided by the word Slu (II. 4. 75), so in qr*UT: ' a
city in the vicinity of weeds called varani/
Here the Taddhita affix indicating vicinity has been elided by the word lup # (IV. 2. 82),
Why do we use the words " of the affix "? Without these words, the sfttra would hare
run thus: "The disappearance is called luk, jIu or lup." So that the disappearance of a bos*
'

would also be caused by the

use of these terms.

the bases agastya, and kaum/inya

affixes is

only intended.

for the bases

So

Thus

which however

is

in II. 4. 70, there

not intended.

also in sutra IV. 3. 168 there

would have been

In that sutra, the

luk

luk* of
'

of the

would have been the substitution of 'luk 9

of the words.

62.

the affix

When

an

has taken place

influence, and the opera-

elision of

affix

exerts its
tions dependant upon it, take place as if it were, present.

(lopa),

still

Bk,

I.

Ch.

I.

This

when an affix disappears by lopa-elision its

Thus the term 'pada' is defined to be that

declares that

stitra

potency does not disappear.

which ends
these

in

affixes

87

Pratyaya-lakshana.

62.]

a case-affix or a con j ligation al-affix.

vanish;

those bases

still

But after certain bases*

become 'pada'

in

spite of

the

How can

an operation directed by an affix

naturally
is a doubt which may
arise.
This sGtra answers the question. Though an affix may be elided by
lopa, yet an operation of which such an affix was the cause, must take place.
Thus Vjfafil^ is a pada though the case-termination has been elided. Similarly the word *rW3 ' he milked;' which is the Imperfect (5Hf) of JR, and is thus
vanishing of the whole

when

take place,

the

affix.

affix itself

vanishes,

*rtrj+fr*-*re*$+*(III. 4. ioo)*mjr + % (VI. i. 68)*ri*?+*

f is changed into jr by taking the word 'aduh' as a 'pada')

formed,

(VIII. 2. 32) (here

*nft^+

(VIII. 2.

37)=*Nir^

(VIII. 2. 39) "*!**:

Why

have we used the word smnr in this aphorism again, when its
anuvptti was understood in this sfitra from the last ? This repet? f ion indicates that the present rule applies where the whole of the affix is elided, and
not when a portion of an affix is elided. The present sfttra, therefore, does
not apply to forms like HJltflq and q^*flq . These forms are the 1st person

- *m% + r(IH. 4.
Atmanepada of f^andir^. Thus MjlfdL +
*n*l .+ tffy^ + *r (IH. 4. 102) *wfi +t[+*r. Here, ^a portion
of the affix *fr^ is elided by VII. 2. 79
now there will be no U*34frl\iUI of
this partial elision of an affix.
Had it been so, the final nasal 5 of *nt*f
would have been elided by VI. 4. 37 but that is not so and we have inrffrr
sing. f*T

I06)

(VII.3.54and VI. 4.98).

The word CT^TOJ means that by which a thing is recognised. The

word i|U|4U\mJ, therefore, means the effect by which an affix could be recognised. The orthographical changes, like the following, are not however
pratyaya-lakshana.

^ + T^ "

In forming the genitive singular of ^ 'wealth/

we have

by the rules of sandhi,

though caused by the affix *rg; is not such an effect, which the affix causes,
by virtue of being an affix, but it is an effect caused by the accidental fact,
that the affix begins with a vowel, and thus gives scope to the euphonic rule
VI.
sj*t,

1.

78.

change of

*TO: f ke rc* the

Therefore,

we elide

when

the case-affix

in

^H,

I*

into %ff^

forming the genitive compound of n*: +

we get the form frg^Pfr Here the elided affix

will not cause the peculiar orthographic

dependent upon

wH*^)

II

its letters,

change mentioned above, which

and not upon the affix as such.

$*td!#

11

*V$*

11

f, *ran,

w^r,

is

H5*m-

Pratyaya-lakShana.

68

[Bk.

I.

Ch.

I.

63.

Of the base" (anga), whose, affix has been

elided by the use of any of the three words containing
^ the operations dependent on it: do not take place-dre*
63,

gardrpg^ sjiclr bas e.

jc

&-;&**

This

a special exception to the previous aphorism which

declares, that when an affix is
elided by using the
words jyqr , ^5 , or jf^ , then the sign ' or 5TOTD or the pecu liar virtue of the
affix also vanishes.
Thus there is an important difference in the elision of art
affix by force of the words 5?^ &c.
and by the word 5?nT# In one case the
virtue of the affix subsists inspite of the elision, in the other it does not

was too

sfitra is

extensive.

It

'

The word *j^F

in this

sfitra

requires

some explanation.

"

A root,

by a suffix (pratyaya), is raised to the dignity of a base (pritipadika^

and finally becomes a real word (pada) when it is finished by receiving a
case-termination (vibhakti). Every base, with regard to the suffix which is
attached to it, is called Anga, body."
Thus the word *pfc is the plural of the word npfr . The word nHr:
is formed by adding the affix zpj to ipi* (IV. 1. 105) the force of the indicatory sj being to cause the vpddhi of the first vowel of the word (VII. 2. 117),
But in forming the plural of *TF^, rule II. 4. 64 presents itself, which declares
that there is luk of the affix *rsr when the word takes the plural. Here the
affix 3p{ is elided by the word luk, which means not only the elision of the
followed

but also the shortening of qT into W, that is, the affix being elided,
vanishes altogether, leaving no trace behind, in the shape of the.vfiddhing

*T of *ir*A
it

of the

first

vowel, which the affix

was competent

Similarly g?: is the 3rd per. dual

to cause.

present tense of 9*r

'

to clean.

9
.

It

belongs to Ad&di class in which the vikarana 7J% is elided by ' luk ' (II. 4. 72);
and hence there is no vpddhi substitution, which would have taken place by
VII.

2. 1 14,

(the ik of the base

3^ is vpddhied before

verbal affixes).

Similarly *J<r: ' they two sacrifice

here the vikarana jjr -has been
by using the word ' slu (II. 4. 75, let lu be substituted in the room
of Sap after the verbs hu &c). The effect of this elision is y that there is no
guna substitution of the vowel of the base, which jj^ was competent to cause.
;

elided

'

When

an

affix is

way than by the enunciation*

competent to cause its proper effect.

elided in any other

of the three terms containing

*j, it is

Thus ^+fij^+^^+^g^+it^+%=grr^+^5+&-CT^. Here the elision

of the affix nich is by lopa/ (VI. 4. 51) and hence though the affix vanishes,
'

its effect

remains.

Why

do we say

mt

'

in

respect of an

Anga

or inflective

'milk/ qjH 's&ma veda/

Here in the word paiicha, the plural case-affix is elided by VII. I. 22

base?' Observe

q*j

'five/

'seven/

<pr:

Bk. I Ch,

64,

I,

Tl DEFINED.

.66. ]

59

l> U
U
and jj^ are elided by 'luk').
Here the affix is elided by enouncing the word 'luk,' the result is,
that the affix cannot produce any change which it would otherwise, have
caused, in the anga or inflective base; such as lengthening, as in r&jan, 'a
king/ x. p. r&j&najp 'kings.' But though it is inoperative as regards the
anga9 the elided affix is not altogether inactive. It retains the virtue of raising the base to the dignity of a pada. Thus:
fa3 + sn|- ff^2+*, (luk VII.
1. 22).
The word pafichan is now *pada % and as such, it drops its final .
I

(after

the words

called

sha|,

the

'

*r*

3T^w*?nf^fe

11

qi

11

m^iPc

11

sro, sre*nf^, ft

11

The final portion of a word, "beginning with

the last among the vowels in the word, is called ft
64.

This
'between the
portion

defines

sfitra

last letter

f^ is f>;

so also in

word which is included

word Mjfnft^l the
The word f> occurs in

It is that portion of a

fi.

Thus

and the nearest vowel.

writhe

in the

portion 7<r.

sfitra III. 4. 79.

The word

*pj: in the sfitra

force of nirdh&rana or specification

it

represents class name, meaning

'

3TOT

the genitive case, which has the

and though

among

3T%UT C mcMJ ^preT

is in

11

it is

last letter

vi m

^iPi u

The
of a word

letter

ra: #

wm^

immediately preceding the

is called

the penultimate.-

This defines 3TOT or penultimate. Thus

in the

the letters ^r , f, ?, and ^7 are 9T^T.

The word ' upadh&' occurs in sfitra VII. 2.

number,

II

65.

1%:

in the singular

the vowels/

11

trfl*rf%Tfir

*m*4*4Pft%

words

q^j,

p^

j>r,

f^

16.

^few 5*nl H^fir Tituw

11

66. When a term is exhibited in the seventh

case in these s&tras, the operation directed, is to be
understood as affecting the state of what immediately
precedes that which the term denotes*
This
is

is

a declaratory or interpreting

sfitra.

When

used in the locative case, the operation ordained by that

in

a word
to be per-

sfitra,

sfitra is

The force op Ablative

60

formed on. the word preceding

it.

Thus

case.

Bk.

in the sfitra fRfr

I.

Of.

I..

stoPt (VI.

67, 68.

i.

77) the

word *rf% is in the locative case, which sfttra, therefore, means that f; *T, gj tif
followed by a vowel (*r^) are changed into 5 *, }T, 5T, (*TT[). The literal
,

Of ^5^ there is if* in *nr/ The force of

in or the locative case being to induce changes in the letter preceding the

translation of the sfitra being:

9

Thus *fa + 5^7^ - ^5^P9[ ; so Hfcwp% , TF*t&\ U

The word nirdishfa (meaning exhibited ') has been used in the
sfttra to indicate immediateness. Thus in qi fafNd the f of *jfir is not directly followed by the f of fif, there being the letter^ intervening! therefore,
rule VI. 1. 77, does not apply here : and we have no sandhi.
vowel.

'

^rcwr mr% *rrfir t j^w

67. An operation caused by the exhibition of
a term in the ablative or fifth case, is to be understood
to enjoin the substitution of something in the room of
that which immediately follows the. word denoted by
sftfc

11

srerrftflr

m^mtiPi^i

11

the term.
This

explains the force of words in the ablative case

sfitra

when

employed

in these aphorisms.
As the locative case refers to a preceding
word, so the ablative refers to a succeeding word.

Thus

and stambha,
Thus
belonging to the class of the prior.
7f +^IHH*
Here the word ??: is exhibited in the original sfitra in the ablative case, and
by the present sfitra it means that a dental letter 5 must be substituted in
the place of sth&na, and by I. 1. 54 ante, this dental takes the place of 5; we
have ^Tf + WTR^^^OT-trpr^. Similarly in sfitra ft*3 *ft: (VIII.2. 18, ' a word
ending in a conjugational affix, when following after a word ending in a nonconjugational affix, becomes anud&tta.') Here the word 'atifiab' is exhibited in
the ablative case, therefore, the operation directed by this aphorism, namely,
the substitution of anudAtta accent, must take place in the word that follows.
Thus ?5f5r <fafH" but not so in 4^*4)fifVtf) II
stitra

the substitute is

VIII. 4. 61

declares that

after sj, of sthi

1

letter

^ ^T vc^traatfvi
?f%n

(Vn

11

ot# &h* *ft u*&f infr

n \c

xt^fk

siui*mi*4 H^fit

11

^rf%^ * f^tTft^qrot fwrJ^ * 11

it

11

11

^^, *ww

i mfitfa v^^l

Tfr-

\\
/'

J
BK.

CH.

I.

I.

SVAM-RUPA RULE*

68. ]

qrft*n

* f^Mfidsiuji^ qwu<i3i *

ii

61

ii

In this Grammar, when an operation is

directed with regard to a word, the individual form of the
word possessing meaning is to be understood, except
with regard to a word which is a definition*
This is a rule of interpretation. The word * V which means one'^
own' denotes 'the meaning/ and the word CT denotes 'the individual form
68.

'

of

The

a word.'

sense of the

a word denotes both things exits meaning, and its form. Thus a

is that

sfttra

pressed by those two words Mr and ct,

vis.,

be applicable to the word composed of s%, 5,

and not to the words synonymous with agni, such as, TnfftT:, qFr: &c.
rule applicable to

*rfifr

will

In this science, therefore, the very

word-form

understood and operated upon, and not external sense

of

words which are definitions,

is

% f
,

to be taken,

and

with the exception

be

in the latter case the things defined are to

taken;

This

sfitra is

begun

in order

to

remove the

which might

difficulty

otherwise arise from a consideration that a word conn otes a certain meaning,

and as no grammatical operation is possible in a concrete object, we must

take the words having the same meaning. As when a person is called to
bring a 'cow/ he brings the animal cow, and not the letters c, o, w. It may
therefore be said, that as no grammatical operation is possible in a material
thing, we may take all the names synonymous with the word and operate
~
this s&tra removes that doubt.
upon them
;

Thus the
comes

after the

sfttra

*p%?(IV.

word 'agniV

2. 33) declares

Thus

*jfar

**

agni," as in the following sentence H/lH|Hg|<fc4M

%%f*H indicates the individual word-form HJIH
larly sAtra IV. 2.

19 declares
:

'

:" that

the affix

$hak r

W%*Rl "belonging

fwht

and not

its

to

Here the word

synonyms.

Simi-

let there be optionally ss after Affair /

As

3. 50 and 51) or qjfaftrirqt* The rule applies to the word-form

meaning 'curd-milk' and not to tmr, HjR?, qrrvHTT, **ST?*f and
which are synonyms.

*?lrcP*Wl(VII.
'uda^vita*
trftft*

of

There is an important exception to this rule, and that is in favour

terms which are technical terms of Grammar and have been so defined.

^^^

Thus vnfttTO? (! * 2 ) an<*

Hi
words
by
the
connoted
denote
words 5 and *r
their word-form. There are, however, some s&tras
*

'

'

(I.

22).

Here the

those terms and not to

in

P&nini which are

Digitized by

aj>-

VjOOQLC

SVAM-RUPA RULE.

62

BK.

I.

CH.

1.

69.

this rule.
These exceptions have been arranged
under four heads, technically called f%?r, fir^, finr, and Rf7*r. When there is
a rule about a word, it may mean that very word-form, or words representing species falling under that word, or words which are synonymous with it.

parently exceptions to

Thus

rule

II.

4.

12 declares,:

"j^r

giST 'grass/

'tree' 3*r 'deer,'

&c. f

Here the word f^T stands

for
and does not represent
name
the
falling
under
it,
species
generic
as a
the word-form, f^r. Thus we have dvandva-compound of jffqr + "Pltar, as
Such sfttras are called f%R(.
g^T?*pjfrPt or fffTTtpfrrr.

may

compounded as dvandva."

optionally be

Then in s&tra HI. 4. 40, we have an example of fir?. That s&tra means
"the word yq* 'to feed takes the affix mjj<H (*JTO when compounded with
the word **." Here the word w' means both the word-form f^, as well as
and the species of *r. Thus ^? and *FT 'wealth' are
the synonyms of
wealth' and if} f cow* are genus and species. Thus
synonyms; while
+ yj + *uy* - srrfa^. Similarly rffa*, *mta* *ftfm, mre?.
1

'

W
^

'

Such

sfttras are called

f^

Then in sfttra II. 4. 23, we have an example of Rft^. " A Tatpurusha

compound ending with the word ^rr court is neuter, provided that it is
preceded by the word r&jft, or by a word denoting a non-human being."
Here the synonyms only of the word r&jA are taken, and neither the wordform 'r4j4,' nor the special instances falling under it. Thus fr'king' +
'

'

'

^TT-T'WH^

'

king's assembly,'

not rnr^PT^, but rPTWr.

or y?Pnr. In their case

Then

in sfttra

means " the words

meaning

is

qrf^T

f^T+^RT-f^TOH^

Nor can we take

we must have

IV.
'

'

'king's assembly.'

Ht&f

'

fish

particular kings, such as ^Pjnpr

'

s*r

'

of f^j.

deer,' take the affix

Here the words

q% &c. as well as the

But

J^lfinreHT, *4A{IU4I4I

we have an example

4. 35,

bird

the killer thereof."

.word-forms

'

q%

The

sfttra

s^ when the

&c. denote both the

species denoted by those terms, but not

Thus <tffr+saE.=3 <nf^T3T: 'a bird-killer/ mftwfr :, 'a fish.catcher.'

JCT^PT+^-^rr^nw. a vulture-killer.' But we cannot take the
synonyms of '<rfitT,' &c. except in the case of h*rt/ when we may take the
word *fhr.' As *nRW9T: and Sh%^T: 'a fish killer.'
their

synonyms.

'

'

mmfow^fa

Wta, %

3URTO:

^nictra:

^W

The

II

\\ n t^rf*

II

STO

*f^W,

letters of the PratyAhAra *rz i. e. the

vowels and semi-vowels, and a term having * for its indicatory letter, refer to their own form as well as to their
69.

Bk. I.'Ch.

I.

7o.]

homogeneous

Ta-para rule.

except

letters,

68

when they are used

as pra-

tydy&s or affixea
The pratylh&ra *T^in thus

sfttra includes all the vowels and liquid*.

the only instance where BTJ pratyih&ra refers to the
second ^ erf
5TT. The letters included in *r^, and the letters having
an indicatory*,
refer to, and include their homogeneous letters also.
Thus sj refers to all
the five gutturals *r, *r, *T, *, <F, similarly
^, 5, y, and j, as in sfltra 1. 3. 8.
Similarly *r includes short, long and protracted
The words 'its

This

is

own

*f.

form ' are understood

Thus

sfttra

*ji^uj: (VI.

1.

single substitute for both.'

longer

being drawn from the previous

87), ' when a vowel comes after *f, guna
Here though the rule mentions only short

in this

sfttra,

sfitra:
is

the

*r,

we

Thus not only 5TT+fxr:~H*lj:; but **T+fa:rifcrt

So also in sfitra s^T
(VII. 4. 32), ' there is long
f in the room of *r when
c
the affix chvi'(V. 4. 50) follows/ Here long *rr is also included; thus
^nr+^nftRr *uif|*^fir, and ^}r+^rnf^fjr^qrrrfir.
So also in sfitra
take the

**$% ^T (VI.

also.

4. 148).

When

long f follows, there is elision of the f or %f

>
ending in long f and *rr also.

of the base/ the rule applies to the bases

This rule of course does not apply to

affixes.

Thus

sfitra III. 2.

168;

words ending in the affix san, and the words 4ansa and bhiksha,
there is *.' Here * is an affix and therefore does not include long 3?.
Thus 5nj: ' a beggar.' So also in IV. 3. 9, the short if only is to be taken
and not the long one.
says,

'

after

dM<c*l

^1*
>rcrfir

U too

II

Ti?r T fSf

H-TTC5, a^-lJTCRT, (

**

****<* *ro*

11

70.

The

letter

which has 5

after or before it,

form, refers to those homogeneous letters which have the same prosodial length
or time.
By the previous sfitra it was declared that a vowel standing by it-

besides referring to its

self

included

all

the letters of

down

own

its class.

Thus *f includes

*rr;

and

f,

f; &c.

by which the very form of the letter is taken

and not all the letters of its class. This is done by placing a either after
or before.the letter. Thus 3^ means the very letter *j and not all its homogeneous letters. Similarly
means short 7 only and not long or protracted
We had to refer to this sfttra, in our very first sfitra, in explaining the
7.
This

sfitra

lays

the rule

term

*n*

Digitized by

Q 00

^{

Tadanta-rule.

$4

The

sfltra consists of

that which has a

after it or

[Bk.

I.

Ch.

I.

7*> J*.

two words IPTC and fTOiTvTCl. Taparafc means

that which is after g. Tat-k&la means having

the same time.

According to time the vowels are divided into short, long

and protracted.
Short vowels have one measure, long vowels two, and
protracted vowels three. A consonant lasts half the time of a short voweL
Therefore a letter preceded or followed by 5, refers to its own form as
well as to those only of its homogeneous letters which have the same time.

Thus the letter *T*)L W *U include the udatta, anudatta, svarita (both
and non -nasalised) *? and not the long and protracted forms.

nasalised

The anuvptti of W of the previAny other letter than r[ may be

This sutra declares an injunction.

ous sutra does not run into this

followed by

and

the rule of this sutra will apply to that also.

qualifies the previous sutra

which

is

(>

ends

in

in

includes

its

we have

letter

homogeneous letters

also.

'After words ending

1.

long *jt and whose prosodial time

not apply, and

TffTf (

$r

9 *T?nPra 5^.
i^r takes the place of P15/ Thus

the sutra VII.

e * short *r),

This rule

which would therefore mean that an ^rj

not followed or preceded by a

Thus
*t%

sutra.

is

different

f$r:

But

from

in *$r2T

in.

which

this rule will

9T,

OTjft:

^ ^**0 *
*ftr

a final)

11

is

MjiRi^^^<jiH ** jjw*uujw^m jfiitH?

71.

An initial letter, with

the

name

qrufmt

*n?^ >nRr

a final T* letter as
intervening

of itself and of the

letters.
This sutra explains the mode of interpreting praty&h&ras. Thus the
praty&h&ra*ra^ means those letters whose beginning is Hand whose final fir
is |f t

Why

do we say with the final indicatory letter?' Because a pratyahara like *j^ would be otherwise ambiguous. It might be doubted whether it is formed with the final of sft^ and refers to the first five case-affixes,
or whether it is formed with the initial \otzf and therefore refers to the first
seven case-affixes. The present sutra clears up the doubt. A pratyih&ra is
formed with the final T3.and not with the initial f^.

FTC*

^ <kHW

II
,

Digitized by

(^
r\r\ci\(>
VjiJOv
LC

Bk.

Ch.

I.

Tadanta-rule.

7a.]

I.

srft^rrer

^T^faww^uffl

ii

An

72.

ii

69

injunction which is

made with regard

to a particular attribute, applies to words having that

attribute at their end as well as to that attribute itself

'

This sutra consists of three words : sfa 'by what (attribute)/ f%ft:
' having that (attribute) at its end.'

qq*K3

rule/

This

a rule of interpretation.

is

to a particular attribute or
letters at their end.

be the

affix

means and

Thus there

When

means

a rule

is

made with regard

also words having those attributes or

97) declaring " let there

Here the phrase "after the vowels 7'

a rule (HI.

is

after the vowels."

I.

includes " after the roots ending in vowels, as well as roots con-

Thus pj + 7^ = *RT*. Therefore, this sutra

down in this grammar with regard to a partis

a single vowel."

sisting of

means

letter, it

that

when a

rule is laid

cular attribute, that rule, besides being applicable to that particular attribute,

applicable to words ending in that particular attribute.

is also

down

laid

vowels

in .those forms.

Thus
f

the sfttra ^c^C(IH- 3- 56) 'after

Thus f + *nt "

Vart

W$

Pf + *n( -

The present

there

is

^5

'

declares that the

sutra

II.

1.

the words

24, declares that

Srita,

atita

^P

II

must not be applied

and to pratyayas (affixes). Thus

rule, (called tadanta-vidhi)

to rules relating to compounds

The

ach would come not only after X> but after any expression that ends

affix

in

rule

a rule laid down with regard to certain forms, will apply to words

ending

Thus a

generally with regard to vowels, will apply to words ending id

(samisa),

a word

As

&c.

in the accusative case is

+ pnn

*6k

q^ftrcr:

compounded with

involved in pain.9

we cannot say that a word

would be compounded with another that ends in irita ;
tadanta-vidhi does not apply here. Hence we cannot form a compound
present sutra must not be applied here, and

in the accusative case

for

of

3* +

TCTfrtr:

II

Similarly, in rules of affixes.

the words to

&c, take the

affix phak to the word
affix qrgj ."

not apply the

cable here.

The descendant

Thus sutra IV. 1. 99 declares "that

Thus stt + qr^ - HI^HH: I But we canffiRrr, the tadanta-vidhi not

being appli-

of *npr? will be called <?H*nfo

and not as

above.
//

The above v&rtika

Vart

is

however

qualified

by the following :

The above v&rtika does not apply to words formed

by
VjUOvIC

affixes

Digitized by

Vriddham defined.

66

[Bk.

I.

Ch.

L 73.

fa 5f, 5f), short or long, or where a rule is propounded with regard to letters. Thus the affix ktavatu (1. 1. 26) has an indicatory w and we have fTCJTJ. A rule which will apply to kpitavat will
Thus the feminine of
apply also to the word which ends in kptavat
kptavat is fT^Ttft (IV. 1.6), the feminine of sukptavat will be sukptavatL
."
Similarly rule IV. I. 95 *pr 7^ says "after *r there is the affix
This
is a rule relating to pratyayas, but as it is propounded by mere letters, the
rule of tadanta-vidhi will apply here.
Thus J^T + f*J - *if^r ' the son of
Daksha/
that have an indicatory ?3

Vart : When a term, which denotes a letter, is exhibited in a rule in

the form of the locative case and qualifies something else which likewise
stands in the locative case, that which is qualified by it must be regarded
as beginning with the letter which is denoted by the term in question, and
not as ending with it.

Thus sutra VI. 4. 77, achi nu dhitu bhruv&m yvor iyan uvanau,
means " iyan and uvan are the substitutes of what ends with the pratyaya
nu and what ends in a verbal root in \ or 7, whether long or short, and

when an affix beginning with a vowel follows."

Here the word ' achi ' is exhibited in the seventh case, which literally
means 'when a vowel follows;' but by virtue of the present v&rtika it
means, ' when an affix beginning with a vowel follows/ as. Pro, 5^: II

of the inflective base bhrft,

*rf%^
*tf%^
flirty

11

**THi^i4qHw**m4i ^r^ftfir

11

* *r

11

str^tot

F5 ^?rr w*&*r.

* flnpuhmnRfriiim *3r^

11

q^m* n

11

That word, among the vowels of which

a vriddhi, is called v/iddham.

73.

the

first is

This defines the word

fftj:

'

the vpddhi vowel /

first/ wf^
If

first in

1THT,

'

that /

T&L

The

sutra consists of five

IS

words

whose/ 5^^^ 'among the vowels/ *n%

called vriddham/

*TC*r '

'

:
f

is

a word consisting of many vowels, has a vpddhi vowel coming

the order of vowels,

JP^t

TS%

&c->

have the

called vriddham.

'

first

word is called vriddham. Thus the words

vowel *jt a vpddhi vowel, therefore, they are

that

itizedby(

Bk.

Ch.

I.

I.

Vriddham defined.

74, 75. ]

The word vriddham has been

67

defined in order to

make applicable

words certain taddhita affixes. Thus there is a rule (IV.

TTPfl^:!!
by which the affix gf is added to vriddham. Thus Hn*T +
Why do we say " the first?" Because a word like 4mj4M4H% which

to these peculiar
2. 1

is

14)

not a vfiddha word, will not admit of the

vative will be

*HWI*H*W

Vart:
tion,

may

affix fj.

Its

corresponding deri-

II

A proper noun,

though not coming under the above defini-

yet be regarded optionally as a vriddham.

Thus

^rf + 5

or we may have |**W.

Si<*T(Ui,

Vart

compound ending

a Gotra word, is regarded for the

purposes of the addition of this affix, as if it was not compounded. Thus
rrf% is a Gotra word and also vriddham.
Its compound y<t<ifl will be regarded as a vriddham too, for the addition of the affix. As ^*n$lt +.5
y<U*U?<qr:

'

in

the students of Ghritaraudhi.'

Vart:

Exception must be made

They do not take

e#

also

II

38

TJ^lfo

II

vJmMlUu*fUl

in the case of nr$il^M<3

Thus Agil^h d r and g|fid*h|flf :

c^lflfa

74.

So

II

The words tyad

:,

f^rwfllT^T:

and ttR<HMM| l

Wf-W^f^,
&c.,

are

*r

called

also

vriddham.
27.

The **r^ &c. have been given in the list of sarvan&mas. See sutra
These words are also called vriddham. Thus *rj+3C<r$te*r, ^nft*l

*#* reft***

sulfas. ,

W*n%, ITfnrf%:

^xrrei

11

11

&c.

T^rft u

^, mm\, \,

(tot-

word that has the letters s and *fr as

75.
the first among its vowels, gets also the designation
of vriddham, when it is the name of Eastern countries.

As if[*f^ is a country of the east, it is a vriddham word and

*fa! + SC - *flFTffa: ; similarly ggfrreifa% , Hfrrarfta
Digitized by

we have

LiOOQ 1C

68

Vriddham defined.

Bk.

I.

Ch.

I.

75.

The word prik in the sutra has been differently interpreted. The
Grammarian Kunin takes the word pr&k as an epithet qualifying the word
1

be thus transa word that has

the letters e and o as the first among its vowels, and is the name of a country,
is called vfiddham.'
Under this interpretation, this will be an optional
rule only, giving the opinion of eastern or ancient grammarians.
In that case the sutra

frchirya, 'professor understood.

will

lated :-' In the opinion of the Eastern (or ancient) professors,

Others however take the word pr&k as qualifying the word dea
and the meaning then is as given in the text.
Why do we say ' having the letters If and qjt ' ? If a simple vowel
is first among the vowels, of a word, that word will not be called vriddham
and as such will not take the affix @C ; as ^jifij^^ :, 3E i<|<fr4if
:

Why do we say of
apply to a word
is

like

'

Eastern country

l^tf: which

not an eastern country.

is

the

'

name

Because

of a

town

this rule

does not

in the Punjab,

Its secondary derivative will

which

be I^TT-i born in

Devadatta.

Why
Thus from

1
do we say 'country ?

ifPTft'

we have

4t*raT:

fish

The^ rule will not apply to rivers &c

born in the river Gomati/

Digitized by

Google

%m ^^wml^^

it

BOOK
Chapter

filter* ^j^}

ii

I.

II.

^rfa^n * wr^: *g?rf|gwreftf<r qrara^ii

1.
All affixes after the verb g&ft 'to study1 and
the verb kufc to be crooked, 1 and the rest, are as if
they had an indicatory ^ (Ait), except those affixes
which have an indicatory ^ (nit) or w fait).
c

This

an atidea

is

having an indicatory

The

root

is

*TT

and makes certain affixes, though not

same effect as if they wer really ft^f.

sfttra,

to produce the

substituted

for the verb ^5^ in certain

tenses,

in which the verb f^ is defective (II. 4. 49).

The aprft verbs are roots
belonging to the Tudidi class of verbs, and they are forty roots beginning

with

5^

to

'

be crooked

'

After these roots

^ with the exception

Thus from

evolved.

Wt

*rfa
*ft

+ CT

and ending with

all affixes

'

to groan.

are treated as

of those affixes

which are

we have in the aorist

+ f^ + f|r^ + tf -

*ni,

*r*

5^

'

they were marked with

fs^ or ftjw.

the form ^rwpfhf ; which

*W

(VI. 4. 66) -raift?

if

+ If +

he studied,

^t

+ *

(II.

^THrifHrni}

'

is

thus

4- 5)

they two

^wpffara 'they studied/ Here by VI.. 4. 66, the *rr is changed

into f before the affix ftnj, which is regarded as Rfj.
Similarly, after the verbs *J &c., all affixes are treated as fir^ f with
studied

;'

the exceptions already mentioned.

Thus
+ <T3 (III. 1. 133) - ?R + f* + *% (VII. 2. 35) - 518c,
nominative singular $fd | ' who acts crookedly.' Here the affix ^^ being
regarded as f|p? does not cause the guna substitution of the ? of aj
by

I. 1.

15.

Similarly

$f?Hq^

with

So on with

the
all

affixes

yyj and

ffwrj,

we hav ^f^fl

the forty roots of kuf&di class

e. g.

an *

^tjfcrf

[Bk.

Affixes like ft^.

70

fitrjr

But the affixes marked with

by which causatives are formed,

or

is

such an

Ch.

1.

II.

$ 2,3*

Thus

not be so treated.

will

affix

e. g.

^gf

ftJ5

+ fa - Wfr*!%. Here there is guna of

Xr^ + Rrj. - **st^ + f +
the -st 'of frar. So also before the affix up* of the perfect tense, wc have
<d*3<k\z,

and

Wore

Vdrtika:

lhe'affix<*^

The

we have Vesiftes!?:

root

ku{idi verbs, except before the affix 5TH.

for the

purpose

fiP^^H
samprasiraAa before the
'

of
Ait

affix *r^

shall

deceive/

i.

16.

no sampra?

n tr^rf^ u fesr:

^y

(few

) ..

mwitm f^i^:4<^4) feinrfir II

that begins with the augment
after the root vij., c to fear, to move.*

^rf%ft w^<rH*D:,

ii

An

2.

affix

(VII. 2. 35) is ftit

The

he

'

&c.

'

not Ait and consequently there is

is

f^r %\\i r

IP?

fqr^FfTI

like

Thus SF^ren'an imp/

s&rana before it

1%:

As

treated

also

is

Here there is
fipqqwiq
terminations fir, J^and fl**^, and the* of
deceiving

^r^is changed into f by rule VI.

But the

deceive/

'to

root

frogr

does not strengthen

its

vowel

before the

affixes

intermediate f, because those terminations are treated

like flF^ affixes. The root f%iT belongs to the Tud&di class.
Thus ^ftr3|Rir
' he
'
will be agitated/ ^ fi fSiH^
for the purpose of being agitated/

that take

the

t'

gftfSryprerS

ought to be agitated/

But those affixes, which are not preceded by the augment jt, are not
like fi^, and they consequently produce their own proper action, such as

As

gunation &c.
to be agitated.

^ + f^ + *j? - ^$*H*t

f^m^TOT:
*ftr:

ii

sfpFfor?

'

that which ought

imixr^rf^r

ii

fsrwnn

^n:

(fV^t **) n

37^*1 *rr*srr^, *r*m<nr r^rf^^inr^ f^nrr flr^rfir

ii

After the verb tenia l to cover/ the affix

beginning with the augment
is regarded optionally
3.

like Ait.
Thus before the r^rft termination $rir of the future,
either jjr^%*rr or 3m&f?<n " he will cover."

we may have

The equation of the form is

sy + ^J +
f + ITT - tf+ 3T$PJ + *TT
(VI. 4. 77) sJfjJf^lT. When the affix is not regarded as fir?r it produces
guna, and we have the second form sfitdhNI II
Of course there is no option allowed before those affixes which do v
not take the augment fj, and before those terminations, consequently, wc have
only one .form as lfr$+F^~TOiff + srT^ jfafrTf* covering/ flufiq*ftqJl
:

'

which ought to be covered/

^
Digitized by

^ r\r\n\o
VjjOOyiC

Bk.

I.

Ch.

II.

!%:

ii

Affixes like fa%.

4, 5. ]

whrnpfr

71

*refiraf5nrifir m

A Sdrvadhdtuka (III. 4. 113) affix not having

4.

an indicatory

^ is like Ait.

The

terminations which are added to roots are either S&rvadh&tuk*

or drdhadh&tuka. The Sdrvadhdtuka terminations are all those that are

marked with a
following;

^ and

also the tense terminations called fin, the latter are the

3rd Pers.

2nd Pers.

dual.

sing.

ft*
fa*

*T

ft:

1
i

Pr*

*5

*3

3rd Pers.

Wf^tl*

2nd Pers.

*n*r

^i^ii

1st Pers.

T5.

<rft

"**
*rf^

1st

Pers.

Parasmaipada.

i
)
i

Atmanepada.

Except the terminations marked with a

jr

such as Rr Rr and

flfr

S&rvadh&tuka terminations are fS^. The tf$r<T terminations like ^jTi ^FfT^ &c., are also Sirvadhituka terminations.
These affixes
are also flFfT, unless they have a ^ as indicatory, as jp. Thus the affix
&c.

all

*T^j,

being an

the other

gunated:

*rfir^

SArvadhAtuka

e. g. 3j^r:

added by Rule HI.

Similarly *|$f<r

'

affix, is

a fS^, and before

it

the vowel

is

not

The equation is: fr + 7 + 93 (the ?

79)- + ?.+ 1R[ (VI. 4. no)^F+*r$ -

'they two
i.

do.'

^n

is
II

they do.*

Here the %f of
is changed into *r and we have a^r, by virtue of
rule VI. 4. no, which declares that the *[ of the verb *Tis changed into *
before those Sdrvadh&tuka affixes which are feTj or fa%.
Here tpj is a
S&rvadh&tuka fi^ affix by the present rule, and hence the change.
These four sfitras describe the fir^ terminations.
Why do we say ' a SArvadh4tuka affix/ ? Because an &rdhadh&tuka
affix though not being marked with an indicatory ^ will not be a fg^.
As
'doer/
duty/
q*%
*xfa to do qrfts*PT
Why do we say not having an indicatory ^'? If a S&rvadh&tuka
'

'

'

'

affix

has an indicatory

mtifit

fa^,

it

thou doest/ qrrrft

^rftn

'

will not
I

be

Ait.

As

fT

+ T + ffTX-^Ttf^r

he does:'

do/

Digitized by

VjOOQLC

Affixes like

7J

fti^.

Bk.

Ch.

I.

II.

5, 6L

5.
The affixes of Lit (Perfect Tense) not coming after a conjunct consonant, are as if they had an in-

dicatory
as

(kit).

With this
fe^ though not

^ to

of f*T^ (Perfect) not being

tions

that have

with

s&tra begins tbe description of affixes which are regarded

actually having a

<r ).

mark them as

The

such.

termina-

f^T?r, after verbs

terminations, are

ftfjT

no compound consonants.

qualifies this s&tra

The phrase HjfH^ (not being marked

being drawn from the previous s&tra by

also,

the rule of Anuvritti.

Thus from
perfect

is fqrft?<j:

firf

'

to tear

the Reduplicated non-fit second person

thou hast torn/

faftf

'

they have torn/

9

Similarly fqfod^j : 'thou hast divided;' far*3C$:

fc$: and fsj:

This rule

will

not apply

Thus #$ 'to fall down* forms

Here the affix is not
4H?taj
: .

if

its

yu divided;*

the root ends in a conjunct consonant.

second person Perfect:

treated as kit

for

had

it

WT3+SET55

been so treated,

would have caused the elision of the penultimate nasal (anusv&ra) of

*Nr by rule VI. 4. 24. Similarly from vr^ we have ?*3%.
it

terminations of the Perfect are not kit and therefore, we

divided/ where the root is gunated before the 3rd perhe
has
fipiT
son singular termination nr*J which is a ft^ termination, because it being
the substitute of Rr^ is regarded like f?^ by I. 1. 56.

The pit

have

'

The lit or Perfect Tense affixes after the

to kindle,' and bhu to become,' also are kit.

6.

roots indhi
These

two

After

these

roots

have been

roots

Perfect are f%T.

the terminations of the

especially

mentioned, because

the

root

ff^f

and
a compound consonant
the root * is mentioned because all the terminations of the Perfect are
fotr after ^, not excepting the ft% terminations. Thus the verbs ^ffa
and t^ are illustrations of Perfect Tense from the root <^as in the following
examples:*rftt *t****W* f (Rig Veda VI. 16. 15), and yr ft *Plfov
(Rig Veda VI. 16. 14). Here the nasal of the root is dropped by regarding
ending

will

in

the affix as

fa^

Varti
'to fasten,

ll

not be governed by s&tra 5

Similarly from the root

^, we have

^r

*$?TO

This rule should be applied also to the verbs N*

'to injure

and *rg[ 'to embrace/

*to

II

loosen/ h*J

As ^l?f: 'thou
Digitized by

hast

VnOOQ

1 6.

Bk.

Ch.

I.

loosened

mentioned

Affixes like

8. ]

7,

II.

^+^T35- ^+W95-

(The

73

fanfc

elided

is

by the

already

rule

in the last sutra vis., VI. 4. 24).

*T*+M*{+ *T3^$ta3:

(VI. 4. 120). Similarly

^^^^^^^<t5
lf%:

SRT

II

The

M^lPl

u?rf ^^ffe^r^^f^^^^nr:

TO^:;**?:, <rfrre*#f

^*-^-*f

II

tf*pr**p fo**i%

be gracious,' mjid
to squeeze, gudh
to wrap up,' kush l to
tear,' kli to suffer,' vad to speak and to vas c dwell*
7.

affix ktvd is kit after myiij

1

After

ktvd
it

is

clearly

was useless to
later sutra

is

RPT

not

if

tin*

is

'

the

verbs,

call

in
if it

it

a hit

is this.

Though htvd

Sj

verbs,

have

kit.

is

is

all

by

lost its fr/Vness

and

of this

f.

hit.

Thus

*rfo**r.

^r

Or in other words,
%? verbs, viz., that

the verb fft

to sleep

'

is

%^.

f.

The

of sutra 18;

3FT before these verbs would

therefore arose the necessity of

anticipation an exception to that sutra, in favor of

this sutra, to provide in

these verbs, where the

The reason

the seven verbs mentioned in the sutra are

and take an intermediate

virtue

affix

letter 5,

those verbs, which are called

happens that

The

a hit affix generally but there is

preceded by the intermediate

is

might

It

18) which declares that the prefix

take an intermediate f , it is not then

Therefore tft + f + *CT~$ + T +
it

these verbs.

affix after

this chapter (I. 2.

added to

Now

gerundial ktvd

what was the necessity of this sfttra

a kit affix, as it is marked with the diacritical

apparent repitition

seven

these

objected,

to

be

affix

htvd

is

necessarily hit.

Thus we have

^ftt^F

f
having squeezed ' ^jf^rT ' having wrapped <^ftWT
4
having torn/ fefi^^T 'having suffered* ^rf^l 'having spoken' Tftttf
4
having dwelt.' The ^r v of
and ^ are changed into xT by the rule of

being gracious* ^ff^F

'

Sampras&rana (VI.

Moreover

1.

15),

in the case of the verbs *prf

have made ^T optionally hit

^ff-^afir-n^

the present sutra

st fer

^[

and ft^, sutra 26 would

makes it necessarily so.

11

The affixes ktvd and san (lit 1. 7) are *iV,

after rud to weep/ vid
to know,' mush to steal,' graft
8.

to seize,' svap

to sleep,' and prachchh

to ask.'

^
VjOOQiC
T

Digitized by

Affixes like far^

74

Bic

Ch.

I.

II.

gi

After the above mentioned verbs the ktvd though taking an inter-

mediate

and the

f,

^J

affix

The

forming desiderative verbs.

root

reduplicated before

is

are

of ?Erj is

^j, the

jf^r

being

real affix

^M

asked/ P^fod

into *p, JJ^ into

(VI. I.

'having taken,

16).

The

fr.

1.

16)

is changed
The verb
7^5 before ft// affixes by sampras&rana (VI. 1.

into

'

he wishes to ask \

The ktvd and

*T f%J and yrby

Rule 26

by virtue of

the affix SET

is of

'having

75

&%

16).

san would have been optionally kit after the verb

virtue of

of this chapter, but this sutra

because these two verbs are

Jt/V,

if,

In the case of the verbs

this sfitra only.

course

makes them

In the case of the verb

necessarily so, after these three verbs.

3^

in

affix.

15) 'having slept/ ffeai% 'he wishes to sleep,' S|f (VI.

affixes are kit

employed

is

fa^tffa 'he wishes to

'having stolen/ gjPrqr** 'he wishes to steal'; gt^r (VI. I.

know'; iJ^faT

take';

affix

Thus 4ft*lf having cried/

'having known/ fafaft^ * he wishes

this fr-T

V*ftqf?T 'he wishes to cry'; f%r?**T

to

The

far^.

these

and

?E^5T

that

anit,

is,

they do not take the intermediate f; and therefore the *3?T being directly
affixed to them, and rule 18 not applying, the indicatory k would make it
kit.

In reference to these verbs, therefore, the present sutra teaches

thing new, only with regard to the

verb

affix

^, by making that

f when the

intermediate

JT^er takes the

affix

*%T t
ff%:

11

II

rr^rngnfr rn
:

9.

tl^Tfa

II

grenf?:

II

**>:

9KS^(

The

also kit.

by virtue of

follows,

sutra VII. 2. 75.

some-

f%^)

II

fa-iufi n

The affix san beginning with a letter of the

Pratydhdra jhalis like

In this sutra there

tk

vowels.

the anuvritti of B* only and not of

sutra literally translated means:

contains the four letters

ending in

after verbs

&zt 9
is

3*,

stir.

The

"After the jAal" The Praty&h&ra fq

The Praty&h&ra fT5 contains
^
tk

all

5f.

the consonants, except the nasals and the liquids.

After the verbs ending in

f3 the desiderative suffix ^5 is kitt when it is

affix ^r does not take the intermediate f.

affix

begins with

?fj

before

is

no longer a

from

it, it

f*r

^r

'

If

'

is

A$

in that case it is

3*

is

or

an

not

affix

is

f^rt

f^, we have

in

also ff

^ or $r

far 'to smile

when the

to say

9^ is

the intermediate

if

a verb ending

5 'to

however, verbs ending in f or

they likewise take guna.

desiderative firerfiptffr

The

mix *RJTI%; so
to be' fprft

to conquer*

to cross' fctfftnt

and

$T*nf| affix,

'to conquer* which

'he wishes

But

letter of the ;n? class.

that

4J<rilft,

which
added

Thus

fif *1WRt

'to do/ ftHflsRi

take an intermediate f;

takes

guna, and makes

\
Digitized by

its

VjOOQLC

Bk.

I.

Ch.

the f^r.

II.

Affixes like fa\

9, 10. ]

The fTCTftOTis not

As rTTrefif (from

after verbs

kit-

7$

ending

'he wishes to

qr )

in

letter than
So from WT. we

any other

drink.'

have fforafff.

The

making the affix q% kit affix

prevent the gun a of the vowel of the

in ik vowels, is to

ending

after verbs

object of

root,

as in

PrtWSfr

wishes to collect ' cfjsrnr ' wishes to praise.' To this it might be objected
" this cannot be : for rule VI. 4. 16 (when
beginning with a jhal i. e., not
'

preceded by the augment fj follows, a long vowel is the substitute of verbs

ending in a vowel, and of the verbs f*r and *r3. ) w ould prevent gun a by
f

substituting long vowel."

To

this

may be

it

replied "if rule VI. 4. i6f

enjoining long vowel, debars rule VII. 3. 84 requiring gun a, it should a fortiori
debar rule VI. 4.51 which requires the elision of the affix ftx before Ardhadhituka affixes not taking the augment \\. But evidently that is not so;
for the elision of ftr

sutra

is

the affix

not debarred by VI.

is

made, so that even by

*rj be treated as fifTSf/'

Thus

debarred in those cases where rule VI.

in

4. 2 is

I.

Therefore, the present

of lengthening,

in fa^tafcf scope is given to rule

VI. 4. 16, and the vowel is lengthened.

maxim contained

16.

4.

giving scope to the rule

But

this rule in its turn will

will

4. 51

apply:

be

in such cases

our guide, and a subsequent rule will

the
debar

a prior rule of P&nini when both find their scope in a single case. Thus
in forming the desiderative of the verb g^r ' to inform/ both the rules
VI.

4.

16 and VI. 4. 51 present themselves, but the latter prevails.

belongs to the churadi class of verbs, and takes the

fnr

fiiT^r

+ ^[ +

being treated as

f?r^;

fisrr,

The verb
Thus

affix fcJTJ-

here the present sutra comes into force, and

the

guna of the \

of ^rPr

is

Thus
51 comes into

prevented.

guna being set aside, sutra VI. 4.

and causes the elision of ftj^[ and we have ^rj + fT + 1% *rr changed to \) ' he wishes to inform.'
VII. 3. 84 requiring

H^

sfttra

play,

<ffc*U^ (VII. 4.

55

And after

a root ending in a consonant,

and preceded by a vowel of the pratydhara ik, the affix
san beginning with s.j/tal consonant, is like kit.
10.

Thus from Pt|

'to pierce*

we have feH*m3

'he wishes to break/ here

a consonant f the affix 9^

\
is directly added without taking an intermediate f, and therefore it fulfills
all the conditions of the sfttra ; and the vowel is not gunated.
the root Pnf contains the ik vowel

it

ends

in

Digitized by

LiOOQ IC

76
I

Affixes like

the final consonant

If

the it class, the

% - RlUMfr

affix *l

of

the verb

q%,
4

is

!
is

wishes to sacrifice. 1

Had

the

by

[Bk.
||

I.

Ch.

II.

n.
Ill*

not preceded by a vowel of

a verb. As ^jr +
9^ been here a kit

hot kit after such

is

there would have been sampras&rana

there

ftnj.

affix

rule VI.

1.

m+

affix,

16 which declares that

samprasirana of the verbs ??, *TT, and irw, &c, before JkiV affixes.
If the san takes the intermediate f and is then no longer a f!5Trft

it is

not tit

he desires to

Roots

Here there

like $?,

is

# &c,

guna

word f*J

ftiftlH^

of fi.

are governed

in conjunct consonants, for the

+
+ fax - 1% + *rfa (VI.
^asfirj) - tftarftorfacsfa(VII. 4thus *

As f^ + f +

and causes gunation etcetera,

be.'

by

though they end

this rule,

means jdti or class;

being elided by treating

of the sfttra

4. 24 the 1*

5^).

After roots ending in a consonant, that

adjoins a vowel of * praty&h&ra, the substitutes of lift
(III. 3. 161) and sich (III. 1. 44) when they begin with a
consonant of jhal pratyAhAra, are kit when the &tmane11.

pada affixes follow.

The sfttra consists of two words fag-Rl'tft and Hm*HH<*J
meaning " the affixes lin and sich in the Atmahepada." The other

literally

phrases,

given in the above text must be supplied from the previous s&tras, to complete the sense. The anuvrittiol the word *%, that began with sfitra 8.

As

does not extend further.

know/ wPHT
Thus
a

'

he broke

the root

'

^rf^

f*r$

fir^te
'

'

may he break and

ends with a simple consonant,

letter of tt pratyah&ra; after this root the jhaladi

in the

Atmanepada

titution of the

Similarly

in

is

the

root before this

we have *n^T -

Aorist

Aorist being elided by VIII.

'

may he

is

preceded by f

affix tfhr

of Benedictive

treated like fa<:; therefore there

vowel of the

$*tft

'

he knew/

2. 26.

*r

So also f>^ +

is

no guna subs*fir - Pfttffcr.

affix,

fo%

+ fe^ +

fa*

tfhr

JpJ

% the sr

sftr (VIII. 2.

of

37)

is not preceded by an tic vowel, this rule will

Thus Ben. inn + tfhr + ^hr (VIII. 2. 36) - ir^ + *fl* Vv
(VIII. 2. 41) - ^fhr (VIII. 3. 58).
Similarly its Aorist is *TW . Had the
affixes tfte and n been tit they would have caused sampras&rana of * by
If

the final consonant

not apply.

Digitized by

VjVjVjy IC

Bk.

Ch.

I.

II.

This rule

Thus the Aorist

Par&smaipadi.

*T

*T

not apply,

will

77

Affixes like ft^ #

11-13.]

+ iStH (VI -

the Benedictive and Aorist affixes are

if

of irsr 'to let off/

is

*C

" *TOl + *5tVI.

5 8)

*p*

4tiQ

*T

anireftv

77)
Parasmaipadi ^TO^ftj. Had the
the augment of the verbs g^and f^
1.

f^we have Aorist

(VII. 2. 1). Similarly from

1. 58 (sq^ is
beginning with SLjhal and not having an indicatory 3 follows),
would not have applied.

Aorist been ftf, rule VI.

when an

affix

This rule

not apply,

will also

we have Ben.

the verb f^,

if

would have been no guna substitution of

The
augment
been

rule will not apply

Had

i into e.

these affixes are not jhalddi but take the

if

f^r?ti there would have been no

This

fitSt

and the Aorist.

and 2nd Future

rule, of

course, is confined to the Benedictive

will not

be affected by

^q|V
&J 9^ n

this rule.

Thus

the 1st

fST and

q^Tfo

II

II

^:

tutes of liii and the affix

sic/i,

Vb*

'

fr

'

to

do

he did/

Of course
intermediate f ; as

So

also fpfte

is

kit,

or*

the substi-

when they begin

frfte

if

'

may he

So

do.'

also

these terminations take the

f + ftfte -rfHte' 'may he choose/

,

ff-^TTftT or^r^hr 'he chose

^r,

and *mi.

would not apply

this rule

fe#R&T Wh3<4$3

affixes follow.

the benedictive

'

ending in

are

with j/tal, and the Atmanepada

As from

And after verbs

12.

fa*, as

of

the affixes been fa%^ f there

Thus Ben. y^ + ^Jte-^fWte, so also Aorist *r*f*. Had they

guna substitution.

f%.

Other tenses
of

Thus

the verb ends in a vowel.

^nfte, Aor. *q^ g.

(Benedictive)

*T+T +

covered/ the f being lengthened

by

VII. 2. 38.
j

and

sich

Optionally after the verb gam% the liii

13.
beginning with jhal consonants, in the Atmane-

pada, are
The
Rule L

kit.

verb

n 'to

go

is

Atmanepadi after the preposition

WH by

3. 29.

The

result of its

being kit

is

AtmaneThus we have

that the nasal is dropped in the

pada, in forming the Aorist with fcr, and the Benedictive.

Digitized by

G00gle

'

78

Affixes like

fi^

the forms :^pNRH' or *Hi<J)g in the Benedict!?*

Bk.

Ch.

II.

ti<

and OTPHT or CTPTCT

in the

I.

These forms are thus evolved :

sick Aorist.

(VI. 4- 37) - tfrefte 'may he combine/

elided by treating the affix tfhrasftp^by Rule

eX+ir^+3hr-*r J+*r+*fte'
,

Here the nasal \

of

n^

is

we have &HhT.
So in theaorist^+n^+ft^+V-^+^^+^+^(VI.4*37)-^nnr*
The f%^ being elided by VIII. 2. 27 (after a short inflective base, there is
So when q[of *p( is elided by VI. 4. 37,
elision of fin;, if ajA*/ follows).
VI. 4. 37.

In the alternative

*r which is a base ending

But in the alternative we have OTfctr*

there remains only

ftn^.

14.

The

sick

in short %?, hence,

Atmanepada

the elision of

affixes are kit after

the root han to kilL*

l

As ^nfW, ^nyETmp; ^rr^RT are

,

aorist is kit the verb loses its nasal,

f%^

is

the aorist of

by Rule VI.

fsj.

When a fy% or second

After the verb f*j the

only kit and not the Benedictive ftqj terminations, as was the case in the
4. 37.

previous sutra; hence the repetition of the word sick in this

sfitra.

The sfitras

12,

and 13 were governed both by f^r^and ftrjp fromand after this sfitra, the governing power of f*fi ceases. The governing power of the word " Atmanepada"
in sfitra 1 1 does not however cease, and its anuvritti runs through the succeeding
though as regards this sfitra, its anuvritti is redundant, inasmuch
as before the Parasmaipada terminations, the root f< is always replaced by
in the aorist, there is no necessity of making the affix sick a ktt.
For the
sfitras

object served in

making sick,

kit, after

the verb

f* ,

is

to elide the nasal, while

in the case of q>r , no such purpose can be served.

Tfa:

11

*reHpt*i%
15.

The

^hhwc

first

***w. l%^,H^Rr

affix sick before

^l^H^ qtw:

Atmanepada

II

affixes,

after the verhyam, when meaning c to divulge.*

The word gandhana means 'to divulge/ 'to make known that
which had been concealed/ The verb *pj has various meanings.
The result of kit is that the nasal is elided. The verb
becomes
Atmanepada when preceded by the preposition ur^ by rule I. 3. 28. Thus
5J3[+^rr+^+V -^nnf -' he devulged/ <m<qm<iH ?fra*nT, the sick is elided
by VIII. 2. 27 and 5 by VI. 4. 37. When the verb * has any other meaning
than 'to divulge/ then the fa^in the Atmanepada is not ibV; as^p^T qif^
he raised the foot/ So also T^Rrer yny^C 'he raised water from the
is

kit

Digitized by

GoOgle

'

Bk.

Ch.

I.

Affixes like

i6, 18. ]

II.

7f

ftnj.

Though here the vc&yam,

is in the transitive form, and takes aa obAtmanepadi by Rule I. 3. 75 which declares " after the
and *rn when it does not refer to a
verb^aa* to strive, preceded by ^r*,
book, the Atmanepada is employed."

well

ject after

it,

yet

it is

tRt^^trh^^i fk^)
vnrc

11

11

The

before atmanepada affixes is kit

optionally, whenjKtfw means * to espouse. 1
Thus^rnw <h^P^ or OTPT^r ^+n\\ 'he espoused the girl,' 3fPTO
16.

sick

1
or grrra^l HPftn ' he espoused his wife.
f
The word Upayamana' in the

'to espouse.

when

The

means

it

verb

^ by

'to espouse*

*ar^if^

17.

sfitra

means

'

to accept in marriage,*

preceded by the preposition

it

The

Rule

13 n

3. 56.

mrf*

^^t:,

affix sick before

T*

is

Atmanepadi

^ * <f%*RW~

Atmanepada

affixes,

" to stand and ghu (1. 1. 20) verbs, and

these verbs change their *rr into r before these terminations.
is kit after sthd

' to
give/ ^r 'to place* ^ 'to pity' %
change their vowels into f before the terminations
of the Aorist of the Atmanepada ; and those terminations are also kit* As
4<Jlfw, 'he worshipped* gHlfrnMHI^ , OTTf^rre ; rf|* 'he gave* *rf*T*
4
he fed.1
u
1 ejt %^n %t n
en, %^, { fro^)

The

to feed'

roots frir'to stand/ jr

'to cut'

q^r %

18^

affix tvd

when it takes the augment

when it is set)

(. e.

We
The

The

is not kit.
had had occasion to refer to

this

sfitra

in explaining sfitra 7.

actual affix being tvd the k being merely it or indicatory

on the face of it a hit affix. This sfitra however limits its kitness to
cases where it is not sit. If it is sH i.e., has before it the intermediate f it
will not be treated like a kit affix.
Thus in ff^r, %*if, the affix e*r is added
affix lctvd {ihe

letter) is

' to do ' and f ' to sacrifice/ without an intermediate

f
and therefore the root has not been gunated, the affix here being kit. But in

directly to the root ff

Digitized by

VjOOQL'6

Affixes like

80

[Bk.

fen^.

I.

Ch.

II.

19, 2d.

*^ft**T, \ffal, *f%**T,

affix is not

it*?,

' to sweat/ ' to shine/ 'to be/ the

ftj; and
an intermediate f before tCT and the root has

from ft*|,

because there

is

been consequently gunated.

Of course this s&tra relates to ^pr ktvd only. Other affixes though
having an intermediate \ will be treated as hit, if they have an indicatory
. Thus the affix frfT^tHI. 3. 94) by which feminine nouns are formed
from roots is a f%* affix. This affix when %*, will remain RfTjr, asf^+ifs
fif^Pr+TJ+^+fir (VI. 1. 16) -Rpjfiftr: (VII. 2. 37). Here there is sampras&rana by treating ktin as kit. So also in yrf^rfgfir and fH*l>lPf: there is no
guna. After ir^&c, the affix Retakes the augment j\ by a Vartika under
sfitra VII. 2. 9 which see.

+^

(hum sf^fef^rf^flcif^^r:

The

II

M^lfa

%% H

fa*3l,

II

Nishfhft affixes are not kit after

the verbs 61 to lie down/ svid ' to sweat/ mid ' to melt/
kshvid c to be unctuous/ and dhyish to offend.*
The Nishthis are kta and ktavatu (see s&tra 26, Chapter I). They
19.

s<*t

are obviously

not

kit,

and the vowels take guna

sk$R<i:

nwRtwii

tf>R<nm

above roots the Nisktha

The
have

But in the case of the above

kit affixes.

all

five roots

Thus jjffcnr. slept, *lfa<W*, ifttft*:, S^ftff^

n^rfenrr^ snrffo, mrffo*^ &c. In all the
,

affixes are also sit.

roots ferf (ftfarar

),

ftf

ftFur

),

Rr|( fafircr) and

2.

ft^r)

These roots
16 are generally anie, and consequently beyond the
the present sfitra. As ft^r: , ferarer% . But when

long qqr as indicatory, as well as the syllable

therefore by Rule VII.

they are

ftr

scope of the operation of

the Nishthi affixes denote 'a state or condition, bhdva/ or 'beginning of
action/ then the above four roots optionally become set. (VI I. 2. 17) It is in
that case that the present stitra

is

qq fcrtfd*aiqi*M

20.

The

applicable to them.

II

t^lPi

set MshtfiS, is

mpsh when meaning

Thusnf*fcn 'forborne'

^: fdfcmqwj

11

not

after

kit

$VSl

the verb

to forbear/
^rfq^rar^ *

forbore.

Why

do we say 'when meaning to forbear?* When it has not this

sense, the se| nish(h& will be ft^
As srTgft^ ^TTWHH he spoke unintelli.

gible language.'

'

**** GoOgfe

Bk.

I.

Ch.

21, 22.

II.

Affixes like

81

ftnj.

The sit NishtM is optionally not iiV,

21.

after

the verbs with a penultimate * if used impersonally

or denoting the beginning of action.
According to some the
having a penultimate

if

sit

Nishthd

the beginning of action (&di-karman).

'

it

has been lighted/

suffixes are

not kit after the verbs

those verbs are used impersonally (bh&va)or denote

Thus *fgr/to

Similarly IJ4J7M4: or

shine* qyffrOT^ or qftfifrPFN

licjfcta:

*he first illumined.'

'

The

word penultimate or uj>adh& has been defined in sutra 65 ante.

If the verb has any other vowel than ? as penultimate, then the
rule does not apply.
As ftjfotW^*! ' written by him.9 Here f is penultimate ; and therefore no option is allowed.
This rule has no application where the Nish{h& does not express
either

action

HTT
but

'

condition
is

or 'Impersonal

used as a verbal

action

or VJlft4i$ 'beginning of

As ?ft* gfrfard ffrfa'he

Here the word *fr* shining *

adjective.

gives a shining coin (called k&rsh&pana).9

is

used as adjective.

The

which takes the intermediate \ and

9
Here no
not to others as jtj^k *fnp 'the rice that has been eaten.
option

is

rule applies to the Nishfh&

allowed.

This optional form

of past participle is restricted in its scope.

Those

verbs which take the vikarana JJ\ i. e. the verbs of the Bhu class &c, admit of
9
f
this option. Thus *n^ to wrap up belongs to Div&di class, and therefore,
its participle

has one form only as

fT% u

<jjFi

<rft

22.

*jf>rt.

^r n %^r fortf*
EishtM and the st tivd are not hit

f%OT unpr:

The sQ

11

alter the verb puii 'to purify.*

The word
sutra,

9
'optionally of the previous sutra 21 does not govern this

because the word

'

optionally

has been again used in the next sutra

23; of which there would have been no necessity, had the word 'optionally*
governing force in this sfttra, for then this would have also governed the next
sutra.

The anuvfitti of * $? however is

to be read in this sfctnu

Digitized by

UOOv LC

8*

Affixes uke .ftr^ #

By

rule

VIL

2.

51 after the veib

{ Bk.

^ the

I.

affixes

Ch.II. 23,24.

Nishthl and

^r

ktvd take the intermediate \. So that yr ktvd being sit (by virtue of Rule
VII. 2- 51) would have been non-kit by Rule 18; and it might be aske<f what
is the necessity of repeating it in this sfitra: when sfitra 18 comprised the
case.

The

sfttra, it

reason of this repetition

is

that

by mentioning

As

has governing force over the succeeding sfitras.

The

iff ktvd in this

qfiFtt

<ii^*Hil

optionally kit, after

the verbs having a penultimate % and ending in %
23.

ktvd

s%

is

and ^.
The sit
x>r 3:

ktvd

may or may not be kit after

The result of being kit

preceded by a nasal.

the verbs ending in

be that nasal

will

will

be dropped. In other words the dropping of the nasal is optional in such

^rerbs.
Thus from inj we have *rftr**T or irf^rerr ' having twisted/ *jfat*T
or $fars*T 'having tied round *lfteqT or Nfct*4T
The word " NishthA" does not govern this sfttra, and comes to an end
9

with the last

sfttra*

This rule does not apply to verbs that have not a penultimate ^
though they may end in t^ or q^. As^f%*3T 'having reviled ' ifrftt^l 'havtvd being non-kit, the vowels of the root
ing tied/ Here by rule 18, the

fc% and jpg have been gunated.

f

A verb may have a penultimate ^ 9 but if it has not final q* orq?t

the rule does not apply. As tfn + ^TT^f%^T 'having dropped 9 i^toct
*

Had

having killed. 1

it

been

kit,

the nasal would have been dropped.

%^1 f*S\) *
24.

verbs va iich
or abhor.1
be
4

kit.

i
%

The

&6$ ktvd is optionally

to cheat * lunch

to pluck

kit,

after the

and jit to dare

i

After the above three verbs, the ktvd affix being s{t% may or may not
As *f^STT or *T%^r # having cheated/ So also *rft*CT or tjfttfT
9

having plucked ^ffiMC or *rf5*CT 'having dared/

When
this sfttra.

the verb

See

gj^

rfi takes the affix

sfttra III. 1. eg.

fn^

it

is

not governed by

\
Digitized by

LiOOQ 16

Bk.

I.

Ch.

II,

When
As

T^+

the ktvd

83

Affixes like far^.

25, 26]

is

not

sff,

but anif, then there

is

no option allowed.

W*T"-**Rrr

fnr:

11

*fa sFr

^rRr *3np*r. qr:

^ nero ^

snpwCTr*rfoq

rt

*r

25. The s$ /*><* is optionally kit, according to

the opinion of Rishi KfiSyapa, after the verbs tjish c to T>o

thirsty ,' mjish i to sprinkle/ and kyiA c to become lean.*

As ?rfs^r

having thirsted/ sfa**r or *rffar ' having sprinkled/ ^rT^TT or *$fk*U ' having become lean.1 By sfltra 18, the sil ktvd is
never kit. This sfttra adds another exception to that general rule.

The
The

*T

is

or rifq^r

'

Kisyapa is for the sake of showing respect.

this sfltra by Anuvptti from sfttra 23.

special mention of

already understood in

^T^J^T^T^ *g
^-3TT^: #

*^ *
f

^ftrs

w:

11

*T%^f%^)

II

II

^ifir

II

VSl 9 *- *-*TOI^,

||

^rrtW>rifV*iOwwi*i*u*rr

i'i<ii<4tft:

rc

*Sv

^ni

%*lr

it

faw

11

After a verb which begins with a consonant, and ends in a letter of Ral pratydhdra^ and has as its
penultimate \ orf,* or *r, the ktvd and san affixes are
optionally hit.
26.

The wording of

this sfitra requires

litofc

explanation.

It

consists

of the following words:-

1.

?sr:

Prat&yh&ra

ralah, ablative of

rati. e. f

all

r^

(after the

the consonants except

consonants included in the

ny and %v):

Verbs having

any single consonant except ^[ y or ^ v.

It is a compound of
*QHm*l means "after penultimate *ft"
The
itself
a
compound
of
is
+
+
.
w
4t
*TOT
*fr
X - fa, in the dual 4t*
w
Therefore the phrase means after (verbs) having for their penultimate either
their final letter
*

1
f tor * u long or short/
3*
?5tt?: means "beginning with a consonant."
All these three words qualify the word " verb" understood.
4. 3fv means " and san/
9

The

f^in

sfttra

means, those verbs which have a *5 letter in the end, a

the beginning, and an {, f or ?, ?? in their penultimate,

treat the affixes ktvd and san as ft^.

may

Digitized by

optionally

T^
VjOOQLC

Short, long" and prolated vowels*

84

Thus *g^ 'to shine/ makes

to write' makes fofcOTT or $1%?*T.

we have

Similarly in mji affix

write' fo*/fcfS or ffeftffoft

'

he wishes to

here.

I.

Ch.

27,38.

II.

or iftffcCT 'having shone/ ftnj

f*rfrftraf<r

The rule does not apply if the

+ ^p $f%**r; its desiderative

As f$\

or fc*rfcraft

he wishes to

'

shine.'

verb ends in a letter other than rsj.

will

be

fttftift.

No option

is

allowed

Similarly there

**ff?T*TT

Bk.

no option when the penultimate vowel

is

not f or

is

As j^ + ^gpT *ffor. Des. ftifdMtt

The rule also does not apply if the verb does not begin with a consonant As irfas^T and ^pvfiraft. There is no option allowed here.
The rule does not apply if the ^T and *n{ are a ntf. As *^T, J**nt
.

In these 26

the description of affixes which are treated like

sfitras

(%^

and fo^ is comprised.

5f^r:

nyyy^ ftfrf qrrerM^ rare* **i<Rfrg4

27.

long & and the

x*%*

*fcft

>nfa

11

vowel whose time

is that of short u$
prolated w, is called respectively krasva

short, dirgha long, and pluta prolatecL

The x[ u having one m&tri or measure is short, having two measures
is long,

having three measures

vowels according to
the

and

their

The phrase

rule.

is

pluta.

mdtrd.

The

sfltra

defines the three kinds of

has been taken to illustrate

a Dvandva compound,

is

Jgt4<ft3Md:

This

letter 3T il

in the Singular,

exhibited in the masculine gender, contrary to the general rule

is

The word

kdla

means measure

of time

II.

4. 17.

required for pronouncing a

vowel.

As *fa 'curd nq 'honey' here x and *

'

is

long.

ct?xTT^

*P*W

Devadatta

These words are used

VIII.

2.

Here

*jt

are short, gpnfl,

o, is

the following sutras

in

82.

3TOJ
?f^tt

11

II

^6

vw 0 spir:
28. The

mpfa

*ftft,

I.

2. 47,

VII. 4. 25.

*:
3*S
w&^wRhwiuji mj^hhwm Vf*i**jn
||

||

<**',

here

pluta or prolated.

II

11

shorty long, and prolated, when

enunciated as such, by using these terms, are to be
understood to come in the place of vowels only.
This
*

short/

'

is

a paribMshi

long' and

sfltra,

prolated

'

and declares the object to which the terms

be applied. When in this book short 9

are to

Digitized by

LiOOQ 16.

Bk.

'

Ch.

I.

long' or

'

prolated' arc taught

&

Udatta- defined..

29. ]

II.

by using the words hrasva, dirgha pr pluta,

As will be found in the sfltra

they must be understood to apply to vowels.

I.

2. 47. l

"there

the substitution oiharsva or short in the neuter gender

is

The word

of the crude-form."

vowel' must be inserted in this sutra' to com-

'

the hrasva

plete the sense.

That

is

the crude-form..

As

srfeHr, Hi ^TT%5, *ff

The

t"

substitution

substituted for the final vowel of

is

W$

must take the place of vowel and not consonant.

As g*H l$JUJ<JyH*l
Similarly

sCitra

VII. 4. 25

"There

teaches

is

the substitution of

dirgha or ' long vowel ' before all affixes beginning with the letter ^, except krit
and S&rvadh&tuka affixes." Here also the word * vowel ' must be read into the
sutra,' which will. then be ".of an inflective base ending in a vowel, the long

vowel

shall

be the substitute &c." As fH

*H

- ^fN%

it is

collected';

in the place of vowels

+ W - **J?T% it is heard'. Why
The substitution must take place in the room of a vowel and
a consonant. As fa| + ^r + n - f*teT% 'it is divided/ fifrqfl 'it is

do we say "

'

*T

only"?
not of

pierced'.

So

Thus

also in the case of plu fa substitution.

rules VIII. 2. 82

and

84, 'declare that in calling from a distance, pluta is substituted for the ft portion of the word in the vocative. (The word fi is defined in I. 1. 64). Here

also the phrase

The

sense.

vowel of the

'

of the vowel'

f>

&c."

Thus &*^\,

Why do we say
be

must be read into the sutra to complete the

" Pluta is substituted in the place of the

sutra will then read

Devadatta q
!

m ^| O

" in the place of vowels only"?

The

Yajfiadatta
substitution

must

As
and
Here
the
syllables
are
mfnPrVfr *tlH*J V|
f>, and the vowels f
f^
and ? have been prolated and not the consonant t(.
The substitution must be enunciated as such by using the terms,
hrasva, dirgha, and pluta. Therefore it is not so here ft *F*n* m, *pm%
*JI% II See I. 1. 4.
in

the place of the vowel of the fi and not

of the consonant.

^fj^nn
ff^r:

is

ir*Uifiiifi

With
cents.

is

11

tr^rf^r n

4i4i^

*f : g^iw
,

:,

on*

sr 431*4 <j*i) >ref?ri

The vowel that

perceived as having a
called Uddtta or acutely accented.

29.

high tone

11

:,

is

this sutra begins the description of the three sorts of

vowel ac-

The accent placed on a vowel by raising the voice is called uditta or acute
As SjPn: agnfh, here 1 has the acute accent. The uditta is not marked

accent.

(*) *etir 5ry=p inf?r<rf53ve*

$3 3^:11

11

()

nrwr}^f!i^i^nJ:

^TCSttall

11

^^fwi:

--

86

ANUDATTA DEFINED.

The word vowel'

in writing.

'

[ Bl{.

of the previous s&tra

I.

is

O*.

II.

36,3!,

understood in this
t

These accents are the qualities of letters, and are well known in the sacred
and profane literature. The vowel which is perceived as having a high
tone is called ud&tta. This tone depends upon the organ from which the

also.

vowel

In the various organs, such as the throat, palate &c. f

pronounced.

is

pronounced from a higher part of that organ, it is called udatta*

The vowel in the pronouncing of which there is the restraining and checking
of the bodily parts, and in which there is dryness and toughness of tone,
if

a vowel

is

said to have the acute accent.

as well as a contraction of the larynx/

is

The word

"the

used in

is

^qiw

low tone

is

has

a|

anudatta

11

" of

\o

it

s.

28

accent

grave

the

marked by a

argons:,

tr^rf^r u ift^: f

affix

has

s^r

) n

is

As *!&*{ agnflj,
The vowel accent known as grave of

is

understood

pronounced by lowering the voice.

is

vowel of an

first

perceived as having a
called Anuddtta or gravely accented.

The word" vowel

here

The vowel that

30.

1.3.

III.

fr + ?|5^=3rtfs^kartavyarn.

As

the uditta accent/'

ift

sfitra

line

underneath the vowel.

the lower portions of

its

in this stitra.

In writing, the anudatta

The vowel which

special place of pronunciation

is

uttered from

is

gets the grave

accent.

This word
?=pj

is

and those affixes

In

used in

that have

pronouncing an

"The case

terminations called
"
are anudatta &c. As TO:, 3t>?Tft.

sfitra III. 1. 4.

an indicatory J

anudatta vowel, there

slackening

is

organs, and mildness, as well as softness and sweetness of tone

is

expansion and widening of the larynx.

ffift

II

flexly accented.
The word " vowel "
It is

catory

^/

have

t *ll?*HI <ft

H^f

II

of

is said to be. svarita

28

s.

is

or circumThe

understood here also.

svarita

pronounced by the combined raising and falling

marked by a perpendicular line on the top of the letter.

or circumflexed accent

The word

while there

The vowel that has the combination of

and Anuddtta tones

of the voice.

the

^iTilj^M^i^Hl^lO *ftj^
31.

Uddtta

of

is

is

used in

sfitra

svarita accent."

0) *jnpnreii

()

VI.

1.

185. *

"The

affixes

having an indl- v

As m^ir kanyft firr^siky&m

aij^nftgfSmhi
\

(*)

ft?^rftgnu
*

^
~ ~~

Digitized by

kv&.

7""

LiOOQ 16

Bk.

I.

CH.

The Svarita

34, 33.)

II.

li

87

defined.
.

mean

a svarita is the resdiuditta

vowel
with
an anud&tta voweL
an
of
vowels,
combination
two
tant of the
It means the accent midway between the two well-known qualities of letters^
This sutra

known

not to be understood to

is

that

as acute and grave accents.

32. Of it (svarita) the first portion is uddtta^ to

the extent of a half measure, or pi osodial length.
%

It

has been defined that svarita accent

grave.
the

is

a combination of uditta

remained doubtful what portion was accute and what

The present sutra clears up the difficulty, by declaring that in svarita,

and anudatta.

It

half is accute

first

The

and the other grave.

phrase ardhahrasva

is

used to indicate half the measure, of

a short vowel. Thus if a short vowel is svarita, its mitri being one, half
will be uddtta and the other half anudatta.
If a long vowel, whose mitris
are two, be svarita, then J will be uddtta, i\ will be anuddtta. If a plutd
(protracted) vowel be svarita, then first half measure will be uddtta, and the
remaining 2 J measures will be anudatta. In short, the uditta portion of a
svarita must not occupy more time than is taken in pronouncing a half short

Thus

vowel.

fW^l

ikyam the a is svarita, half being acute, the other

half, grave or monotony; in r4l hanyd, the long & is svarita, its first half
measure is acute, the remaining 14 is grave; in mH^I ^ manavak^
in

here a prolated
is

is

svarita,

its

first

\ is

accute, the balance 2\

grave.

measure

tot *nfH ^15^*^^ ^ft h

In
addressing a person from a distance,
33.
the tone is called EkaSruti or monotony.
^nr:

11

%$?*{%

Monotony or Ekagruti
is

addressed

and there

is

in it there is

no

is

that tone which is perceived

an absence of

definite pitch

in

it.

all

when a person

the three tones mentioned above;

It is, therefore,

the ordinary recitative

tone.

The word Sambuddhi 9 means here addressing a person from a

*

tance

and has not

dis-

meaning of the singular number of the vocative case. As ^hi^ *ft

**l*n\ O boy Devadatta ! come/ There
is vanishing of all the accents in the above case ; and the final short vowel of
Devadatta is changed into plu ta by the rule already referred to in s. 28 ante
;

its

technical

mm*

(VIII. 2.

84 ttt^t**)

II

Digitized by

VjOOQ IC

88

Ekasruti defined.

Bk.

Ch.

I.

II.

34, 35;

'.

the person

If

will get

its

not addressed from a distance, then the word

is

proper accent.

As Hjm*^ nt

^PPT 'come,

1UU44i'

boy.

Devadatta.'

^^^^^^^^m g ^
11

m^iPi

11

11

*re-^faf

sn*-

works, there is Monotony,

except vol jap a (silent repetition of a formula), Nyftitkha
vowels (sixteen sorts of om) and the Sdma vedas.
In

34.

sacrificial

In " sacrificial

the

Veda

works" or on occasions of sacrifice, the mantras of

But on occasions of ordinary
in Ekasruti or monotony.

are recited

reading, the mantras are to be recited with their proper three-fold accents.

" Japa"

is

the

repetition of mantras,

and

their recitation in

hymns

a low
and

Nyfinkha is the name

the names of 16 sorts of " Om." Some of these are pronounced with uditta
and others with anudAtta accent SAmas are songs, or the musical cadence
of certain

voice or whisper.

in

which some vedic hymns are to be uttered. As:

^r*

*rrc3.rmra fit^uft \

When
accents

a mantra

As

*j*jp%

When

is

^T

5.11

of the veda,

SfpH^llJl. *$^f?f: afa><lf

(Rig Veda VIII.

recited as a japa, then

14. 16).
it

must be pronounced with

figfoi*j (Rig Veda X. 128.

1).

not employed on occasions of sacrifice, but are ordinarily

read,-

the mantras must have their proper accent, and there will be no Ekasruti.
In the

be no Ekasruti

s&ma chanting, the mantras should have their accent, there can
Here ti^re is no Ekasruti.
there.
As ^\ f^npr *WTTO *?T*

^fhcTtf -m qMd4>l< :

*wzww

*ra Afo i,

^5%:

II

^H

II

V \\\k

^ffcc^T^

II

*t

) n

<m^K: lt*uf qr *r*n* h^nPiIi

35. The pronunciation of the word vashat
may optionally he hy raising the voice (accutely accented), or it may he pronounced with monotony.
jfc

11

v&xnftj

The phrase "yajna-karma" is understood here. Even in yajfia-karmas

*ftaj; may optionally be pronounced in a raised
The word VT^ in the sutra signifies *fta^. But why was not

or sacrifices the word

tone.

the word

4Wl. used

ease as*q*?

To

in the text,,

this

it

could have been used with .as mucji

natural query, the only

.frf^: <nf%J^: strange and wonderful

Thus *fl*WU3 <ft#* *ht HI or

is

answer

the structure of

^r^

*ft*H tft* S%.

: .

is,

ftf^FIT: ft *Jjre*

PaniniV aphorism*.

ed b v

9S -

'

BK.

CH.

I.

EKASRUTI DEFINED.

36, 3/.]

II.

fswnu^fa
^frT:

11

SF^ft*

fir^rar

v^ifaw f^nrar,

n \\\\

fiprrer ^3jfti>fai%

89

*-

^fa, (ij*Sn)

^^f^ *4*i* *nf%ii

The Monotony is optional in the recitation of the Vedas, or they may be recited with accents.
36.

Chhandas or the Vedas there is option either to use the Ekairuti

tone or the three tones. Even on the occasion of ordinary reading, the
Chhandas might be uttered either with the three accents or monotonouslyIn the

Some

say this

The

is

a limited option (vyavasthita-vibhAshA).

option allowed by this

be adjusted in this way. In

reading the Mantra portion of the Veda, every word must be pronounced
with its proper accent : but in the Brahraana portion of the Veda there might
be Ekasruti ; while some say there must be Ekasruti necessarily and not
optionally in the recitation of the Brahmanas.
.

Thus :*rffctfr^

sfitra is to

.3*lT$f or simply srffcp&?C jnffc*.

"

praise

Agni

the purohita."

The word
been read into

*r

u optionally " of the

this sfttra

f%HRr "optional" again?

by the

To

last

rule of anuvritti;

this

we

sfitra

why

could easily have

then use the

reply, this apparently

word

redundant repe-

sake of indicating that the anuvritti of the word jd^flif,

which was understood in the last stitra, does not extend to this. Had we

tition is for the

taken the anuvritti of

qr,

the other word also would have been attracted

hence the separate use of the word PoTTST

There should he no Monotony in the reSubrahmanya hymns and in those hymns,

the vowels, that would otherwise have taken the svarita
37.

citation of the

accent, take the uddtta accent instead.

The subrahmanya hymns are portions of Rig Veda mentioned

'-.,'-

atapatha Br&hmana.

ia

This sutra prohibits Ekarutt in the case of certain prayers called

By rule 34 read with 36 ante, prayers might be optionally
Ek
This ordains an exception to that rule.
as rati accent
uttered with

subrahmanya.

In subrahmanya

vowel

which

prayers there

otherwise

is

by any

no ekagruti
rule

of

and

in

these hymns, a

grammar would have taken a

an udatta accent instead.

Here the word giw* is formed
y ftTgPTCi *ft* ^mr^
by the addition of the affix ^to the.wordtpigr3 , and this * will get svarita

svarita accent, takes

As

^m^t

Digitized by

VjDOQ

{ Bk

SUBRAHMANYA HYMNS.

00
accent by VI.

~
-

I;

CH.il/ $ 3$,3^

it has an indicatory ?; by the present

changed into ud&tta. In the phrase f?3C ^rnr'Sf
the word Indra being in the vocative case, \ is uddtta, the *r of Indra is
anud&tta VI. 1. 198 * The anuddtta preceded by an ud&tta is changed

I.

185,

ftresfttp;) as

sutra, this nascent svarita is

into svarita (VIII. 4.66)

Thus the *f

f** must become svarita, but by the present sutra this

nascent svarita is changed into an ud&tta* Thus in f^r, both vowels become uditta. In the word -iJHl^ the *jt is uddtta the next letter which was
anud&tta becomes svarita, and from svarita it is changed to uddtta by the
of

Thus

present rule.

are

all

in

the sentence x*X IPT^SE the first four

fifth syllable is only anuddtta.

syllables

So

acutely accented, the

in ffcr <*JMI*dU for the reasons

the rest are

all

7 and 3 are

also

anuddtta,.

acutely accented*

^rsrsr^ng^nr:

hymns

given above, the letters

w\i\\

xj^f^r n ^-w^5ii: >

38. The word devd

anud&tta accent,

stitch,

and Brahm&ija in those

have

By

sutra 37,

is

replaced

was declared, that in subrahmanya hymns, svarita

by uddtta accent.
This sutra makes an exception in favor of the words far and srcrrcr occurring in those hymns.
|T539
These words have anud&tta accent. As far TOTO"
come ye Dev&s
and Brahm&nas.' Here .the word far gets ud&tta accent on the first
syllable
by rule VI. 1. 198. l (in the vocative the accent is on the
beginning): q? vd has originally an an uditta accent which by rule
VIII. 4. 66
(an anuddtta following an uddtta is changed into svarita)
would have been changed into svarita. This svarita, by the previous sutra
required to be changed into uddtta ; but by this rule, it is replaced by anud&tta. In other words, the original anuddtta remains unchanged.
accent

it

..

ffir.

ii

#fg*rraT^ffafr

39.

^iT^wCNiq^iMHft^ft jqfll

The Monotony takes the place of the

vowels which follow the

proximity {sanhitd).

anuddtta

SanhitA

is

11

the joining of two or

purposes of reading or reciting.

When

svarita

more words

vowels, in close

a sentence, for the

words are thus glued together, then

e ) VWf***k n H f ) ^TWTg^^W lfff

in

digitized

by

GuO^It:

BK.

I.

CH. H.

become Eka^ruti

th anuddtta accents

9V

SANtfAtAitA DEFINED.*

40, 41. ]

they are preceded by svarita

if

vowels and are pronounced monotonously.

Veda X. 75. 5) O Ganga, Yamuna! Sarasvati

As

f*T

Here the word y4has uddtta on the

originally anuddtta, but by rule VIII. 4. 66

tf.

TF *3^r WCWftr (R'g

mine.

this

last syallable:
*

the

word

% is

following an uddtta% it

is

anuddtta like *i^, &c., arc

changed into svarita
replaced by ekairuti. All the vowels of the words i^$r *rg% &o, had anuddtta
accent by rule VHI.

svarita

after this

19

1.

(all

all

vocatives get anuddtta

if

standing in the

middle of a sentence and not beginning a stanza.)

The word " sanhita" has been used in the sutra to show .that when
there is a hiatus between the words then there is no change of anuddtta into.
ekaruti. The word sanhitd will be defined in sutra I. 4. 109 *

^TO^fePKV!

to*

******

n 80 H

H$

(k H ^TO*S*ft?r-

srg^irem )
jfa:
^mkw ^famro ^uth* qq<umiun *nfir n
40. The accent called Sannatara is substituted
in the room of an anuddtta vowel, which has an uddtta or
svarita vowel following it.
wz*K*.

11

11

an anuddtta preceded by a
If however such an anuddtta is followed by an
svarita becomes EkaSruti.
uddtta or a svarita, it does not become Ekaruti but becomes sannatara i^*
In the previous sutra

it

was

said that

lower than anuddtta.

The sannatara
datta, and which

is

is

therefore that accent which

preceded by a svarita and

is

was

originally

auu-

followed by an uddtta or

svarita.

This is one explanation of the sutra. There is another explanation

which does not take the anuvptti of Ekaruti in this sutra. The anuddtta ie
replaced by sannatara when such anuddtta immediately precedes an ud4tta

The sannatara is also called anuddtta. As^n *fgw. uffiHMifo II

Here the word mice, is anuddtta. The word *JH*: has uddtta on the
4
last syllable by VI. 1. 171.
In the phrase ifam: (*rnTT: + *pr:>The syllable ft
is anuddtta, because anuddtta + anuddtta - anuddtta.
This anuddtta *jf,
preceding the uddtta T- is changed into sannatara.

or a svarita.

STlrR

rare:

^BTSTHcW

II

81 N H^rf*

II

WJ^R:

^-STCT

,11

C) **r*m*rTKmfK*:\i
(*) ^f^HilSJFJ^tJWBT:

C) <OTrfNm**fii

() *c. crfrft&ofttirii

II

Digitized by

VjOOQLC

OS

Karmadharaya defined.

.-

An affix

41.

called

an

"

Bk.

I.

Ch.

4*:

II.

consisting of a single letter is

Aprikta.

They are those affixes which consist

Thus the affix f / in *r4frft<rts a one
lettered suffix and is an Aprikta. Similarly the affix fej kvin is an Aprikta,
because the letters gr, f, and g^are merely indicatory, the real affix is ^r.
This % v being a single letter, and therefore an Aprikta^ when added to a
This defines Aprikta

affixes.

of only one letter of the alphabet.

elided by rule VI.

Aprikta \y

Thustprep +
fa% - \^^i\ + ^ (III. 2. 58) tpRS^ll *faPT?t + fa* stfjpn^ 'co-sharer.'
(III. 2. 62). An affix which consists of more than one letter is not an
Aprikta. As ?tff a ladle formed by the Unidi affix ft* (^f^f ftr^ ).

base,

is

67

I.

(the

is elided).

''

'

%*tmiRw>c&k

**>4^iw

42.

A Tat-purusha compound, the case of each

member of which

the same, is called karmadhdraya ox

Appositional Determinative compQund.
* "

is

Karmadhiraya or Appositional Determinative compounds form a

compounds (Tat-purusha). In them the first

sub-division of the determinative

portion stands as the predicate of the second portion, such as in black-beetle,

Os

sky-blue."

'^^^.tr/'
J

like fl<rU<Ml 'the blue lotus' *rc*n*TT 'the supreme

examples of karmadhiraya compounds. " The component words,
dissolved, would stand in the same case, (saminidhikarana), whereas

spirit ' &c. are

;'

([Max Muller).

J
The compounds

-.

if

in other Tat-purushas, the preceding

word

is

governed by the

last."

As, m>*R|W|*jL, is a karmadhiraya compound meaning " the best

Government." Had it not been a karmadh&raya compound, the uddtta
accent would have fallen on the syllable
by rule VI. 2. 130, 4 (the word
<l*41 has uditta on the first syllable in Tat-purusha compounds, except in
karmadhiraya).

Similarly

nft^+rerit^ Hiq*3^lf<4il

adjective is changed into masculine in

(VI. 3. 42.* the feminine

the karmadhiraya).

Each member of a compound may have the same

not a Tat-purusha compound,

it

case, but

if

it

is

As *ftPCT+HF5r-

won't be karmadhiraya.

9
This is an example of a
1lP<MiHl4: ' He who has a wife for a cook.
Bahuvrihi compound, and therefore the word <j|fcM retains its gender sign.

(')

^ci^kwii

() *Tfffr3**ffc* (*) ?nitf**:ii

( )

*r**m*m*wn

Digitized by

VjO

it
i

Bk.

Ch.

I.

II.

Upasarjana defined.

43, 44.]

93

A compound

may be a *fat-purusha, but if its component parts do not

same thing and are not in the same case, it won't be karmadWU
srregg/isj^ Brihmana r&jyam ' a Brahmana kingdom. Here *T5^gets

refer to the

raya:

uditta on the

first syllable

sre*nfr f^H

ffrT:

11

by the

wt*3*H3*!*w

sn^nTr fire^n*

mentioned

rule already
11

*$

^Rrflf^ *mhhuh!1

11

(VI. 2. 130J.

^tf^r

11

mmr-f^ff^j

sjroibreRi H*fil

11

In (this book, in the sdtras relating to)

compound, the word that is exhibited in the first (Nominative) case, is called upasarjana or the secondary word.
43.

This defines or rather describes the Upasarjana.

In.

the sutras refer-

ring to compounds, the words that have the case termination of the nominative,

are called Upasarjanam.

Thus

sutra

II. 1.

24

(frcffar

fimT^ sffiflJlflKq^M

MH*!

is

a samisa

sutra enjoining composition. In this sutra the word factor is exhibited in

the nominative case, and the remaining words are in the Instrumental case.

The

"

sutra means,

An

accusative

(fSt^tarr) is

compounded with the words

STTOT, TOT, and ?rrnr and forms Tat-purusha." Thereforming accusative compounds, the word having the accusative case

P*tf, 'snfhr, <rf<nr, *nr,

fore, in

will

be

called

Upasarjana.

zr being Upasarjana, stands

STO^rrf^,

(in

Thus ^re + f^f: K*P>W. Here

first in the compound, by Rule

a compound the Upasarjana should be placed

the
II.

first)*

word
2.

30.

Simi-

larly in rules relating to the formation of Instrumental, dative, ablative, geni-

tive

and

words standing in those cases will be

fPJSTTCr*?: ^HFTF ; T^>ra^, rPTJTO, HJ^gUll"*
Upasarjana is, therefore, that word which either by composition or
derivation loses its original independent character, while it also determines
the sense of another word called JTVTPT or principal.
locative Tat-purusha, the

Upasarjana.

Thus

44. A word which has one fixed case, (while

the word compounded with it may vaiy its case) is also
upasarjana^ except for the purposes of the rule which
requires the upasarjana to stand first in a compounds
4

Digitized by

VjOOQIC

/ p5^

'

94

A word

Pratipadika defined.

which

in the Analytical

case

is

i.e.,

^\Jt
i3*n*

I.

Ch.

II.

45;

it is

compounded may vary

fixed case-termination

is

first.

called eka-vibhakti,

a word whose case termination has been determined by a rule of samasa

while the second word in composition with it may take many casetakes only one case affix; apurva-nipite, such a

affixes, it
v

Bk.

also called upasarjana, but does not necessarily stand

That which has one

t\e.,

statement of the sense of a compound

has one fixed case, whilst the word with which

its

upasarjana for

nun-o/i which

purposes,

all

word

will

except for the purpose of the rule

requires an upasarjana to stand

first in

be an

(II. 2.

30)

a compound.

Thus the prepositions fit: &c, when meaning across &c., are compounded with another word in the ablative case. Though the first word may
have any one of the several case terminations, the second member must
always be in the fifth (ablative) case, when analytically stated. Ex fti4*l~4:
fa**rn*r + rfku*if - fWNrrf*^ ftuhi*<N +
+ *hU *m r - fWhcrrffci:
.

word PhNj *UI%

when analytically

Similarly the
If

same

the word,

case,

it

will

II

stated,

does not retain the one and the

compound
n*n +
<l*t$Hlfl

not be called upasarjana, as the word ^H\(\ in the

iM^Hld,
n*n + aprrtf
rnft ~ rmyrnft *r*n + *5*nif - <M<fr*uf .
*5*rpft^ - im^hiO n^: +
Had it been an upasarjana, the long f* of ft would have been shorten'

the king's daughter,'

because

ed into X as *n the previous example.

This upasarjana, however, contrary to the genera! rule (II. 2. 30) l
can not stand first in the compound, because there is no such form as, 3?)!UIH?l3:

A significant

45.

a verbal root

(dhdtu),

form of a word, not being

or an affix (pratyaya) is called a

prdtipadika or crude-form.
This defines the word " praiipadika" or crude-form. The pratipadika
is the intermediate stage in the development of a full word (pada), from the
undifferentiated ore called the dh&tu or root It is that part of a word which is
capable of receiving the case-terminations.

The word
verbal roots and

means having

^rf"

affixes,

With the exception of

a word-form having a significance or meaning is called

signification.

Digitized by

V^OOgle

BK.

a
'

CH.

1.

&&Z: ' a wooden elephant/

pratipadika, as

a bowl/

<ft*

PRATIPAD1KA DEFINEd.

46. ]

II.

qrffcf:

'

95

the wocH-apple tree,' apT*

seat*.

Why

do we say "significant"? Of course it must have some meaning,

thus of the word ^PT, we cannot say that the portion *^ is pr&tipadika ; as it
has no meaning, and had it been a pr&tipadika, the final ^ would have been
dropped by Rule VIII.

2. 7

The word must

(the final

a pratipadika

is

he

killed.

Had

it

been a pr&tipadika,

^ would have been dropped.

The word must

bowl.

not be an affix or ending in an

Here the word ends

quently not a

dropped).

not be a verb, as the word *rf^ (the third person

sing, number, Imperfect tense of f^);

the

^ of

the affix

in

X of the

affix

as 35*%

locative case,

and

pr&tipadika ' or crude form, but a complete word.

pratipadika, the

is

Had

it

in

the

conse-

been a

would have been shortened into f by rule 47 succeeding.

though not a significant form of a word, yet gets

A nip&ta or particle

the opinion of the author of the

Mah&-

The forms ending in Kjit affixes, or

compound are also called Prdtipadika.

Tad-

the designation of pr&tipadika in

bhishya.

As

syuiHl^ l fr, H<d**i<l

46.
dhita affixes,

or

This further explains the use of the word pr&tipadika. " Suffixes for the
formation of nouns are of two kinds. Those by which nouns are derived direct
from roots, primary

nouns

secondary

Taddhita (IV.

1.

suffixes.

suffixes.

76).

Those by which nouns are derived from other

The former

(III. 1. 93) the latter

derived from the root *f^ jam

are called Kfit,

Thus^PT jana, man,

is

by the krit suffix ST; but spffrf janfna, appropriate for man, is derived from
3FT jana by the Taddhita affix fn tna. The name pr&tipadika would apply
both to 9CT jana and spfbr /aia, as nominal bases ready to receive the terminations of declension"

(Max

Of the compounds,

Muller).

of which there are six varieties,

refer to five already viz., Tat-purusha,

we had

occasion to

Karmadh&raya, Dvandva, Bahuvrihi and

They will be fully dealt with in their proper places.

In the last sutra, the words " not ending in an affix " were too exten-

AvyaytbhAva.

makes an important provision in favor of words ending in

Kfit or Taddhita affixes. So also compounds are also called pr&tipadika.
Being restricted to compounds only, it, of course, does not apply to sentences.

sive; this sutra

(*) srefrr: 3 iftMfl<mw

11

V)

f*ftii

() nf^iir.ii
Digitized by

VnOOQ IC

J>'

\ ^*
M

Shortening or the Neuter bases.

96

Bk.

1.

Ch.

II.

47;

The words formed by krit affixes are pr&tipadika a$, f? (to do)-*-*^The affix vjsj is a krit affix, and it is added
fT + J^^KTT+^pK'-^iTT^K'.
Rule III. 1. 133. l The letters^ and * are indiby
agent
form
to
root
the
to
catory, the force of

^ being

to cause the vriddhi of the vowel of the root.

The

changed

into

real affix

is

5H? by

(VII.

1. 1

the affixes

and j are

*H*

is a pr&tipadika,
replaced by *Ff and *[zr respectively}, thus the form
receiving
case
terminations,
declension
by
of
as, *ttK'<t,: ||
and is capable

Similarly fT+gr^(HI.

133)

1.

gf$; nom. case ?fSt.

The word formed by Taddhita affixes are also pr&tipadika 3TJ+

^^=^r Pfr+^r aB ^TPTT 'the son of the Rishi Upagu': nom. case ^ftlJjqr,
;

similarly TKTTZT-

In fact in the chapters treating of these affixes, the derivative subs-

them are always shown by the Indian Grammarians in the

The examples of nouns given in this
book will be always declined nouns and not prAtipadikas, except in peculiar
So also in the chapter of sam&sa or compounds.
cases.
The words ending in compound are pr&tipadika as n^r:+5^r: = CRT-

tantives formed by

nominative case singular number.

$$H, nom. case rPTJ**:

ff%:

11

Tj^*riw^43f gcmfl s fW r*l

?rc*r **f)r >rcf?r

The short vowel

^fcu1triM*iHU

i:

11

substituted in the
neuter, for the final vowel, of a pr&tipadika.
47.

is

In the neuter gender, the pr&tipadika that

vowel, changes

it

Thus

into short.

*$?*$ ' an extravagant family'

*n^

would have ended

a long

in

*fft + ^vrftf)r 'extravagant* as snfaft*-

5ft

*rf%5J

'

very hairy* *rf^<y ^*T

-a

very

hairy family/

There

is

no

substitution of short vowel,

neuter gender, as *rPT

'ft =

TTTOft,

nom. case

word may be

in the

the noun

inntft:

or head-borough/ similarly d^rnfr-'the leader of an

if

neuter gender, but

'

is

not in the

the leader of a village

army/
if it

is

not a pr&tipadika,

not
two cantos remain/ Here the
formed by the coalescence of ST (of the pr&tipadika *6T*sg) and
^ (the dual case termination) ; thus Sfrnrs+f-grr*^. Now it might be urged,
that here one letter ^, replaces two letters *f and f, therefore this substitute
the vowel

is

shortened, as hl u 4 f^S^r:

'

of *l u 5 is

is equivalent to each of those letters separately, and consequently n

vowel of the pratipadika and ought to be shortened.
But this

(*)

^C^hl

( )

jtamftii

Digitized by

is

the

is

not

V^iOOgle

BK.

I.

CH.

II.

$ 48, 49.

RULE OF

97

LUK-ELISIOtf.

mentioned
not treated as the final of the

because the word pr&tipadika has been especially

to

be

in

the text,

so,

and therefore

ekidsa

this

is

form which precedes it

mfef^rf^B^i

48. A short vowel is the substitute ofpr&tiends with the word

which
a cow,' and of that
padika
which ends with what has as its termination a feminine
c

*rlr

affix
the

when regarded as upasarjana.

The word upasarjana has been defined

word

*ft

becomes shortened when

Thus

f^Fr + *Tt~P^np

'

it

9
.

Similarly in those pr&tipadika

suffixes

having a

sf^c^rgrrK?:

final

long vowel, there

Here the

The word

final

is

long f

is

So

compounds

an upasarjana.

possessed of a brindled cow\

ample of a Bahuvrihi or possessive compound.

cow

In

in sutra 43.

stands last and

This

also SU'TrPf

'

is

an ex-

a spotted

upasarjanas which end in feminine

is

Thus {%:+<& 2111*41

a shortening.

shortened.

So

pratipadika of the previous sutra

is

also Pi^KlUjfa:

understood in this.

The word *ff in the sutra means the form *ft and not other words synonym
with it The word ^ft means " a word ending in a feminine affix," because
The word upasarjana qualifies both these words,
it has the svarita accent
t. e. when ifr is an upasarjana and when a word having a feminine termination is

an upasarjana.
Other examples

qjfimw

^rnr + ^rjf-^rRn3j:

are:

without a bed

'

stead

surpassing a necklace in beauty9 .

such a word

no shortening, as,
upasarjana, and not
*M^HlO
the word aprrffr, which latter is therefore not shortened. The word must be
a derivative word formed by the addition of an affix which makes it feminine. Thus the words 5T^fr, ^ft &c. are feminine originally, and are not derived from the masculine nouns, by the addition of any feminine affix. Therefore we have *fft?4^4|: 'surpassing Lakshmi in beauty *rftMfc II
In Bahuvrihi compounds, exception must be made of femiVart
nine nouns ending in the affix t*r^h as sr^M^f, ftfJHH^mJ |
If

'

is

not an

the king's daughter.

upasarjana, there

Here the word TPTJ

is

is

l*

^tra^TOi

?f^r:

11

n
^f^r^f5i *f*r sfbro^OT ssrcnfo^ 5**nfa

||

Digitized by

LiOOQ LC

98

RULE OF LUK-ELISIOX.

BK.

I,

CH.

II.

$ 49.

Taddhita affix is elided by the

word luk there takes place the elision by luk of the
feminine affix of the upasarjana.
49.

When a

The word jg^ defined in

Where a Taddhita affix is

Chapter

sutra 61

I,

twice used in this

is

by the word JJ3 there the feminine

sfttra.
Thus there are
suffix of the pr&tipadika is also dropped, or becomes luk.
certain Taddhita suffixes by which patronymics are formed (one of them
being ^73) from other nouns. Before this sr% the initial vowel of .the word is
vriddhied and the final is gunated. Thus flnjf 'ocean'; forms Rfj + ^T^"
%^r+sr=%^H' born in ocean or oceanic.' But there are certain words e. g.
*
MpTST, y^ mift &c. which are all feminine gender (see sfitra IV. 3. 34)
after which the patronymic suffix is totally elided, without leaving any trace
of its action, by using the word luk. Thus *n%BT + (*T;raps) = WI^S": il Here
then the present sutra finds its scope. The Taddhita suffix being luked; the
original feminine termination *jt also becomes luk. Therefore the patronymic derivative of %rf^T5T (is not a longer word, as might have been expected)
but actually a shorter word, namely ^rf^f: similarly from <ti<^Jjft we have
elided

'

^p*pT: &c.

Thus there is a feminine suffix called sft[ (actually f- ) and certain

words like f*x &c, (IV. 1.49) f take an additional suffix called *JTJ^ (actually
*TPr). Thus the feminine off** will be f?ff + ^TJ^+^hC. " T*X + *n% . +
* f^ftruft.
Now in forming Dvigu compound (Numeral Determinative
t".
compound), the Taddhita suffixes are dropped. Thus Hi^^M: * an offering
(purodash) made in a dish with five compartments/ In this compound. the
Taddhita suffix *r<^ is dropped. Otherwise the form would have been <*Hl<ri: f|
Similarly when the word ysgpgft forms a Dvigu compound, the Taddhita suffixes
are dropped. But not only that, even the original radical affixes are also
dropped by force of the present sutra. Thus <pbn which means the cake
sacred to the five goddesses (HUUft- Here the full form was ^hf + f^TOft +
(The suffix *r^ has the force of " sacred to God." Thus f*X + *TJ
.
np sacred to God Indra).
In the above expression, first the Taddhita-suffix
W? is lukedby rule contained in sutra IV. 1. 88 relating to Dvigu compounds

^r
we

have then remaining sfa

comes
the

into force

final

+ f^c mfl

In this

stage, the

and declares that where a Taddhita

suffix

present sutra

has been luked,

feminine suffixes of the upasarjana pr&tipadika are also luked.

^9

are also dropped, and

Therefore, the feminine suffixes 3n33 and
have vfazf: which means " cake sacred to the five Indr&nis (goddesses)."
(*)

we

^ftHI4i^^H<IMK*(filf?K*! J^gft<lftW*<lgl4f??re5I3ll (') f^^^UJv

Digitized by

VjOOQ 16

BK.

CH.

I.

50,51.]

II.

The words

^ft and upasarjana of the last sfitra are understood in this.

By the last sfitra, a word ending

when it was an upasarjana this
;

an

"99

RULE OF LUK-ELISION.

in

a feminine

was

affix

told to

be shortened

teaches the total suppression of such

sfitra

cases. To take another example: Thus Rule IV. 3. 163

" luk takes the place of an affix signifying modification or

affix in special

declares

q?5Trj3r

when fruit is meant." Thus *njis an affix which means modification.

Thus ift + *n{ = *r*3PT cow's milk or the product of cow/ This affix is suppressed when applied to a tree, in the sense of the fruit of the tree. Thus
product

the fruit of the tree qrragraft will be called %jw*t3i

is

and then the feminine

luked,

Vfft or qr^ft trees, are

affix

i.e., first

also dropped.

is

^t or *TF*t.

This rule only applies when a Taddhita

when any other

Here

of G&rgt/

luked by

affix

in

4 71

II.

1
.

luked.

is

Thus

* \ \*M\

forming the sam&sa,

But

as in *TPffepg

Nor

ffrf:

11

if

affix

elided

there

of the

and not so
'

the family

word g&rgt

is

genitive termination does

of gArgl.

no

is

by luk of a Tad-

elision

apply when the word

will the rule

^f

affix is

+ ^fr nnff*^

this suppression of the

This rule would also not apply

affix,

.the case affix

not necessitate the elision of the feminine

dhita

the Taddhita affix

Similarly fruits of

*frpn:

11

\9

11

v^rtk

11

*n u 4it<i 1^431% ^r% f^nrf^ft

is

^h,

As

not an upasarjana.

Stawr:

qr^dgfo

*nt% II

The short is substituted in the place of

when the Taddhita affix is elided by luk.
50.

goi ii,
#

By

the former sfitra

nine also required elision.

word

when a Taddhita is elided, the long f of the femiBut this rule makes an exception in favor of the

which, under similar circumstances the short f replaces the long

compound
T^PTTftn purchased for five gonis. Here the Taddhita
ff,
suffix which conveys the meaning of " purchased for/' has been rejected
after ifrtft by V. 1.^28, therefore by previous sfitra the feminine suffix f
also required rejection.
But this sfitra intervenes and changes the long ^
iftaft| in

as in the

'

into short f.

This

sfitra is

yoga-vibhiga.

Thus

divided into two separate rules by the process called

*?^is

made one

sfitra

by itself, and then

it

means, when

there is a suppression of Taddhita affix by 5^, then the long | is replaced by

short f Thus purchased with five needles -tprr%: $*ftPr. *ft*n -T^Pr, TO^fa:
.

This

is restricted
l

( )

to such

examples of purchase

^tjrjmf^fi^:!!

(*)

only.-

^*^ftifr^rai^ii
Digitized by

VjOOQLC

IjAjl^L**

a/(fk'

o>^*J ^J^u<~JA

100

>v^(t

urns.

RULE OF LUP-ELISION.

[ BfC.

I.

t^cL

ZxfatJ,-

Ch.

51.

When a Taddhita affix is elided by

51.

II.

using

the word sjst , then the gender and number (of the derivative word) agree with those, of the original word.
This sutra consists of four words

gflr,

where there

a rejection

is

by using g^ 2 3prey?rJappropriate to the same/ 3 wrf^K, gender/ 4 qn^T number/ The form vyakti vachane is dual.
'

'

When a Taddhita affix is luped, then the derivative word retains the
gender and number of the primitive word. Note the difference between the
rejection of a Taddhita by saying let there be a 5J^' and " let there be a SJj" II
*

The

direct action of both

words

is

the rejection of the suffix

but a derivative

formed by luk rejection may not retain the number and gender of the original
word ; while a derivative formed by lup rejection does retain the number and
gender of the original word.
Thus in the secondary derivative word ftrcfar: meaning * a village not
far away from fqrffa trees'; the masculine gender and plural number of the
original word has been retained, though made applicable to a village, which
is in the singular number and neuter gender; similarly the word v^fRTP is

masculine plural

in

This sutra

form though applicable to a single province.

is

not an approved rule

in sutra 53 following

Thus
and

<farrerr:

plural number.

and

is

as will be mentioned

consequently of

little

are a class of Kshatriyas, as such

The

by P&nini

practical importance.
it is

country in which Panch&lis live

masculine gender

is

also called PafL-

chAJAs; similarly 3ft*: , *n*pjr: &c. There is a rule 5pn%5J. (IV. 2. 81, the
lup takes the place of an affix when signifying the proper name of a country

or kingdom).

Thus

*f ^THT:

+ ST* (this is one of the

This rule does not apply when the

.

affix is

affixes

forming country)

suppressed by the word

jyar &c. and not g^.

Thus gPTOT *Jjn salted soap* STTORraT*: 'salted gruel/
has been elided by the word
SMUJSTT* 'salted vegetable.' Here the affix
the affix is luked).
lavana;
/ukf by IV. 4. 24, MIUJI^^ (after the word
These derivatives retain only the gender and number of the original,
but no other quality. Thus as we have already seen that fttfNr. irishAlj f
is the name of a village and is formed by the Ixip of the affix.
Now com*
pounding it with ** we have fin!fmq^ 'the forest of the village SirishA/ Here
:

'

Digitized by

VjOOQLC

BK.

CH.

I.

II.

the word ftiflm :

means

village,

and not

then the

II

when preceded by words

Vart

In

signifying annual herbs

101

it

meant

trees called

optionally by Rule VIII.

optionally

and

changed into n

As

^flraw^ qgllPr

neuter in form, while ^fltuft

is

'

trees).

the case of the words Haritaki &c. the gender only

retained and not the number.

<K*T is

Had

trees.

H of *5f would have become t!j

the H of the word ^r is
ftajmqfa q^Tfiw

girisha,
4- 6. (

RULES OP LUP-ELISION.

52. ]

is

Here

the fruits of Haritaki.'

feminine.

der, as

Here

Vart : The words i^ftcfc &c. retain their number only but not gen<^fcjch%HIH 'mountain forests i. e. forests in the vicinity of mountains.9

*35TnfcT is singular

and <Mlft

plural,

but the gender of both

is

the

same

viz. neuter.

ffrn

11

9<j<U44ift faftmuiRi tfaprf?

mfin^

11

T5^^ Jrt%wT T^wn

rf%^^

*nf% T^firar

11

11

And of adjectives,

52.

>rrefr

(the gender

and num-

ber are the same as of the word formed by lup elision of

the Taddhita and which they qualify) so far as the jdti
(or kind or species) is concerned (or when not expressing
;

jdti).

When a Taddhita is luped, the adjectives which qualify such

secondary

number and gender. This is a rule of syntax. Thus

Hwr: ililitai: *gTO, H^fU qw: ^Sm^^f the pleasant Panc hjtLAs having
plenty of food, plenty of milk and butter.' Here the adjective rroffax* pleasant
&c, agrees in number and gender with the Panch&l&h; being also in masculine
plural.
But when such a derivative is used as a jlti word then the
adjective does not agree in number and gender, as 4^11*41: imTi *it$t Wit.
Here 3PH1 though qualifying Pafichala does not agree with it in number
and gender, as it is a noun of class. All attributes of such words formed
by the lup of Taddhita agree with their substantives in number and gender:
provided that such an attribute is not a common noun used as an adjective. Similarly adjectives which do not directly qualify such Taddhitaformed nouns, but do so through the medium of a noun of class, do not
Thus tfaraT:
agree in gender and number with the Taddhita-word.
*\HHi\ r*nrfHt ^f^ th e country of Pafich&las is pleasant and fertile/ Here tlie
SRqj: and indirectly
words TVifa: and ^JiT: qualify directly the word
not
agree
do
with
the
latter.
the word PanchtU&s, and therefore
derivatives agree with

them

in

'

"

'

'

5
Digitized by

Google

^J
^\

****t

'

Vv*']

LUP-ELISION NOT. APPROVED,.

102 v

[ Bk.;

I.

CH.

The. explanation of this sutra as given by Patanjali.in

bhAshya

somewhat

is

is analysed by. hira as

jati

The word

goes."

and -*JMI^

jAti is

A word expressing

:,

the sense being *!and

thus explained

whatever

is

without any further teaching, (a

MahA*

as. far,

*
:

as the.

:
m

distinguishable by.

or.which being the name of an individual

the.

53v

The phrase m*rnfc

the KAsikA.

different from that of

II; $

is easily

common name)

its

form or figure,

found applicable
provided

it is

to. others,

not.

a word,

(common noun 34*4*{ift genus); and (only, for the

used in all
purpose of grammar as coming under the rules relating to the above mention*
ed words), a word expressing descendants by their parentage as well as a word
genders,

expressing a person by the branch of the Vedas

person belongs

-which the

OliuMlft

competent to

is

sirar )

which the family

read. W<g(iui<g (sAkhAdhyetfi)

'

^ifiHl^*!: (jativAchakAfc) sjTgjft y^nfl'fcifStiiwI

The following examples

finition:(i) HZ

is

by

will illustrate

ajAti word because

it

to,

.^T

whl^l

the meaning of the above de-

denotes what

is

distinguishable

being contiguous to a place covered with water, (2)

because
when given as the name of an individual, is
word,
such
a
is
TOT
applicable to other sudras (common name), (3) ^jtarcr is such a word, and

by

its

form,

i.

e.

its

(4)^7 a person belonging

to the family competent to read the branch of

a word.

But $5 3*3 is not such a word,

because it is a proper name applicable to only one individual and trf? is
word, because it, though a common name, is used in
likewise, not such
the Vedas called katha

all

is

also such

genders.
Varti

Prohibition must be stated

in

the case of nouns formed by.

W{ elision of an affix relating to man. Thus the Taddhita affix 3T3j[ (gff)
employed in denoting representation by imitation. Thus ^J^^r means
a figure like a horse (in wood or clay or paper). But when the imitation is
Thus ^[f means a " doll of straw." But
that of a man, this affix is elided.
when we want to say a doll in the figure of a man, we will have ^fr+^rTOT
(hhtto} V. 3. 98) ^jr. Here this word is formed by the elision of an affix
relating to man. Adjectives qualifying this word will not agree in gender and
number. Thus ^r 3jfW<T: the delightful straw figure of man.' ^fVfarr:
the
is

'

{3Fffc:

a beautiful representation of an eunuch*9

'

M*U*W*THj U

Digitized by

Google

fy

BK.

I.

CH. It

53. 54- ]

10S

"LUP.ELISION NOT APPROVED.

This (concord of gender and number, ot

primitive and derivative nouns, and of attributes and
substantives* need not be taught (or approved), because it
has the authority of sariijM (or conventional term or
53.

idiom).
the number and gender of the nouns and
and secondary words formed by suffix rejection, is
The gender and number of particular derinot an approved syntax.
vatives or adjectives are not blindly to be fixed by the primary words
but it is a matter more or less of usage
or the governed substantives
or idiom: and no hard and fast rule can be laid down for it. Thus the word

The agreement between

attributes

of primary

CTCT: 'wife'

has the form of masculine plural, but

is

always applied to females,

always feminine plural in form, so also *JfT 7^h

This sutra, therefore, modifies the former sutras, and leaves the

similarly ^jr?: 'water' is

faehdr t-

whole question of syntactic agreement to be decided by usage and idiom.

The words

Kurava &c, should not be considered as

words formed by the lup elision of Taddhita ; but they must be taken
as proper nouns and appellatives of certain countries ; consequently the
gender and number of such words are fixed by the nature of such words and
not by any rule of grammar.
like PanchAtes,

derivative

^msrr

?fir

11

The

lnp elision need not

also be taught, because of the non-currency of the etymological meaning of the words supposed to be formed by
lup elision.
54.

s(itras declaring

In explaining certain words,

to say that there

was a suffix

ducing any effect.

It is

it is

after them,

a round-about

way

of going to

work

which has been rejected, without pro-

easier to say that the form is what

we

find

it

to be,

and

meaning depends upon usage. Moreover, in many cases,

the would-be etymological meaning is not in fact the current meaning which
the word has in ordinary language. It is therefore a useless circumlocution td
that

its

peculiar

presuppose the existence of a

to make it vanish.

suffix,

to add

it

to

a word, and, then after

all,

^
VjOOQlC
f'"

Digitized by

~
"

104

PjRADHANA AND PRATYAYA.

Thus *TOT: Varan&b

from

is

name of a city."

the

BK.

To

CH.

1.

say that

II.

it

55,56*

is

derived

near such trees, and

a cumbersome process. Because there

*TOT: a kind of tree, because the city is situated

the trees gave the

name

to the city, is

might be no trees <|<UJI at all near the town Varani. Let us therefore call
words like q rqjf TVRTr, &c, as simply proper nouns. Therefore there is no
occasion for the application of the Taddhita affixes given in IV. 2. 69 and 70
,

(WT

STgrW^), relating to residence and vicinity; much less of rules

Mup' elision contained in IV. 2 81 and 82 ( SFntsyj, ^T^lTf^TW).

f^rrcr:,

relating to

55.

And if the

etymological meaning be held

meaning is absent, the

authoritative, then when such

word also should vanish.

This sfttra strengthens the former sfttra. If it be said that a word

always retains its etymological meaning in current language then when there
;

is

an absence of such etymological meaning, then the word

vanish.

But we know, as a matter of

fact, that,

itself

ought to

there are words which have

altogether lost their etymological sense, and connote a thing different from

words by hip elision of affixes

is improper, because they do not retain the meaning of their primitive words.
It has already been said that words like <raT5RP &c. are not derivative words, &c. but are appellatives.
If these words be taken as proving
their etymological meaning, that is, as expressing or dependent upon, the
sense of the original word, then when there is a loss of the original word

their radical meaning. Therefore to explain such

signification, the

chilis be the
live,

secondary word must also cease to be employed. Thus

name

of the country in

if

Pan-

which the Kshatryas called Pafichilis

it should cease to be called

then when they cease to live in this country,

Panchalis.

But we know, as a matter of

fact,

now used
countries." These

these words are

who once inhabited the

words are consequently not derivative, but their sense is determined by
usage. They are what may be called ^f3r words.

without any reference to the people

Bk.

I.

Ch.

56, 57. ]

II.

Kala and Upasarjana.

105

(SSor need be taught) the rule relating to

56.
dependence
of the meaning of a word on the princithe
pal (pradhana, in a cojnponnd) or on the affix (pratyaya),
because the authority of the meaning (of a word, compound or derivative) consists in something else.
This sutra may be divided into two parts.
proposition and ending with the

The

the reason.
in

a compound.

is

Upasarjana

n g-'

4-

first

As

word vachanam.

part consists of

in the

compound

and <T5TC is pradhAna."

4^*i4 ' word or sentence/
;

stating the

part giving

four words; Pradh&na: 'Principal

ll*iq<*H:
2.

The first part

The second

'

king's

Pratyaya

'

man/

affix.

the

word raja
mean-

3. qpi'

were some grammarians, who held the

meaning of a word is determined, if a compound word, then /'* J
by its principal word and if a derivative word, then by the suffix. PAnini ^
controverts this opinion by declaring that in as much as the meaning ofa^ r
word is fixed by usage and idiom, therefore the proofs for the meaning of a V
word are not to be searched either in the affixes which go to form it ; or by its
Because, says PAnini, the proof of the
principal word, if it is a compound.
meaning of a word is in something else, that is to say in the usage of a people
and not in the suffixes &c. A person who has never heard the name of
grammar, understands full well when told to bring a Raja-purusha. He brings
an official and not a king, nor even any person in general* Similarly when
In the time of PAnini, there

opinion, that the

'

'

an 5rPPH he brings a cowherd's child, not a cowherd, nor a child

general, nor both. When, therefore, the sense of a word is determined by

told to bring
in

usage, there

is

no use to

strive to find out the sense

by grammatical

rules.

And a rule

fixing the meaning of Tense

(kala) and Upasarjana iseqnence) is equally (unnecessary,
57.

and need not be

taught).

Here PAnini controverts the opinion of those grammarians who

would even define time and sequence. Thus there were authors who dea tense relating to time hundred years past, others said
a thousand years past &c.
PAnini declares that these are redundant
definitions and reprehensible, for the same reason as given in the previous.
fined pluperfect as

Digitized by

VjOOQiC

"106

Singular denotes THfi plural.

Bk.

I.

Ch.

II.

58.

To give another example. Thus *nwt. 3RT5T: or the period of

the current day, has been thus defined by some Acharyas*: "The period of

time beginning from the point ^when one

rises (or

ought to

rise)

from his bed,

according to the law, and ending with the point when one goes to bed,
according to
is the
1

rule, is called

adyatana." Others say "from midnight to midnight

Similarly others have explained the

period of the current day."

upasarjana' to

m^an

'"that which

not the principal word in a com-

is

The sage PAnini has not thought it worth

pound is
his while to define such words as upasarjana, in as much as their sense is well
understood by all as a matter of usage. Thus common people, who have
never heard of grammar, also know the correct use of tenses, they say.
called upasarjana."

" This
"this

to be done by me to-day,
done by us yesterday."

is

"was

Similarly

for they say

common

people also

" *m*m tft *tt%

is

know

3T 4<{4i4*11

'

meaning

"persons in this house or village/

persons. Therefore that which

this will

be done by us to-morfbw,

the use of the word upasarjana,

we

are secondary or unimportant

that they

are not the principal

valid according to the usage of the people

is

needless to be taught.

Why

was not

this sutra included in the last ?

The answer

What

is

an

the necessity of

making
and does not exhaust the subject There are other rules made by former
sages which are also not taught by PAnini. Thus the following rules of
a separate rule of this

is

that

it is

illustrative sutra,

old Rishis are not taught herein, they being supposed to be well-known.
"A Bahuvrihi compound connotes ownership." " In Dvanda compounds the
'sense of both the

compounds

members

of

a compound are principal"

the sense of the prior

word

is

" In AvyayibhAva

the principal " &c.

5ngnwmfr^T^gg^ wM^d<^i*iN

ii

H* u

*mfa

In (a common) name (expressive of) class,

in denoting the singular, the plural is optionally em58.

ployed.
The words of this sfltra
name of a j4ti or species, always
and

require

will naturally take the singular

may take the plural number

also.

also the force of the singular.

some detailed explanation.

denotes one, since

In

The

number

it

is

The

collective noun,

by the present sutra such words

such nouns of class, the plural number has
;

anuvfitti of aishyam does not

go

further.

Bk.

I.

Ch.

It

II.

Dual may denote plural.

58-60, ]

107-

follows from this that adjectives which are. not themselves

common

&c. f agree with the noun and will also get the. plural
number. Thus writifV. or wmt *nrn ; " Full grown barley " <cfa*T KTtmn
j^^Jhr: or ^T^Hr m&tur. **?$m: 11

noun, such as

*rqrsr:

W hy have we used

word jati in this sutra? For this aphorism.

does not apply to Proper Nouns. Thus 444-4: Devadatta, 4{J{<h: Yajfiadatta.
Why have we used the word Hjimuwi ? A word may be a class noun or jati,
but it may not be the appellation of a class. Thus the statue of kayapa may.
the

kayapa

also be called
f*j|444f

or

name

this is

a class noun, but as

of a class, such

it is

not the appellation

words cannot take the plural form and

still-

denote a singular sense.

Why

do.

compounded as
Vart

we

say 'ekasmin'?

fffrferil

'

An exception

by a humeral adjective.

Trffo*^

II

When

two or more class names are

the nee an<* barley:' the rule does not apply.

As

must be made when a class noun

5[5RT tffrft:

3**tf! iKM^iMI*JL

*nf:

**Pl^T

is

qualified

^oftf

II

.59.

The plural of the pronoun asmad, If is

used optionally, though the sense requires a singular or
l

dual number.
Thus "I speak "or "we. speak" (*n? frftftor Tqrinr.), may be
spoken by one person, similarly two persons may either use the dual case or
f
the plural case, thus *rnrt
we to speak* or **f ipn
we speak.9
Vart :There is prohibition when the pronoun of the 1st person is-

:as *Tf ^frft IHfH%

I Devadatta am speaking.':
*li TF'ff frtW I GArgya am saying.* Here we cannot use the plural.
Vart: The word g^ master' may have plural form though referring
to one person, when following the word *[If as *t 5f *j^: or ^jf % ipcr^ Thou
art my master', or 'you are my master.
qualified

by an

attribute

'

'

'

60. And the dual of Phalgunt and Proshthapad&, when* signifying asterisms, (also connotes option-,
ally plural).
Digitized by

LiOOQ 16

SOMB RULES OP NUMBER.

108

The word
fpf:

from the

** in

CH.

61-63.

II.

stars phalgunf

As *f$t

either dual or plural

I.

aphorism draws in the anuvptti of the word

and prostyhapadA, the forms may be

this

Of the

last.

[ BK.

<jjf

qpp*r?4lr (dual)

or sRprr: pfc SRMf^: (plural.)

So also

There are two pairs of stars of the name of

^5f ifrOTfc or ^jffr iJTSW: II
phalgunt and prostyhapada, both being of feminine gender, and their logical

number being ' dual. 9 The present sfitra ordains plural optionally. If phalgunt
and proshjhapada are not names of asterisms they must have their proper
number : as <sqpft mufNj II

In the Vedas, the two stars, Punarvasft,

op|)tioiially be singular, (and connote a dual).
61.

may

In the Vedas, the star pxinarvasd which is always

be

the singular form and connote

in

^^UHlftfl^dl

II

The

option

profane literature. In the latter

when

it is

it

is

dual in form, may

a dual meaning.

As 'grfg^RcR or

only allowed in the Vedas and not in

must be

in the dual, that

is,

JT#^

not the appellation of an asterism but of a man, there

is

Similarly

no option.

As tprt^HTOTOCT

sron*

) n

may

In the Vedas, the two stars Vi6akh&

optionally be in the singular number.
62.

The word
it

is

ftftjnsr

is in

the dual

number as a

rule.

In the Vedas,

Thus

found sometime to have the singular form, denoting duality.

f%JF3T

*mn\

or flnjr^ sftMftHM 1 *!) $^nT

II

f^ryr^TR?Rf%^^t <n^iw^ Rr^r ft*^f *renr

63. In the D vandva cc mpounds of the stars Tishya
and PunarvasCl, the dual constantly comes in the place
ofthepluraL
When there is a collective compounding of the words Tishya and
?fH:

11

11

Punarvasu (meaning two groups of

dual.

Thus

sftcft

AM^H^t^^

stars), the final

'the Tishya

compound

is

Seen (dual).

always in the

and Punarvasu having

Digitized by

risen are

C OOgk

Bk.

I.

Ch.

There

one

is

1W

EKA5ESHA.

$ 64. ]

II.

star called

Tishya ; and there are two stars

Dvanda compound

Punarvasu.

As

two

ought to have been in the plural number.

stars, it

the

of these stars refers to

called

more

This rule teaches

number, where otherwise there would have been

do we say 'Tishya* and 'Punarvasu'? Observe

that there should be a dual

a plural number.
f^jTOT3TT>IT:

'

Why

the stars Vis&khd and AnurAdhA/

The compound

is

in plural

number.
This rule would not apply
are used in any other sense.

As

if

these words do not connote stars but

fa*zr3pfrH%! *UUjq4ip

'

Boys called Tishya

and Punarvasus.'

Why

word star 9 repeated in the sutra, when the previous

sutras and the context show that stars were being treated of. The repetition
As
is for the sake of including the synonyms of Tishya and Punarvasu.
is

the

'

h^Sh^t; 3*^5^%^, R^X^U*

The rule only applies when these words form a Dvandva compound,
and not when they are compounded in any other way. Thus ftiq<ji5444: is
an example of Bahuvrihi compound meaning " persons who confound the
Tishya with the Punarvasu."
The rule only applies to the plural Dvandva. If the Dvandva takes
the singular termination, this rule has no application. As Rr^rynf^f *Trfl%.
This sutra indicates by implication (jn&paka) that ''every Dvandva
compound may optionally take the terminations of the singular 19 for otherwise
the employment of the term q$qHHtq in the sutra would be superfluous.
The word always has been used in the text to show that the
governing power of " option " stops here with this sutra and does not extend
'

to

'

or any further.

it

Of the words having the same form, and

in the same one case-teimination, the last one. is only
G4.

all

retained.
This

and deals with what is technically

there are two or more words
of the same form, and the same case termination, standing together, one is
retained and the rest are dropped. Thus f^T: + f^P f^ft (trees, in dual)
is

a very important

sutra,

called Ekaesha (or retention of one).

When

Every individual thing requires an individual word to express

word

therefore could not express

many

it ; one
things; to prevent the repetition of

than
*

110

Ekasesha.'

Bk. L Ch.

at

is

the purpose of this

This applies only to words having the same form and not
different forms

as JRT ?^nfhn: the plaksha

The word " form

have

"

is

+ SRT:

(eye)

The present

and nyagrodha

same form, the

*rer: (axle)

rule

of

=*nTT: Similaiy

rule only applies to the

if

they

trees.
if

two words

Ekaesha

will apply,

used in the text to show that even

different meanings, but the

as *r?tt (die)

65."

the same word to express many objects of similar form,

sutra, by which one word is only retained.

have

II.

*(F[f:

and HfTC

retention of one,

and prevents

the retention of two or more.

The word ^r

(retention)

is

used to

show

that

substitution (Adesa) of one for many, but the retention of

The

rule will not apply

nations, though

sron%

they

if

may have

3^

lj*,

faito

of

is

not a

many.

the two -words are in different case-termithe

As <np(i.

same form.

ftrerop^rf (3. d.) "^frsrsiTCTOP^rf (4-

^c^-^Pl:,

there

one out

<*)

1 ^%

s.)

q% (2.

s.)

II

The vjiddha (or patronymic Gotra word

becomes ekaSesha, and is retained, when conrponnded)
with a patronymic word called yuvan, provided that the
specific difference in form between them be in their
G5.

signs

only.
The word sesha
(affix)

The word
The yuvan word is dropped
when read along with a Vpiddha word. The word Vpddha means gotra: the
old Acharyas (grammarians) used the word Vfiddha for gotra. The vpddha
" yfinA" in the text

is in

of the previous sutra is understood here.

the

instrumental case.

word designates a person between whom and

a word formed by an apatya affix) intervenes. In using together two words, one formed by a gotra affix and the
other by a yuvan affix, the Vpddha is retained, where the difference between
those words is in their affixes only. These two words gotra and yuvan .are
defined in sutras IV. 1. 162 and 163. farof <JhpPjfir *TJr*PjH sftafa 5 **% 3*0 "
Roughly speaking a gotra word is formed from the original noun which is the
name of the head of the family when a son of such person is living; and a
vpddha word represents thus a grandson, or lower than that, but not a son
while a yuvan word is derived from such last mentioned gotra word by
another affix and thus represents persons lower than grandsons,
g[g
(or in other words, the gotra)

original head of the family a son (or

Bk.

I.

Ch.

Ill

Ekasesha.

66. ]

II.

yuvan affixes.
'cause' or
with
synonymous
the
The word lakshana 'sign'
'occasion'; meaning the specific difference is caused or occasioned by the
gotra and yuvan affixes. The word %^ in the sfitra means 'if? The word
S* only* is used to exclude others. The word f%^r. in the sfitra means the

Tbe word

'tad' in the sfitra refers to the gotra and

in

sfitra

is

'

'dissimilarity of form.'

Here the first word denotes a clan

Garga formed by the affix ^T (IV.
called
l
the second word denotes a younger branch of the same, and is formed
I. 105)
In this then, the
by the Taddhita affix qrar denoting a secondary derivative.
"
"
and the form
dropped
is
yuvan
Vriddha remains the second or the
first or

Thus
G&rgya

*i mJ:

irrrqfcffTr :

irrnjf.

(the offspring or grandsons of

" GArgyau "

means both the

This EkaSesha

is

old

to

and the new clan.

be done only

Similary *fTC*n

in those cases,

+ qKWKM?

where the two words

have the same radical form, the only difference between them being

in their

derivative formation.

The words must

must be the same.

differ

The

only by their

does not apply to

rule therefore

word(-MicHUH (a yuvan word)ti4||'2|1l4t4l4H)

;

This rule of ekasesha does not apply

Vriddha word.

Thus

The

element,

II

not yuvan.
word " only " is used in the

irp^: (a Vriddha

one of the words be not a

+ JIH^HUJ: - *T ?HII*JHuft
versa *TT^: + *P h 'Trf 3ppff

Here the one word

is

is

force being, that two words

their radical

if

ll

Tpj-:

Similarly vice

Vriddha, but the other

but their radical element

affixes,

1.

e.

an exclusive sense,* #tbe

sfitra in

may

stand in the relation of Vriddha and yuvan,

form

may be

the

same but
;

if

the secondary

word

has another sense over and above the sense of a yuvan affix, this rule is not
applicable. Thus Rule IV. 1. 148 8 says a " Vriddhi word may optionally take
the affix 33J

to'

form a yuvan word and to indicate contempt and born in the

country of Sauvira." Thus H Wfa fiT: + Wlftft*: - HHTft fiWMlfliq*V

Here the second word, though a yuvan word, connotes the additional sense
of contempt

and degradation.

conveys the other sense

also.

The affix sa is not merely a yuvan affix

The pure yuvan word being HPTftw^PT

but

N. B. The system of domestic economy among the ancient Aryas wns considerably different from the prevalent one. The surnames or the gotras represented the patriarchal system. Three
forms of surnames are constantly met with in ancient literature. The first was most important : It
the patronymic by which the lord of the united family the patriarch was known. For example,
Garga or Gnrgacharya was the recognised head of all the Gargas who may be a hundred. His eldest
son and heir wns called Gargi. This is the first form of the patronymic (apatya). The grandsons or
sons of Girgi were named Gargyas (Vriddham or Gotra). On the decease of the old patriarch,
Gargi began to be called Garga ; and the eldest of the grandsons was called Gftrgi ; and those
great grand-sons who belonged to the family, and were designated Gargiyanas (yuvan) were now
ci lied Gargyas."

ws

(') *Pirf|*?t

*pj

11

() *rf?T5?rv n (')

^*Tj*^hWf wjwj n
Digitized by

VjOOQLC

112

Ekasesha.

And

[Bk.

I.

Ch.IL .67.

word, ending
with a vjiddha affix, when similarly spoken along with
the same word but which ends with a yuvan affix, is
only retained and it is treated like a masculine.
When a word denoting gotra and in the feminine gender is com66.

so also a feminine

pounded with another word denoting a yuvan,

the

retained and the last

first is

dropped; and the feminine noun so remaining is then treated like the
masculine. This aphorism makes an addition to the previous sutra and is
governed by all the conditions mentioned in that sutra. Thus *Tntf + 4||$l4Uj:
Here note that the resultant form is the same as in the former
=*TF4fr.

is

sfitra

namely the masculine.

Similarly

Vart

^ft+^WHniTI^SRTT (masculine

dual of

The word strixn the sutra means VfiddhA

?rftr).

stri,

that is the eldest

daughter of a grandson, or a further descendant considered as the female

head of the family. The words tal lakshanas chedeva viSeshafo ' of the
'

previous sutra govern

words must be

this

sutra also

in their formative

g^T^f^nn

t.

the distinction between the

e.

element and not in any thing

n 39

ti^TPi

11

^x%

fercr

two

else.

( 5fa: , <rer-

A word in the masculine gender, similarly

the same word, but ending with the
with
spoken along
feminine affix, becomes ekasesha, and the latter is
G7.

dropped.
When two words

of different

genders

differ

elements but not in their radical elements, that

and the other feminine because of certain

retained and the feminine is dropped.

The governing

force of the

words

'

is

only in their derivative

to say, one

masculine

the masculine' only

affixes,

vpddha

is

'

and 'yuvan,' of

is

sfitra

65, does not extend to this sutra, but the remaining portion of sutra 65 is to
be read into this sutra. When a masculine word is read along with a femi-

nine word, the feminine word is dropped and the masculine is retained,
when the difference between the two words is caused only by the feminine

and masculine
BrAhmani';

JTTSTO: + W^ft = OT^nift 'tlie Brihmana and the^

+ aj**| - $ gyfr the cock and hciBOgitized by G(

affixes: as

'

cfr$jd

Bk.

Ch.

I.

II.

Ekasesha.

68, 69. ]

But not so in the following

the
affix

113

^^. +

peahen/
5^ by which the word ganaki

is

cock and
Here the feminine

'T^3'=a ^fra^nj4f 'the

+ ***&& " *IUWHU4l

Similarly 4|iy*:

formed from ganaka;

in addition to

its

feminine signification, has the further signification given to it by Rule IV, 1. 48,
"
"
j qmisHs^mi-M meaning the wife of a ganaka and not a feminine ganaka

so also ^srv T^CTUft ^-Vftl u *li

-*il4iuft

than

^rnfr^P7 ^.

feminine signification.

its

This rule does

which

is

Similarly ^n^: + ^rnJr-^rr4J but SErr*: +

II

Because the feminine

when

it is

49.

not a masculine noun

a noun without any gender or neuter noun

not, of course, apply

compounded, but

1.

aryani conveys more

in

affix

See Rule IV.

it is

compounded with a feminine noun. Therefore JTP+'Jr'fl "*n^55T*4t

The word irr*? is an indeclinable and is without any gender*
which

is

fpcf :

II

WTO" tiKM-HWill^jIt^*) ^Tf^^T STOjf? P*R% W

JS

G3.

The words

bliratvi,

brother,'

and

putra,'

c
son,' when spoken of along with svaspi, sister ' and
dnhitri daughter' respectively are only retained, and
c

'

the latter are dropped.

With

governing force of the remaining condiEven where the radical elements of two words

this sutra ceases the

tions contained in sutra 65.

are different, there

may be an ekasesha under

OTT + STO^nRT
(son and daughter or

(brother

N. B.

and

sister

Thus
JT+jf^r-yfc,

special circumstances.

or brothers), similarly

sons).

The practical application of

this sutra is

very neatly illustrated

by the following example. There is a verse in YAjfiyavalkya smriri

<^fi%<H^TflmirMM<W*4r which declares that on the death of a sonless person his property passes to his wife, daughters, parents and bhratara^.
Here the word bhratarah, if it be taken as simply the plural of bhratri,
it means " brothers " and excludes sisters.
But if it be interpreted according
"
and
brothers
sisters" ; and thus gives sisters a right
to this sutra, it means
to inherit property of their brothers.

^^* M HMq$3*qqKq
*i^raw

raqQui

^^

Md<^ m

are?

II

II

4t*Md*jm

Digitized by

Tf^rik N
,

( Sfar

VjOOQLC

114

Ekasesha.

_.

Bk.

,,

Ch.

I.

"

70, 71.

11

A neuter noun, which has the same form,

69.

optionally retained, and the

other is dropped, and it is like a singular number.

only

differing in affix

is

'

A neuter prevails over a masculine or feminine noun when spoken of

along with them ; provided that the words differ in gender signs only ; but
radically they be the same. Thus ^rrereft %*&, fa*T <MlM Pujfl f Idleness,
lust, and sleep, indulged in, increase.'
Here the adjective ' sevyamAnam ' is
in the neuter gender, though it qualifies the words * Alasya ' which is in the
masculine ; ' maithunam ' which is in the neuter, and f nidrA ' which is in
the feminine gender. The rule, therefore, may be stated in these words, that
where one adjective qualifies several nouns, in different genders, but one
,

of which must be neuter, the adjective agrees with the neuter.

The above

illustration also

shows that the neuter ekaSesha may be in

the singular number.

apply.

compounded with another

the neuter is

If

Thus HW+g#+5lsr=5WrPf the word

is

neuter, this rule does not

in the

plural; there is

no

ekavadbh&va.

The words dM%lUj3ft4 f%$TO

thus fjs^i **<H:,
the white

(fern.)

sutra 65 governs

"of

"The

^T^^R^ir.^lf ^qret

wrapper, and the white

garment,"

(jteut.)

this sutra

white (masc.)

may

all

also:

blanket,

be spoken

of collectively as *pjj (neut.).

ftCTTOIT

70.

II

30

firarr

II

The word pitji,

retained when spoken

Thus

T^TfH

II

nnrr

fqcTT,

m^l (^3TOcTTOP*)ll

father' is optionally only

of along with m&tri, c mother.*

f

fadifr

father

and mother, or parent ' or nnuffiqft.

The
*

verse quoted under sutra 68 illustrates this sutra also. There the word
pitarau ' has been explained by all commentators as " father and Jmother."

The word

" ekavad " of the last sutra does not govern this sutra ; though the

anuvptti of ' optionally

WW^)

is

to

be read into

this.

II

71.

The word

tionally only retained,

mother-in-la w.>

fiva&ura

father-in-law, 1 is op-

when spoken of along with &va&rft

Bit

Ch.

I.

Ekasesha.

71.73. ]

II.

Thus **gt:+S^jmay be
in-law,* or

fw*

either **qjTT

115
'

and mother-

father-in-law

x^M^npcrl

(5fa:

The pronouns tjT ad &c.' when spoken of

along with any other noun, (pronoun other than tyad
c

72.

&cJ) are always retained as ekaSesha, (to the exclusion,

of others).
The

pronouns has been given under sfitra L I. 27.

' tyad' and
ending with ' kim/ when these
tyad&di pronouns are compounded with any other noun, (or a pronoun, which

They

of

list

tyadAdi

'

does not belong to their

word
ever

'

are 12 words beginning with

'

sarva '

may

is

class),

be^the

word

in

'

universality

composition with them, the 'tyad

&c

' ;

r.

an obligatory

rule,

Thus ^:

(he)

e.

what-

are' retained

The word 'nitya' is used to indicate that

and not optional, as were the last rules.

to the exclusion of others.

is

The

they prevail, the rest are dropped.

used in the aphorism to indicate

this

\\\^x (Devadatta) - fft (they two).

Vart : When nrcrft words are compounded among themselves, the

word which is read last in the order given in the Ganap{ha remains, the
rest are dropped.
*T (see

1.

I.

after ^f,

^1^3

Thus *n+^:*rr; ^: +^1*^11

27), so*r$ will be retained and not

fif

Thus ^|
;

and therefore fc\ is retained to the exclusion of

( fr?: )

is

read after

similarly f%*^ is read

irj[.

73. The feminine noun is only retained, when

denoting a collection of domestic animals, not being
young.

As a general rule, when there is a compounding of masculine and

feminine nouns, the masculine noun is retained (see 67). The present
sfitra is an exception to that rule.
It ordains that when there is a com.
pounding

of

words denoting group of domestic animals, of

different

genders

116

Ekasesha.

"

[Bk.

I.

Ch.

the feminine noun is preferred provided that the words should not
the young of such animals. The word 'ataruna' in the aphorism
the word pasu with which it is in construction, and not the word
;

'

As nr* r*T:

'

these cows (and bulls).' *pir $Hn

'

II.

73:

to

relate

qualifies
'

sangha.'

these goats' (both males and

females).

The

(gr&mya) animals and not to

and only to beasts (pasu) and not men. As ct? f%, these
wild deers' (male and female), $^rr f^r, these antelopes (male and female),
the Kshatriyas.' In all
ICTSmrr:, the Br&hmanas ' (male and female) Vlfaqf
these, the masculine noun is retained by Rule 67.
toild animals

rule only applies to domestic

'

'

'

'

:,

This

'

must

be confined to domestic animals having

divided hoof. Therefore vj^il f%,
(male and female).
these horses
Here the masculine noun is retained, because horse has no divided hoof.
Vart*

rule

'

'

Why

have we used the word (sangha) " collection " ? Observe ^^

these two cows are grazing.' Here the word ' g&vau does not

*n4V ^C<n,
connote bull
'

'

Why
^*tr f%

'

'

'

also.

do we say " not being young."

Here the masculine noun

these kids.

?
is

*c*?r

&

retained,

'

these, calves

by the

'

applica-

tion of Rule 67.

c$'^

*H1
BOOK
Chapter

^T^^t tow:
1.

it

II

I.

III.

tj^ifSr

^l-an^H:

ll

TOW:

The words beginning with bh& to become/

c

and denoting action, are called dhatu or verbal

The

This defines the word dhAtu or root

begins with the root bhfl

'

to be.

The

before certain terminations.

8. Tati.

Bhft class.
9.

Krt.

10.

2.

Ad.

3.

list

roots.

of Sanskrit

Sanskrit grammarians have divided

into ten classes, according to certain modifications

i.

4. Div.

verbs

which their roots undergo

ten classes are as follows

Hu.

verbs

all

Su.

5.

6.

:
Tud.

7.

Rudh.

Chur.

There are nearly two thousand verbs, and they are conjugated in two
forms, some taking the Parasmaipada terminations only, the others the

Atmantpada terminations and some

both.

The present chapter

with rules determining the nature of the verbal root, whether

or Atmanepadi or both.

verb expresses action.

it is

deals

mostly

Parasmaipadi

The word dhAtu

is

a word

coined by older grammarians than PApini and they employed the term in

denoting a word expressing action.

Here also therefore, the word dhAtu

means a word which expresses action.
The qt in the sfitra is for the sake of auspiciousness ; for the regular
sandhi of l+*nft is *TTft and not *prf|; while Dr. Ballantyne considers that
*T is a separate root: he translates the sfitra thus
" Let the verbal roots bhA
be,' vA blow and the like be called dhAtu."
:

'

'

^gffii3T 3 ?Hfa *E

^W

II

OTfaf^TJ^fifr

II

II

TT^lft

3*rt*T:, 5llfel4l<f3lfif

||

*T^$t

H^TOT: R&M4IAV

3I^ f

Snj-

*m ^fW^j-iifii-

2.
The nasalized vowels are * n in Upade&a, or
original enunciation.

118

Indicatory letters.

Anunasika or nasalized vowels are

ring

The

in

Bk.

Ch.

I.

f? that is indicatory,

III.

3, 4.

when occur-

Thus in fa*, f%^, f%^ the anunasika f is fsfc

word upadesa which we have translated as
'Upadesa' literally means 'instruction' or the first mentioning

technical words.

original sfitra contains the

technical term.

of a thing either

From

in

'

'

&c

a s&trap&tha, or ganapAfha or dhatupi^ha

this sfitra

up to

sfitra 9,

there

a description of servile or indi-

is

" In PAnini's Grammar there is no visible sign of the

catory letters called f*
nasality of a vowel hence we can know a vowel to be nasalized only from

Panini's explicitly asserting that

in such a
is

way

that

it is

so, or

we must conclude he

from our finding that he treats

regarded

it

An upadeSa

as nasal."

defined as signifying an original enunciation, that

is

to say,

an

affix

any
grammar, and

augment (agama), or a

(pratyaya), or an

it

verbal root (dhatu), or in

short,

form of expression which occurs only in technical treatises of

which is not a word ready for use, but one of the supposed original elements
of a word. Thu$ in the root sttj- to increase,' the final qf is indicatory, the
'

real root

is

So

3^.

also the final sjof *?s$

is

^r II

word is not an upadesa, then the nasal vowel Is not fir II As

A word may be an upadega and nasal, but if it is not a vowel,
it need not be jw as the affix *rf%* in sfitra III. 2. 74. ( srrtft yft%gft*r qft<*V )
It is only the nasal vowel of an upadeSa that becomes
and not all the
vowels. The word f?r occurs is sfitras y. 2. 16. ( mfotV &c).
If

the

?ra *ft W:

II

f*w*
\P*z

11

n ^

11

\n*ri$: *T5*nre*r

^ti

11

^w^

^w* *% irfcatf *rcfa

g^ifr

%qj

it

11

In upaclega, the final consonant of roots &c.

3.

is *w.
All the final consonants of roots, affixes &c. are indicatory.

pratyahara

herey

sfitras

T ^ ^;

lierec^

is

*wil

5* sr;

here

a*

is

As

in

*w Hit

the

a|fcr;

^5 11 $ VfVS; her? ^ is 5^11 It is only in upadesa, that a final

consonant is X*
Not therefore, in <*rftft^ or *ta^, which are complete
is

words.

* fvmst H^n:
%f*:

<nfa smmiTft^>rRrf

II

II

^tOi

II

f%H^ v^sirit)

fafRR*, g--*T: N

*wfr

writ

*nKrrptf qftft?

smrcii
4.

e and
,

The

n, are not

final dental

^,

consonants, and the final

in affixes called vibhakti or inflective

affixes.
Digitized by

VjOOQtC

Bk.

Ch.

I.

III.

This

is

an exception to the previous

consonants to be ?^.
are not
final

f^
,

Indicatory letters.

5.3

in the sfitra

and ir f
5f^. Here the

of nominative plural is

final

all

^,

not an f^; and is not rejected, as in MIIUUI: II

means the letters of the class *, by virtue of sfitra 69

though a consonant

The word 3

which declared

sfttra

In case terminations, the final w, *^ f ^,

Thus the case termination

119

is

The word vibhakti will be defined later on in sfitra

These
are terminations applied to nouns in declining them through
4. 104.
various cases and to verbs in conjugating them. Thus in sfitra VII. I. f 2,
Here
'4tef*l*4llf'Hl*b4i:) the vibhaktis f*[, *inj and *^r replace 2T, vfa and 3^.
the final f of the affix W*[ is not indicatory and hence not rejected, as f^TIW
Similarly verbal terminations
and *j^ as <p*PT: f T^T II So also the final
and
and
in
as
trnj
*ttoipt
^TT^T^ II
?PJ
H
This exception applies only to vibhaktis and not to affixes in generaL
Thus the finals of
(III. 1. 97 *p^T*;) 3 (V. 2. 123 3TCjfar 3^) and mr
(III. 1. 78 F^TTf^^Wl) are
and are rejected. This exception, however
Chapter

I.

(see ante).

I.

does not apply to the vibhakti pj

those two sfitras the final
the present

sfitra is

^of

an anitya

(f^rwj:) we
sense of mode or manner.'
V.

sfitra

is

3. 24,

a vibhakti by V,

Now

3. 1.

had the present

sfitra,

find,

As

( sTP^foft

The

syllables

catory; as firf^r
is

give

'

'

to

So j*rft

servile.

'

or

The

III. 4.

^4^)-

106,

reason of this

fw.
a rule not of general application.

e.

I*

that

is,

la

the word fj* takes the vibhakti rj in the

9
fi^+trj-^w^, 'in this manner. Now tfj
firefor) the

is

^,

the real vibhakti

is

tj^.

^ of

this

as indicatory letter, which has been

from becoming an

fif.

This

sfitra is

con*

sfitra.

The

5.

i.

ftftJTJ^

is

been of universal application, then there would

sfitra

evidently added to save the

V. 3. 12

have been no necessity of adding

sequently an anitya

(in

the vibhakti

fir,

initial ni, tu, and du are ^11

J and J, standing at the beginning of a root are

have affectionate pleasure.'

to rejoice, be glad

the real root being

'

The

indi-

real root isft^, the fir

the real root being 7^.

So vpn^'to

jr.

III. 2.
'

has the power of the present

The fif shows tha't the past participle
;
'blown
As
filflfarft*p fat'; fiT|*r^:
qp^r:
187 (Tfhf: **:).
pflxrfl

bold/ fsrf^rer-f^rir:

The J

soft/

fsj^^f^:

form a noun indicative of the act

shaking ' J^frft^- TTERf: swelling.*
;

The 5

kindled/

subjoined to a root serves to show that

*jtf to
1

'

(III. 3.

it

admits the

89 f|tftj^*); as

affix

5%^ **!p

'

indicates that the root to which

affix fir* (III. 3. 88, f%w. fa:) to

it

is

subjoined admits of the

form a noun or adjective atributive of the act

120

Indicatory letters.

Bk.

Ch.

I.

III.

"by which the substantive thing has been produced, as kii **ft^ '

3*^V"*flPfl[

"P*

'

m^J^R^do
es

m vphf
G.

The

by

Rule

HI.

The

initial ir of
1.

rrjrf^,

11

initial

an

affix

h,

145 (fafarf* cjsr) the

by

affixes
i"^h:

1,

having an indicator)*

affix

sj^

g^prerafr)-

qfrT"

added to a verb to indicate

is

1.

take the

The ^ and *[ are j and 977

Thus ^+jsr*rr+*^rfai:
41,

foftnf^lV

affix

^[

'

words formed

in the feminine.')

so

fem. oraft.

The
'

*<ij u

of an affix is indicatory.
name of f^ and is rejected. Thus

dancer' (by profession) *fem. qfagt (IV.

also
in

1.

( snfi[

gets the

proficient in the art expressed by the verb.

takes the place off (VIL

gfp^rft &c.

r^jfk w *: f u<nnw,

11

artificial

not stand in the beginning of a verb,

syllables

are not indicatory

6, 7.

sown.'

'

these three

If

they

'

initial of

six/ or qftK:

an

7.

11

only

f% and

is

The ^ must be

II

affix fzqr^ in *rf%T*nfff<r9,

55

affix

11

The

(Un

I.

initial,

45) as srfiTO

vyfk

3-5

not every

'

therefore

an ocean

uwmu

initial palatals

initial *.

'

it is

*f^r:

snf^: f

Thus not

not JJ in the
a buffalo/

^) u

and Unguals of an

affix

are indicatory.
The consonants ^, f^ sr 5^, 3j, ^, j, j, 3:, and r are always
rejected when initial in affixes. The word 'affix of the previous
f

*c and are
sfitra

'

governs

As

this also.

the affix *qn chphafi in

is indicator)-, as,

e^granp

II

The

sfitra

initial

98 nt% gf^rf^rVKTj). Here

chh of an affix is always replaced

(IV.

1.

The initial 7 of an affix

The initial ^of an affix is always reAs. *f$ (Nom. PI. term.) srnjnrn::
is*f.
(VII. 1. 3 tfTJ^T:). The initial^ of
placed by wr, as *l+*r$+fir - *T*fr
an affix is
as in t^ which comes after the words *rf*T3* &c. As 4llf*>444:
(IV. 3. 92 \lfi^^R4i^ :) The indicator)' *r causes vriddhi by rules VII. 2. 115,
116 and 117: (^^^PhPr, *I*imnn :, *l^M *l |lftO
by

f*r (VII.

1.

2 muStfMlfim: <W^r5^f g <w{Nlf* ).

||

II

The initial ^t of an affix is f% as in III. 2. 16 fafe: the root ^ takes

the affix z when compounded with a noun in the locative). As <**H: 'who
goes among the Kurus.' The feminine of words formed by this affix take
#*X(IV. 1. 15 ftrgpr^jp?*n3t &c.) As *wQ, wmfc The initial 5 of an affix
iWis always replaced by f^j (VII. 3. 50 *TO3n.)
The initial ^ of an Sflke is t/ ^j)
as in III. 2. 97 (OTTOt *T^T: the root "sr^ takes the affix 7 when in composition

Bk.

Ch.

I.

Indicatory letters.

8.]

III.

with a word in the locative, as 3TODT:

final of the

is

word

called fi should be

The

added.

The

initial

5 is

letter

5 of

an

elided

affix is

always an

ft

85 fa^TCf:) the affix ur comes after

The p causes VriddhL
This

Why

has

Thus

The

made a

separate aphorism

part of the real

2. 31
'flat

26

affix.

As

srif?lfa<*i i qr :

(VII.

As

in the

1. 2)-

aphorism IV, 4

As inr + ^-Uraf:

food.'

'

to say,

is

that the

a rule which

is

not uni-

every

of

The

reply

? .

is

not indicatory.

affix is

not indicatory but forms

famous for one's learning/

Se

Similarly the initial ? of the affix Hz%^ (V.

*Unf

?fe*r

it is

the

initial

palatal

these letters occur in the middle of an

'

^r

IHir S?^),

not

is

As TT*te

it.

nosed/

Of course
?

is

initial

fi 44133 : f%*Trr*:

>r ftrr^p^^nfh

migffill'W

that

palatal or lingual

initial

^^[ and ^r^the

in the affixes

S. V, 2.

replaced by

when initial.
the word wr

present sutra declares an anitya rule

versally true.

could very well have been included in the last aphorism.

sfitra

then been

it

The V indicates that the

.
when an affix having indicatory

H*|i*f

121

of the affix

*|?^ is not indicatory

and

affix,

in

lingual

they will
V.

sfitra

2.

which are servile ; if

not be indicatory. As

35 favrffa

**lrJ**r)

^fa:

dexterous/

*"% 1*0
\fa qfltmfijfW
11

The

8.

The
<

*4mm w^rr *rcrt *irf %*&& to?

and , and the gutturals of all

q<m*H3ift<D

initial 1

11

except taddhita, are indicatory.

affixes,

Taddhita

initial

affixes.

*HR^(VH.

g, ^j, g, ?qr, i, tj, 5 of affixes are indicatory, except in

Thus the initial fj in ra^ is m(III. 3 1 15 *33J l) Ft+*J"

1) 'collecting/

The

^ +M+f?r=s Wfit 'he

initial

in

jj^

is

f^(W.

68

qftrfirjrj)

^3

The initial ^isf^as in *E and

X
(I. 1. 26), as 5^:
eating* ^qi-jK The initial *3 is { as in CT^dH. 2. 38
ffcmf W- *&% the word q% takes the affix khach when compounded with f*m
and qsr) ft?rc?: speaking kindly ^TO submissive. The initial *j is f^as

^+^rSL+fir

s=

is/

'

'

in the affix

^mj:
5T^r)

'

r^

(HI.

2.

unmoveable/

H^H-

5^

'

'

139 <HlOwi*| ^5),

The

H^fTj

initial

ij[

'brittle/

tion of the ablative sing.) yj? ditto

3 5=g re5+*r3
r

as

3 Fre:'of
,

**rre j:

'languid

f^ as in ^c^ (III.*
The initial ^ is f, as
is

of genitive sing. (IV.

a well minded/

f3i*j: 'victorious,'
2. 161

H^pirefift

in yftr (termina1 2),

as

*pFTH+

In Taddhita affixes however,

5*^ and gutturals are not fj; and are therefore not elided.
Thus *rjr+i*^*prrar: (V. 2. 96 wfiUwNHft ^ni^mrwr^) 'crested'; ?frr+*

these initials

122

^W.(V. 2.
IV.

3.-8 1 -86

100 <Hl*HRqtHlfifl*tdfo*r:

sto

I.

CH.

9, IO.

III.

+ qr^ T?TO

^15)

'hairy;'

f^r

*h),

11

^rf

sita:, (

*qj

tT^rfSf n

11

Of this, (namely of that which has heen

9.

there

is elision.

This sutra declares the function of

letter,

[ Bk.

*nftTOK **% ) ' a small tree/

?tct

called

RULE OF ASSIGNMENT.

and must be

rejected.

It is

namely

fijj

useful only as

it is a mere indicatory
a mnemonic and is not a

part of the t$rm.

The word
must be

tasya in the

indicates that the substitution of lopa

siitra

whole term called fj, and not only in the place

in the place of the

of the final letter, which last is the general rule (see. I. 1

whole of fsy, 5 and J is rejected and not only their finals.
*j*n

^frT

II

wnw

q^qjfe n

h^tto

10 r

ii

Therefore, the

52).

ii

w-^

HTffif *M*I^Hl 4W4f<4fdHI*f^fiH IHH^f^Rf ^7IT 9iH^Rl(^ij$R||

"When a rule involves the case of equal

numbers of substitutes and of things for which these are
to he substituted, their mutual correspondence or assign10.

ment of each
eration.
Thus

to each, is according to the order of

siitra

III.

134 (Hfaqfojq ffoft ip%?ro) declares

affixes Fg, f*n%

and *f\ are applied

means

fj is

the affix

of irf| class,

enum-

to

srff,

applied to the words of

and

t^ class

jrfSj class,

of words.'

the
It

the affix fafir to words

and %[% to words of T^ class. The application must be respecand not hap-hazard. Similarly in VI. 177 j^fr

tively according to order,

*HJjf^T (it

a vowel follows)

in the place

off, ^,

3?,^

there

is ^rr

%, ^, ^,
where the
four affixes dhak, chhan dhafk, and yak are applied respectively to the words
tfidl, al&tura, varmatt and kuchav&ra ; u e. 9 the first affix in the order of

II

So

also see S. IV. 3. 94

enumeration to the

As

*H|*r:,

first

word, the second

UfoUgOq: , fJ^fcj:
do we say

Why
apply

if

the

number

of

and 5ifoCTc:
'

of

q&PT

for

here

equal

substitutes

to be substituted are unequal.

9ft

the

1. *.,

(^ l^^lrji^^^^Kl^ g^Bg r^^rer:)

As

words

affix

to the second

word &c.

lf

members ?
and of things

in sfitra

This

'

I.

lakshana

4.

for

rule

will

not

which these

are

90 ^rdfq^n^TPPimfNrr

&c

in

the

first

part

<

Bk.

I.

Ch.

1S3

Atmanepada verbs.

II, 12.]

III.

are four in number, while the words prati &c. are only three. That
sfitra therefore must be read as thus, " The words qfir, qft and *rf are karma-

the

sfitra

pravachaniya, whenever they indicate either lakshana (a mark), itthambhut4khy&na (a statement of mere circumstance) ; bhAga (division); or vipsi
(desire)."

^iRu^Tf^^n::

II

11

II

V\rfk

^ft^T, ^f^^i<: H

a word is
marked with a svarita accent, by that an adhik&ra or a
governing rule is to be understood.
When in this collection of grammatical sfitras, there is any sutra

when

In these aphorisms,

11.

that has a circumflex accent,

it

denotes that

either the beginning

it is

subject and the subsequent sfitras are governed by

it,

or that

it

of

ends a sub*

and separates the previous sfitras from the following.

As a rule, the sfitras are not marked with accents ; it is therefore
from commentaries that one has to learn whether a sfitra has a svarita or
not. Thus the following sfitras, must evidently have svarita as they are go-

ject

verning

sfitras;

qnra:

'

(III.

^rat: (III.

I.)

I.

91),

Mlfr

W (VI.

4.

1),

TO*

(VI. 4. 129).

^llcHrlM^*!
*jfc

II

11

w^nHTr 5

>n*rfr fiF*ra

w^rwW

*nf?r m*$**r.

After a root which has an indicatory anudatta vowel (anudattet) or an indicatory ft (Ait), the
affixes are those of the Atmanepada.
12.

The word atmanepada here governs

'

sfi.

77 inclusive,

peated.
fore

Thus

'

and

is

understood in them

As

an Atmaccpadi verb.

Mnrs3*ft:
^frT-

II

all

of the verb *?ra the final f is

HT#

hifiSj

II

II

So ^ tfa jtft

mR?T.

1^

up to
and will not therefore be reanud4tta and is f*. It is therethe subsequent sfitras

all

mfa

*Ht*i^ 4$fJL*nrf%

WTO-S^ft:,

sUcH^ ^T)

11

13.
An atmanepada affix is the substitute of
the affix <* (III. 4. GO) when it~denotes the action of the
verb or the object of the verb.
Sfitra III.

transitive verbs in

69 declares the " letter *f C*nO fa* &c.,) is placed after

denoting the object also as well as the agent ; and after

4.

marking the condition ( e. f the action itself which the verb

imports) also as well as the agent." The Paras, and Atman. affixes would

intransitives in

ATMANEPADA VERBS.

124

Bk.

have come, therefore, generally after all these verbs.

Atman. affixes to bhava and karma verbs.

CH.

I.

II).

The present

13, 14.

res-

sfitra

tricts

is clear. Impersonal verbs and passive verbs as a rule are conjuatmanepada and take the terminations of that pada. These originally were verbs expressive of states rather than of actions. As of *ir* we
have *tSnre WIT 'you dislike' (lit. 'it is disliked by you'} tpr<T WfT 'you
Similarly passive verbs as ftr*T% 5*?:'the mat is made
sleep.'
ft"*T^r HTC:

This

gated

in the

'

the load

may have

All verbs in Sanskrit

middle or impersonal

active voice

three voices vis. active,

generally parasmaipada.

is

verbs known as SP^Sft- are also atmanepadi.

wood

fl^

cuts of

is carried.'

itself.'

See

snw**^)

Thus

passive,

The

f&fil <*?$K:

and

reflexive

STO^* ' the

sfitra 78.

In denoting the agent, when reciprocity

of action is to he expressed, the affixes of the Atmanepada are employed.
14.

The

active

or

^^r^r

when denoting

verbs

reciprocal

action are

atmanepadi. As, mffrwft , they cook for each other,' c^rfitpnt 'he perform^
''J'-*^
cutting of wood which was the appropriate office of another.'
'

The words "

reciprocity

or

interchange of action " of

tliis

sfitra

govern and are understood in the two following sfitras also.

The word karma in the sutra means action and not the technical 'karma
meaning ' object and the word vyatihara means reciprocity or interchange.
'

When

an action which was appropriate to one person

whose duty
terchange

was

it

is

kartari here

not, that is called

not meant Paras,

is

^RH^^^^^fgrfir
^fa;

11

is

performed by another,

interchange of action.'

used.

As

J*fe*T

'

When

they cut'

such in-

The word

used for the sake of the subsequent aphorism 78, which see.

* ifa fgwfar:
(

is

II

V\ U x^Tfa

ii

rniuwit fs*rriifajv ir***:

^ifSehflL

11

*<KiifWta

*& sqfatf

II

* ^-ffOT-Vlfai:
f

^^

* *wf%

||

11

After verhs having the sense of c motion, 1

or injury,' when expressing interchange of action the
Atmanepada affixes are not used.
15.

BK.

THE ATMANEPADA

I.--CH. III. $ 16, 17.]

125

VERBS.

affixes in certain cases where by

would have been obtained. As

This aphorism prohibits Atmanepada

Atmanepada

force of the last sfitra

they go against each other/ sqfdnfcfcr

**lfn*7ufN

'

iq fo 'd fof

they fight together/

The word c not

Vart.
rest

affixes

'

they injure each other/

understood in the subsequent

of this sfitra is

This prohibition

'

extends to the verbs

As g^f^rf^r, mft^^Pfl, ^Rl4*Pa II

Vart. Prohibition must be made of

$$

and the

to laugh/

the verbs f*f?f

'

sfitra.

to injure,' as

4WC?Kl*iM:il

^RT:

^T^dW^T ^frlipw^iql ^vforf^T? |l*|3?{ H *Plfa

II

16.

II

And after the verbs which take the words

and anyonya

one another/ as
upapada (or dependant qualifying words), the affixes of
Atmanepada are not used, though reciprocity of action
be denoted.
Thus jd?*UHI **tf<* sprf^r / they cut each other ^F^inr utfdflP4
itaretara 'each other/

'

'

they cut one another.'

Vart.

This rule must also be applied when the word <u'fH

As H*3U*J wif^npfl

position with the verb, as an upapada.

Stfhjt

II

3b

II

q^Tfvr

$:,

II

fo^: f

is

in

com*

micH^H^q

After the verb vi& to enter,' when prethe preposition ni, the Atmanepada affixes are
c

17.

ceded by
employed.

As firerfir he enters,' but ftfiicft he enters in/

Even when the augment ^j of the Imperfect, Aorist and Conditional
'

'

tenses intervenes between the root and the preposition, terminations are
the Atmanepada.

The
and not any

As

?trf%TOT

'

or*

he entered in/

f% of the sfitra must be an upasarga, because that has a sense,

f%.

combination of

On

letters

this

there

is

paribhishi

this

wi^TOl)

sf

PnNi^

"a

capable of expressing a meaning denotes, whenever

employed in grammar that combination of letters in so far as it possesses

that meaning, but it does not denote the same combination of letters void of
a meaning." Thus in irjft farf? *TO: f the beetles enter the honey flowers.'

it is

The Atmanepada

126
-Here the f%

fore the verb

vno

i8, 19.

and has no sense by itself, and there*

the Parasmaipada and not in the Atmanepada.

a part of the wcrd

is

[Bk./J. Ch.JH.

verbs.

is in

ijgfir

11

^ftr

Hftmfr *

11

*&fa

qrerergi gftarlft itH^N 4

11

After the verb krl to purchase/ when

preceded by pari, vi or ava, the Atmanepada affix is employed^ even when the fruit of the action does not
accrue to the agent.
c

18.

buy or barter/ has an indicatory ^ and therefore,

by sutra 72 it will be Atmanepadi when the fruit of the action accrues to the
agent The present sfitra, therefore, refers to cases where the fruit of the

The verb

'

f^lffaff

to

action does not accrue to the agent.

The root ifl" to buy as a general rule takes the terminations of both
when it is preceded by pari, vi, or ava, it is restricted to Atmanepada terminations. As JflfafffefHr he buys fliftfMKi he sells srqrafhrfl% he
'

'

padas, but

'

' ;

'

'

buys/

The word

and ava must be upasargas, therefore, in the follow*

no Atmanepada termination, because the vi there, is not

pari, vi,

ing example, there

is

a preposition but a noun,

as,

gff%5?Mrf5 ^pt^.

fiwronRit :

11

*%

11

ti^Tft

5t:

(we

11

After the verbji to conquer,' preceded

vi or par&, the Atmanepada affix is employed.
c

19.

by

f%tr^i^qt\,

11

This

sfitra

debars S.

78 by which the root

flf is

generally Paras-

maipadi.

As

he conquers <HT*J4<) he conquers/ The words vi and

pari must be upasargas (prepositions), for the application of this rule. In
the following examples^ they are used as substantives Kfq*nfll 3W%,
f%*PT^

'

mft ^tonw $*%*$

^I-faf^,

qiRfn^

wo
f

'

'

11

ro

11

TRjTfSp

11

are:,

^:, spit.

11

*m*iftt$r i'KWHftraT3ft

*?f?t$>St

*lf^ll^*tf^ft**Rppi

<Mit*i:

11

Digitized by

GQOgk

Bk.

I.

Ch.

The Atmanepada

20, 21.]

III.

127

verbs.

After the verb d& to give, 1 preceded by

Aft, and when not meaning to open the inouth,' the Atmanepada affix is used, even when the fruit of the action
does not accrue to the agent.
2(X

The

root ?r is generally both Parasmaipadi

But when preceded by the preposition

As fawn*^ 'he
mouth

19

sjt, it is

But when

acquires knowledge.'

or metaphorically,

whether actually

and Atmanepadi (see S. 72).

itamanepada.

restricted to the

is

it

'He expands his own mouth.'

^KIlH
Vart: The prohibition also applies when
the act of opening the mouth. As ftmR<hf wrr^lftr

it

means "to widen the

As

parasmaipadi.

VJTOT

r*

Vart
verb

of

W^:

When the

itmanepadi, as

is

mouth

>

'

is

similar to

he opens the tumour/

the river breaks the bank.'

'

aJ* g*r H<jlfi *rft

the action

action does not affect the agents'

^W^ft-ilf^C

<Jttat<

5?3d 1

'

own body the

the ants P en

the

locust.'

ffrf:

W?q% *o

II

^H^H^R
q^m*^ 11

sftf ft?T? H<HHIJ

^tflw**i^ ffa

qrrfSsir^

11

^rf^^r*

11

ftr^rftr^rraRrr^

TiftNr^

11

^nftrPnrnr:

qif?!*^

f
i

Jtift

^^^T^^^m^T* ^ft

It

11

11

$T%*nrcfT^BMfr

11

wrfWj v* ^TT5Tpr ?f?r ^raro^ it

11

After the verb

anu, sain or pari, as well as
21.

kricj
&ii,

to play' preceded by
the Atmanepada affix
l

is used.

The word
tion

^ in

the text.

"W^"

is

to

be read into the

by virtue of the conjunc4

qfiufhsw he plays/

sfitra

As srnfln^ S*fte% MJj*Cu %, or

P*>*'. When the verb *ft^ compounded with

rattling or creaking noise/

it

^wr^cT^RCTfir'the carts

rattle or creak.'

^ means

'

to

make a

does not take Atmanepada terminations.

The word

anu, pari

As

&c, being

taught along with sam, indicates that the upasargas anu, pari &c.,
are to be
taken, and not the karmapravachaniya anu pari &c.
Therefore, when these
prefixes are used as karmapravachaniya, they do
not cause the verb *ff^ ta
Digitized by

VjOOQLC

The Atmanepada

128

verbs.

[Bk.

Ch.

I.

III.

31-22.

take the Atmanepada terminations as munqiHjttfUffr I * he plays in imitation

of the boy/ For the definition and action of karmapravachanlya, see* I. 4. 83

and

II. 3. 8.

Vart.

The verb hjit^ takes the Atmanepada terminations when mean-

ing 'to wait for\

'

sjnpnrw *K*

to over look' 'to have patience' as,

*m^

'

Have patience with

The verb takes Atmanepada terminations, when meaning

to enquire
fimg fw% he investigates sciences.
Vart.The verb s?t^ when meaning 'to bless/ takes Atmanepada

the boy.'

Vart.

ftrcr

as,

':

'

terminations, as, ^rfr^

HWR

do we say 'when meaning

Manavaka/
Vart.
'

The verb

to take after the

'he blesses with clarified butter.'

to bless?'

f^fir

?rm%

iiyfr

Why

Observe, *iUU4hHHHU4ft f 'he begs of

when meaning
As feq rarar *^<^1 the horses

takes Atmanepada terminations

nature of the parents.'

'

resemble their
mother.' But

father.'
m<t< TTPfr*H^<-3 'the cows always imitate their
when not having this meaning, we have HM^iftj he resembles
'

his mother.'

Vart.

meaning

'

The
happy

cock scratches

in

bull

scatter

i.

search of food,' fr^fc^id **I\MM3TOT

his abode.'

142.

Hjqfehid ajf^fr HW*ft 'the

scratches with joy.'

When

not having these senses

The dental

scatters about the flowers.'

VI.

Atmanepada terminations when

with joy, for abode or food.' As rof*3ft%
takes

fchifa

to scratch out or

fTOlrSET: 'the

make

verb

the

'

we have

apaskirate

*r in

dog scratches to

gpfqK^fH ^HP^C/ he
is

added by

sfitra

Wwami-H4$flMll3<rt

Vart.

The verbs 5

terminations

'

to cry '

when preceded by

jackal howls.'

and

spsg[

'

to ask

the preposition SJT^

take the Atmanepada

'

as

m jft
i

Jjnn*:

'

the

iniHjfl *ns% ' he questions the Guru.'

Vart.The verb *rx when meaning 'to touch the body by the word'
affixes. As ^FfrTRT *TT% he promises by oath to'Devadatta/
Otherwise we have wrfH 'he curses.'

takes Atmanepada

'

After the verb sth& < to stand/ preceded

sam, ava, pra, vi, the Atmanepada affix is used.
22.

by

As

f?te%

he stays

with,'

qy qffra^ he waits patiently/ irf^% ' he sets

'

forth/ f%fifar% he stands apart/

'

Digitized by

G00gle

Bk.

Ch. JIL 23-25.

I.

Vart.

The

The Atmanepada

w when

verb

sjc* f%tf

129

preceded by *JT and meaning

Atmanepada terminations ; as

declaration ' takes

take another example,

verbs.

atflsr

*T SPC ttilUUKIWIt^

'

solemn

Or

4H4tKm-H4lfd8<)

for thee

to

shall surely have

recourse to water or poison/

^IT

W&&0

II

After the verb sthil when meaning c to,

c
indicate pile's intentions to another/ or to mak e aft
c
k&&biP&& an arbitrator/ the Atmanepada affix is em23.

ployed.
The word prakAsana means

The word

a compound of stheya arbitrator' and Akhya name.9

u As frrar^r ^rromi? ' the wife expresses her wish to the husband^ t*fr
frtg% , he refers to thee for settlement/ *ftro Mi^uT^ firrt ^:, 'who, when
he is in doubt, has recourse to Karnaas his judge or umpire.'
sthey&khya

disclosing one's intentions.

*

is

'

'

ffrT:

11

^$ 1??^ fi*a<l **&$^*$fa *hhw*h*N$ ^nft

ii

After the verb sthst, preceded by ut, when

not meaning 'to get up or rise/ as from a seat; the At24.

manepada

affix is

employed.

The word karma'

in this

'

the grammatical karma or

As #?
^liHI^friyftl

Vart.

3ftnr<r

he

'

rises

'

'

aphorism means ' action,9 and does not mean

9

object.

he strives for U13 house' so also 5J*% ^Otc%

The force

exertion, wish or desire,

of the preposition ut

must be

to surprise or excell.'

a hundred

is

yielded by

this village.

anurdhakarmani,' and does not debar the

*mw3i*<3l
en*

xto )

But

11

to express f^r, 'effort,

If this

the terminations are those of the Parasmaipada.

*

II

up from the seat.'

As

The word

be not the force of

ut,

qrenX^TPTT^ tm^frtgft

ffT qualifies

word

the

latter.

% n vztfk ^n^ to-^j

11

w,

Digitized by

LiOOQ LC

The Atmanepada

130

verbs.

Bk.

Ch. HI. 25-27.

I.

After the verb sth&, preceded by upa,

25.

when meaning

to adore,' the

Atmanepada affix is used.

As ifejUHllJMmgqfrtgfr he approaches with prayers or worships the

fire with aindra hymns/
praising with hymns' the terminations which
If it does not mean
'

Girhapatya

'

the verb takes, are those of the Parasmaipada, as WdfiJJlfiyft

proaches the husband through youth/
Vart.

The verb

after the preposition

*sjr

'

'

she ap-

3T takes the terminations

of the Atmanepada when meaning^ worshipping a deity/

tercourse or uniting or joining/

^hRH

'

to form friendship with/

to approach for in-

and ' to lead to as a

1st

Deva pujA Hjlll^^kiy^l 'he worships the Aditya/ 2.

Sangati karana tfd^ftud HlO 'the wife approaches the husband/ mi^ljHI^a^

way/
'

Thus:

forms union with charioteers/

man

approaches the saints to

ween

Mitrl karana ^raryrf^OT *STi

3.

make

What

friends with/

is

'

the good

the difference bet-

Sangati-karana and Mitri-karana ? Sangati-karana means drawing near

and approaching together in space, as ^HimjJHI^lrlaJlr 'the Ganges joins the

Jumna/ While the friendly relations may be established without coming in
physical contact* 4. Patha

Vart.

sense

'

is

It

^q 7ir: 5**J**?^"^

'

Srughna.

this roa(^ leads to

must be stated that the Atmanepada

is optional when the

As faspRf ^T^TCT^TyTf?!^ or OTT%gf3 ' a beggar
a Brahmana with the desire of getting something/

desire of getting/

waits at the palace of

After the verb sth&, preceded by upa,

used intransitively, the Atmanepada affix is nsed.
26.

when

As H)T3R3tT5)

VMf^^f)

'

he stands ready at the time

of

dinner/ 41443^3*

is present whenever it is dinner time/ 4H4WH3<jf<ta<t 'he is present

whenever there is food, that is he comes at the time of dinner/ The word
bhukta is formed by adding the affix kta to the root, and has the force of

qri%3% 'he

condition ' here*

The phrase when used

'

ceeding

governs the three suc-

sfitras also*
If it is

tions.

the Intransitive

in

transitive

As iMH^Mfrty^
gf^Rit

to^stw

the verb upasthi takes the parasmaipada termina-*

he approaches the king/

cw

11

^a

11

n^ifk

11

g^-favcn^, ^cn

aro^-

xio ) n

*iNN*n 11 wi^*i

*i*4w*ifJi

q-rhmn

11

Digitized by

LiOOQ LC

Bk.

Ch.

I.

III.

27, 28.

The Atmanepada

verbs.

.131

After the verb tapa c to shine/ when used

intransitively, and preceded by ut or vi the Atmanepada
affix is employed.
27.

As ZrHrt or ftmn fkvrm ftsmff The scholar shines with knowledge/

transitive verbs, it is Parasmaipadi. As ^xnf% 4}4u7^4lJhli:> the gold'

But

in

'

smith heats the gold/ R<wft

Vart.

It

gy ttf^dl

must be stated

the sun heats the back.'

that the terminations are of the

Atmanepada,

vi tapa be transitive, when the object is some limb

own body. As ^rTT^ITfaj or fir^falftj^ or % he heats his own hand
means one's own body and not the pdribhdshika or
The word
or back
meaning " a thing which not being liquid or gaseous and
the techinical

though the verb ut-tapa or

of one's

'

'

^y

wy

being capable of being perceived by the senses, and not being one produced

by a change from the natural

state, exists in

a living being and though found

elsewhere actually or at any particular time, had previously been

existing in only a living being, or

the same relation to the being

being."

(See IV.

54

1.

is

as a similar thing has to a living

it is in,

Hl^lClMqJHK^JihMlO

the following ^-cft

known as

found to have actually (not figuratively)

Therefore not

so in

Devadatta heats the back of Yajfia-

*|<Him ssj^nft
-When the preposition is other than ut or
employed as, fi^rft.

datta.

vi,

paras maipada affix is

3TT#taHTf?|:
9TT0

ri

TW

>wfir

II

^C

||

TRJTft

II

3n^t, *nr-fr:,

^+A*Ic^

II

11

After the verb

28.

yam

to stop,'

and lian * to

when used intransitively and preceded by &&,

the Atmanepada affix is employed.

injure

The word

intransitive of

verbs are generally parasmaipadi.

Atmanepadi.

Yam

s.

26

is

When

understood here also.

they take the

belongs to Bhv&di class; and han to

W+^r

Both these

become
Ad&di class. Thus

affix *jr

they

+ *TT+^"W+*r*3 + ST^ (VII. 3. 77 *S*lffcritf 5: chh is the substitute of the finals of ish, gam and yam, when an affix having an indicatory
*T follows) = srr*r*5^ 'it spreads.' **nrgpr and ^rrar^u?^
so also
+ *% sfa*^
+ ^-W+f +% (I. 2. 4 and VI. 4. 37 gr3^mAli^fddHl^i4>HI*IJHlRl4if?W>
fTf^fi^j-BinjlT, 'he strikes.' Brr-^+^r^-W + ^+HT^ (I. 2. 4 and VI. 4.
gS^MiH^HR^ im<4*M<gMti<ii ott: a^Sr wrffcJ-nnnMVH. 3. 54), (*ir?^r'

fe5)Pl.nft.
Not so when these verbs are used in the transitive, as MJI4tf<14JtMnc^npj he draws up the rope from the well/ fttt*f* j^r* T!$t they kill the

**
|

'

sinner with the

foot.'
j

The Atmanepada

1$2

Wheto

Vart.

these verbs take the

qrf^ he
the object

is

maipada, as

some limb

mnPd

some member

is

own

hand.' *ff?% Rnf

Ch.

of the agent's
transitive.

own

$ ig, 30.

III.

own body
As a?nre*it

When

head.'

of an others body, the terminations are of the Paras-

far; qr^fhr

'

they hurt others head.'

4S

*<!

U^lPl

II

II

^t: f

II

29.

become

I.

he hurts his

q%T^{^g f^a<c^f%faR *

*n**I%<rt *Hfif

Bk.

Atmanepada terminations though

puts forth his

'

the object

verbs.

After the verbs

gam

to go,' jichchh * to
to ask,' svar c to find ihult,' ji
vid c to know,' when used in-

prachchh
to go,* Srfr to hear,' and
transitively and preceded by sam, the Atmanepada
l

hard,'

affix

ia employed.

The above seven

verbs

when preceded by

the preposition

*3PJ

and

Atmanepada. As oq^s^r
he joins/ *Ui*u^ ' he becomes hard or goes.' s*% ' he asks/
9
In the case of this last verb
g^q?^ he blames/ tm^i ' they are attained.
Bhvidi
and
Juhfltyftdi
it is Atmanepadi only in the
class
which belongs both to
used

in the intransitive, take the terminations of the

(VII. 3. 77)

'

Aorist

As ^j+^r+an^+tr

(HI.

1.'

56

*rfTrcrr$nrf%vq v)

srq*r,

as >if^pr

+ *T +
+ w*r - mvxi (VII. 4. 16
75 q^rig[^^pn ^flfl jft)
the
generally
in
Vedas.
occurs
The verb faj must have
^l^Mf^-^JUJ: )- This
(VI.

4.

the meaning of 'to

^f%?Hr

'

know/ and not

that of 'to acquire'' cfff3^ 'he hears/

he knows.'
Vart.

The root

<[*r

(to see) after the preposition

transitively takes the terminations of the

But when

transitive, it takes

when used

Atmanepada as tw^qft

'

in*

he sees/

Parasmaipada terminations as mn*( ilMUqft

'

he

sees the town.'

(no no) n

After the verbs live l to call,' preceded by

ni, sam, upa, and vi, the Atmanepada is used, even, when
the fruit of the action does not accrue to the agent.
30.

Digitized by

LiOOQ LC

Bk. I.Ch.

III.

The verb \:
after the

above

apply to this

The Atmanepada

31, 32.]

and from

The

is

Atmanepadi

condition of being Intransitive does not

this sfitra forward general rules

of. As f%^r%, *3|*WT OT|*J%

The verb^ is marked in the Dhatupa(ha with a

are treated

sfitra

133

'to call' whether transitive or intransitive

prepositions.

sfitra,

verbs.

of

Atmanepada

II

72 of this Chapter,

the direct fruit of the action accrues to the agent.

fruit of the action

minations of the
Vart.

Atmanepada

and therefore by
Atmanepada when
But even when the direct

will take the terminations of the

it

does not accrue to the agent, the verb hve takes the ter-

Atmanepada when preceded by

The verbs

sj^r

'to throw*

the above prefixes.

and 3T^ 'to note* take optionally

upasargas. As ftUw tl
fr ' he

when compounded with

affixes

casts out/ ^jipft %

'

he

collects.'

After the verb hve, when meaning c to

challenge ' and preceded by fifi, the Atmanepada is used,
even when the fruit of the action does not accrue to the
31.

agent.
As

to conquer him)'

This
the

fe

'

an athlete challenges another athlete (in order

'one student emulates with another student*
also for the purpose of showing that the root hve takes

i{F$t qFSTPTTf ^[ir

M^ nm^

sfitra is

Atmanepada terminations even when

the direct fruit of the action does not

accrue to the agent.

The word spardhi means

another.

When

to emulate, to vie, to desire

the verb hve has not the above signification,

terminations of the parasmaipada.

As

nrarf^ffT

ifrrreT:

'the

conquer

to
it

takes the

cowherd

calls the

cows/

^n^^^qiir^yi^^f^q^f^q^H^^^i!!^^ ^|:
(WO

TW)

II

II

||

iTw:

11

i?*?rrftRr^

^4tri^ *0?Uich3hj

*rrfHr

11

After the verh kji when meaning to divulge,' 'to revile/ c to serve/ 'to use violence/ 'to
cause change/ < to recite/ and to do an act tending to
effect a desired purpose/ the Atmanepada is used,
even
when the fruit of the action does not acci^e. to
agent.
d g@
32.

The Atmanepada

184

The verb
when

fps[

by

verbs.

Bk.

I.

Ch.

III.

33.

J2 would take the affixes of the Atmanepada

This sfltra has been

sfitra

the direct fruit of the action accrues to the agent*

begun to show

that this verb takes the

when the

circumstances even

Atmanepada terminations under certain

direct fruit of the action does not accrue

t'o

the

agent

The word gandhana comes from

the root

gandh

to injure/ of chur&di

and means to inform against another maliciously with the object of injuring
such person! Avakshepana means to revile' 'to over-come/ sevana means 'to
obey and serve/ sihasikya means ' an act of violence/ pratiyatna means ' imparting a new quality or virtue/ prakathana means to narrate fully/ upayoga

class

'

'

means the disposal of a thing for the object of attaining merit &c/
Thus 3*$?%, xT4l^?l means he informs against (2) ^SHt *f3<Mii<tf**<l
s'\
Chx^i
QajlaXl ^ 'the hawk overcomes or reviles a^ail* (3) HUj<hlj4^*> he serves thej>rostitutes/ rgrqnrpr^T% he serves the mahamatra/ (4). qr^rn^ *fajF% he outrages
'

'

'

/t

/
'

/''another's wife.' (5). ipilr^i^iPT^y^

'

affix

a sacrifice)/

The object of the

when the verb

the fuel gives a

water (or he prepares the wood and water

verb kfi takes the

new

quality (boils) to the

for

of the sixth case

1.

genitive, only

e.

Therefore udakasya, though

means pratiyatna, see S. II. 3. 53 (frsf: Wflqfr )
an object, has genitive form. The verb takes the augment only when it is
I

preceded by upa and signifies pratiyatna see VI.

qi44ltqw?f)

Therefore, there

II

'he recites stories/

(5)

1HIT:

(6).

CTT 73}$% 'he devotes

<i4<M Hij*S

U*ihit

(^TT^ q ffi*UT

139.

^^f

'

3remT$r% M^hh 'he recites slander/

pieces of money, for the sake of merit.

he devotes a thousand.

Why do we
mat/

a hundred

1.

the insertion of sibilant in upask unite.

is

In this case the Atmanepada

The verb kp

?f%T:

II

%jfa

Witness sj# *itfa

not employed.

say in these senses ?

is

understood

<rj??[qRtlr*T:

affix is

in the three

succeeding

*W*3 ^r{HHii\9H^Hi ^rft

'

he makes a

sfitras.

II

After the verb kji preceded by adhi,

when the sense is that of l overcoming or defeat/ the
Atmanepada is used, even when the fruit of the action
does not accrue to the agent.
33.

This
affix

sfitra is

commenced

even when the direct

to

show

that kfi

fruit of the action

The word prasahana means 'to over come,

may

take the Atmanepada

does not accrue to the agent.

to be not defeated/

As fnyf^Ni 'he

overcame him or he was not defeated by him/

Why do we say, in the sense of to overcome?' Witness *flfaptarftffr ' he
learns the meaning in which example the Atmanepada affix is notr^mploycd.
'

'

Bk.

I.

Ch. IIL 34-36.

The
cluding

mo

necessity of

making

a. separate

135

verbs.

sutra of this rule, instead of in-

in the last apporism, arose with the object of giving

it

meaning

The Atmanepada

a distinctive

to the prefix adhi.

tio) n

^5. *hClli*^ftqr8 fi^^ii^i^ v*^c^*4m *iw^N< *nflr 11

34. After the verb kvi preceded by vi, even
when the fruit of the action does not accrue to the agent,
and when the sense is that of making sound/ (literally, having sound ' for its object) the Atmanepada is
employed.
^ftr:

fk

11

The word karma

in the sutra

does not express 'action/ as

As

nfrST

f%3f$%

in

WI41

indicates objective case or kAraka;

some previous
*

and

sutras such as 24 ante.

the birds are making noise/ t*Nft ft<*

The word fk governs the succeeding sutra.

do we say " when governing a word expressive of sound
objective case"? Witness f^r R^uft 3TPT: love affects the mind.'

Why

in the

'

rc*M*5n|
SITO

VO :)

n \\ n

*mfa

11

few:

After the verb kji preceded by

used intransitively, the Atmanepada is used.
35.

As fofr * Ttl
4

erevfan^*

the students being

&*j<ii
full

the horse^move gracefully/ afFFTCT

vi,

when.

yjfasPn (%aH%
wander-

of food are acting as they will or are aimlessly

ing about.

ffa:
firafaiSy

**5

11

cot^,

qnd t<9<tw^i^>^ftmitfti<^^wi<

*nrfo,

virniftj

11

After the verb nX to lead,' when used in

the sense of to guide so as to render the person guided
worthy,' c to lift up,' * to make one a spiritual guide, 1
1
to determine the true sense,' c to employ on wages, 1
36.

'

Digitized by

LiOOQ LC

The Atmanepada

136
c

to

the

pay as debt/ and

Bk.

Ch. HI. 37.

I.

'to give as in charity/

even when

not accrue to the agent, the

fruit of the action does

Atmanepada is

verbs.

used.

begun in order to" show that the v6rb sfr may take the
This
terminations of the Atmanepada, even when the direct fruit of the action
does not accrue to the agent, in the following cases, vis., when it means
sfitra is

to

'

respect

'

&c.

SammAnana means

gence, and by secondary use

a preceptor gives

spqftf

*5pft <HicfaTq% 'the

ChArvi gives

The word

charvi primarily

means

to respect

instruction in the Lokayata astra.'

as

intelli-

has been extended to the preceptor also, such

it

instruction in

Lokayata Sastra, that

te

having estab-

to say,

by argumentation, imparts
them to the pupils. Those doctrines being thus established by reason, become respected (Sanmanita) and honored.
Utsanjana, 'to throw up, or lift up/ as *TFnpfr g ?Pra^ 'he lifts up

lished the truth of the doctrines of that philosophy

Manavaka.'

a boy
near oneself in such a way, that being so brought near (upa-neta); he may
himself become an achArya. As Hmi^^indfr 'he initiates Manavaka (/. e.,
Acharya-karana 'acting as a teacher/ that

is

to say, to bring

making himself the preceptor he brings the boy near himself/)

Jnana means knowledge, a demonstrated verity.' As spnt
.

'

^%

'

^rff *tfa*T-

the Ch&rvt investigates the truth of the Lokayata doctrine.'

Bhfiti

means 'wages.'

As

qvfcgrc r

jT?^

'he employs the servants on

hire or wages.'

Viganana means the paying off as a tribute, debts &c As OT *R(

fipRFT, the Madras pay the tax due to the king, that is, they discharge the debt.'
Vyaya means ' allotment of money on works of merit &c/ As *ffi Rw^tffc
' he expends a hundred
pieces on religious acts.' qr&t fiH^3> he devotes a
l

thousand.'

Why

do we

Witness ^prf TOfct MW5. ' he carries

no Atmanepada affix, as the verb has

say, in these senses ?

the goat to the village' Here there

is

not any one of the above significations.

*>*Rfa, (fro: zno no) n

?Rf:

II

TO%:

MU* 4 *lfi<$*H3l*4l *&i$

:

cfewSu^qft? Sift

SRWiKH^*

*nifaii

After the verb ni, when it governs an

incorporeal object existing in the agent, as its object, the
37-

Atmanepada

is used.

Digitized by

Google

Bk.

Ch.

I.

111.

The Atmanepada

$38.]

verbs.

137

Atmanepadi when governing an object which has no

material body, but is an abstract noun, that is an object which has abstract
but no concrete existence ; and when such an object has its seat in a
portion of the agent of the verb. As *W f%TO*t ' he subdues his own anger/
T?J f^rerJfr he suppresses anger/
The word sarira means the body of living beings, any portion of such
body is also called iarira.
The object must reside in the agent, (kartristha), otherwise the verb
will be parasmaipadi.
As *43ift <J*i4*(t4 **t>t ft^niRr ' Devadatha removes

The verb

ft

is

'

Yajnadatta's anger/

The

object moreover must be immaterial, otherwise the affix will

As

of parasmaipada.
'

irf fenqfo

he removes his own wort.'

'

be

qraf ftroftr

he bows his heck/

Why

do we say

'

in the case of

submissive through knowledge/

taken an accusative case, but

and therefore the present

rRf:

||

sncRTT

is in

an object ? ' Witness f^jrf^Prfa ' he is

Here the verb fi?nri% has not
fii^fl|
.

construction with an

instrumental case,

rule does not apply.

*T4lRt4*?^ JhttafJHlfH *! *Wft

1

II

After the verb kram to move' when used,

in the senses of continuity/ c energy and development,'
the Atmanepada is employed.
c

38.

'

The word

kram

understood in them

The
affixes

be employed

when

Vritti

taste for,

'

governs the succeeding sutras up to 43 and

in

sfitra

3.

I.

78 (after the

the verb

continuity

or facility

'

means

to

in cer-

of interruption

(t. e. f

energy' means application

development ' means increase and

'sarga
'

his reason
'

affixes, 'of

affixes

have a taste for &c.

anything),

(1) 44^4*4 ffPT% jfqp

the Rig. scriptures u

the parasmaipada

Atmanepada

means unobstructed, or want

in,

growth.

As

rest, let

marking the agent), would have taken the

the present aphorism enjoins

and determination. T&yana

resolution

is

all.

verb kram by

the parasmaipada
tain cases

proceeds unobstructed through

he can easily comprehend the Rig/ (2). wrraTSJWf*R|7T *FT% the pupil shows energy or exerts to study the grammar/ (3). ^lft%^
e. %

'

^rr^rrfiT

*W% the shastras are developed in him/

Why in these senses only? Witness 9TTOPrft 'he
'

runs

away/

Digitized by

LiOOQ LC

The Atmanepada

133

verbs.

Bk.

I.

Ch.

39-41*

III.

After the verb kram, preceded by upa

the senses of continuity, energy
and development, the Atmanepada is employed
39.

and

when used in

para,

The words vfitti &c., of the last sfitra are understood here also. Why
has this been made a separate sfitra and not included in the last ? The reason
is to make a restrictive rule in the cases of upasargas that is to say, only ip
;

the cases of the upasargas upa and pari, there

is

Atmanepada

affix

but not

so when any other upasarga precedes the verb kram, though the sense may
be of continuity &c, Thus OT%reft 'he commences to advance/ w*hHft 'he
inarches to attack/

Why do we say after the upasargas upa and part. ? Because, after
any other preposition the affix will be of the parsmaipadaj as OTTRft he
makes progress/ If the sense is not that of " continuity " &c- t parasm^ipad^
will be employed, a? 3*TOPrf*t, TOSTPTftr.
'

'

'

ii44+u)

118011

^ft n

Ttffcsqin if*iym3 jht

sn^:,

^pra^

fan*:,

sna

tjo) u

tt&^n

After the verb kram, preceded by 46, the

Atmanepada is employed, when used in the sense of the
rising of a luminary.
40.

As

stlliMid

^?: 'the sun

rises/ qjrCTri) ^HPtf: 'the.

moon

rises

'

HjUMjsfr

*4>qi'ft 'the stars rise/

Vart.

This ascending

must

refer to heavenly bodies.

Therefore in

smoke rises from the surface of th$ terrace/ the verb

WfrlHfft Ujft^JfltM^
iCT is parasmaipadi. Why do we say in the sense of " to ascend" ? Witness
the boy assaUs4h^/ M*]4 tK, <td Ct *~t - a iv mj
4ij HiHpi qrara*: <$W*{
'the

IW

^: qi4&{tifc
)

H 89

II

Wfjfk

II

*:,

tn^-f^S*,

*&t

II

Tfo

11

fa^rfcsprer:

mifi^iul^ yiprnrnrf^i^w

H*ftr

11

41. After the verb kram, preceded by vi, the

Atmanepada is employed, when used in the sense of
* placing of foot-steps. 1

As qnfr

ft<tiHtl

'

the horse

is

pacing/

The term yikramana

is

applied to

the special movements of horse &c.

Digitized by

VjOOQlC

Bk.

I.

Ch.

The Atmanepada

4*, 43-]

III.

Though

DhAtupA^ha (catalogue of verbal

in the

and*rj have the meanings

sfitra is

what

is

139

roots), the

veib nrf%

pada-vihaxana and pAda-vikshepa, that

of

throwing or placing of foot," and so

11

verbs.

it

is

might be objected that the present

a useless repetition, yet as verbs have various other meanings than

assigned to them in the dhatupa{ha, the present sfitra is not un-

necessary.

Why do we

say "in the sense of throwing of foot"? In any other sense,

As

the terminations will be those of the parasmaipada.

thefetdof the antelope skin

is -rupture}*

q$rn*

lifamit

*t0w4rf^i|:

f%3tprf3f

ii

^T^f

n-^THRn^, *n*rt-

it

After the verb kram, the Atmanepada is

employed when it is preceded by pra and upa, both conveying the same sense; viz. that of "beginning an
42.

action."
As topi% Ht-rj*t 3WT^ *iT3^ he commences to eat &c.
The prefixes pra and upa are synonyms, when they denote the commencement of an action.
Why do we say, " when they are synonyms." Witness the following
tjjfaj: W^lHp *nfrgFnKWft 'he goes during the first part of the day and he
9

'

comes back during the

is

" to go," in another

Why
manepada by
answer

is

it

latter part of the day.

means " to

in the latter

case of

that Rule 39
'

Here

'

'

one case the sense

aparedyur upakramati
is

&c

'

there

is

not At-

the upasarga upa here?

not applicable, as that rule

is

continuity

in

return."

virtue of sfitra 39 ante, as there

tion of the sense of

limited

is

while in the present

The

by the condi-

sfitra,

that limita-

tion is not applicable.

After the verb kram, the Atmanepada is

optionally employed, when it is. not preceded by any
43.

preposition.
The root

*>*'

may always be conjugated as Atmanepadi when

The upasarga will be defined in I. 4. 59. The
option allowed by this sfitra is an example of what is technically known as
apr&pta vibhAsA viz., an option which is not an alternative limitation to a
'

kram

fc

not having any upasarga.

general rule already found or known.

Digitized by

Google

The Atmanepada

140

[JBk. L Ch. HI.

verbs.

44H6.

Examples: ICT^ or %mfo 'he goes over/ Why do we say ' when it is
without any preposition V For no option is allowed when it takes preposition.

As 3**PTft.

44. After the verb jna, when used in the

sense of * denying,' the Atmanepada is emlpoyed.
The

by rule
means

78,

root jfia which ordinarily

means

'to

know' and is'parasmaipadi

becomes Atmanepadi when through the virtue of any prefix it

as <U4*uftfr he Reives/ fEPPTniPfl^ he denies the debt

toltective:

'

'

'

of a hundred rupees/ 4J{UH<JJiH'ft 'denies a thousand/

Why

do we say when meaning 'to deny?" observe:

?f^f3ffovft

:
TTRTft 'thou knowest not anytb ng/

qre

&

8H

grer

itvft

sre^n?*,

(v, sno

tro)

11

Hl^i*^ 3 *A * faqi*^HKUH^4 *nft

45. And when used intransitively, after the
verb jfia, the Atmanepada is employed, even when the
fruit of the action does not accrue to the agent.
lf%:

As

gf

II

tl

engages

by means of clarihoney/ (See II. 3. 51).

This Atmanepadi form of jna is employed when the fruit of the action does not accrue to the agent From sfitra 76 it will be seen that
.

citfjt *iHl'?f^ft^rrft% 'he

in sacrifice

fied butter or

when

the fruit of the action accrues to the agent, the verb

How
word
fice,

in the

sarpil? is

above example the verb jna

not the object of knowledge, but

into which one engages from complete

pishah)

is

the genitive case

in

by virtue

which the instrumental IcAraka of the

Why

do we say

parasmaipadi, as re?i

arrant

is

jpfr

snow

jfia is

knows

of

Because the

intransitive ?

it is

an instrument of sacri-

II. 3.

51

and

it

*frjf^for *MUJ

(sar)

by

put in the genitive case.

Because

in the transitive

it

is

(recognizes) the son by his voice/

) n

After the verb jna, preceded by sam, and

Atmanepada is employed, when not used in
46.

prati, the

Atmanepadi.

knowledge (jn&na)

of." Intransitive"?
sfFftfr 'he

is

the sense of "remembering with regret."

Bk.

I.

Ch.

The word
that jfia which

so

jfia is

understood in this

verbs.

141

^^ * C^Yf^V

he promises a thousand/

Why
Because
tfjTRTfit

do we say when 'not meaning remembering with regret?'

not Atmanepadi, when it conveys that meaning. Thus IT*:
9
' he remembers with regret his mother
fay: ftaHlft II
it

is

ff^r:

>^HiRa f%$r*ndf **9 *f*ta*rfrrt

11

*wflr

After the verb vad, the Atmanepada is

employed, when used in the senses of " showing brilliance, or proficiency in," "pacifying," "knowledge/*
u
cc
effort," " difference of opinion," and flattering."
47.

By
pada,

sfitra 78,

by the present

vad generally takes the terminations of the Parasmaisfitra, it

takes also the affixes of the

Atmanepada when

having certain meanings.

Bh&sana, (shining) means to illumine as

illumines the Lokayat shastras,

by

wjifr

his discourses

Upasambhdshd (persuasions) means

The chlrvi

*wif tfta*f*?t

and clear exposition.

to appease, to conciliate as qnl-

STnjTOT^ he conciliates or cajoles the servants.

Jildna (knowledge) means to

know completely

as

fyyfr

knows completely to discourse upon Lokayat

Vatna (endeavour) means energy as vft wfW. ' He

chArvi

tfr

**% 'he

toils in

As tf^ft*^.

*m{ ffoKryl

the

shastra.
toils in the field/

the house. 9

Vitnati (disagreement)

means dissension, want

'They disagree over the

field'

1. <.,

of unanimous opinion.

holding different opinions

they talk diversely.

Upamantrana
entices the wife of

**% 'he

(enticing)

means

a respectable family

in the

above senses only

srerarotsg^T^

to coax in secret as, ffi?THrfr3<mpi 'he

(1. <.,

seduces her in secret)' *HjKljM-

flatters another's wife. 1

Why

*5 :
ff^r:

f
11

WO

X(0 )

See

a*

11

TTfr

fafanfa *hc says something'.

u^rffi

11

wnwiwN

**-9^t-

11

***STrtf rg^mrf

48.

11

^fhrmd

*Hrefrrrenrc%n*ifrrt H*ffr

11

After the verb vad, the Atmanepada

employed when used in the sense of "speaking

lately in a similar manner/
1

and the aphorism applies to

sfitra:

used in the transitive. As %pt ^JTPrtit # he l ooks for a hundred/

is

*m sf?f3Pftf

Thb Atmanepada

46-48. ]

III.

is

articu-

The Atmanepada

142

As #TO3?9 Al^nnr:

of the sfltra

articulate speech, speak

takes the

affix of

the

crowing'

pT: 'the cocks are

The sense

'

all in

verbs.

Bk.

I.

Ch.

Brihmanas are speaking/

it is

III.

But

49, 50.

in

*fqq?fcr

properly Parasmaipadi.

is that when men, who are only capable of

one and the same time, then the verb vad

the Atmanepada.

When

lower animals make a chorus of

noise, the verb does not take the Atmanepada.

there

is

There must be samuchchirana for the application of this rule, when

no samuchch&rana or speaking in a chorus, this rule does not apply,

as OTSTOt Ufa the Br&hraan 'speaks.'

'

wo n )

gHingreri

11

After the verb vad, preceded by anu

is intransitively used, the Atmanepada is employed, when the sense is that of" speaking articulately
in a similar manner."
As 4djj<f4<) gjT: cfartutq kafha is echoing or imitates kalapa. He
49.

when it

reutters exactly

what the kalipa-reader or the teacher says.

The word anu

here means similarly.

Why
the transitive

do we say
it

in the Intransitive '?

Because when

takes the affixes of the Parasmaipada.

As

it

is

used in

<rf$* H*^flfl1j34fll

he repeats the yajurveda which he had learned before.

The words uttering of articulate speech' are understood here
'

Otherwise ar^q^fi

4t*\f

the lute resounds, here

it is

Parasmaipada.

also*

After the verb vad, the Atmanepada is

employed optionally, when the sense is that of " contradicting each other.*
50.

As

ftOTsF^ or#?r tor: (the doctors are at variance).

vyaktav&ch&om (articulate utterance) and

gether) are understood in this

No

option

wrangling as

is

allowed

dUi^A flngTO

The phrase

'

samuchchAraoa

The words

(speaking to-

sfltra also.

when the sense is not that of contradiction or

The Brdhmanas are speaking together.

articulate utterance

'

is

necessary in this also.

Because

as ftrorfN tr^TO: the kites are quarrelling, the veib is in the Parasmaipada.

Bk.

I.

Ch.

III.

The Atmanepada

51, 52.]

verbs.

The wrangling must be by talking at one and

wise this rule will not apply. As wfru #OT $^r *T*

same time

the

Rw^

tradict

other-

the doctors con-

by turn another doctor.

st^t^i:
ffrT:

11

\% n q ^ifn a-eraif

^W^ll J f*HUlwJl4

II

Wfiti

v:

no

II

fc

After the verb gri c to swallow/

ava, the Atmanepada is used.
51.

by

ceded

As ^K ftiiPf

The

(he swallows).

when pre-

root grt to swallow preceded

by

the

preposition ava is Atmanepadi. The verb gri taken in this sutra means to
swallow and belongs to the Tudidi class, it is not the gft ' to make sound
which belongs to the kryidi class. Because there is no word formed with the
By sutra 78 this verb gfi
latter verb by affixing the preposition ava to it.
'to swallow

would have been Parasmaipadi, the

present sutra

debars

that.

When

is

it

not preceded by ava,

is

it

Parasmaipadi, as ftfcft be

swallows.

ff^T:

<u\jfis^ftK& 5rf^rr%

11

^HPnrr^R^t *r*f%

After the verb gri preceded by sam, the

Atmanepada is used, when employed in the sense of
52.

promising.'
As

mean

to

*iftf*frt

bPik9 (he promises to pay a hundred rupees) If it does not

it takes paras maipada terminations.
As

*ptf

promise or acknowledge,

*iro*rhe swallows the mouthful.

na va

) a

ifip

II

^^ITOr%: q*^*flh^l**Hljl**l>J1

nrfir

After the verb char * to walk * preceded by

used transitively the Atmanepada is employed.
53.

ut,

when

As $*<jmd he strays away from home iM^Hjq<<> he transgresses

commands of his preceptor.
Why do we say "when used in the transitive"? Observe qimgqifl
;

the

the vapour

is rising.

Here

it is

parasmaipadi.

q^ciliiigitii^ a H *RFfa a

(w WO tro)
?fif:

II

qm

^ftin-g^r^

11

^I^K^M^ 3 -rMlltHHMj
f

snfif H
Digitized by

n
VjG>OQLC'

144

The Atmanepada

verbs.

Bit

I.

Ch.

ML

S4# 55-

54. After the verb char, preceded by sam, and

connected with a noun in the Instrumental case, the
Atmanepada is employed.

As n[%7 3*nrd he
The

rides on the horse-back.

rule does not apply

the instrumental case.

As &tt

wanderest through both regions,

Instrumental case

is

when

it is

not in composition with a word in

^ %^T

<JMlfa %$ ^T$

stigfr

this

and that

implied, yet as

it

is

Devala

thou

Here though the sense of the

not expressly stated,

we

use the

parasmaipada terminations.

*rftw*

11

v^jt^icft

*nforr

^igwn}

H**ftftr

*v*n^ n

And after the

verb d& to give, preceded

by sam, and connected with a noun in the Instrumental
case, the Atmanepada is employed, provided this Instrumental case have the sense of the Dative case.
When is the 3rd case used with the force of the 4th case? That is
55.

answered by the following.

Vart: The Instrumental has the force of the Dative when immoral
conduct is implied. As {TOH or f^zrr *tore% (he gives with the object of

enticing to the female slave or prostitute).

The verb di

to give,

is

generally parasmaipadi,

becomes Itmane-

it

padi under the above conditions.

Why do we say " when it has the force of the dative case"

when

it

Because

has not the sense of the dative, parasmaipada terminations will be

he gives with his hand/

might be asked how the Atmanepada terminations are employed
when the preposition sam is not directly applied to the verb, but another pre-

used, as qrf*RT shW^sfa,

'

It

position pra, intervenes between

word samah
its

in sfitra

sam and the

and

is

9TW

The

reply

is

that the

is in

it

the genitive case,

used as an attribute.
**!8|*r* *5TOC3* H 1$

verb*

not in the ablative case (which would have required

54
being placed immediately before the verb), but
is

X(0 )
fftf:

II

V^tft

II

*VTH,

*W

W^

II

V*Vftf5W
^

^ ^ ^ ^HHHIWPff H*f*l
1

II

Digitized by

(^
r\r\n\o
Vji (J KJWVC

Bk.

I.

Ch.

III.

The Atmanepada

56, 57. ]

14*

verbs.

After the verb yam, to give, preceded by

upa, when used in the sense of " espousing,' the Atmanepada is employed.
56.

This

is clear.

As

not so

^1^^^

he espouses or knows his wife.

when

another's wife is meant, there

By

verb

present

rule 78, the

it is

But

parasmaipadi.

yam would have been

parasmaipadi, but the

makes an exception, when the root takes the preposition upa

" to marry, to espouse, or to accept
The meaning of sva-karana

sfitra

and means
j

is

This

confined to accepting in general.

to MahAbhAshya,

means

sva-karana

is

according to Kisika; according

make

to

one's

own what

was not

previously his own.

Why

do we say

in the

sense of " marrying"?

When

it

has any other

sense parasmaipada affixes will be'employed as S^r^ft <UU*m

Devadatta has illicit intercourse with the wife of Yajnadatta.

sno

lnfjfWfcW^

tro ) *

57. After the Desideratives formed by the

of the verbs
to know, sru, to hear, smyi to
remember, and djiS to see, the Atmanepada is employed.

jM

affix san,

The above

four roots are Atmanepadi

form, the suffix" san" being the pratyaya

The verb jna

when

in

the Desiderative

by which desideratives are formed.

takes the terminations of the Atmanepada

the senses indicated by the three

when used in

44, 45 and 46 already explained.

The desiderative form of jfiA would ex necessitate take Atmanepada affixes
when used in the above senses see Rule 62. The present sfitra however
enlarges the scope of Atmanepada by declaring all desideratives of jnA to be
Atmanepada, in whatever sense they may be used*
Similarly by sfitra 29 ante and the vArtika under it, the roots ru 9
and dpi, take the terminations of the Atmanepada, when preceded by sam,
sfitras

the desideratives of those would of course have taken Atmanepada affixes

62, but the present sfitra makes it general.
I

smp.

The present sfitra however enunciates a new

by

rule in the case of the root

As y&if f*i<!Nj3 he wishes

spjjnt he serves the teachers, *n*

to

know

(i>. enquires

5^% he wishes

to

after) religion *[$

remember the lost

yt

ftf^T% he wishes to see the king.

Why do we say, when taking the iffix san ? Because the primitive
verbs will take the parasmaipada terminations as *n*fft he knows; tpflftrhe
hears,

mtfH he remembers Tpqf% he

sett.
Digitized by

LiOOQ LC

The Atmanepada

146

*It^;

\c

11

q?[Tf*r

verbs.

*T

II

ST^T*

Bk.

I.

Ch. IIL 58-60.

VT: WO^o)

ll

^n^m^T^rt * wflr
58. After the desiderative of jM when preanu the Atmanepada is not employed.

?fa:

mfljil*iiMifr ;

11

ceded by
This

ah exception to the

is

the prefix anu

11

The

last sfitra.

desiderative of

jfid

with

not dtmanepadi.

is

45 limits the scope of parasmaipada to the

transitive, desiderative verb anu-jiiA.
As J^prjfinrfraft he enquires after

This

sfitra

Why

do we say when preceded by anu

read with

sfitra

the son.

As >**&{ ft'HTOQ' he

take the Atmanepada terminations.

( **T:

WO
yfa:

HO

it

will

inquires after religion.

rr^*Mr

*fa

11

Because otherwise

^gft^gf^-: q*renrreft*N

H^rfir

ii

After the desideratives of 6ru when preceded by prati and &fi the Atmanepada is not used.
59.

The verb

when taking

6ru

the prefixes prati and An,

padi, though taking the desiderative "san.*'

.

This

Thus sn%%ycffi and miyyiifr

rule of sfitra 57.

The word

pravachaniyas (see

I. 4.

83) then the

sor^: fifca:

II

^0

ll

is

also an

if

they are used as karma-

rule will not apply

xr^Tfa

V%t

II

exception to the

and in must be upasargas;

prati

not Atmane-

is

As ?^HT

fsrcr:

*pg*%

iflRr

WO

HO

II

II

After the verb 6ad to decay, when' it has

one of the affixes with an indicatory & (6it) the Atmane60.

pada

is used.

The
tory

jr, is

read

sfitra

root 'sad

'

when taking any

conjugated in the Atmanepadi.

VII. 3. 78.

marked with an indicaIn connection with this, must be

affix

which

is

TniB^^liiKIU^t^^^^^^^li^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^"

by which the root qr^ is replaced by tffar before affixes, having an

indicatory *r
Thus *Tf + *r + % *ffa + b^ ^ffaHfr he decays or withers,
*fHft they two decay *ffai*$T they decay.
Why do we say before affixes having an indicatory *r? Before

^fNttft^T:

other

affixes, it is

not Atmanepadi.

As HjAI<^^ if he decayed,

TC**rf*r

he

will

decay, firaroft

The well-known vikaranas

are

fiflj affixes.

like

*r

In other words the root Sad

&c, the

is

affixes like

Atmanepadi

in all

tional tenses.
Digitized by

to &o,

conjuga-

C^r\r\a\o
V^OVjy IC

Bk.

I.

Ch.

The Atmanepada

6i, 62. ]

III.

147

verbs.

3TT0 T|0 ) M

After the verb rnji to die, when it has one

of the affixes having an indicatory *r, as well as when it
takes the affixes lufL (aorist III 2. 110) and lift (Benedictive III. 3. 159) the Atmanepada is used.
61.

This

a restrictive

is

as an indicatory letter, so

sutra,

the

by sutra 12

the present aphorism restricts

it

tenses, as well as to those tenses

which are

and

ffr& liA

It will

fil<.

(^ affixes

(Benedictive)

be found hereafter

are the special tenses

the present, the Imperfect, the Potential and the Imperative.

only before these three

It is

mp

that the root

before sit affixes thus

1%^

rtfa

The

root

^r

vikarana

tf

$ belongs

is

lift,

luA

he dies/

(VI. 4. 77.

- 5 + v + %
rf%r

'

may he

(VII. 4.

and sit affixes,

Thus the aorist
die/

Similarly

28 ft? mftH**l )

^j^Tj^ft ^^Irft^^w) fii^r , fini^

Tud&di which take the

to the sixth class of verbs called

viz.,

parasmaipadL

^r**^*:

'

the conjugational tenses

%t in

namely,

Benedictive s*frr mrishishja

Rre%

In other tenses,

verb

affixes,

takes the terminations of the dtmanepada.

yQ1% ampta he died

this

to W3F lun (Aorist)

that out of the ten tenses, those that take

i.e.,

(to die), is marked with a

would be always Atmanepadi. But

root
it

11

(III. 1. 77).

the two Futures, the Perfect and the conditional,

As:

nfi^Pl he

will die.

^ u *5t0c n *nNr^

The verb which

UjnRtq^

***

srw no

Atmanepadi in its
primitive form before the taking of the affix san, will
also be Atmanepadi when it ends in the affix san. In
other words after a desiderative verb, Atmanepada is
employed, if it would have been used after the primitive
62.

is

verb.
If

the primary verb

parasmSiipadi

Atmanepadi.

is parasmaipadi, its desiderative will be also

the primary verb is Atmanepadi, ifs desiderative will be
This is the general rule. Some exceptions to it have already
if

been mentioned

in

sutras 57, 58,

and

59.

root which

was Atmanepadi,

before taking the Desiderative affix ^san, will be Atmanepadi even when it
takes the affix *sr san. In other words, that by reason of which the Atmanepada affixes were ordained in the primary verb, will cause the same terminaDigitized by

LiOOQ 16

*148

The Atmanepada

tions to be applied
12, that roots

when the verb ends

in

verbs.

Thus

*p^san.

Ch. lit 62.

was

said in sAtra

Bk.

it

having an anuditta accented vowel as indicatory or

a^ A

as

Thus vm%
down) and *ft^ (to

Atmanepada.

their indicatory letter take the terminations of the

he sits down and *ftr ' he sleeps/ The verb Bfl^ (to sit
lie down) will remain Atmanepadi, even when they are used as Desideratives.
Thus *rRrfifa?r he wishes to lie down/ Similarly sfitra 17 declared that the
verb fifty, is Atmanepadi as ftfrcrit this will be Atmanepadi also in the
Desiderative form, as f%f%i%WT% he wishes to enter/ So also by sfltra 40,
'

'

TnCTft

*f ^ ^%*
^

:l
:
',

*-^

is

Atmanepadi, the Desiderative flfttto%

will also

be AtmanepadL

are Atmanepadi, yet

*ffo% and ft^
*
he
wicheo
he
to
lie
dow
n
wishes
to
die/
are parasmaipadi.
3^<fa%
ftrcTOI%
Because the Atmanepada affixes were ordained after the roots qjf and

--^But though by 60 and 61.

'

55

'

only under excep-tional conditions and not generically, and as those

conditions do not exist in the desiderative, the latter does not take Atmanepada

V
/

uCL

terminations.

/
'^

Of course

which

primary state would not have taken the

terminations of the Atmanepada, there being a prohibition to that effect
will not allow them in its Desiderative form.
As HjHftmflflft ' he wishes
that

to imitate,' Milftchtfft.

in its

Here the root f?sj by

rule 79 has

been especially de-

clared to be parasmaipadi, to the exclusion of Atmanepada affixes which would

come by Rule 32 and 72, and therefore its Desiderative

The force of ^ causing Atmanepada is counteracted

otherwise have
is also

by

parasmaipadi.

79.

Now
a

root

is

it

might be asked:

True,

this rule provides for those cases

ative conjugation.

But what provision do you make

which take the

3^

affix

And

for those

even in their primitive form

have no prior form to look upon as a guide

affixes.

where

conjugated in two forms, one a Primitive and another a Desider-

and

in

in the application

there are at least 7 such quasi -roots which take

partial verbs

whose case we
of Atmanepada

in this

way,

Those quasi-roots are ^r, f*n^, f%?<r, 1FJ,

*>f $P( and wj. What are we to do with these quasi-roots, which are always
conjugated with the affix ^r J and have no simpler conjugation ?" To this we
called also the self-descriptive

reply

" In the case of these partial verbs which take the self-descriptive

the pada will be regulated

have.
*Ihl*U

For though the

and $<IHI

"a sign made

in

by the

full

yet by the

q%

indicatory letters which these quasi-roots

roots are

^ppa

maxim a^R#

fifa^T,

fftf

f*T^p

fofam ftaFr <Nw

^Jfnn^ fMfa* HT
,

filr

a portion of a thing, qualifies the whole thing/ 9 the sign

&c, will qualify the whole verb SRp^r &c" Thus

*np%
he despises, ftfc?*r% he cures *fhrfcr% he investigate^nfcc.
we have
made

in the expression *J

Bk.

Ch.

I.

III.

if^T:

II

The Atmanepada

63. ]

149

verbs.

MIJiHW^fRlfc ^pfrJi^^lWW^Hl *T*Rf

II

like the verb that takes the affix &m f

if the verb be conjugated with the Atmanepada terminations, so of the verb kri when subjoined thereto as an
auxiliary, the terminations are of the Atmanepada,
oven when the fruit of the action does not accrue to
the agent.
63.

sfitra applies where the fruit of the action does not accrue to the
There are in Sanskrit two forms of the perfect tense (f*^):
one formed in the ordinary way by the reduplication of the root and adding
the terminations; the other called the periphrastic perfect, is formed by

This

agent.

3^

adding

to the

and then

root,

(to do), ^ ( to be ) or Hf[

anuprayoga or auxiliary verbs, as

roots

tense

formed.

is

The

sfitra

principals,

prosper)

is

supplies the answer:

the

other

auxiliaries

will

tion

be parasmaipada, as

do

auxiliary

verbs

are

Thus the

not.

root ^>f (to increase,

vjH* (he prospered). Similarly

parasmaipadi and the auxiliary $r after

Thus
is

<il4j4hlt (he

it

'

appeared with great splendour).

But the other auxiliaries ^and H^ retain their own peculiar conjugaand are not influenced by the conjugation of their principal. Thus ipir-

The word Am-pratyaya

Am

latter

Atmanepadi, therefore in forming the periphrastic perfect, the verb

f^(to appear with great splendour)

it

These

with their help that the perfect

forming the periphrastic perfect ?

follows the conjugation of

in

the

be also in the Atmanepada.

f? will

the perfect tense of the

question then arises, what conjugation, parasmai or

Atmanepada, do these auxiliaries take

This

it is

it

be).

(to

f?

called

to

affixing

(III.

I.

35 and

36.

of the sutra

^gmrwWg%

f*&

means

comes/

subjoined to another as an auxiliary, the termination

like the

verb that takes the

affix

Am.

If this

'that after

which the

Of the verb
is

that of the

sutra enjoined

krifi,

affix

when

Atmanepada

rule of injunction

then there would be the termination of the Atmanepada even in

examples like Sjfcirfcresit and gjfrqpyKTC where the fruit of the action
accrues to the agent.
This is no valid objection^ to the present sfitra.
(vidhi),

be interpreted in both ways, that is, both as a vidhi (a general injuncand a niyama (a restrictive injunction). How is that to be done? Because the word purvavat of the last sutra is to be read in the present aphorism

It is to

tion)

The second explanation in that case

a niyama or restrictive rule.
also.

will

be

for the sake of establishing

150

The Atmanepada

verbs.

Bk.

Ch.

I.

Ill 64.

has already been said above that the auxiliary verbs *R,\ and
ira are used in forming the periphrastic perfect This is done by force of
I.
the aphorism III.
40 fr^M^ft fe> meaning, the verb kr/ifi is
It

annexed in the perfect tense, to verbs that take Am. In this sfltra (III. I. 40)
the word kr/in is a pratyAhAra, implying the verbs 55^ , ^ands*^. ** mi ght
be asked how is this pratyAhAra formed? The word kji is taken from
and the
Sec-,
the fourth word of sfitra V. 4. 50, *J*JJW.*I? ^w*R<l4W
This is the way
sfitra V. 4. 58 spfrffsffcf &c.
krin is used as
the
verb
not
only
explain
how
commentators
in which the
an auxiliary in forming the periphrastic perfect, but also the verbs
and tra . These three verbs denoting absolute action unmodified by any
letter

is

taken from

especial condition have in

languages been fixed upon as the best auxi-

all

liaries.

must however be noted that the word kjifi in this sfltra is not used
and sj^.
as aprat3'AhAra and consequently does not include the verbs
It

jftqwt g5ft*rerereg

swiHn%

ano

xto )

11

v* n n^ifH n h-4<iihihi, git*

qffffr^i M<K4^iM<*aiftui

ygfs^^n

After the verb yuj to join, tlie Atmanepada is used, when it is preceded by pra and upa except
with reference to sacrificial vessels even when the fruit
of the action does not accrue to the agent.
64.

The verb
72

it

agent.

*ifSl^ 'to

join*

The present

sfitra

agent

when

svaritet,

when

this

{Rf rf%

may

take

when not employed

the termi-

Because there the terminations

<rnrrT%

will

ir

and 57

in reference to

As R^^tfe 'he joins or employs' ^TJ^% 'he

do we say "when not employed in reference

VArtika:
of the

verb

After the verb *r^ preceded by the prepositions

sacrificial vessels.

vessels ?"

sfitra

the fruit of the action does not accrue

the terminations are of the Atmanepada,

Why

and consequently by

the fruit of the action accrues to the

declares

nations of Atmanepada, even

to the

is

always Atmanepadi, when

is

fits

or uses/

to sacrificial

be of the parasmaipada.

As

*&*&* -

be rather stated that the root takes the terminations

preposition beginning or ending
an important modification of the above rule. Thus

It shall

Atmanepada when preceded by any

with a vowel.

This

^*|^ and faqw^.

is

In fact,

all

upasargas, with the exception of

^, firr

and

3^, either begin or end with a vowel, and therefore the VArtika ^mounts
to the inclusion of all prepositions with the above excep^on^

CoOQl

Bk.

I.

Ch. HI. 65-67.

The Atmanepada

With ^n, f%^ and jr

nations

however, the root

lot

verbs.

parasmaipada termi-

will take

as tig^frtr.

^T:

?^:

Vl

II

*^ir

II

II

**?:

*$V

3H0 90 ) B

After the verb kshnu, to sharpen, pre-?

ceded by sam, the Atmanepada is employed.
The verb ^3 'to sharpen, whet, or grind/ is generally parasmaipadi,
65.

it is 4tmanepadi when it is preceded by the prefix g^; as ^^jtttrc^Pr

'he whets the weapon' 3^[41?r 'they two whet' *J^<gq% 'they all whet'.
It might be objected, why has a separate aphorism been made of the;

but

verb kshnu,

when

it

also speaks of the

richchha &c.
the
as

is

To

sfitra 29 ante, which

when used with the verbs gam

could well have been included in the

force of the prefix sam,

answer

this the

is that,

that sutra treats of intransitive verbs,

word akarmaka being understood therein, while the present sfitra,

evident from the example we have given above, treats of transitive

verbs.
>

MiftR^
Tf^rftii

\%\\ 9^rf*r

11

11

wt:

<mvsfl

mow

After the verb bhuj, the Atmanepada is*

used, except in the sense of protecting.
66.

The

root bhuj

when

it

does not mean to protect,

Atmanepadu

is

This root belongs to the rudhadi class and has several meanings,
to cherish, to preserve, to eat,
bhufijAte, bhunjate

But

&c.

and to enjoy.

*m\ yfa

As

jpft

ftor 'the

'

feed,

as, to

he eats or enjoys

also

'

father cherishes the sons'*

^JHTrH^HpHilR^n

The

root bhuj belongs also to the tudadi class, but there

The bhuj belonging

sense of being curved or crooked.

is

not to be taken in this

protecting.

Therefore

sfitra,

f%*prf3)r

because that bhuj

Tlf^r

'

has the

it

to the tudadi class

has never the sense of

he bends the hand/

is in

the paras-

maipada.

Slv^i

*&b$

93

Wrft 3ft *frf^H itll*livqi^

^t ^Af ^ *

*5^tf

,3RT*qj^

It

^9
(

II

W0

q^lfa

90

II

5fr:^

II

67. After u verb ending in the affix jji (causal)

the Atmanepada is employed, provided that when the-"
object in the non-iji or non-causal sense becomes thfr

152

The Atmanepada

__.:

verbs.

Bk.

I.

Ca. HI. 67.

agent in the causal ; and when it does not mean to remember with regret ;' even when the fruit of the action
does not accrue to the agent.
c

The

causatives (f*P^) are conjugated in the Atmanepadi,

when

is to say when a word which was an

becomes nominative case in the causa-'
the ordinary verbs becomes objective case

they are used in the passive voice, that

objective case in the ordinary verb
tive

and the nominative case

in the causative.

In short

of

when

causatives are used in the passive voice,

This round-about phraseology has been employed,

they are Atmanepadi.

because the base of the active and the passive causatives do ^ot

form;

as*ji0te*j9 ff^pranp^fpfr.

The phrase

'

*fc

succeeding sutras and

ing words

'

dfr:

qp? 'object;' &

is

(after the causatives)

after the causative f *ftt

tqr 'if;'

^:

'

of this sfitra governs the four

The

understood in them.

in the causative;'

differ in

'

sfitra

consists of the follow-

in the non-causative

'that;'

;*

sraf 'nominative

;'

what;'

*Hreitf

'except to remember.'
In general, by sfitra 74, the causative verbs take the terminations

of the Atmanepada,

present

sfitra

when

the fruit of the action accrues to the

agent

The

applies to the case where the fruit of the action does not accrue

to the agent.
After the verbs that take the

affix fr^,

the terminations are those of

How ? When that which was the object when the primiwas used non-causatively, becomes also the object when the derivative verb is used causatively ; and even that object becomes also the agent
as well. There is exception however, in the case when the verb means to
the Atmanepada.

tive verb

remember with regret.' As HjlOPtf *R*PT tftdlh|: ' the elephant-keepers

mount the elephant.' Let us paraphrase this sentence by transforming th^

<4jl<]T<Ptr into a causative form. The sentence then

<qi0^3 f**fr trcfo 'the elephant makes itself to be mounted'. Similarly
^Mf%qPd {fcw 3fci14ti: 'the elephant-keepers sprinkle the elephant'; and
OT&^fr 1V$t **I*I*N the elephant makes itself to be sprinkled ;' <Tprf^I *J**ir
THTR^ the attendants see the king and $afcr% n*TT ^5R%T the king makes

primitive non-causative verb

will be,

'

'

'

himself to be seen/

Why
this sfitra will
sal verb,

is,

do we say 'after the causatives?"1 Because the rule of

not apply, if the verb though conveying the sense of a cau-

however, not formed by the

affix (5j^;

as atffttfN ?ft*Pf ffttfT^T:

and Ml ft gem mil ffvft WWiXf lh

9
'the elephant that is being mounted, mounts gracefully . Here the terminay
tions are of the parasmaipada in the second case also.
'the elephant-keepers

mount the

elephant;'

Bit

Ch.

I.

Why do we
when

not apply,

The Atmanepada

67. ]

III.

say

the

in the non-causative non-ni

'

verb

primitive

itself is

added

the

in

and not

sense,

self-descriptive

'

Thus

the root *mj belongs to chur&di class

ed/

The

For

this role will

formed by the

ftj^
nich is

affix

which the

or chur&di in

such are the roots of the tenth class

153

verbs.

a causative

for

purpose.

whose causative and primitive

forms are the same. As *rcreft *ntf *Ti4Mh: 'the cowherd counts the herd;9
and the causative form is *JUj^ft TT: *TO*ta 'the herd makes itself to be count;

terminations in both cases are those of the parasmaipada.

Why do we
cause the rule will

when the object (karma) becomes the agent.' Benot apply, when any other k&raka or case, than the karma
say

'

or object, of the primitive verb becomes the agent in the causative.

spnf?*

siw

'

he cuts with the scythe/ snrcft *PT ^ra^f 'the scythe

Here the word d4tra was the instrument

cut of itself/

is

Thus

made to

of the primitive

verb

which became agent in the causative, and therefore in the causative the terminations are of the parasmaipada only.

Why do we say' if in

the causative

sentence and the causative sentence.

mount
that

is

6rst sentence

the

purpose

Therefore the rule does not apply

here where the causative verb ttaqflt in

in

in the sutra? It is for the

verb must be one and the same, both in the primary

of indicating that the

used

the

HJHlsPq ffert

second

tfct<44ii:

sentence

was not

the elephant-keepers

and HjlflqqHlUJ) **fl4l<U! % R1% iJrtT 'the elephant

being caused to mount is made to sprinkle with urine the frightened

the

elephant;'

men*.

The word 9:

'that

is

employed

objects in both sentences must be the

in the

aphorism to show that the

same and not

Therefore in

different*

the following example where the objects are different, the terminations of

parasmaipada are only used.

HjiO^fcl

f^PT *ft<nrarn

'

the elephant-keepers

elephant'; and ejrctfWT) **ft tqwjli)* <lft *T3*P ' the elephant,
being caused to mount, makes men mount on the land/

mount the
that

is

Why do we
object

is

use the word karti (agent) in the sfitra?

pada only would be used.

mount the elephant ; and
mount'

Why do we

say

As WCirff^ vfcpt cftOTOR

UH

the former

forest tree

;'

and

itself.

W3<54

fls^ft J?pnw:

'

'

the elephant-keepers

the elephant-driver

makes

it

to

except

ness?' Observe, CTtfir <H^*^U3

bered of

If

not the agent in the second case, the 'terminations of the parasmai-

when meaning

tlfo<ri:

**npl:

W3^*

to

remember with tender-

'the dove remembers, with regret, the

'the forest tree

is

made

to be

remem*

Digitized by

VjOOQLC

Thb Atmanepada

13*

sfo*^f*nft

WO

X(0 )

n \*

verbs.

Bk.

1/

xt^ifk n *a-**ft:

11

Ch.

III.

%^-fl^

68-69.

( t

tt

nfolyw
of the verbs bhl to
causatives
the
After
G8.
fear, and smi to wonder, even the fruit of the action
accrues not to the agent the Atmanepada is employed,
when the fear is produced directly by the causative
ihr: nf>fo: grafts q*nqH3i<

agent.
The
sfitra

and

phrase

of the causative ending in ftr'

restricted to cases

understood in this

is

from the previous aphorism.

to be supplied

is

where the

fruit of the

This

sfitra

is

also

action does not accrue to the agent.

The word |tj in the aphorism has been defined later on in sfitra I. 4. 55
When
( Wf^T ^r^fi" ); it is the agent which is the mover of another's agent
a fear is caused by a $5 it is called <TTO- The word H*T 'fear* in the
aphorism
also.
'

is

As

illustrative,

*ft**r%

*\(l<8t

'

and includes by implication

the

jatila,

fire*RJ

the cock -headed frightens/

the munda, the shave-headed frightens '; *ffe3t ft^TTnr^

5**fr fiwiinil 'the

munda

'astonishment

astonishes

i.e.

'

*r*?fr

Hfrra#

the jatila astonishes/

the very fact of matted-hair or

shaven-head frightens' &c.

Why

do we say tyre?

For

if

the fear or astonishment

is

not

the direct result caused by the agent, but arises from something else, then
the Atmanepada will not be used.
the kunchika/

^TD

fagTPreffr

'

As ^f^T^f qnrefc

'he frightens him with

he astonishes with his form*. Here kunchika and

rupa are the instruments, which cause fear or astonishment, and are not the
hetu thereof.

***%

( *:

STW *0

tt

After the causatives of the verhs_gyidh to

go, the Atmanepada is employed,
when used in the sense of deceiving, even though the
fruit of action does not accrue to the agent.
69.

covet,

and vafich to

The phrase
sfitra 67.

This

of the causatives

ending

sfitra is also restricted

in

fiSj* is

to the cases

accrue

means

AsiPPRi trf^'be deceives

deceiving.

cheats the boy/

be supplied here from

where the

The word iMHf

action does not

to the agent.

to

fruit of

of

the

the' sfitra:

*^T*# ****
izedbydo gle

the boy/ fpf*3i

.Bk.

Ch.

I.

III.

Why do we
not

this

The Atmanepada

70-71. ]

say 'when

means

it

For these verbs have

deceiving.'

As J^pt ir&qft

meaning, their causatives take parasmaipada.

causes the dog to bark/

*rf8?

9*n^-^l<^ft-^*$T:

q^^fa he

^:

'

he

avoids the serpent'

'

155

verbs.

H^H%

WTO TW

) N

After the causative of the verb 11 to melt

or stick, the Atmanepada is employed, when used in the
sense of showing respect, subduing and deceiving, even,
though the fruit of action does not accrue to the agent.
70.

The phrase
sfitra

67.

This

'

sfitra

of the causative

has

its

ending

in ftj' is to

scope only when the

be supplied here from

of the action does

fruit

In the Dhdtupatha, there arc two roots 5ft

accrue to the agent.

technically called ?ft? and

means

not

one

to stick, and belongs to divadi class.

is

The

meaning to ' melt' belongs to kryidi class. As there is no specifiis to be taken, both are therefore taken.
cation in the sfitra what
The force of the word ^r in the sutra is to include the word SffiTFr
*to delude' of the last sutra into the present. The word *wi*m means to show
other

+tt

&

The word ui^4)h<^ means

respect

As ^.ipKMI^S he gets

to subdue.

'

shown to him through or on account of his

?pi% qfa*l3feU4*M 'the hawk subdues the partridge', *K^rrgSFni%

jespect or causes respect to be

matted

who

hair.'

deceives theeA

The
changed into

ftwir

sfitra

tffoit:

VI.

I.

51 declares that the | of 5ft

But there

*JT before certain terminations.

is

is

optionally

no option allowed

when the root 5ft has any of the above three senses: in these cases the substituFor the option allowed by sfitra
tion of *rr is necessary and not optional.
VI.

51

I.

is

ftqrar applicable every-

a c*nfeptf% irqT and not a general

where.

Why

do we say

Because otherwise there

when

is

has the meaning

it

parasmaipada.

fi^m^i <^ M T4^^T%

f*:

3ln%

( ^t:

WO

xw

ft

11

As
toi

11

of,

to

show respect &c. ' ?

*nTOi5?t*ITOfir

n^ ft
i

11

f^T^OTnjrax ,

After the causative of the verb kpi, the

when it has the word mithya,
incorrect, as an upapada or dependent word, and is.
71.

Atmanepada

is used,

156

The Atmanepada

___

verbs-

Bk.

Ch. IIL 71-72.

employed in the sense of repeated wrong utterance*

even when the fruit of the action does not accrue to
<

the agent.
The phrase of
67. The aphorism

sfitra

^
~?f

is

restricted to the cases

to

be supplied from

where the

fruit of the action

the causative ending in fa

'

is

The word abhyAsa means doing

does not accrue to the agent.

again, or

he repeatedly pronounces the word

repetition as <rt fiwjr ***Hqfa means
incorrectly that is with wrong accent &c, not once but constantly*.
Why do we say 'when the word mithyA is used as an upapada?'
The causative of kp will take parasmaipada when it has any other upapada.
Thus <rt ygfc *hHq f% he pronounces the word correctly.'
Why do we say of the verb frsj? Because the causative of any other
verb used along with the word mithyA will not have Atmanepada; as <rf
ftw ^T^^lf^r he repeatedly utters the word wrongly/ Here T^ takes parasmai'

'

'

'

pada.

Why
habitual, then

wrongly,

do we say 'repeatedly'?
parasmaipada

not always but once/

For

if

be used; as

will

the incorrect utterance

<rt

ftiqi4iH4fd

is

not

he pronounces

"

After the verb marked with a svarita,

(svaritet) or which has an indicatory fi rfiit), the terminations of the Atmanepada are employed, when the
fruit of the action accrues to the agent.
72.

The anuvptti

The word
of the phrase i^: does not go further.
a
compound, meaning fruit of the action.' When the principal
ftronrtt
object for the sake of which the action is begun, is meant for the agent indicated by the verb, there the Atmanepada is used after verbs having an
indicatory sy or a svarita accent. As *nr% ' he sacrifices for himself p*% he
cooks for himself/ Here the verb tpr and *r\ are marked with svarita accent
in the DhAtupAtha, and therefore they take the Atmanepada terminations.
is

'

Similarly

gj^

'he presses the so ma-juice/

^^

he does/

'

Here the

verbs gsj and ^rsj have an indicatory 3j.

In

all

the above cases, the principal object of the action such as getting

heaven by performance of

That
cooks

is

sacrifice, eating of food

&c,

to say, he sacrifices in order that he himself

in order that

he himself may

eat,

&c.

is

meant

may

for the

agent
he

attain heaven,
ed by

Bk.

Ch.

I.

Why do we
Otherwise

it

The Atmanepada

73, 74. ]

III.

say

'

when

As

have parasraaipada.

will

chJ^MC

their masters)' apifcf

'

*nrf*I

work

the priests sacrifice,

'the cooks

cook

(for their masters).

(for

Here

which the agent gets, yet as that

not the principal object for which the action was begun the principal
fruits

object of the sacrifice

sacrificer

may go

to

was not that

heaven

Here the principal

pada.

*U*i4(l:

q^rf^ct rr^CT:

the menials

though the fees and the wages are the

fruit is

accrues to the agent 9 ?

the fruit of the action

(not for themselves, but for their clients)'

157

verbs.

the priest should get his fee, but that the

the verb takes the terminations of the Parasraai-

fruit of

the action does not accrue to the agent

but to a third party.

*%

sno tw

fPrf:

it

wtiliw: ^rlpttra fe^nr^ *TT*H<I* >rcfa

73. After the verb vad to tell, preceded by
II

11

when the fruit of the action accrues to the agent,

terminations
are of the Atmanepada*
the
aj>a,

The

phrase "

when the fruit of

The sutra is clear. As

understood here.

forsakes justice, that is to say,

But when the

justice.

parasmaipada

is

wo

xw

'the wealth-seeker,

sacrifice of

does not accrue to the agent, the

As W*tf%.

ba a

<i^TfSi

11

ftre:

^Hifwni*

feqrR%

) n

fRr-

when

11

-m^q-H^

qpraiPft

he wishes to acquire wealth at the

fruit of the action

employed.

ftmg

the action accrues to the agent," is

11

ftnig <mi^u< >nrH *r%Pisr^

ftnmra

11

74, After a verb ending in affix i.ii (causal)

the fruit of the action accrues to the agent, the

Atmanepada is employed.
The phrase "when
be supplied from
rally causatives.

<n^Rl*T

tion

TCttT

'

sfttra

As

3vi

72.

the fruit of the action accrues to the agent"

The

verbs that take the

<KK4% he causes
'

he causes the food to be cooked

the

mat

to be

for himself.

does not accrue to the agent, the parasmaipada

he causes anothers mat to be made.

'

V*v

^t^l^rr^^5rt ijrNr^: ^%Pmr%

affix fiir*

made

When
is

for

is

to

nich are gene*

himself sfof

the fruit of the ac-

used.

As

qrcr

5nmft

f*r**n?

^n^m*

H*f?r *rof%.

158

The Atmanepada

verbs.

Bk.

I.

Ch.

75, 76.

III.

After the verb yam to strive, preceded by

sam, ut and to, when it does not refer to a book, the
Atmanepada is employed, when the fruit of the action
accrues to the agent.
75.

The phrase

'

when

the fruit of the action accrues to the agent

As

read into this aphorism by anuvritti from sutra 72.

gathers rice

The
the

^RJ^3%

is

'

'

he

HPCyT^S^i 'he lifts up the load' qfemi4*&?t 'he draws out the cloth/

'

yam preceded by

root

ffrsfcr

Atmanepada by

the preposition ^rr^f takes the terminations of

aphorism the verb
; but in that

virtue of aphorism 28 ante

was intransitive, here it is transitive, and this explains the

two different sutras for one compound verb SJRP

Why

do we say

'

when

it

necessity of

making

does not refer to a book.'

For otherwise

As

OTTtgft fef^Rqf

the verb will take the terminations of the parasmaipada.

3?: 'the physician studies diligently the medicine.

When
the above

however the

fruit of

compound verbs are parasmaipadi. As

wgq^nhra:
<3TTd

qo

the action does not accrue to the agent

b%

11

vFrfk

11

dq^

ffr,

W4<kft, *7nre$fo

^ly ra^, :

^fam^

II

ff^r.

vijwiTviiMri: 9&f>nira ferarcr^ *n*i%<T* >Rfir

11

11

After the verb jM when not preceded by

the terminations are of the Atmanethe fruit of the action accrues to the agent.

76.

any upasarga,
pada,

when

The phrase
understood

own*

in

^TC^ *THt%

Why

'

<S|p3

when

*J*fHlPt

When

prepositions,
*JT.

'

<rr

*rf siPfttl

to the

agent

'

is

he recognises the cow as his

it

may

take the

the fool does not

fruit of

know

For when
Atmanepada terminations ; as

the heavenly regions.'

the action does not accrue "to the agent,

takes parasmaipada terminations.

recognises Devadatta's

II

Thus

he recognises the horse as his own.'

however, the

the simple root

^PfT:

the fruit of the action accrues

sutra also.

do we say when not preceded by any upasarga ?

compounded with

^A

'

this

$???rer

tf STPTTft

he

cow/

*rfn WWTOJ 90PtlecHJ|<|<|{ *PT R*fN*T%

^%Pm%

ftf^RT^ fiPfHT*-

wfc*>Pinill
Digitized by

Pnoalp
VjVjijy IC

Bk.

Ch.

I.

III.

The Parasmaipada

77, 78. ]

77.

150

verbs.

The Atmanepada is optionally nsedj when

the fact of the fruit of the action accruing to the agent

is indicted by an upapada i.e., by a word used along with
the verb.
By

the preceding five sfitras 72 to 76,

Atmanepada terminations were

ordained to come after verbs which implied the accrual of the fruit of the
action to the agent, that is to say, where the verb by itself denoted this. But

when

the

same

idea, instead of

being inherent

in the

verb, is expressed

by

by a word governed by the verb, the necessity of using

Atmanepada
affixes,
to denote the same idea, is obviously removed, and
the
in such a case it is optional whether we use the Atmanepada or the Parasmaipada terminations. As etf Kt *T5rf?t or *nnt he sacrifices for his own
yajna'
grfsrctfl* or 3j*% he makes his own cot/ ** J^nmffa or Bm^f,
FPfr?5* <rrec% or qre*rf% &c. So on with all the above five sfitras.
an upapada, that

is

'

'

flNi^H^w r^j^fed hji^^jj^ ii

78. After the rest i.e., after all those verbs not
falling under any one of the previous provisions, the
terminations of the Parasmaipada are employed, in
marking the agent (i.e., in the active voice).
sfitras,

i[miH*3Rq<*3M4 H*f?r

fnr:

11

The

rules of

12 to 77.

Atmanepada have been declared

The

terminations of the

in the

preceding 66

Parasmaipada, which are the

come everywhere else that is to say where

its operation is not debarred by any one of the preceding aphorisms.
The
present sfitra declares this universal rule. The word sesha or the rest, means
general verbal terminations, will

that which

is

Thus

the residue after the application of

all

the previous restrictive

was declared by sfitra 12 ante that a root having an AnudAtta

vowel or a sf as it, will take Atmanepada terminations. As *mit, *r#
The
converse of this will take parasmaipada terminations, namely all verbs which
do not have an anudAtta accent or a r as it. Thus irrft he goes, *rf% ' it
blows/ It has been declared by sfitra 17 that the root fttr when preceded by
rules.

it

'

f% takes Atmanepada termination, asftf%g3.

any other preposition

Why do we

it

will take the

parasmaipada termination.

say "when marking the agent"?

passive voice, the root will take the

is

cooked

'

ip^ 'it

Wljen not preceded byftbut

is

Atmanepada

As

4jlfi*lft,

For when used

termination.

gone/
Digitized by

in the

As <TO(it

it

VnOOQ y16

The Parasmaipada

160

verbs.

Why is not parasmaipada used when

As

in the following

example

q^r^

[Bk.

the verb

^tRFK vmti-i

'

is

I.

Ch.

III.

employed

79, 80.

reflexively?

the food cooks of

itself.'

word 3T<ifc of sfitra 14 ante is to be read in

by anuvritti, so that, in fact there are two 5t5ft in this aphorism which thus
means " when the agent of the verb is an agent pure and simple then parasmaipada is employed." While when a verb is used reflexively ( ch*4ch<ift ) the
agent of the verb is also, in one aspect, the object of the verb; and it is therefore, that in reflexive verbs the Atmanepada terminations are employed.
Because in the present

79,

sfitra,

the

After the verb kji to make, preceded

by

ami and para, parasmaipada is employed, even when the

fimit of the action goes to the agent, and when the sense
is that of "

divulging" &c.
By aphorism 32 ante, the root fr took the terminations of the Atmanepada when the sense denoted was that of " divulging, reviling" &c., and it
also took Atmanepada termination when the fruit of the action accrued to the
agent by virtue of sfitra 72, because the root frJ has an indicatory sr. The
present sfitra makes an exception to those rules, and ordains parasmaipada.
Thus mjchflfi he imitates, qilchfift he does well.

fan:

II

ffrp

11

) n

^iPnrf%

80.

^ri^^re 'pt^Rrr:

mwi

*roftr

11

After the verb kship, to throw, coming

and ati, parasmaipada is used, even

of
though the fruit the action goes to the agent.

after abhi, prati

The root fin to throw, is svariteta therefore by sfitra 72 ante it would

have taken Atmanepada termination, when the fruit of the action accrued to
the agent this aphorism ordains parasmaipada instead. As sfftftmft ' he
throws on' itfcrftrrft 'he turns away or rejects,' aiftftrrft 'he throws beyond/
Why do we say "when coming after abhi, prati, and ati"? Because
;

when compounded with any other

pada, but will

The second
verb

is

preposition,

be governed by sutra 72.

q^

As

it

grrf^TTt

will
*

not take parasmai-

he throws down/

of sfitra 14 is also understood here, so that

when

the

used reflexively, the agent not being purely an agent, the present

sfitra will

not apply.

As

qrftfiim3

^j^r

'

it is

thrown on of

itself/

Ogl

Bk.

I.

Ch.

III.

The Parasmaipada

81*83. ]

161

verbs.

81. After the verb vah to bear, coming after

parasmaipada is used, even though the fruit of the
action accrues to the agent.

pra,

The root q? to carry is svaritet, and by sfitra 72 it would have taken

the Atmanepada termination when the fruit of the action accrued to the agent.
But the present

sfitra

Why do we
preposition

will

it

say "

by

pari,

when coming

JFTffir 'it flows.'

Because after any other

after pra"?

not take parasmaipada as 9ITO9# 'he brings.1

jft^K
ffrf:

As

ordains parasmaipada instead.

^ n ^fa

*ft*

II

Wl

TO

^rfr^x^^Tc^rt *nfif
82. After the verb mjish to bear, preceded
parasmaipada is usedj even when the fruit of
11

11

the action accrues to the agent.

The

root *n*

fi

to suffer"

is

agent.

becomes angry.

When

be understood
terminations

QV

qo

As

qpnrorflt

not preceded by this preposition,

some

to

72

it

would have

it

he ' endures or he
takes

Atmanepada

in this,

authors, the root.*? of the last aphorism

so that q? preceded by

as qftq^ft

is

said to

<rft will also take parasmaipada

) H

sfa:

11

Ptmi<sRfriU 'C"Tr,r^

83.

vi and

sfitra

of the action accrued to the

As W|**pl

According

fruit

This ordains parasmaipada instead.

termination.

and by

svaritet,

taken Atmanepada termination when the

&ii,

After the verb

parasmaipada

^^* *Frf*
ram

11

to sport, preceded

by

is used.

The verb r* means to sport.' It is anud&ttet and therefore by sfitra

would have taken Atmanepada terminations ;'the present sfitra ordains
4

12

it

parasmaipada instead, as f%^7if% he takes rest

1

';

aiirofct

'

he delights

in,' qrftTRflt

he sports.

tion.

With other
As hjPKw)

prepositions than these,

it

will take

Atmanepada termina-

Digitized by

VjOOQLC

162

The Parasmaipada

*m^

t% n t^Tftr

11

And also

84.

11

verbs-

*nm,

Bk.

Ch.

I.

III.

84-86.

w wfo<z?\)

verb ram takes

after upa, the

the affixes of the parasmaipada.

As foj-dyuqffr
of a verb involving in
It

it

The sense

'he causes Devadatta to refrain.'

.verb uparamati is causative here, as

if it

was <fUH4ft

This

the force of the causative affix f*pf

is

of the

an example

might be asked why was not the preposition 3T read along with the

other preposition in the last aphorism, instead of making this a separate

sfitra.

The answer

is that the necessity of making a separate sfitra with the preposition upa arose from the exigencies of sfitra making. It is desired, that the
next sfitra 85 should apply only to the root upa-ram, and not to other com-

pounds of ram ; and

this could

only be done by making these two distinct

sfitras.

fwmw*4i^

to

ii

i\

ii

v^fk

ii

fkwm

s^forc*

) n

iPr

11

mM

qHHflIt<H3w T<Mft'H si
85. After the verb

parasmaipada

is

*ref*r

11

ram preceded by upa,

optionally used, when employed intran-

sitively.

The last aphorism ordained parasmaipada

absolutely,

this

declares

an option under certain circumstances.

As qii^-'h^'UHft or 4<U<|3 he
desisted from or was quiet while it was eaten.

^p 3 5 ? ***f^*lT 'l^v^ <hA<i4 *f*i%

86. After the verbs budh to know, yudh to
fight, naSto destroy, jana to be born, ifi to go, pru to move,
dru to run, and sru to flow, ending in the affix iji (i.e.,
when used in the causative), parasmaipada is employed,
even when the fruit of the action goes to the agent.
ffrf:

By

11

sfitra

,y

J>T5>T^EnPf

11

74 ante, causatives took the &tmanepada termination when

This makes an exception to

the fruit of the action accrued to the agent

that and ordains parasmaipada.

As

*ftrqfct

he expands

4ta*rf3T

he causes to

OTraft he causes destruction, srraft he begets; qtuOTOft he teaches

snroft he causes to obtain ; grroft he causes to melt ; traraft he causes, to
fight

trickle;

Digitized

by

Li O

Bk.

L Ch.

The Parasmaipada verbs.

87. ]

III.

Of the above eight

163

which are intransitive would have

roots, those

taken the parasmaipada terminations under the conditions mentioned in

88 sub, that

when

to say,

is

the agent

is

a being endowed with a reason.

sfitra

The

present aphorism in the case of such intransitive verbs makes this additional

when the
agent is not a being endowed with a reason. As ^nrafa TO*J he makes the
lotus to expand, ifrroflr 3TOTfir he makes the woods to strike each other, sirestatement, that those intransitive verbs will take parasmaipada, even

*rf?r

J.^T he destroys the sorrow, *H*jfa *p!P he produces pleasure.

Again of the above eight roots, those that have ordinarily the sense of

"moving"

makes

will

The

get parasmaipada by sutra 87.

this additional statement,

present sutra, in their case'

that they will take parasmaipada termina-

when the sense is not that of moving. Thus *, means both 'to move/
* means to run' as well as to melt,' and w, means to flow'
as well as to to trickle/
As sret he obtains; mJiftqfft the iron melts Kp^r
*T?rf*fr the water-vessels drip.
The examples in the first paragraph have there-

tions even

and

'to

obtain/

'

'

'

fore

been thus translated

The

root

$y

always compounded with sjfa

is

fSni^I^WI^ig
q<*fr q qq ) H

( *t:

*rfW*

II

*1%:

gntftTOg*

4$

fSprc^l^-3|W:

tJ^lfSl U

II

And after the

87.

I)

causatives of verbs

which

have the sense of the eating or swallowing* and shaking or moving' parasmaipada is employed, even when
c

the fruit of the action goes to the agent.

The phrase when used in the causative (%:) of the last sfitra is to
this also.
The parasmaipada is ordained as an exception to
Sutra 74 by which Atmanepada was ordained when the fruit of the action
accrued to the agent The word ftmilf means eating,' and ^ratf means'
moving/ shaking.' As fijimft he causes to swallow ?mroft he causes to
eat H)r*nrf?r he feasts. ^5^rf?r he moves <$TTOft 3R*nrfq he shakens. This
'

be read into

'

'

'

aphorism applies to transitive verbs, and to verbs whose agents in non-causainanimate objects *>., not possessed with reason.

tive state are

Vart

The causative
eats; 3tf?*i3

^t-t^i

The prohibition
of *ff to

I^^R he

eat,
is

of the

root

%n

to eat,

must be mentioned.

Thus a*r% fc^T:

by Devadatta.

takes Atmanepada.

made

to eat

wm^^^^f^i^^^Tc^n 44
mi^i ^v.^( ^: *w qo ) n

xnpfa N

Devadatta

^^ g^
,

The Parasmaipada verbs.

164

Bk.

Ch.

I.

III.

88.

parasmaipada are employed after the causal of that verb, which in its noncausal state was intransitive and had a being endowed
with reason for its agent even when the fruit of the

The

88,

affixes of the

action accrues to the agent.

The phrase

is

d":

understood here also.

was

fThe Atmanepada

ordained by sutra 74 when the fruit of the action accrued to the agent
is an exception to that, and ordains parasmaipada.
As *rrc$

This aphorism

Devadatta

S-TStT:

Dcvadatta sleeps,

Why

ijra^ fa? ^T he makes Devadatta

sits:

*rnr*rf%

do we say

from another causative

fafW he causes Devadatta

to

sit

*}$

t*TV

to lie down.

For if the causative' root is

and not from a simple non-causative rOot, then

in its non-causal state?

'

root,

the parasmaipada will not be employed.

Thus

one person such as Devadatta, causes another person Yajnadatta, to cause a third person Ramadatta,
to do an act denoted by an intransitive root, as ' mounting for instance,
'

if

though Ramadatta mounts for his own benefit, the verb to be used in such a
case is qtf<tl*Ft in the Atmanepada, from the root 3]TC? to mount; and not
mifl^fo (Iengar's Guide to Panini).
'

Why
if

the verb in

do we say
its

causative from
it

for his

own

'

which was intransitive"?

This rule

will

^r, if

use,

the person caused to do the act

not apply

Thus from qoft the

denoted by the verb does

non-causative state was transitive.

comes only thH4$ though the person has a will ; for the
9
root, is not an intransitive root

root fT though a non-causative

otiginal
(Ibid).

Why
For

if

from

do we say 'having a being endowed with reason for its agent?

is a non-sentient object, the verb will be Atmanepadi.
Thus

the agent

sfrfa

the causative from lyr 'to dry'

if

that

which dries

is

a thing not

possessed of a will as jft^r: paddy/ for instance, though the fruit of the
action i.e. t the drying, affects only the paddy itself, comes ;fr<nid in the
Atmanepadi, though 'to dry* is an intransitive root ; e. ., piFR# gflfolK :
'

the sun-shine causes the paddy to dry/

(Ibid).

Bk.

I.

Ch.

The Parasmaipada verbs.

89-91. ]

II.

Bub the

89.

165

the parasmaipada are

affixes of

not used, after the causals of the verbs p& to drink, dam
to tame, &yam to extend, ayas to exert oneself^ parimiih.
to be bewildered, ruch to shine, nyit to dance, vad to
speak; and vas to dwelL
The

last

two aphorisms had ordained parasmaipada instead of Atmane-

pada, even when the fruit of the action accrued to the agent, thus debarring
the latter's action which would otherwise have taken place by virtue of sutra

This sutra prohibits the last two s&tras, and re-instates Atmanepada of
Thus root qr to drink, has the sense of nigarana or swallowing,
the roots 5* &c, have sentient beings as their agent; the root tr^ to dance has

74.

sutra 74.

the senre of 5RTO or moving, but

these verbs have Atmanepada affixes,

still

As qnr^ he causes
be tame, ^iqm^d he lengthens, Mjiqmq3 he

and do not take parasmaipada

in the causative.

to drink,

troubles,
$Hnd he causes to
r5*rt he causes to dance,
<TKH)gq3 he entices, n^trt he makes agreeable,
<iimd he makes to speak, qrcro^ he causes to dwell.

Vart

The root

>TTr$$ fii^ji ^?Nfc

*iz

should be enumerated along with qr

The doe

srere:

II

%0

The

suckles a
II

vc^fik

young

II

^T

infant.

*mz

&c Thus

wfl q

"

"

parasmaipada are used

optionally after the denominative verbs ending in the
affix kyash.
90.

The
after

affix

z&m

is

ordained by sutra

the words <f)^r &c.

<*fRiqf*r or

3 he reddens.

^ftg%
ff^r:

11

wrrf^^

affixes of the

III. 1.

12 *prrft^

WT^[ t^nTV $5f:

These root take optionally parasmaipada.

444414ft or % he makes pa( paj.
11

<si

n q^rfSr u

g% *r 4<**>4* H*ft

^rp

^fe

*n

As

*ns?fc-

11

91. Alter the verbs dyut to shine &c. the

terminations of the Parasniaijmda are optionally employed, when the affixes of lull (aorist) follow.
the

The Dyutadi verbs are 22 in number, to be found in DhatfipAtha in

Bhuadi class. By the use of the word ??: in the plural in the sutra,

the force

is that of &c.
These verbs are anudatta and so by sutra 12 they
would have been invariably atmanepadi, this aphorism makes them optionally

The Parasmaipada

166
*

so

1,

in the aorist

aorist

verbs.

Bk.

ii

1
1

Thus ^rfyr^ or f*4TM8 he

list

of

I.

Ch.

...

III.

92,93-.

!.

In other tenses than the

shone.

As

these verbs are invariably Atmanepadi.

For a

tn^fcr*

fta% he shines.

Dyutddi verbs see Dhatupa^ha.

After the Verbs vyit to exist &c, Parasmaipada is optionally employed when the affixes sya (Future and conditional) and san (Desiderative) follow.
92.

The TcTlffr yerbs are five in number and are included in the *J<nft subThey are ?sr to be, f% to grow, *re to fart oi break wind; ^^J to ooze,
and ^J to be able. As 1st Future ?*t?rf<t or qfV^tff, it will be, conditional
^T*^^ or *nfa^; Desiderative ftf^pf or fir^RW &c.
In other tenses than, the above, they are always Atmanepadi As
class.

*3%itis.

f^$*r:

11

r^xfk

ii

11

fe

^t:

^re%r *n

93. After the verb kjip to be fit, Parasmaioptionally employed, when lu$ (1st Future) is
affixed, as well as when sya and san are affixed.

pada

is

The verb

*h<-Mlfl

it

will take

^or^T follow.

The

five

verbs of the sub-class,

thou wilt be; in 1st Future

we

have:

of the last

when

present sutra makes the additional declar-

we have

f%3|-*tf^

H1***W^ or tn^TO*.

^mf$

both parasmaipada and Atmanepada,

Thus

the case of rst Future or 5?.

in the Desiderative

have

one of the

is

Therefore

aphorism.
the affixes
ation in

fpv

in

Lu|wehave:

3TFtn% or

3fifimqd or tfiwqfif he will be;

or Pf*rffc<re%

in the conditional

Digitized by

we

VjOOQiC

BOOK L
Chapter IV.

s*ts3sto^5t *>st

tnr ii**i4i<<H^<flf5i

ii

ii

rnpfa n sn hIW

^T-wr

$Rci^ ii

From this sdtra up

to the aphorism Kadarh Karmadh&raye (II. 2. 38) only one name of each
thing named is to be understood.
What is that name then ? That which comes last, where the claims
1.

and that which were its claim disallowed, would

have no other opportunity of conducing to any result, would be the recognised
name. As a short vowel is called light ' by 1. 4. 1 o and it is also called 4 heavy '
when it precedes a conjunct consonant (I. 4. 11.) Thus a short vowel has two
names * light' and * heavy/ But it will not be called light ' when it precedes
a conjunct consonant, but will have only one name, i*. 9 * heavy.' Thus in
9
f%% to divide fe? to split, the ^ is ' light ' while the same letter is 'heavy in
are otherwise equal

(I. 4. 2.)

'

'

ftrw teaching

Thus
aorist

ftw begging.

in the root

we have

the form 3prera?T

applying here as that rule

is

m is

the
.

heavy ' and therefore

Similarly

MJU*i^

The

in

forming

rule VII. 4.

its

93 not

applicable to laghu vowels only.

2. IVhen rules of equal force prohibit each

other, then the last in the order herein given is to take

effect.
^

yhe word

two topics having

ftitftro

means ' opposition

different objects in

ously in ojne particular case,

that

of rules of equal force.'

When

view find scope of action simultaneopposition

of equal force*

is

called

16$

Nadi defined.

A general

vipratishedha.

rule (utsarga)

and

variable (nitya) and an optional (anityo)

'when a

follows, the long vowel

clares

When a

'

3.

exception (upavAda), or an in-

102.

and VII.

3.

The

103.

beginning with a letter of yan pratyAhAra

case-affix

substituted for the final of an inflective base ending

is

As Vpksha + bhyAm VpkshAbhyam.

Hf.

Ch. IV.

or an antaranga and abahiranga

of rules of equal force, see VII. 3.

first rule declares,

in a short

its

rule,

I.

There the stronger prevails against the weaker.

rule, are not rules of equal force.

As an example

f Bk-

plural case-affix beginning with

The next

rule

de-

a letter of jhal pratyAhAra

As
Vpksha + su=Vriksheshu. But when the plural case-affix bhyafc follows, what
rule are we to apply ? For the letter bha belongs both to the pratyAhAras yafl
and jhal. Are we to lengthen the shorter, or substitute^? The present
sutra gives the reply, ^ is to be substituted because VII. 3. 103 ordaining q
follows next to VII. 3. 102. Thus Vpksha + bhyarj - Vpkshebhyafc.
follows,

if is

the substitute

fl
*jfif:

11

W H Wft

for the

final

9
short T of an inflective base.

t^^-^HRT,

^ M T*Vft "
|*ui?d*ihKiwl ^ ***iwwi w%&<? i^f *W ^nrfir

**$

11

"Word-forms ending in long

names of females are called Nadl.
3.

The word sms compound

which by itself denotes the name

II

11

and

ft

being

The word stryAkhya means

of

of

a female.

+.^T.

that

These words must be always

feminine, having no masculine of the same form, as the word grAmani has.

As

KumArl a virgin, *r*pr yavAgfifo rice gruel. The declenis somewhat peculiar which will be treated of
later.
As see Rule VII. 3. 1 12 qgr^r is the augment of the case-affixes having
an indicatory 9 when they come after a word ending with a Nadl.
Why do we say ending in f and 3T ? Because feminine nouns not
ending in these vowels will not be declined like Nadi words. Thus while the
the words

<*>H\(t

sion of .nouns of nadl class

dative of ^$ttO will be

Why

mm^t

the dative of f|c will bejf*%

do we say which are feminine ?

'

males, they will not be called Nadl.

leader of an army;

As

Because

STHUfr:

if

they are names of

leader of a village

ttanffc

a sweeper; their dative being *TPF$ , ^^TF^ tgvict

Why have we used the word AkhyA ' name ' in the text / Because
feminine gender must be denoted by the word itself and not by any other
epithet used along with the word. Thus if the head-borough or the sweeper
*jp**r:

should be of the female

and 3rvF%fr4*

sex, the Dative Singular

% qvq^ranr
R*, (3*$)

11

*sft

n 8

it

vqfa

would

11

*r,

still

be iffT^ fori,

.f^**^sOTit 9
v

Bk.

CH, IV. 4*6 J

I.

169

NADI DBFfNED.

Feminine words ending in I and ft which

admit the substitute (v^) iyA and ( **^) uvaft (VI. 4. 77)
are not called Nadi except the word stri, (wliich is called
4.

nadi notwithstanding
The

this limits the

iyaft

and

*ffc

its substituting iyaft).

Nadl given in the last sfttra was rather too wide,
brow, admit the substitutes
Thus *fr, happiness,

definition of

scope.

uvaft respectively,

and are not nadi.

Their vocative singular

* &c. f while the vocative singular of stri is

tuwfa

n h

it

v^rfk

is

$ f%T

*t, -onf*, ($*^re-$-?n^) *

ii

Feminine woixls ending in 1 and ft, though

admitting iyaft and uvaft substitutes, are optionally
termed Nadi, when the affix &m (Gen PI.) follows, hut
not so the word stri, which is always Nadi.
5.

*fr + 8ip - *fr*^ + *n^ firo^;^* *n* - *gn^; or

=*& + 5\ + ^^(VII. i. 54.) - *fiajP; ^ + %n\ - *gOT*. But stri
nadi, and we have VAUJIH strtn&ra.

To

by the

the absolute prohibition enjoined

%fr
i*

+ van
always

last sutra, this allows

an

option in the case of Genitive Plural

f|pfH|^Ri h %

^f%:

h^Wiit

wr:

11

fefa

<rctfr

s**v

wpfii

ii

cfft

11

*p*&ft v.

fefk fe;ffe)

ro^

|w

pnpnreirfr

*,

nw

*r

It

When

a case-affix having an indicatory

it (nit) follows, then feminine words ending in short 1
and ft are optionally termed Nadi, as well as feminine
jiouns in long i and ft which admit of iyaft and uvaft ; but
not so the word stri, wbich is always Nad^
6.

Feminine words in long t and ft have been defined as nadl, words in

short vowels can never be termed nadt, while even some words in long vowels
have also been excluded from the scope of the definition
uvaft.

The present

when a

case-affix

The

sfttra

declares an option

having an indicatory

nthe case

follows.

if

they take

iyaft

and

having an indicatory A are the Dative, Ablative/*

Genitive and Locative singulars. Thus we have 1^
Digitized by
,

of all ^he above words, H&*

~~
*W **** ^^tijX^

case-affixes

GoOgk

170

Ghi defined.

'

[ Bk.

-------rarr:

fiptf

Srr or

d^n fa*:

So also

*&& or mil S?rt or $?! faH or fa

Dative

or

'

or

finff:

But

gt &c.

or

3&t t^ref^

ii

Locative

Ablative Genitive

$*H

or ^nr^^fi' or

*nft

"*

*
'

iflfc

prfir QT

always fe& &c.

stri is

ii

Ch. IV. $ 7-

I.

ti^TtSr

Sta:

ii

fa, sref?s, (&&) a

The rest of the words that end in short * and

* are called ghi with the exception of the word sakhi.
7.

This defines the word ghi. The peculiarity of the declension of ghi
words will be treated later on* The word hrasva is understood in this sutra.
The word esha or f the rest* implies the words ending in short f or 7
which are not the names of females, or if they are feminine names, they are not
'

nadi words.9

As
So

fire.

fire.

atffcr

nouns gunate

Before case-affixes having an indicatory

vowel VII. 3. 11

their

1.

- ^nr? to the wind.

wsm ^^ ^* and tjiHu
* M^lPf
*ft: WRm q*

is

stffcf

also ^nj x

these cases

ft,

the ghi

# sp# + 3~9P7$

to the

But the declension of sakhi

in

II

II

The word pati is

.8.

is in a

As

II

t|fer:

^fT%,

^E| f (fa) 9

called ghi only

when

it

compound.

The word

pati

would have been ghi by the

laist sfitra

the present

sutra is therefore a niyama rule, restricting the use of ghi in the case of pati to
its

The word eva

occurring in composition.

'

only

is

'

used in a restrictive

sense.

As
q?*t

and

there

is

q?qr

by the lord but *MmpH by the lord of creatures. So also

When qfSt is ghi,q?*p and mn*pfc ,' <*?*& and inirmV &c.

|u*i<i3

guna of the vowel before the four f&^ affixes by VII.

TOig^Eara^fa
*T, (qft: fa)

11

11

t^rfa

1 1

1.

TOt-gw, ^fa,

ii

It

9.

with a noun

The word

The woid

when used

in connection*
ending in the sixth or genitive case, is ghi,

optionally, in the

pati

Chhandas (veda).

pati is understood in

"would have not been ghi

exception to thai

3.

when

when not

this

this

sutra.

in composition.

word occurs in the Vaidic

By

the last

sfitra,

pati

This sutra makes an

literature*

Laghu and GurIa

Bk.I. Ch. IV. $ 10-12. ]

tfrc^Hf

Why

**& or q? H*r. salutation

do we say 'when used

17*

to the lord of the Kulunchas.

in connection with

Observe *RT <TW Miif^jqm : .Why do we say * in the Chhandas '?

a noun

the gen if'

tive case '?

^fff:

ii

j^rorc g

thus the
the affix

*JT

11

vowel which has already

it is

So

affix.

also 3*TT

11

When

il.

r^Efif

9
;

which

gunated before a Sarvadhatuka or

aHtaft^ and wflfT^

^rf^r

it

jrwrstf

*Uf)r<f<rc<Tr

is

light

gunated before

as >tor he will break, by virtue of the rule VII. 3. 86,

^TSfcj*
<jfa.

light ' (laghu).

laghu; and by being laghu

declares that a laghu penultimate vowel

an drdhadhatuka

under certain circumstances called laghu or

(I. 2. 27), is

of ft? to break, is

fir

A hrasva

word Laghu.

defines the

been defined

ii

A shoi-t vowel is called

10-

This

y*a *wf%

j-

Observe rre^T*t

ii

'

^nt, 3s, (ipew)

*wft

11

a conjunct consonant follows,

short vowel is termed i heavy * (Guru).

hrasva vowel however

is

As the i
+
*? (HI.
ftw

by a conjunct consonant.
Rrtt

is

derived from

not to be called

is

So

feminine}.

^5^r

ir
T

^fin

also
11

$ttaiiku {|44]f

11

12.

light'

when

it is

followed

Thus
come after that verb
a consonant when the word to be

of fin?TT 'learning' is

a heavy vowel.

3. 103, let the affix a?

which has a heavy vowel and ends

formed

in

^**T and fiwT

v^Tft

mfa

11

^Hh, *

(gs) n

11

And a long vowel

termed heavyv

is also

(Gnru).
This

As

sfitra.

is

of

clear the anuvritti of the

word conjunct

fffa* he endeavoured,

fcrfcnfc

guru, and because of

its

is

not understood in this

he saw.

being called guru, the rule

Here the

III. 1.

forming the perfect tense by the addition of the augment

36

is

letter

is

applied in

W\. Thus all

long

vowels, and short vowels followed by conjunct consonants are guru or heavy,*

AI1 other short vowels are laghu.

q^nc^Xlc^fafMW^lf^
lf%:
*rcfii

11

ti

*c*nfc

J^MII^H ^ffa

wti^imret frfhnl qrmtat nrffiprffacrirs^ m^^i

.

TON*

II

n&A iKwlypinlt'
*Q$\

"IT*
*^m^***m

'

"*

"

'

..-Anga defined:

ii

.I

Bk.

I.

Ch. IV.

.I.

13.
<

After whatsoever there is an affix enjoined, whether verbal root or crude-form, that which begins
therewith in the form in which it appears when the
affix follows it, is called an Inflective base (anga).
13.

The words of this sfitra require some explanation. Yasmat after

whatsoever ; pratyaya-vidhih compound of pratyaya meaning an affix and
vidhih, a precept,

therewith
.

i.e.

pratyaye

rule enjoying

an

SL=in a pratyaya

7.

affix
i.e,

tadidi,

i.

S. that

when a pratyaya

which begins

follows (I. 1.) is

called a base.

After whatsoever there

an

is

whether

affix enjoined,

it

be a verbal

root (Dhatu) or a nominal base (pratipadika), the word-form having that as

its

beginning,

word yasmat

is

is

called

an anga, with regard to the

because the word tad&di follows

word ' base

'

iS

affix

that follows.

The

used in the aphorism to point out the thing named, as anga

it.

This defines the word

thus a relative term with regard to

anga.

The

Thus ff + nr

its affix.

Here because the root

qrs? he will do *?tf he will lose, 3*ft*rfir *ft**fH
^p and J gets the name ^fr they are gunated by (VII. 3. 84) similarly because
37J &c. get the name Anga, their vowel is vriddhied in a?fai]T: &c.
The. words kfi hri are anga with regard to the affix -tt&c. 3*TJ +
,

l^ ^nif:

Here upagu and

*:

anga with regard to an.

Here the whole word*
as
and
such
the
short
as
anga,
a is lengthened by
form Karishya is regarded
VII. 3. 101 ; because though the affix vafc is enjoined after the word kp, the form
-which begins with kfi i.e. karishya will also be calfed anga when the affix is
to be added. The word tadddi, therefore, has been used in the sfitra, to
make the definition of Anga applicable to the forms which a word may asSimilarly ff

sume

^rrnr:

+ &[ +

4ifttq

*:

fcapafu are

4iR4l4:

after taking the. intermediate affixes like

sya &c, or

before the

Thus ap*t + H% + f ~ ap**^ + T - * u *iift (VII. 1. 72 and

final affixes.
Here the
VI. 4. 8) kunda + num + 1 kundan + t = kundini, bowls.
it
lengthens
such
its
and
as
anga,
vowel
before
kundan
is
called
form
whole
the case-affix t by VI. 4. 8.

Why have we used the word pratyaya? Without it the rule would
After whatever there is anything enjoined &c., is called
have ran thus :
Here sandhi of vowels is enjoined
Anga.* Then in sfr + finft ^Tinft If &ft was here an Anga, then its last vowel would
between f + f f
have been replaced by j*T3 (VI. '4. 77), the form being farfSrsfa ./'U

'

^^

Why
have run thus
dadika

is

have we used the word

: " After

Anga.'

Thus

f%ftr?

whatsoever there
in

*fa

Had we
is

an

W^j though the

omitted

affix,

affix

it

the rule would

whether root or
adfaunA

is

prati-

placed after

BK.

I.

CH

f 14,

IV.

IS-

PADA

Wtf

DEFINE*..

word dadhi, it is not enjoined by any rule ; and the word qtfSfr is not- called
anga. Had it been so called, then the f of dadhi should have been elided
by rule VI. 4. 148.
The word pratyaya has been repeated twice in this sutra in order toshow that when an affix is elided, the terra anga will not apply to what stood
for the sake of
before it. Thus in the compound word fe$
*&
the woman.
Here in forming the Tat purusha compound the dative case-affix
after the word wit has been elided, for as a general rule case-affixes are<
elided in forming compounds* If the word jpft after its affix had been elided,,
still retained its old designation of Anga, the ^pfr + qjtT would have been;
the

-I-

ftsnrtf

the

augment

iyart

being added by the rule already referred to above.*.

sfiwei t^*r
ff^r:

if

&&

11

98

11

g^F*f fire^f ** *r*T5tf

*KpfSf n

*%*$

^-{erer^rei^,

fifii

*V^

11

That which ends in sup ( case-affix )*

IV. 1. 2; or in tift III. 4. 78 (tense-affix), is called a pada
or inflected word.
14.

The sup

or case-affixes are those by which nouns are declined

and

by which verbs are conjugated. They have already*

been given before. Thus f^^5ro + T^-l^^5TO^ the Br&hmanas qref&r they cook.
It might be atked by a caviller why the word *t??r has been used in
the aphorism, for by the rule of tadanta given in'Sfitra I. 1. 72 a rule relating
to sup will mean and include also that which ended with a sup-affix. To this
we reply, that, the very fact that the word anta is used in this sfitra, indicates
by implication (jnipaka) that the Tadanta rule of Sfitra 72 Chapter I doei
tin are

tense-affixes

not apply to rules of sanjnA (definition)

made with regard

to affixes.

Thus

tarap and tamap affixes are called

will not

Thus

apply here

gha by Sutra I. 1. 22. The tadanta-vidhi

words ending with these affixes will not be called gha:
not be called gha, for had it been so called, the long %

Hitufujflrj will

be shortened in irrft fTRgfitffiTT In short, ' an affix when'employed in a

which teaches the meaning of a technical term (sanjna) does not
denote a word-form ending with the affix/

will

rule

H:

II

II

tr^Tfa H *P

*^>

(*VQ

The word-form ending in n, is

pada, when kya follows (Le., the affixes kyach,
15..

called
kyaft,

andkyash).
These are
nouns.

See.

by which* denominative verbs are formed from

and 13. A word ending in r is called pada, when
Thus *npr% + **C\ - *nft* 3rd J^dSy cnfhtf* he

affixes

III. 1. 8, 1 1,

these affixes follow.

-174

Pada defined.

behaves

a king. So also CHP^

like

Wihrif or ^ifarfa

"^^&c,
which

it

result of

by SAtra

elided

is

+ R^tt*Fnr9

its. being

called

cnfhr (VII.

These three

U Ca

is

VIII. 2. 7. (there is elision

IV. $ 16, 17.

n5^

(VII. 4. 25.)

pada

to the designation of pr&tipadika).

is entitled

*rjr

The

{ Bk.

that the

*r

+ R^

of

tnr^

in

a pada

Thus CTSP^ +

W\

of

final

sf

4. 33).

^l^\ &c, come

affixes

after case-inflected

words

(i>. t

and though, before these affixes, the case terminations

I. i. 62 such words would have retained the name of
pada which they got by Rule 140! this Chapter. The present sfitra however
makes a restriction (niyama). It declares that only words ending in *j retain
the name of pada while all other case-inflected words before these affixes
do not retain that designation. Thus the words qm speech, g^ a ladle are
not treated as pada and we have *pnnl and ymd
Had they been pada,

words ending
are elided,

in sup),

by

still

Sfitra

the

would have been changed into

ftfar

3%:

11

11

*&&

ftrf?r

follows then that

preceding word

word

which precedes it is
This

called bha.

is

therefore the

*l^ +
that n is

*-^,

*r f
94 n ^if^f 11
wr: <# tt^t *rcfir 11
an affix having

Thus Rule IV.

after the vriddha

(I. 1.

word

ra?fcf:

2.

*nnj,

VII,

(^j)
an indicatory o

called pada.

declares an exception to that

^jftfTj:

"Affixes 8^ and

Here the

standing before

1. 2.

it,

belonging to you.

by

ej^ come

13^ has an indicatory

be called pada. Thus

affix

will

The

result of

being pada

is

Similarly ^is
in *ra[ (Alter the
Thus ^mfcj :; so also q^V. 1. 106, has
There is no guna because of its being pada.

changed into f (VIII. 2.

yus V. 2. 123).

Thus

sfitra

115 declares:

74) wordspn^."

firni there is

jE^as indicatory.

VIII, 2. 30.

18 of this chapter teaches that before certain affixes, the

sfitra

anticipation.

by

When

1G.

The

a?

39).

^f%: .11 ^nf%5 '^rSj <ron $HN*qMif*JdM <nf irtfst *r*f%

it

When the affixes beginning with g

17.
ending
and
in
(V. 4. 151.) follow, not being
2)
Sarvan&masthana (1. 1. 43) then that which precedes is
(IV.

1.

.called pada.

The
pbove

sfitra.

Thus

iibove.

The.Jf

is

beginning with su and ending with leap ana meant by the

Thus the case-affix iqr>((Ins Dual) is an affix included in the

affixes

xm%

IP

- CfSf*^, KXsrfH'.

elided by being pada*

CHPf

KHtol,

CHTOn, KtWJH:
v

Digitized by

Bk.

Ch. IV.

I.

Why

Cnrnft"

Bha

18, 19. ]

defined.

175

do we say ' when not a SarvanAmstliAna ?

two kings,

nw*:

WT

ift

II

The

kings.

%C

TT^lfa

||

^ is not

II

<m^-+ WV

Observe

elided.

*T-3?fa f <OT

fanf^TOO)

THt4f^-ilHH^f qi^HtaitWtll

<iifn&^

II

*lf3<*H

II

^HUH^ifr

18.

II

And when an affix, with an initial y or an

initial vowel, being one of the affixes, beginning with

sn and ending in k, follows, not being Sarvan&masth&na,
then what precedes, is called Bha.
This debars the application of pada.

m*&

So

a grandson of Garga.

also TOOT:

ya and the word garga being treated as Bha

affix by VI. 4. 148.

- *n%:

Thus ipfr + *P^(IV. 1. 105)

The affix yan begins with a

its final

*r

is

elided

before the

95) grandson of Daksha Rlftf: .

Here the affix %j^ begins with a vowel the word standing before it being
Bha, it causes elision of the final a? of daksha.

So

also

qn=T

The word

r*J

when

Angiras.

which

w^

the affix

it

1.

meaning when ^ or *pj follow; and

means c when an affix beginning with

the 7th case

irf^f is in

by the last Vart of Sutra

ya or ach follow.9
Vart 1 The words

(IV.

I.

72, it

I.

Hjf^-i^and qyj should be treated as Bha

Thus ipflef^ like the sky. HjQ{*<*4<l like the
the man. By being Bha, tfie ^is not changed intor ,
,

5T*I*J

follows.

q^srw like
would have been, had

it

The words ^\

been a pada (VIII.

2. 66).

Bha in the vedas when the

words **J and *r* follow. Thus ^V** ^MUI^W 5#
Here had the word
vpshan been treated as pada, the 7 would not have been changed into IJF
(See Rule VIII. 4. 37) and this h would have been dropped before the affix
vasu by VIII. 2. 7.
Vart

is

treated as

*l

*Tc*ni U <*%

H^rfk

II

II

?l-%T f

T^-^, (\)

H&& H**J Sfrtt >Whf H*f*f M

19. The word-form ending in t or in s is
called Bha when an affix with the force of matup ('whose
*jfa:

is it,'

II

ff<4*HI4 4J<fcKI?rf

or in

whom it is

The word Bha

is

JJ*W*

'

V.

2.

94) follows.

understood in this sutra.

Thus

is

the

word

4lft<4 having butter milk Norn. Sing. *qf*3W^ tfta: the herdsman having
butter milk, ftqf?PT TOOT*: the cloud full of thunder. So also TOPr)* famous <F
"
^
Digitized by vJfV^VJV
2

BHA

If

(Bk.

CASES.

Thus 3*fa*c + **n By making these Bha,

I.

Ctt. IV.

20>2I.

mj*L + f%fa (V. 2. 121)

rule is
of pada
*Hjft*^
the *
and
debarred in their case. That is to say the final tf of udavit &c.,
of yaias &c., are not changed into f and r respectively, which had they been
pada words would have been the case by the action of Sfitra VIII. 2.' 39,
and VIH. 2. 66. via., gjpMt and *n{jtf%*r which are incorrect.
TOSft

full

of milk.

S*f*?*q;,

operation

the

Words like ayasmaya &c, are valid forms

20.

in the chhandas (veda).

These words being taught here in the topic relating to pada and
Bha, show that they have been properly formed in the chhandas by the application of the rules of Bha and pada. Thus *nr* + TO =* ^n^HT made of
Here the word aro^is treated as Bha and hence the H is not changed
iron.
Into r . Thus 9FEKTO *# iron-made coat of mail.
WPSTOrft <rPTffij iron
In some places both
vessels. The present form of this word is *nft*Ri
Bha
and
apply
simultaneously.
pada
Thus
in
the word ij^ formed
these
.

by ^C\ + **[* ^ e % s first changed into wby treating the word rich as a
pada. Then the word gj^ is treated as bha, and therefore the g^is not
For had it been pada, the form would have been
changed into * before qrtf
sjpr^ Rigvat. These irregularly formed words occur only in the chhandas
or Vedic literature. Thus ^r *|^!ra 3fto<tl *i*fa
*

*g snprnm

n ^i

11

*^ift

11

335, *g-**R\ii

In expressing multeity, a Plural case

employed.
21.

affix is

When
employed
H*P<t

after

it

is

intended to denote multeity those affixes should be

nouns and verbs, which denote plural number.

The Brahmins

Thus KTOTO

read.

This rule applies to words which are capable of expressing numbers.

Indeclinables (Avyaya) do not admit of numbers, and consequently they are

always

in singular

number which

\*&\

is

fs^hrcr*^

the general form*

11

rh n

^ftr

11

fs-Tjwfr:

fjpwi

Bk. t,Cii.

Numbers Karaka.

IV. 22-24.]

177

22. The dual and singular case-affixes are

employed severally in the sense of duality and unity.
This
affix

When

also clear*

is

duality

to be expressed,

is

a dual case*

should be employed, and in the case of unit, the singular case-affix.

Thus

two Brahmins cook.

MiWUjV TOT: the

^rc$

11

ur&ro V^ftr the Brahmin cooks.

*nt$

tr^Tft

The phrase k&raka' (meaning in the

special relation to a word expressing an action ') is to be
c

23.

understood in the following aphorisms.

Any

thing that helps towards the accomplishment of an action is a

Thus

kAraka.

in 'cooking/ the

fire,

the furnace, the vessel, the cook are mil

helpers in the accomplishment of the acton.

vessel,

by the

kAraka

'food

from the furnace for his

(ire
9

object kAraka; 'vessel'

is

trumental kAraka, 'furnace

is

is

Thus Rama cooks food in a

master.
Here Rama is agent
'

a locative kAraka,

fire is

the ablative kAraka and 'master 9

is

an ins-

the dative

kAraka.
9

synonymous with the word cause (hetu)

and occasion (nimitta). All the various causes and occasions that are required to complete an action will be kArakas. Out of the seven cases in
which a Sanskrit noun is declined, six represent such relation with an action.

The word 'kiraka

The

thus

is

Genitive or the sixth case can never be directly related with an action,

and thus can never stand

jm^Hd

wnronfc

[ftr.

11

ig*f

sryira^K

24.

that of a fixed
is called

in the relation of
it

sqj

it

a kAraka to a verb.

q^ift n

*mx i*5 ^rc^rfipg*

wr, <*im5fc,

q*ftH**wuH*J<f >rcf%

whose relation to an action is

point from which departure takes place

apdana or ablation.
the village.

<r$4f{4tfcft

(II.

3. 28)

he descends from the mountain.

*q|tll<4)*r:

The ApadAna takes the 5th

and the above examples show this. When therefore

this relation is to

be expressed,

the above) which

is

called ablation.

Thus UNiqintofl he

from chariot.

lost his object. T*n^qfcifT: fallen

case -affix

11

A noun

This defines the Ablation or ApadAna kAraka.

comes from

snmjT*

the

limit

'

the fixed point (like grAma, parvata &c., in

denoted by a word dependent on a verb,

Digitized by

is

Google.

178
Vari:
*

The Ablation. _

._

The

objects of verbs denoting

Thus:

negligence* are also called ablation.

he ceases from

justice; MJWii&iJjft

^T:
*Wf%

II

injustice.

IRt^wf^ff

f4+ta|tji*lt

'

Bk.

I.

Ch. IV.

aversion/ 'cessation 1 and

renfrssnrar

ft

he dislikes

vmfwmftl he neglects

HT*j\

25-27..

*riH*t

in-

justice.

^W?g^ Wf*U*H4HHiM-

II

In case of words implying fear * and

'protection from danger' that from which the danger
or fear procedes is called Ap&d&na k&raka.
c

25.

The verbs
of,

signifying 'fear' or

protection* govern the object feared

'

or the danger to be protected from, in the

f^j% he

afraid of thieves, ,*to*r

is

^ftfrqHIMfl

or TOfif

Why
case?

He

do we say 'the cause

II

is

ablative case.

Thus nt^ft

agitated because of the thieves.

protects or saves from the thieves.

Observe *rc3f fk^fa or

*jRfc

sitr^ ^e

<RH*}k* *Hl3:

of fear (bhaya-hetu) is put in the

<iraff

he fears or protects in the

34)4)441) 4t

*&& .^TJ

tiU<t*|ft

ablative

forest.

*!^H*H4KM^*f>Wf<* Jl

In the case of the verb par&ji, 'to he

tired or weary of,' that which becomes unbearable, is
*

called

26.

Ap&dana k&raka.
When

the verb

fir to

conquer, with the preposition pari has the

governs ablative case of the thing

As M^nRHJ muitlft he finds study unbearable.

sense of 'becoming tired or unbearable

become unbearable.
Why do we say

'that

'

it

which becomes unbearable.

Observe jpnr

TCnraS he defeats the enemies.

$faci: (qno vrar^ro)

11

In case of verbs having the sense of preventing, the desired object from which one is prevented
or warded off is called Ablation or Ap&dana k&raka.
27.

The obstruction to one's n.atural inclination is called v&rana or prevention. As *rewft irf ^nfrfflr or fr*forf?r he wards off or withholds the cow
jOC
from the barley.

Bk.

Ch. IV. 28-30.

I.

The Ablation.

179

Why
Observe

irf

do we say 'the object desired' is put in the ablative case'?

^H7ri% %% he wards off the cow in the field.

tjfa:

W^rf^f^fW 3HK^qiW**fsftfl^KW4l<H*Ui

When concealment is

28.

son whose sight one wishes to avoid,

*|*f% Q

indicated, the peris called Ap&d&na

karaka.
Thus OTT^rnrr^f^ ^ or
so that the teacher

Why
? fi VI ^ he

may

he conceals or hides from the teacher;

ftoftqJI

not find him out or see him.

do we say 'when concealment

does not wish to see the thieves.

is

indicated/?

Observe ^Jkp*

Here the term chauran

is in

the accusative case.

Why
k&raka

has the word ichchhati been used in the text ?

The ap&dAna

be used there only, where one desires that he should not be

seen, yet he shows himself.
is

to

MK^kim%Hl n

<

(mo

3TTT*)

11

^ifSi

11

sn-^rnn,

^ra-^i?*,

II

29.

The noun denoting the teacher

is called

Ap&d&na or

ablation^ in illation to the action signifying

formal teaching.
The word 4ji4$4idl means teacher, and greftl means acquiring knowledge in the regular way. Thus TOumrrqpftt or Mnpruft he learns from the
preceptor.

Why

do we say 'when meaning to learn'?

Observe *GRf

*JtDtft

he

hears the player.

?lfw<ftTi:

(tp

wno)
^r.

Hsbfa:

II

$p

11

t|^ip|

11

^rRr-^S:,

J*?rft: 9

11
11

m~4<U4j<jm:

30.

jan to be born,

^r *rra*r?:

i^^r nfrffc *ur*f ?g: af^H^^m*-

The prime cause of the agent of the verb

is

called Ap&d&na.

That which is the Agent ( qm ) of the verb jan, is called nfiqprf .

That which is the prime-cause ( UfrfJr ) of the agent (or product) of the root jan

The

180

is

Dative.

^frf:

II

I.

horn iTtaqr^^fcqft *rr*Ht the scorpion

WW:

Bk.

As MJfrcrft *TOfr the arrow

put in the ablative case.

*:

II

is

Ch. IV. 31, 32.

is

produced from

produced from cowdung.

^1 U M^lPt

it

gw

mre: , (19 pn)

wft *f WWH**WI<jmM Tift

The source of the agent of the verb bhu,
II

*J?E^:

31.

to become, is called Ap&d&na.

The phrase of the agent (kartuh,) is understood here. The word
iMW means the source or that from which anything arises. As Q*i4<ft ifar
ipiqft the Ganges has its source in the Himalayas. *ttivft?**ft ft^WIT JPfafir.
'

The Hydaspes has

^ftf:

its

source in Cashmere.

W&GJt, *RVZP*jfcr

II

qiRkh^

vf*^

9T*lf

11

fa^moj

11

**irc M.ujiln

32.

ift

^Rnft

wrfcn^

'

<Jq*H<^

it is

n *tfaar

whom one

II

is

11

wishes to connect

Samprad&na or

is called

the word qpfen in the sutra

with the object' yet

of the verb

ffrf^H^f *faf%

*Jf*K*li

11

fm*m

The person

with the object of giving,

cepient.
Though

meaning
The object must be

indefinitely

not every object of any verb.

re-

used,

to give.*

Ai'iWWW

*tf

W&t ^ e gives the cow to the

teacher. Uiy44il4

ftw^

Here the words cow 9 and ' alms' are the

OTftt he gives alms to the boy.

object of the verb 'give'; the persons connected with this object are the

teacher and the boy respectively.

These

latter are in the

Dative case and

take the 4th case-affix,

Varti

The person

whom one

should also be called recipient.

of Sraddha.

J^m 9TOJ3 he

husband.
Varti

wishes to connect with the action

As VT5TO

f%*I$it

prepares for battle.

he censures

for the

sake

<nd $ft she sleeps for her

_
2.

After

some verbs

(especially

to sacrifice),

the object

(karma) gets the name of Instrument (karana) and the recipient (Saraprad&na) is called object (karma).

Thus qjpr *t frifr or * tot*

Rudra, which

is

equivalent

to,

'

Wf^ he sacrifices with an animal to

he gives an animal to Rudra.'

Bk.

Ch. IV. 33-35

The

181

Dative.

In case of verbs having the signification,

of the root ruch 'to like,* the person or thing that is
33.

pleased or satisfied, is called

The
1

ruchi.

As

verbs having similar meaning (artha) as the word ruchi or

*ml

liking* are

Samprad&na or recepient.

desire or longing caused

by something

else, is called

*ta3 Ht^S: the sweet meat pleases Devadatta. ^np*TO

is the agent that draws

foj-diq

*^3 4TO Yajnadatta likes Apupa. Here modaka

out the longing which is latent in Devadatta.

Why
qfir

do we say 'the person pleased?

Devadatta likes modak in the way.

Observe $44*114 *ta*fr qtfV

pathi being in the

The word

7U1 case.

^k

ii

5^nr ' 53<^t jj* v53<rf

!

^ftM-sHi^i *SM*J

w^ *h\x< *lw-nW *fln%

to praise, hnu to

it

34. In case of verbs 61stgh

take away, sth& to stand, and 6ap to curse, the person
whom it is intended to inform of or persuade by, these

actions, is called Samprad4na.

The word <fttQCTPT means whom it is desired to make known or inform. As <N4tU3 VrilM^ he praises Devadatta, m., while praising Devadatta,
he wishes that he should know this praise. So also with other verbs. As
?^4*tH %9 he hides from (wishing that Devadatta should know of it) Devadatta.

3q$Tuq

fr\u3 she

Why

ii

herself to

Devadatta for (sexual embrace,

?44tU4 jjq9 he reviles Devadatta.

do we say 'the person whom it is intended to inform'? Observe

93TTOT Vrimft

^Rn

offers

know

wishing that he should

*f*i

wspfc
35.

Here

of

it).

pathi

is

in the Locative case.

jrftff sp*pp5i *JtJ5r

fw*iirf ^twrtfif *wfa u

In the case of the verb dh&ri

to

owe/

the creditor

is called Saniprad&na.
The word swrf is compounded of two words ^nr best and sjtjj debt
meaning (whose debt is best) creditor, as opposed to POT& debtor. As

V^T^nr ^pt WT^rf^ he owes hundred to Devadatta.

Why do we say the creditor is called Recepient?
lltfmiqftl VT% he owes hundred to Devadatta in the village.
'

in the

Locative case.

Observe

Here

Digitized by

^^TPf

village

is

182

The Dative.

(mo

Bk. L Ch. IV. 36-38.

qn^r*) n

In the case of the verb sprih to

the thing desired is called Sarnprad&na karaka.
36.

The verb

wp

to

desire,

belongs to the churAdi class.

governed by this verb takes the Dative case*

flowers,

K^*: *jpifit he desires fruits.

Why do we say the thing desired/

desires flowers in the forest

Here rf is

As

desire,

.The word

j*<Mr: ^nprft' he desires

Observe yfcft *% *^lfa he

in the Locative case.

37. In the case of the verbs having the sense

of krudh to be angry* druh to injure, Irshya to envy,
asfty& to detract; the person against whom the feeling of
anger &c, is directed is called Samprad&na.

Krudh means non-tolerance, droha means doing wrong or hurt,

irshya jealousy and asfiya means to find out the faults of another. The
word kopa includes all the above four sorts of actions. As qq<j-dm ^i^ft*
;

55Tf?T-i^5f% or r*n?ft

jealous

of,

he

is

angry upon,

(i>. with) or bears

or finds out the faults of Devadatta.

malice

to,

Here Devadatta

or
is

is

in

the Dative case.

Why

do we say 4 against whom the feeling of anger is directed.'

Because if there be no feeling of anger, then these verbs will not govern the
dative case, but the accusative. Thus Hnrfiftcjftt he is jealous of his wife,
*>.,

does not wish her to be seen by others.

Here the word bhirvA

accusative case.

H*i \t ; mi (mo
^f:

II

Ig^TJjt

is in

the

*i

nfe^nj:) U

^TO5?^ twfcfrMiql 5 llft^HflWiHM!

^PTTlf H*f%

II

But in the case of the verbs krudh and

druh, when preceded by prepositions, the person against
whom the feeling of anger &c.y is directed is called karma
38.

karaka or

object,

Dgtze

Bk.

I.

Ch. IV. 39, 40.

This aphorism

Sampradana Karaka.

is

a proviso to the

last,

183

and enjoins accusative case,

where by the last, there would have been dative* The word upasrishta
means having upasarga or preposition. As frqqvmftyqfa qjfo^uft
When
used simply, those verbs of course govern the Dative case by the last
.

As $44^4

aphorism.

fkv&:
^r

5f^i

flvlPlr

far ^w^to) n

>r*rf% *re*i spirept

5^m

11

In the case of the verbs r&dh, to propitiate^ and iksh to look to, the person about whose good
or bad fortune questions are asked is called Samprad&na.
39.

The word vipraSna means

literally

asking various questions; and

denotes questioning about the good or bad luck of another.

nwrf^-t^T^

*T*fc

Garga

is

favorable to or looks to Devadatta,

Thus foiTm

the sense

is

that

being casually asked by Devadatta, he reflects upon the good or bad fortune
of Devadatta.

tions

is

Another explanation of

this sutra

put in the dative case.

As ftronr

is,

the agent that puts various ques-

TOftftr

or f ^T$ qT

*[F:

meaning, the

pupil asks the teacher various questions to resolve his doubts, and the teacher

answers those questions to the pupil.

Hcmspari
^
^f%:

11

sw
Nft

*rfcrn^juN

treh*
^^

<Eftf

11

,
*JJR*t JioHfc 4ift<*

so

11

trcTft

^unrest

11

*rcfir

nfa-snsronw,
^
\

<&i\i *jfr*t ^K^rf

11

In the case of the verb Sru preceded by

the prepositions prati and &ii and meaning ( to promise/
the person to whom promise is made (lit the person w)io
was the agent of the former verb) is called Samprad&na.
40.

The compound verb Jtffaf and sjpi^means to promise. A promise is

made on the motion or at the instance of another. The person so proposing
who was the agent of the former action becomes the recipient of the promise
in the latter case.
As fcf^TRr irf *tfkqirf$Hrajajrffir he promises a cow to

....

Devadatta.

3?3wfg q*Tq
**rc[w

tHfo

11

v^ti*

srg-Hfa-vi*, *,

(*w

vsri) g

H*ft "
Digitized by

G00gle

Instrument Karaka.

.184

Bk.

I.

Ch. IV. 4*-43-

In the case of the verb gri> preceded by

ami and prati, and meaning c to encourage by repeating/
the person who was the agent of the piior action, which
41.

Samprad&na.

is repeated, is called

Asflifr
first,

The phrase pfirvasya karta of the last is to be read into this aphorism.
They encourage the Hotri, i.e. the Hotri priest invokes
jy uu iffr
.

the others then follow him in invocation and by so doing encourage him.

The word

tqiff:

and

srftflTC:

mean encouraging

qi vi<feg H 5>ry

ii

*k

ii

the invoker.

tr^Rf

ii

^w^w^,

*<<n*^

'

(n%)

ii

That which is especially auxiliary in the

accomplishment of the action is called the Instrument
or karaka k&raka.
^
_^
42.

As

fr%UT

fprffcThe

cuts ^vith the sickle,

qf^rf fPfRf he divides by the

The instrument 4fcU<fc takes the third-case affix.

Why do we say especially? Because in the case of the other
karakas, the non-mention of the word 'especially makes it possible for u&
to use those cases, in not their strict sense. Thus though the locative case
should be used where strictly a thing is located in another, yet we may say
i|<fl.|*lf qfr: the herdsman in the Ganges, not strictly in, but on the banks of,
the Ganges. gr^*j*J*c5Jjthe family of frogs in the well, t>. on the sides of
axe.

the well

^Rf:

II

ffa: ^PJ^T?r4 *tkhl<* tfeh'&U? H^fif

*l*hUI^ 4fc<UJ4l<f ^T

II

That which is especially auxiliary in the

accomplishment of the action, of the verb div to play, is
43.

called

karma object,
The

present

sfitra

of the last aphorism there

of ^r in the sfitra

WT5 ft&rfH

or

is

Sflff

as well as karaka, Instrument.

ordains accusative case, where by the operation

ought to have been Instrumental case.

to indicate that
tfo^ft

karana

is

also to

he plays the dice or with the

be read into
dice.

The
this.

force

As

Bk.

I.

Ch

IV. 44-47. ]

Adhikarana Karaka.

185

44. In the case of hiring on wages, that

which is especially auxiliary in the accomplishment of
the action of the verb paiikri, c employing on stipulated

wages, 1

optionally called Samprad&na or recipient.

is

This ordains dative case, where there would otherwise have been
Instrumental case. The word qRthq fr means to engage for a limited period

on payment

of wages,

and not absolute purchase

for all time.

As

^rara

Adhikarana.
STTqiftrf

WW, (too)
[f%:

^^W

8H

II

^rf^T

3*T*H:

Slfvi-

It

^i^f^Tf: f^lWT'gl^tafoj

II

II

That which

flfarf lrf%

HJWH*<l*lt<* lif?l<**<UJ

the action as the

site where the action is performed by reason of the agent
or the object being in that place is called Adhikarana
or the Location.
45.

That

in

As 9$ we9 he

which the action

is

srrom , *&*

supported or located

is

called 4dhAra~

on the mat
Hi he is sleeping on the mat.
the pot The Adhikarana takes the 7th case-affix.

seated

TOfrt he cooks in

is

is related to

^qr^irt

faro arret*:)

That which

the site of the verbs si to

lie down, stha to stand, &s to sit, when preceded by the
preposition adhi, is however called karma karaka or
object
46.

is

This ordains accusative case, where otherwise by the

would have been the Locative case. As iTWTftfW

lies down, occupies or lies in the village.

*, faw

stpstc:

^tt

II

^*)

last

sfitra

there

*jfaf?tefa or *!U[rc#

he

11

*tf*tf%*J?J^I ftHJdilWHlT *H:<i**Kh

^Wf *Wfa

II

47. Thatwliich is the site of the verb abhinivii to enter, is also called karina-k&raka. Di

186

Karma Karaka.

Bk.

I.

Ch. IV. 48, 49.

As TPFrPtf^f%7Jtf he resorts to the village. This is an optional rule,

as the word " option " of sutra 44 should be read into it. Thus we have the
following forms also <n^jf*rf%t$p resorting to sin. *K^r5jPif%#sn resorting to
good. The rule here is that of vyavasthita vibhAsa.

**)

(VBIO S?P*T*:

II

48. Tliat which is the site of the verb vas to

dwell, when preceded by npa, anu, adhi, and ail, is called
karma-karalca.
As iiiMJiq^ft On? the army dwells in the village q^gryrTO^r -M^rofr
Hjftquft or MlTOft.

Prohibition must be

Vart :

stated

when the verb

means " fastAs gr$ yr^r ft he fasts in

ing/' or does not denote lying in a locality.

Here the verb upavasati governs the

the village.

locative case

and not

the accusative.

Karma.

S^H^^RW 3>3
*&* (W)

8<5

M^lPl

II

^tt 9 ^ftoiRPPT,

II

49.

affected

II

That which

by the

it is

intended should be most

the object

act of the agent is called

or karma.
That which is especially desired by the agent to be accomplished
by the action is called karma. As sr <M)ft He makes the mat. qtf *r*&fa
he goes to the village. Why do we say " desired by the agent " ? Observe
Here gram is no doubt
*ff$*? xi TOTft he ties the horse in the gram field.
agent of the verb, the
the
most desired by the horse, but as horse is not
word imj takes the locative case. Why do we use the word " most " ?
Observe <Rj*fosf *J3^ ne eats tne f0(* a' on g with the milk. Here milk is no
doubt desired by the agent, but not being the principal object desired, takes
the Instrumental case.

Though

the word stf

the repetition

was understood in this

of this word here is to

the last

sfitra,

vritti of

the word AdhAra does not extend to this

not take the anuvritti of the

word karma

into

sutra

by

anuvritti from

indicate that the anu-

sfitra,

this sfitra,

because as

we do

we do

not take the

Bk.

I.

Ch. IV.

Karma Karaka.

50, 51. ]

187

any word of the previous sutra into this. Had we taken the
word karma from the last sfitra, then we could use the accucase in those limited instances, where the word is capable of taking

anuvritti of

anavritti of the

sative

Thus while we could very

the Locative case also, but not in other cases*

well say *it ^ fi ^ifrT he enters the house,

^rj

the food,

he drinks saktu.

fttfftf

we
By

could not say *Hrpf T*fH he cooks

repeating the word

in this

The karma-karak, takes

such examples become valid everywhere.

sutra,

karma

the second case-affix.

sw grH toHSto*
Wnfal*W f
*f%r:

(^5T0 S>*)

3*

11

\o

11

*m

mrfk n

11

ipsa,

II

zznfcj vRrf tffotnrf

fk^m

Hh*

q*i3

*Hii?uj ^{frfam

3% mfH ^tot cr^tkt ft^Jhid u

not intended to be most
affected by the act becomes however similiarly connected with the action it also is called karma.
If that

50.

which

is

That which is not desired by the agent is anipsita or object of

aversion. Thus f%tf w^raft he eats poison, ijhr^ **VXf* He sees the thieves.
aTH^ip^^r1 jTO*rfcr going to the village, he plucks the roots of the

trees.

sreftm
[f%:

11

*rafZfcf

11

^^fc "

\%

^ ii^kkii

H%Wjff

*wflir

w^rf^rcPL,

*, (* *5)

II

51. And that karaka which is not spoken

of as coming under any of the special relations of ablation &c, is also called karma.
^J^ju^

There are some verbs

in

Sanskrit which

akathita object, in addition to their usual

it is

that object which

of the other case

If the

optional.
for

the fold.

relations,

it

is

As

its

.is

name

called

an ^*"

indicates,

mentioned by way of any

such as ftfTOFT HjfacM"! &c. and

this akathita

is,

therefore

object be not intended

Accusative case with such verbs

put in the

as,

he milks the cow (her milk; 9PPTOCT& *tf he confines the cow to
Here 5 and jpt are akathita or optional objects. If the speaker
'

does not intend to have

cases

direct one.

not otherwise kathita or

noun capable of taking

any other case,

$tfnr q?r:

is

take what

as,

&?f:

The

this object,

the words will be put in

aPTt&ft rf.
two accusatives are mentioned
**^*fa *f*5 fa ^ JTHJ fif *IW <*&{ II Sffap^

(ablative) T*fl$rfnr, ir# (locative)

roots that are capable of governing

in the following kirikA

:JSJPJ <r*

their natural

/;,

188

Karma Karaka.

[Bk.

I.

Ch. IV. 52.

In the case of the roots j?N ' to milk qr\ f to beg/ T^ ' to cook/
9
^SH[ 'to punish/ to' to obstruct or confine H*^ ' to ask/ fa 'to collect*
Wto tell jjt^ 'to instruct* f5r 'to win' (as a prize of wager)
'

f^

and also in the case of ft, 5, ^, and N all mean5^

'
ing to take or carry ' and others having the same signification, that noun
which, besides the direct object, is affected by the verb, is put in the Accusa-

to churn

to steal/

'

tive case

as,

$tfi*

irf

He begs

'

*r are examples of the

*^*t

ftsnt,

(S. K.)

'

he milks the cow

similarly tf^gjpftyf

' ;

other roots in order.

' ;

qfii

W<t,

w*&

*f*tf

*Plfc^ *Rt TO**lfa,

1IUI4^ *T$ HPfft sfa? *r, qrfS-

dWWUtf

art

flt

the earth of Bali

TOlft firar*3lr are instances of this kind of

or qt\ and f^ or ^ have the same meaning as f^ and

object, because *n*T

iTPT, the roots given in the kasiki.

Obs.The roots Pr, J^, T^ f^, ^^., fsT,

5 and everq^ are of
every rare occurrence as governing two accusatives, in classical literature,
though given

The

in the

above

roots

mentioned above and

list

take two objects.

One

the case of the

twelve roots from

*nrf,

first

of

them

in the case of the last

Thus

and qnt the secondary.

tive case in order to

rppfk

will, is called

II

' t

four roots SPTT,

that which

in the

the principal object

is

necessarily put in

is

is

Accusative case, depending upon the

the secondary object.

9*fWrrf, *:,

l^whrf $*W*lW RHR^Hnjprf

VRnrf *n '^raf h ^ii^dHl **ta*iY lift

^Tf^^ ^mnrj ft **it:
II

n ^TRglt WTOS? ^chim

uforo* ^rarar:

*ifi!*HJi

t?t

ft^i*^

II

*jrff

mtit: Jrfswt Tifi^f:

^nf^R^

11

*^Jf fifanfc^r iiftWlr q^vni:

n< cut-in

^m***^

11

it

11
11

Of the verbs having the sense of ^moknowledge or information and eating,' and of
52.

tion

Hh4<4ilUfl

qif&hi

the accusa-

the principal object,

nm-^-IlWWTO-^-S^^

JjfrT: II

'

irf, sfift,

complete the idea of the verb,

and that which may be put

speaker's

5^ to

^f, vfhftfSf &c, are secondary

they can, according to the speaker's volition, be put in other

And

cases.

same sense,
and the other, secondary. In
y{, the nouns <nr Rptf *h*\lfk,
others having the

principal,

&c. are principal objects, and

objects, for

3?9

is

Bx.

Ch. IV. 52.

I.

Karma Karaka.

189

verbs that have some literary work for their object, and
of intransitive verbs, that which was the agent of the
verb in its primitive (non-^i or non-causal state), is
called the object (karma) in its causative state (when the
verb takes the affix (13a).
knowledge ' or 'information or some kind of eating/ and other roots having a similar sense ; also
of roots that have some literary work for their object, and of intransitive
roots, that which is the subject of the verb in its primitive sense is put in the
Accusative case in the causal, the object remaining unchanged ; e. g.
In the case of roots that imply

'

motion/

Primitive.

"

Causal.

ft#f

suft*if*ui ifrer

But
*ltf*** UH^fft

Rima'

is

UHt

in inraft

(f%*3 Pft) prompts

'

'

*Jtf*Ft

R&ma

to

(Rama makes Govind

this, we shall have

Rma

its

if

some body else

to say fforfoft trfnf

Govind to go/

to cause

not put in the Accusative case, because

verb, not in

go)

do

Vishnu mitra prompts

'

^f$& *m*mn^

it is

Here

the subject of the

primitive, but causal, sense.

Mah&bhishya, adds this explanation on the meaning

the sutra qfapt &c. *re*ri may be either ipsft

Patanjali, in his
of the

word

firar or u*$t

1&&&
*fafr

in

^f

*rf*

When we
(ifa)

and

w^f:

apr^rerfl

take the former interpretation, the roots f?n% ( ) iiftft

(denom. of $rs* ) have to be excluded from the rule ; as, K*f%

iXQvfif fa^fcr

roots *|

ot with

fir

t*

itfff<ir-$n^nc-for*fs

and

f% <iHlft -g*req3%^:

w^ with ot must

WWft-ftll wRl-4
,

iK^ifir-^^nnn%-5if^f .
;
be included in the rule;

l*l | *^ft-?*f^n|

HPJ with

and

sjf

included in the rule; 3f^7fe-ft<filM*JWIMfl-?*TTO

rule,

.
(

second interpretation, the roots sif^

And the
as, UHjffif

When we adopt the

5W with ft must be
,

M*S^ft-fi^W*lfi-^l*im^Rl-

There are several exceptions and counter-exceptions to the preceding

which are important
Vart

The causals of

and *f% to carry/ do not govern

e. g. *jnifr *nt infa tfjft *r A servant
;
*mf ITOift TOtrflr *r (S. K.) (He) causes a servant to
*ft

'

to lead'

the Accusative, but the Instrumental

carries a load.

carry a load.

**fcr

190

Varti
signifying a

draw the

when

has for

it

its

chariot.

qtff% Vffl\ TOtatf:

The

(b).

mH\+m\mTh.r*ttTQfa *t
m

Varti

Jc

causals of the

roots

(c).

and

igf\

Ch, IV. 53.

word

Horses

'to eat/

The boy

H*^,when

has not the sense of

it

govern

eats his

food.

*^frr but Kraft sren^^ft^f wrf<lr 'raft ^f *j irf^

;

intransitive

roots mentioned above

is

fifar

'

injury to a

W^f fop*:, W*rf%

as, *rcnrf%

'

I.

(He) causes the boy to eat his food.

sentient thing/ governs the Instrumental

By

Bk.

subject in the causal a

the Instrumental case; e.g. H^tUtRt ^HffitqT

C*\

Hj

But **

driver/ obeys the general rule; as, qur K*i T?f^f

'

Varti

Karma Karaka.

fihff

meant such roots as are

not by their nature capable of governing an object other than that of

'

time,'

'

place &c., and not those roots which, though transitive,

times be used*intransitively according to the speaker's volition, or

meaning
tive, is

is, quite, evident ; as, fc&h<: q^r: 51%

Here q^f?r , though transiused without an object, because it can be easily understood ; hence
.

and not

fifaftqr qnraft

In

fifcac

but n

forming the passive

pal object in the causal, which

tive sense,

unchanged ;

is

iwmfa

frcyif

construction of casual verbs,

the princi-

the subject (agent) of the verb in

primi-

its

put in the Nominative case, and the other object remains

is

e. g.

Causal Active.

Primitive.

Kama

may somewhen their

goes to a

Causal Passive.

(He) causes Rama to

go to a village.

village.

Rama is caused

to

go &c.

^wta *|**f ^t tt *iwRlr. tot mi 4tiid

The servant prepares a mat. (He) causes the servant The servant is made to
*p*n *rf ttitlft

to prepare a mat.

Govind

one month.

sits for

But

(a).

prepare &c.

(He makes Govind sit &c. Govind

in the case of roots that

imply

is

knowledge

mode
*

to sit &c.

eating,

those that have a literary work for their object, the principal object
in the
e. g.

Nominative case, and the secondary

5m*

ifcztf or

known

in the

*mim

to M.'

^JHt^t Hts^f

\pft

qfc?3

M.

^H>3i ^nrf?t

is
'

made known

and

is

put

Accusative, or vice versa

V^^nrf^ 'he makes Mananaka know

'

duty

his

duty

his
9

he makes the boy eat food:

or
9

'

9
;

*mu*3iti|4

duty

is

made

7|ft?? Ht*Rl5 or

(S. K.)

With regards

to roots that

govern

two

accusatives, the

rules

roots that
i.e., those
mentioned above hold good in their case also
imply motion <c, govern the Accusative of the subject of the primitive
,'

Case, and others, the Instrumental case, sometimes;

as,

qpritqfvi Tfprt-

Bk.

Ch. IV. 53, 54.

I.

im**

nrtfl: ( fn?*t )

Earth/

*fwt

"

Agent defined.

^rf^mft

191

(God) makes

Vamana ask

*wft ) tW iftfcr *nrt *mf (ITOft

makes the cowherd take the sheep to the town.'
ntfTjsrf *ptc *rfr; (

(5>w eif^r

% Q<**4<H^n^
*><<tf * *ft ?&) h

^frf:

11

n *$

11

W^

^TOUM,

^stef

jx& ^rfWw^^nirt:

spa?

^r iiiiilf

twmwil

The agent of the verb in

53.

Bali for

'(The master)

*wfa

irftfsfr

11

non-^i (pri-

its

mitive) form in the case of hji to lose and kji to make,

optionally called karma or object when these verbs

is

take the

affix.
nf

(Causal)..
Causal.

Primitive.

As ftf% nit tostto:

The boy takes the load.

tiroft

He

causes the: servant to take the

Devadatta makes the mat.

He

causes Devadatta to

Vart:
in the

The subject of the

Atmanepada,

is

*?rr

<mmtf or uncroftr

primitive, verbs *rf3ft^

make

load.

the mat.

and ros when used

either put in the Accusative or Instrumental casein the

causal: as,

Primitive.

Causal.

Devadatta bows down to the Guru.

He makes

Devadatta bow down to the

Guru.

The servants

He makes

see the king.

y. jL^->*~tJ^'r

the servants see the king.

KARTRI.

w?f*:
^[Rf:

11

firarr

srat

II

t$

II

q^rfSf *ro?*: *rcrt

sr^np wi**ihu fro^qd *m*i<*' Hi&itf

*rofa

(*w)

11

Whatever the speaker chooses as the independent, principal and absolute source of action is
54.

called kartft or agent.

The agent
cooks,

is

absolute and

f
unconditioned, as, |*f*T:

q^lftr

Devadatta.'

**mfr T^rfa the pot cooks.

Digitized by

LiOOQ LC

19J

NlPATA DEFINED.

BK.

I.

CH. IV. 55-57.

That which is the mover thereof, L e., of

the independent source of action, is called Hetu or
55.

cause, as well as kartA or agent.

Thus

SKTCqfij

he causes to be made, ?nroft he cause to be taken.

When hetu is employed as agent the verb is put in the causative form
The

force of the

agent, v/*., Hetu

and

word

^r is to

(III. 1. 26).

give both names to the mover of an

kartA: otherwise by sutra

of this Chapter only one

name

would have been given.

Nipita.

The

Particles.

56. From this point forward upto the aphorism Adhirt-6vare (1.4.97), all that we shall say is to be
understood to have the name of Mp&ta or Particles.

The word

same purpose as the word cha

of the last ; namely, it makes the words Gati, upasarga and karmapravachntya
take two names, t\ e., their one name as well as the name Nip&ta* The letter
C in mifNiiqJ s to remove doubt, i. e. aphorism I. 4. 97 should be taken as
limit, and not sutra III. 4. 13 which has the word iswari also.
sjraj

of this sutra serves the

*T^t
^f^i:

11

to?3

11

h>

11

mpfa

*n^ir f^nrcUir >wfwi t

57.

or Particles,

11

*-sn^j: sre?3, (Etotot) n

^^r^ q&9

The word cha

and,'

11

&c, are called Nip&ta

when they do not signify

substances.

The following are particles (nipita) ^f'and'

'or' f 'an expletive'
'vocative
particle'
'only
'exactly.' <r*n' so, thus,' snp 'certainly/
fjf
*
<j*
tf**^ continually/ vnr^ 'at once/ *jjn^ 'repeatedly/ ^rr^ ^q^ 'excellently/ vf%n ' abundantly/
< if/
[the n is indicatory], ^r

4^^'if ^j

'where/ fpc 'there/ *&*** 'what if?/ * 'no/fe* ah/!

nrfan [*rtn)
do not' M4l*tl^ indeed !' m^ do not,'
rftpr
' not/
*r*^ ' as much as,'
*T*^'so much/ tf ?* I 'perhaps/ * (disrespectful interjection)
'

'

'

m^4W

Bk.

Ch. IV.

I.

oblation to the gods/ fT^T

'

*3T?r (intcrjO

Prepositions defined.

58. ]

'

198

manes/

oblation to the

forefathers

q^' oblation to the gods/ *fr^ (mystical ejaculation typical of the three great

deities of the Hindu mythology), inj thouing/ tnnft * thus/ introducing an ex'

excellent/

certainly/ fa*?

position, (?5P*

indeed/

'

*m now
f

'

U& 'fie' trf??? 5?

3 *ft

<C

The vowels

*fK

a, i,

i, 1,

interjections, they indicate various emotions, differ

c^t

t> (ft), 'n*.

2 tf^*

TO

fff^t

srnj, 5k*tjt, apr:,

^f

To

the

sfr,

rft, ift; Off),

[ ^Pfc

to*Ji

u,

list

qs*

snr^.

Fd, ftvsr, A, fj^# 5,

J ^5^ snr (tft* )
*F3T, I3Ti nWty *^l ^t

*rit, 115,

ftrar^,

vw

),

when, as

e, ai, o, au,

ft,

from the ordinary vowels.

f)ii<(

^RH^ ^5^ Tft^fc STTOfc ?iPP[f

9^, ^k, s^, fr, ?, ( $ ), rrftRf^ JCPfc ^*.

fti^, ft:,

f-fhj,

Wi

^*

vii^N^, **3Fi

15^)1

**, ?^,

^rr|t, srarft,

*t *fl&

*f*i ^pR^

auspicious inceptive), *[$

it a past signification),

(attached to the present tense gives

^.

fS^sf*

*r&, *^, *i^ (^i|)

^.

*?.

^i ^Pfc ^

^
what have, without the reality,
a word with one of the terminaIn the example MT*M* avdattam

of indeclinables belong also

the appearance of an upasarga (No. 59), of

tions of case or persons and of the vowels.

it were, the word (by VII.

ahanyuh
In the example
4. 47) would be mPJ avattam.
*rtj: egotistic/
the ahan is not identical with the aham 1/ terminating in a case affix be-

'

given away/ the *{%

is

not really an upasarga, for if

cause a pronoun, really regarded as being in the nominative case, could not
be the first member, in such a compound. In the example, atfercfrrr astikshiri, a

cow or

the like

in

which there

ed as differing from the word

third person

member

in

asti,

singular, otherwise

it

is

is,*

milk/ the asti*jft* must be regardwhich ends with the affix of the

could not have appeared as the

first

a compound.

xn^q:
58.

11

\c

11

n^ffn n n-sn^r*, (famdi ere?*) *

The words pra

&c., are called JSTip&ta

when

not signifying substances.

The

following

is

the

list

of

*npn or

* TO , Hf *%, *IJ.

prepositions:'

*** *****"
w 1 ft 5^ t ft . *ros fir , *rftr , nfir , *flr , 9 **
well have been
could
it
The making of this a distinct aphorism, when
included in the last, is for the sake of giving the Pra &c* words two names,

*rf*

namely, those of NipAtas, as well as upasargas under certain circumstances,

t. e. t when they are in composition with verbs.* Not so however the cbi Ac,
words.

They never get the designation

of upasargas.

these words signifying substances they are not Nipitas. As TO

Here the word TO is not a Nipita.
*F(f?r fhir the excellent army conquers.

When

Digitized by

VjOOQiC

Upasarga. and Gati.

104

^f*c

11

sir^r: ftrsr

*lf*?<h*(JI

^A 3*nh1

f$*&^W

3ht mfas

*ft*f*I*43U*f

Bk.

Ch. IV. 59, 60.

I.

11

^Mfcu^ll

The words pra &c, get the designation

of upasarga or prepositions, when in composition with
59.

a verb.
.

As q +

Rlft

qj because of the

JT

JflSrafir

Here the dental

getting the designation of upasarga (See

Similarly qfrtOTft, jtotrFR:, qftuffWH

Why do we
sition

say

when

sfttra VIII. 4. 14).

a verb?

in composition with

As

with a noun they are not called upasargas.

*Hmehl%U

changed into cerebral

*r is

Here

a country destitute of a leader.

is

*t

When

ipj^t

in

compo-

inTOMOT^Stfni

not changed into

r.

a leader 'the term TOPraft means destitute of a

leader; though both have the same radical elements: pra in one is an upasarga, in the other a NipAta pure and simple.

Thus while

sroqcff:

means

'

Vartz

As

*r*fie$^r:

The word ij^^ should

- *$*

be included

given by Marut.

*TF^

in the list

*T

of upasargas.

KS\ +

+ n

Here Marut being treated as an upasarga, though it does not

(VII. 4. 47).
end with a vowel, the $r ls replaced by n by rule VII. 4. 47 which declares
1

the substitute of $r which

called ghu,

is

sarga that ends in a vowel, and

is

when

followed

is

it

by an

preceded by an upa-

affix

beginning with

which has an indicatory k9

It

might be objected, that as *$!( does not end with a vowel, sutra

VII. 4. 47 does not apply.

designation of upasarga to

be so9 the

fact of its not

To this we

H^

is

say that otherwise the giving the

superfluous; and in order that this should not

ending with a vowel

is

overlooked.

The particle m^ should be included the of upasargas.

- **5T (HI.
Thus m*J + W +
Here because v^is treated as an
106).
Varti

in

upasarga, that

sfitra

HI. 3. 106

*tfhn

11

is

made applicable.

\o n o^TfSr w nfat,

The words pra &c,

when in composition with a verb.
60.

list

3.

*J3

(ni^r.

fomen )
t

it

are called also Gati,

Google

Bk.

I.

195

Gati.

Ch. IV. 61.]

Now

the gerund of the simple root f> would have been

compounded with a gati word (II. 2. 18J the C4T is
replaced by *** see S. II. 2. 18 and VII. 1. 37. H + y + f^ - *&**'
(VI. 1. 71).
Here pra being called gati we have compounding by rule
Similarly it^ra^.. Here pra
1. 37.
II. 2. 18; and then we apply S. VII.
being a gati word retains its own accent by rule VI. 2. 49. ' a gati retains in
a compound its own accent when it immediately precedes a second member

As

JT|TO

^FTT, but as

that ends in kta

is

is

it

provided the latter denotes

expressed by the root of which kta

Similarly

by

rule VIII.

sjcfctlft ,

a^f.

/.

The yoga-vibh&ga or

*''*47)

the separation of one aphorism into two,

the sake of the subsequent aphorisms.

through the latter

sfitras

the object of the action which

added.'

here pra being treated as gati gets annuditta accent

C*~A

7/

is

and not

'The annuvptti of

of upasarga.

So

is

gati only

that while pra &c.,

for

runs

have

two names upasarga and gati ; uri &c., have only one name, namely, gati.
Thus in JT>ffapj and *rf*rfikK^ , by treating the words * and Mfa as
upasargas we change the 7 and 9 into QJ and * by rule VIII. 4. 14 and
VIII. 3. 87 and again treating them as gati we regulate the accent
:

VartiThe words

SRTftqfn

should be included in the

list

of Gati.

As

In the first by taking it

(1) qhlRchl^m ( 2 ) frlR^lfr^ fc) H^lR*r"^rtf?T .
(VII. 1. 37.) The other two cases
as gati we have samasa (II. 2. 18) and

f^

illustrate accent.

Vart:

The words 5^ and *&Q are treated as Gati in

yreqqqnfarq 5*Pl .
dAtta accent (VIII.
fr

Here
1.

the Vedas.

As

word p^ being gati, causes &nt to take annuHere also the accent is regulated by
70) ^itft?!:
the

VIII. 2. 71.

^T:

II

3T*lfof: JJ*ftt *J**J*3I >II*W1IW ft>4(4)i) ffirtHF *CTf5*T

61.

The words

II

&c, and those

and
those
4. 50),
that end with
(when in composition with the verh bh&
uri, assent,

that end with chvi (V.

cj&ch (V. 4. 57),

kji or as) are called Gati.

and ^4ch are ordained when the verbs in composition is either 7 f ^or qq^ (V. 4. 50 and 57) firi &c., being read along
with chvi and d&ch ; shows that the verb in composition with them must also

The

be any one
to the

affixes chvi

of the

name

above three verbs, and none else

in

order to entitle M>tt

of gati.
Digitized by

LiOOQ LC

Gati.

196

The words
18 and VII.

(II. 2.

with the word

wft

??ft
1.
.

*fe[lPK5ff.

*n*Ih

XFIiW.

^rer*-

The words ending

white what was not white.

JJ3R*5I.

sir:

ufararcjir.

^.
are also gati.

in chvi

words ending

in

*V\

6a, 63.

As irfl^W
So
j. 71).

37) *fl$H> (VI. 2. 49), gffififtft (VIII.

The following is a list of these words:

^*-

also

Ch. IV.

I.

and qx(t mean to assent and spread

snfc

So

Bk.

ITifr.

^Nifel

As ^tfmj having made

made

as <FTT?ffRq having

the sound

pat.

62.

Gati,

A word imitative of

sounds

is also called

when it is not followed by the word itL

The phrase <ijfaftm^ is a Bahuvrfhi compound

which has not the word ffa

As

<U^kH| having

^rr^tfir

^fa;

made

H^-fft-qr^

'

that

sound kh4t.

the

iai^<|\ (VI-

3.

49),

(Viii. 2. 71).

Why do we say

^j^-^to^

after it

(
11

'

when

i*m^i5t ufa*

it

*njtT hh<41 &ii**i

has not the word ffa after

it?*

Observe

^wkj*w *iftuw *fw

11

63. The words sat and asat when in composition with a verb are called gati, when used in
the sense of c respect or love,' and * disrespect or in-

difference. 1

As <<* having honored (II.

or ^TOUj^CVI. 2. 49) *^*IW sftftft or

2.

18 and VII.

^^lETtf*

1.

37) HCTJ^r?* , QtQRI*

(VIII. 2. 71).
Digitized by

LiOOQ LC

Bk.

I.

Gati.

Ch. IV. 64-66. ]

Why

do wc say when meaning

197

respect or disrespect ' ?

'

Observe

(feo ufar:) n

The word alam when in composition

64.

with a verb
1

is called gati,

when used

in the sense of

ornament.*

tion,

m^

an indeclinable and has four meanings : 'prohibicompetent, enough and ornament/ The term T5^ is gati when it means

The word

is

ornament As *H<i^m (II. 2. 18, VII. 1. 37); tfti^rt (VI. 2. 49) qqt^flfa (VIII.
2. 71) when it does not mean ornament we have t|c$*qvE*T JPfftr he goes having eaten enough.

(few) ift:

<H**K*ifTO%

<4<\i(h

11

snEP^sprft**^

11

11

*if&***t u

m*^: jjs*sm f^fkfa ^t^TOife^inr^iwn

11

65. The word antar is called gati, when used

in the sense oi * non-accepting/ in composition with a
verb.
The word ?fof means taking or 'accepting/ iftfrq? means therefore the opposite of this namely
rejecting/ abandoning. As r?qt wr tpjipr
9

'

'

he went away having abandoned home ;

doned.

3ftR| if*G

Why do we
the

ijfTOtf jSnUltf:

Vart

say 'when meaning to abandon 9 ?

hawk went away taking

The word J^rr

is

92 by which

into ot.

fK is

*51m^^

HI. 3. 106

added; and rule VIII.

As WSTgf f a^if$: and

Observe qjsafaf

hold of the mouse.

treated as an upasarga for the purposes oi

the application of the following rules

III. 3.

being aban-

irenfrwyp^ falsehood

Hj4i<$J|ft

sjjnrcihn?!

ii

by which WT is added rule

14 by which *r is changed
;

4.

%$

11

v^ifk

*Mnrol f

11

sijt-

inft-tn^, (nfir:) u
*fa:

11

$jj*fr

wj umi 'ror irfhm*

j

iflttak

wr:

'

11

66. The words ka^e and manas are gati when

in composition with a verb and used in the sense of 'reaction by satiation.*
Digitized by

LiOOQ LC

108

[Bk.

Gati.

The word M^Mftftara means

W.

ffafir

'

Ch. IV. 67-69.

As

of desire/

satisfaction

he drinks milk to his heart's content or

I.

he

till

is

qrfftqr

So
( WET )

satisfied?

much till his desire

TO ft^ft . That is
by revulsion of feeling. When not having this sense we have q*4
or q^terqnpr he went away he satisfied.
to say, he drinks so

also T4t?nT
is satisfied

wmi^

trtt

*^Tf3ir

11

1**:

stow*

( ifife )

67* The word purah in front of, when indeclinand in composition with a verb, is called gati.*

able,

The pronoun

^jf 'front'

with the

affix

forms ^rr^, and by S. I.

39 pur being substituted for
rflr

becomes an Avyaya. (See S. V. 3.

The object by making it gati is threefold (1) compounding by II. 2.
18 (2) accent by VI. 2. 49 (3) to change the: fc into ^ by VIII. 3. 40. As <v?*$ft*
H<*fr*iH and 11^ y\*ht\fb, when not an indeclinable we have ^: j?ft
JT: ff?*r
1.

38

it

pfirva).

home/

srer

68.

And

is called gati,

The word
means not
'

\c

i'

H/uiu

is

it is

n^r

an indeclinable as
^fiffiT

( *rf?r:

swmnr)

it

ends in^(I. 1.39); and

set, rises again

Tppnt

Jjtft,

when

not an indeclin-

11

\% n ^rf^r u srra

*rfif-3i^*^i|

) *

II

The indeclinable word achchha, meaning

69.
*

*,

not gati as Httt CEfQCT the arrow has been thrown.

nfai siaws^

*wfa

yr**f% the sun having

have vanished.

era ict^^j
(

s^si*

11

the indeclinahle word astam c at

when in composition with a verb.

As tpsforo

visible.'

4J4d<|tMft >*mPt riches that

able

11

before in the presence

of,' is

called gati,

composition with verbs denoting

verb vad to speaik.
,<

when used

in

motion* or with the

'

The word *i3 is an indeclinable and has the force of the word lift.
So also *!*$m TK5tftn^ and H1*QAs Ws&t?*, H*5WJ and qq?mi*bft
an
Avyaya,
we
have
3f3iTOi *I*6fa
qjfa when not
,

JjF^J

it

bo

11

wrfk

11

w? ig'WiX'^O
,

Bk.

I,

Gati.

Cii. IV. 70.73. ]

109

The word adas that is called gati when

in composition with a verb and not implying a direction,
c

TO.

to another.
The word upadeSa means a

When

to another*

direction

a person

and does not address another, that is anupadesa.

a demonstrative pronoun. As *jf: $>*?
f^l
when used as a demonstrative pronoun we have *TT

cogitates within himself

That
and

when

is

w^(:

is

it

37ctf%

f?Jtt

not-

J*dffi

71.

to?

II

II

^?[Tf^

II

fH^:

e^lfl,

(ifei:) H

when used in the sense of

when in composition witlx

The word

tiras

disappearance,' is called gati

a verb.
As f3ttt*gr fifl*t*l^ and
fftfftiqft why do we say when meaning

'

disappearance

Observe

fawror^fe
72.
is

fiftt
11

\s*

Tttfflqw:

This
42):

fift:

is

an example

or fiii^^l

fwr

optional VIII. 3.

^fsi vfoi)
^frT:
frfs?

s^

11

fsmnw, ?fa 9

F?it*)

(*rf&:

meaning disappearance
c

tiras

when

the verb kpl follows.

As fsr. fff* or ft<*$U| (VII L $*

The change of visarga into sr Is
meaning disappearance we have ftfc

(VIII. 3. 42).

When

42.

standing apart.

of sftff-ftTOTT.

not

he stands having

fJW 3ft#
^m%J*QfT%
f<tefir

mrfk

The word

optionally called gati,

i. e. t

laid aside the stick.

y^iHt

ii

^rm%-^FmSt

(fenrai

11
11

3*n^j?*r^s(j5ffc

f%Wrf *lf*W<" Wf:

ftn^K *ifiwran fan

j^w otto?dii#

wSfa

II

The words up&je and anv&je both mean-'

ing supporting or assisting the weak/ are optionally
called gati when used along with the verb kjri.
73.

As n^
*ir*f

frar or

gqr

ffffT

^ fror*

Hj^ili

$nr

or

^Tsmwj^fa*
^T:

having given support

II

11

tg

11

*^rf*

11

*TOi^ f n^ftf*

^TOTOPpftft JJ^VJlfr yft? ftqrar *rf*RfHlft TOfal

II

*,

200

74.

Ac,

Gati.

The words s&ksh&t,

kri.
Varti

C*C

IV. 74-77-

in the. presence of*

when used along with the

are optionally called gati,

verb

Bk.

In the words **hrU^ &c. the force

under-

of the affix f%^r is

making a thing what it was not before. As *U4fin ^HRf or ffcfr

making evident what was concealed before.

stood, namely

fkiziff%m ffaztt^Wf

iRrefin

fnn

it

The word urasi, in the breast,' a^d

the mind are optionally gati when the verb
4

75.

rnanasi in
'
kpi follows, provided that they are not used in the sense
of c placing/
As xiifin$< ? or 4K(ht>*tt <Mft$*3 or *HiV^f When it has the
sense of placing wehave ^ifa^ fr qifa
he lies down having clasped the
hand on the breast, *Hfa^>* 3T *^f mmfil he ponders having placed 'the word
'

'

mind.

in his

1^ ^
^fxT:

ii

*Mfrqi

fiwfl

Pta^^nN}

ll

b$

3cr*^r,

H^ifa

li

*virtj^ f fore%,

II

HT^rnn^ f%Hm

And the words madhye

fSr

*rfcrcr*n *m/5<i

in the middley
c
pade in the foot ' and nivachane speechless * are optionally gati, when kpi follows, the sense not being of
76.

placing.*
As H&i ^pnj or ^stqr. qf f??ar or ^j&r firare? fiHT or ^Rqr.
But when it has the meaning of placing we have fffenr:
;

d# he

lies

$R*T

fijjT:

.down having put his head under the foot of the elephant.
i*fi?j

ij^t *ii*nicjmw^

<4<4J4+& (nfg: ^ftl)

*fir: u

77.

the

l%

hand

are

n 33

ii

xj^Tf^r

ii

f*i?i* , ips!-*n*fl

II

<rn& x**$t jf$I ^ftr fro* *rf^ft

wr OT3H3

ii

The word haste in the hand,'

c

paijiau 'in

always and necessarily called gati when

used with the verb kji in the sense of marriage;*

c

As qnnr ^pi^r or f^
he went out having taken

married.
But f^d fftCT'^irfcrf
hand a.k&rshipana (a coin).
r^

^j?^ having

in his

*ni:

*ifnffwf^rf: arf^i

201

Gati.

Bk.-I. Ch. IV. 78-81.3

f%?4 *rfoJ^

*i*fif

11

78. The indeclinable word priidhvam followed

by the verb kj*i, is always called gati when used in the

sense of binding/
The word *n^ ends in ^ and means favourably suitably. When
however it means bound it is a gati as, snW^TOT having bound. But
when not meaning to bind, we have
muf fr^t VRii W. having made the
9

'

'

carriage agreeable, he

is

gone.

efta*2t, (nf?r: stf* )

^Rt:

flf%cRT

II

11

>WpiMR*A<tf

IFw

**tvt fi^KI SjfsT ijfa&tft TOT:

II

The words Jivik& and upanishad followed

79.

kvi are called gati when used in the sense of

likeness or resemblance.'
As ?ftf%3\T3yKr having made it as if it was a means of living OTftTOipm having made it like an upanishad. But 4tfa<*l fffyr ipf: having made

by the verb
*

his livelihood

he

11

gone.

xn^m^:

f*

^t:

is

11

ireyrepfcrerarn

co

11

q^ifir

qrfh'mi xi^K^ir:

ft, fra^.innt:., (rftr:

11

The particles called gati and upasarga

be employed before the verbal root (that is to say,
80.

are to
they are prefixes).
The word # has been employed
preceding examples

m**\ mo)

to include the term 3<rerfalso.

The

the application of this rule.

all illustrate

m^ro* ^fr; <tf Jft <j*ft mJ^E^ir:

81.
In the chhandas (veda) these gati and
upasarga are employed indifferently after the verbal
root, as well as before it.
^ffc

11

E*?flr fire*

As.^ruft^rv *?**

ti

^m <wft*y*nj n if&m fa*? ixr (Rig.

i

**

Digitized by

I.

2. 6).

VjOOQLC

Karmapravachaniya.

202

Bk.

Ch. IV. 82-84.

I.

In this we have WTOHPgq instead of tiqnnPj/ vayu and thou Indra, ye

heroes, come ye both quickly to the soma of the worshipper by this sincere
prayer/

t*

arafgmq

11

mpfa

sroni<n:

11

*;

(no

the chhandas (veda) these gati and

upasarga are also seen separated from the verb by intervening words.
82.

I11

As:
" Indra

*nrr 3* Jnftfacnm^ii f^lr *r gqjfcaft (Rig. I. 2. 4).

*** *ra
and vayu, here are soma libations for you. Approach, ye with

Here ot

For the libations are desiring you."

from the word 3n*T9 hy the intervening word sritfir.
pleasures for us.

separated

is

Karma pravachaniya.

From this

point as far as aphorism I. 4.

97 the particles treated of, are to be understood as having the name of karcna-pravachaniya.
83.

These particles govern a substantive and qualify a verb and

from other particles termed upasarga and gati. As snsjtf ?&m well
praised by you. *| fori? ?mr you have sprinkled. Here
is a karma pravach-

differ

*f

aniya and qualifies the sense of the verb, /. e. it is an adverb. It is not an

upasarga, for had it been so it, would have changed the *ET into * (VIII. 3- 6 5)The term karma pravachaniya is a big term compared with other technical

terms such
syllables.

term

it

as, f>, fir 5 &c, which generally do not exceed more than two
The word karmapravachaniya is not however merely a technical
contains within itself a definition of itself. It means that which
,

qualifies or speaks about (qjffiCTHTj

33|
84.

II

ch

11

an action

ti^Tfif

11

q& )

is

3*|: stf*

The word anu when

it

so called.
f

mj qyftqr:)

II

denotes a sign,

is

called karma-pravachaniya.

The word

lakshana means a sign;

an attendant circumstance an

invariable concomitant or accident in its logical sense

occasional concurrence.

consequence -of/, because

The
of,

force of sj^ in this case

or being indicated by.'

is

and not merely an

that of*

after/

As JiTO^-TOfcl it

in

rained

Bk.

Ch. IV,

I.

after or in

anu

is

86

85,

Karmapravachaniya.

To put

consequence of the muttering of prayers.

a karmapravachniya when

it

203
it

in other

word*,

governs the word which indicates

the

cause or the attendant circumstance of an action.

So

^tftnnr5i?Rr^-?Tra^r g*j*tf tfft*rprrftjp*rqr: mro;.

The God (clouds) rained having listened to the well performed reading, by
The force of a karmapravachaniya, therefore, when fully analysed
&kalya.
will

also grrarereq

be found to be that of an upasarga whose verb

sentence but

understood; and because of

is

govern the noun which

its

not expressed in the

is

being so understood, the

was governed by the

example
in
above
is
in
the accusative case,
Thus
the
unexpressed verb.
ff|%<rt
apparently governed by the preposition ^5 , but really governed by the

particle itself

seems

to

in fact

"

verb wf%3[F8f understood.

So also ^pr?^ auwqfiit-q^

sacrifice, <*j4j*U4W4ftta<^

ifsiT:

The Taurus

sprinkled water after the

the people began sprinkling water after the rising

of the canopus.

Why

make

unnecessarily this

karma parvachanlya even by

lakshana occurs
should

This

is for

sfitra,

force of sfitra

when *& would have been called

90 following, where also the word

the sake of indicating that the karmapravachanfyas

always govern the accusative case

8) even in expressing

Otherwise Rule 23rd of the third chapter of Book

(II. 3. 23).

set aside

(II. 3.

Rule 8 of the same by the maxim of

to? I.

3. 2:

$g

would have
and would have
II

caused a karama pravachantya to govern an Instrumental case where the

sense was that of hetu.

The word anu

85.

when

it

karma-pravachantya

has the force of the third case.

The meaning
As

is

of *?[ in this case will

.fftqj ?Hrfo<TT sfaT the

army lying along

be that

of

'

with

side the river.

or along with.

t}<PP[ 9nfo*r *hrf

lying along the slopes of the mountain.

^%
^Rt:

11

II

6$

11

n^rfa

11

^,

cfoWfisni^: 3v$ Jnr^fhr

86.

sWt

The word anu

when it is used in

(313: qnfno)

II

*raf?lr 11

is

kanna pravachanlya

the sense of inferior or subordinate

to.

The word ftn means inferior/ and being a comparative term requires the other term with which comparison is made and which is superior
c

to complete the sense.

In other words *f?r governs the person to which others

are inferior, in the accusative case. As HJH^l^4l44$4l<h lUJI: ' all gram man"
ans are inferior to&katayana/
a

'^^GoOgle

Karmapravachaniya.

204

iftfa$

63

gt?. srfafc,

11

or c inferior to

'

is

I. Ch.. IV.

(^ ^ no)

The word upa when

87.

Bk.

it

87-90.

means superior
c

kaiTaa-pravachaniya.

the sense is that of 'over, above/ or 'inferior* as OT

above
a khiri. 3<r fir^ wqfTCT. a karshapana is more than
*3Trf
a Nishka. In this sense 37 governs the Locative of the thing which is inferior
(II. 3.9).
So also 37 mcteu rf $*U<hlU: 'all grammarians are inferior to

That

is

when

Kto: a Drona

S&kat&yana. 9

is

In this sense 37 governs the accusative case.

ere **S
*jf^f:

II

^% u cc

5JT <rff ^T*^f

11

pfc,.(5no) n

sre-xi(* f

^f$^R$ hjfc4^iNl4i*H *TO

II

The words apa and pari are karma-pravachaniya when meaning exclusion.
88.

The

force of *TT

and

qft" is

in this case that of

'

with the exception of/

As wfaipfr'iT *jst fo: it rained outside of or with the exception ofTrigarta.

So also TftPnRwJlr ^flfcp In this sense they govern the noun excluded in

the ablative case

(II. 3. 10).

As

karma-pravachaniya.

When

sjfctf

upasarga, and hence changes the

sn^^rohp

(tow)

not having these senses, they are not

Mftfa^fa

w&

11

into

1%

He

Here

rice.

an

it is

11

^^r

nrra^f ^n^ET-^ra^,

89.

The word & as

far as, is

chaniya when it expresses limit

far as inclusive

of or,

(e.

g.

karma-prava-

when it means

as

as far as exclusive of.)

^7

meant.

The word
in the text shows that both sorts of limits are here
As *jrml*W4U^t[?r $7: it rained as far as (but excluding) Pitaliputra

*m*Rw4
*nj: TTpl^:
it

waters the

^?T $7:

rained as

it

far

^luf^hl^m WT HUimi when

,

as
it

(including)

means

'little'

Pitaliputra

or

is

mi*h*U<

a verbal prefix

does not get this name.

sa^C^^til^qRWI^cqigsift

n srer* i*tf *pron*

ht* ^T^rnrf

^WJ
fir*rcpijir*t

II

&

11

u^lPt n

*f% 7ft pj

Digitized by

p*

VjOVJvLC

Bk..

Ch. IV, 91; 92.

I.

Karmapravachaniya.

205

The words prati, pari and anu are karma

90.

pravaxshaniya when used in the. sense of * sign* (in the

direction of) * mere statement of circumstance , ( c as regards *) * division * c share of and c pervasion 9 severally.
As

^f itf^-TR

direction of the tree.'

man

(2)

qrft*

as regards his mother.'

mAHl *rf% **jnj that

Hara.'

^[ f%s?t*nfr fk*\ the

m^*V$t *TOt xrf?f

or

may

^pf ^irsftr fa^sfir he sprinkles

11

ground*

91.

fall

to

my

^i h

wnntemfl

r;

flashing in the

- Hr Devadatta
fell

is

a good

to the share of

So with qft and *?[. (4)

another. So with ^rft" and Hj.

share.

one tree after

is

'

%*U4*\ 'the poison

Jffa

u \i n

stfH*m?t

*f*r.

fr

(3;
it

lightening

?ft:

aw** (ssn*

*s*r

*Hm<*fU*<i4ft wfir h

The word abhi is kai-ma-pravachanlya, in

the above senses of c in the direction of,' c as regards/

and c each severally \ but not when it means division,
1
share of?
.

The

illustrations

HlWlft &c. But it

means the share which is

f%dta*t;

give that which

therefore

fr

of

^r

is

of

mutandi apply

of those given

'

here to

changed into

my

share.

Here abhi

is

an upasarga, and

<r

The word

prati is karma-pravachantya
used in the sense of representative ( c representative
92.

when

falls

last sfitra muttra

under head (4^/ As ^TOft

is not karraa-pravachantya when* tot is meant. TOT
allotted to one as his own.
As 4{MHHlft c^RT

here also, with the exception

$ter?rpj

given under the

or exchange

in exchange for.^

That which is like to the principal is called srftftftr Giving in

As Hjftn^i ^i*f: *rf*T Abhi-manyu is
what is obtained, is srf?r?Fr
the representative of Arjuna. *ilNH^ flf^f: ^rf^^uft he exchanges M&sh&s
for these sesamum.
In these senses prati governs the Ablative (II. 3. 11).
return for

srf^m* 3to$%i

^jfiT:

II

Ufa itf

tT$T

11

*5t6i h

.vifr-vft-,

s^r5% f

MTfeRi MfqfalTTTpRT **?iW^*ftvidi HWtfl^

Digitized by

'

VjOOQLC

KarmapravachaniVa.

206

Bk.

The words adhi and pari

vachaniya when used as mere expletives.
93.

I.

Ch. IV. 93-9&

are karma-pra-

whence has he come ? or gj*f: <ntf *PS5f%. These

have been called karmapravachaniya so that
surplusages,
mere
words though
they may not get the designation of upasarga or gati and thus produce

As

qfrfofrqm^kffr

results peculiar to those words.

94.

The word su

is

karma-pravachaniya in

the sense of respect, (when it means l excellently*).

As Rtt1? ^f^rr H *tf H^ir excellently sprinkled by your honor. Well
,

praised by your honor.

into

Why
has this

By

not being an

upasarga,

it

does not change the

(VIII. 3. 65).

do we say when respect is meant 7 Observe

your place been well sprinkled to-day.
'

gftrff ftf

fmw

The word ati in the sense of super-abundance {* excessively ') and excellently is karma-prava95.

'

'

chaniya.
The word

means to do more than what is necessary for the

accomplishment of kn object. The force of ^T in the aphorism is to draw in
the word <j5rranj from the last. As atf^Rffq? *mr.
It has abundantly been
sprinkled by your honor, arfirepfftq WfT so also stffcmf TO3T excellently
praised by your honor, *rf?t ft^f *rro .

sift:

ujftftiiuj

^^-nnf-w?^^^-ii^-^gi^3
^f:

11

T^wf tfror^ 4^N*iiI

*i?htf

*w

) ii

^rj^d ^ h&hw.

sift:

^Rtiwtitef&St

>*rflrii

The word api

karma-pravachaniya,
when it implies, the sense of word understood ( somewhat ') or possibility (e. g., even in the sense of such a
great person), or permission to do as one likes, (' if you
like '), or censure ('even' in the sense of whatv is disgrace96.

is

flil)

or collection

(*

>>

and*);
Digitized by

V^iOOgLe

BlC

I.

KARMAPRAVACHANIYA*

Of. IV. $ 97, 98. J

The word

means

renf

As

*afhH\jft

^n^

fe(>7

word which

the sense qf another

expressed but has to be supplied.

there

is

not

may be perhaps a

drop of ghee ^jfttffi *Rin^. Here some word like vindu 'a drop/ stoka 'a
The word B*TTOT means
little' mitri a measure &c, has to be understood.
As, ^ftr fiNfc^ J$FraTC*# ^f*l%*[ possibly may
a supposition.
sprinkle a thousand trees in one moment; *rfr *d*U$N <l*iH he' may praise
In the surfive cases it is used with the potential mood*
possibly, a king.
possibility,

&4<wl means indifference

another to do as he likes.

ort

the part of the speaker where he permits

It is

used with the Imperative mood.

Astjft f*ta

may praise, if you like.. The

or
contempt
reproof.
As fat[*tteqr 5*^wft firt^
censure,
means
word ij^f
The word ^ijsnr means cumulative. As sjfa sgf| Mfir f^N praise
qii"^
you may sprinkle

if

you

like.

*ifir*5[ftyou

as well as sprinkle.
In all the above instances, the

change the

word not being an upasarga, does not

into tr.

mfi<k^

97^

11

csa

t^

n tt^tto u srfa:,

The word adhi

is

when used in the sense of " lord "

" having as a lord").

*^w*

karmapravaohaniya
("

being as a lord " or

The word

f^qpc

means

'

master/ and

it

therefore requires another

word denoting 'property 9 of which one is master. The word adhi

Sometime locative of the person possessing,
governs a Locative case.
sometime locative of the property possessed: as *fffr TOT*^ tf^rar: r*lft
correlative

<ftr^r JTOT^

Brahmadatta rules over Panch&las.

?>fa

f^riRWi

^f%:

11

As
a

1.

*f$*r *Plfi)F

71

m^Pi

The word adhi

<h(lmfa .
.

When

finnan

11

s>fif

11

is optionally

when the verh kji follows.

irfH or a ^pfopnftq

S. VIII.

%t>

sjfin <tiClni fipiiNi 3rfcnwffarcf<ft H*flt

98.

vachaniya

karma pra-

Here the word *rfa may be treated either as

it is a iifiir the accent will be regulated by
-

otherwise not.

Dieted

by

208

Parasmaipada and Atmanepada.

The substitutes of

5?

99.

maipada.

Ch. IV. 99, iod.

I.

are called paras-

'

The word

is in

OFF}

The

'

of m.

to complete the sense.

a generic word for verb in general,

* f5n^ sp

means

the genitive case, and

must be supplied

nfSJ 'substitutes'
is

Bk.

substitutes of

^, f*^

viz.,

are the well

The word
The term's?

^? ^,
known

'S^'sSt^',

personal

Namely

terminations by which the verbs are conjugated in those tenses.

following.

,.

the

Parasmaipada.
Sing.

Dual.

R^

Pers.

1st

2nd Pers.

f%^

3rd

ft^

Pers.

the

affixes

3?

and

'*V
**.

And

Plural,

qr$

*T

( III.

2.

and

107,

124,

and

HI. 4. 78).

*j$wii<w3<4Vi

see u

^Tf^

^;3n^ mi^q^

The nine affixes comprised under the

Praty&hftra tafi. and the two ending in &na (S&nach and
K&nach), which are substitutes of m are called Atma100.

nepada.
The following are the Atmanepada
Sing.

Dual.

PluraL

1st

f^

*ft

*lft^

2nd

m%

Wtt\

**l

unti^

11

3i

And

affixes

the affixes

Jjm^and pr^(III.

2. 106).

30gle

Bk.

I.

Ch. IV. 101-103.

Person defined.

209

*rcf5*rn

The three

101.

triads in both the sets Paras-

maipada and Atmanepada, of conjugational affixes (comprised under the general name tift, a pratyah&ra formed
of the first and last of them, viz., tip and mahifi) are
called, in order, Lowest (3rd person of European Grammar, the middle (2nd person), and the highest (1st person).
Of the 19 conjugational affixes, above given 9 are Parasmaipadi and
9 are Atmanepadi. Each of these two classes is subdivided into three classes,
according to person, as shown in the above list.
;

^f%:

11

**qcM^H ffrrw

w^r

sw- ^Nf *fj n

tfsrrfa *rcfar

These three triads of conjugational

affixes, which have received the name of Lowest &c,
are called (as regard the three expressions in ach triad)
severally " the expression for one v (singular), " the ex102.

pression for

two "

(dual),

and " the expression

for

many n

(plural).

Of the

six triads thus formed,

into three classes,

viz.,

*:

^Rlf^T

^*p

^t:

11

II

singular, dual,

30^

II

trcpft

each

and
II

is

divided according to

number

plural.

gq:f

(*tf*I

^WHR f^nff ^J-

II

jto tfftj *ftj q*n% mxjj

ir*>w ft^npr *^w tfsifir *w&*

a Pratyfihftra formed of
su the first of the case affixes and the final p of the last
of them) the three expressions in each successive set of
the three, are also severally called singular, dual and
103.

Plural.

Of sup (which

is

Digitized by

G00gle

VlBHAKTI DEFINED.;

210

The sup or

[ BlC.

the case-affixes by. which nouns are' declined are 21

number corresponding to the seven cases, see

have three numbers singular, dual and plurah

^f%:

II

CH, IV, JO4-I06.

I.

*ftf*l ^ftftj fiPffrS"

SflTCV Wlfrl

sfitra

IV. 1.2*.

They

in

also

^fttfi-V

II

104. The triads of conjugational affixes and

case affixes are also called vibhakti or Inflective affixes.

The word
the three affixes

and

fiprf^ir

of

So TOTT

plural.

means a complete

the seventh case,

firHf^K"

means

t.

Thus wpfr

triad.
e. f

the

fa*F$fi(

means

singular,

locative

dual,

and

the third person, singular, dual,

'

plural.

^f%:

11

*ror*Jnf$ *rf%

105.

unRft ^i*^qf^8

^% WMifa^M.^

*t*iMrPH$

3^-

"When the pronoun yushmad, "thou"

understood, and also when the same expressed, is the

attendant word in agreement with the verb, then there
is the verbal termination called the middle (2nd person).
This defines the 2nd person of conjugational
thou cookest or Trf%;

^t <TW

As

affixes.

or <rw: you two are cooking

*f TOftl

zri q^qr or vr*m

you cook.

mjro ^ tuifiqq^ ^r^^viH q^sng

U^re

***fa

11

* ^q-^qq^
f

106;

an

*T?q?t:

^W:

Tjqj^,

11

*J

When joke is implied with

action, the verb denoting it is used in the

%c\
(

11

ti^if^r n

*TTO: )

II

reference to

2nd person

provided that the word many a to think is the attendant word (upapada) of such verb, and of the verb many*
itself, the affix must be of the 1st person and singula?
\
niimter.
*

-Xoo^e

BK.

CH. IV. $ 167-109.

AVASANA DEFINED^

The word jjsw means joke,

Thus thou
HT^rt ^fst: ^Nmfaf**:

eat, that

f^rr

Asqt

sportt

thinkcst

' I

211
*&$

shall cat

Bfftif

$t&&

ri ce/.

fft; rf>

thou sh alt not

has been eaten by a guest 5ft *&t kOh uraifir 1$ ^fWfir , TO^thf
I think thou wilt go by the chariot, no, thou wilt not, thy father has

gone before thee on it. When joke is not intended, the proper persons
should be used: as, lift iftmft iftvt Ht* Thus thou thinkest 'I shall
"

eat rice/

sreT|jsw
^nfvi^5t ^[fwrqfq
^fa:

11

n %#& n

vimfk u QRPRf^, ^pt*, (4i<i$

vb-

) H

grewynfr OTTTTPir^

h^iwi*

w^wr* jft vwwtit ^rt% u

When

the pronoun asmad " I," understood and also when expressed, is the attendant word
in agreement with the verb, then there is the verbal
termination called the Highest or the 1st person.
107.

This
merely TTOT

is clear.

As

Mtf TOlft

cook, or merely V*lft-*Jf*t ^TOHT: or

*!*:

11

*o6

11

rvrfH

11

5ft

mni:

108. In the other cases, namely where,

thou " or " I " are not the attendant words in agreement
with the verb, there is the verbal termination called the
"

Lowest

(or

3rd person).

As q^Rr he

cooks, toj: they two cook.

109.

The

qrrfSfl

they cook.

closest ^proximity of letters, there

being the intervention of half a m&tr& or prosodial length

between them, is called contact or sanhitA.

When
sandhi.

words arc

in sanhita, they are

As ^a?nr - ffa + *nc

glued together by the rules of

AVASANA DEFINED.

Sit

BK.

I.

CH. IV.

IIO.

The

cessation or the absence of succeeding, letters is called pause or avas&na.

110.

The word avas&na

occurs in s&tras VIII. 3. 15 &c.

Digitized by

Google

Digitized by

Google

Digitized by

Google

Digitized by

Google

Digitized by

Google

*'-

Digitized by

Google

OWER W,LL 8E CHARGED

12 2225
OVERDUE FEE IF THIS BOOK IS
**
NOT RETURNED TO THE LIBRARY
ON

BELOW. NON-RECEIPT OF
OVERDUE
S OES N0T "eSpT
ooL
BORROWER FROM OVERDUE FEES?HE
Harvard College Widener
Library

Cambridge,

MA 021 38

(617)495-2413

D]igitized

by

Google